WO2019151534A1 - Photosensitive transfer material, manufacturing method for circuit wiring, and manufacturing method for touch panel - Google Patents

Photosensitive transfer material, manufacturing method for circuit wiring, and manufacturing method for touch panel Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2019151534A1
WO2019151534A1 PCT/JP2019/004043 JP2019004043W WO2019151534A1 WO 2019151534 A1 WO2019151534 A1 WO 2019151534A1 JP 2019004043 W JP2019004043 W JP 2019004043W WO 2019151534 A1 WO2019151534 A1 WO 2019151534A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
group
transfer material
mass
acid
photosensitive transfer
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/JP2019/004043
Other languages
French (fr)
Japanese (ja)
Inventor
山田 悟
知樹 松田
藤本 進二
克己 篠田
壮二 石坂
漢那 慎一
一真 両角
Original Assignee
富士フイルム株式会社
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Priority claimed from JP2018162138A external-priority patent/JP6832899B2/en
Priority claimed from JP2019016912A external-priority patent/JP7007308B2/en
Application filed by 富士フイルム株式会社 filed Critical 富士フイルム株式会社
Priority to CN201980011644.1A priority Critical patent/CN111684359A/en
Publication of WO2019151534A1 publication Critical patent/WO2019151534A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B32LAYERED PRODUCTS
    • B32BLAYERED PRODUCTS, i.e. PRODUCTS BUILT-UP OF STRATA OF FLAT OR NON-FLAT, e.g. CELLULAR OR HONEYCOMB, FORM
    • B32B27/00Layered products comprising a layer of synthetic resin
    • B32B27/18Layered products comprising a layer of synthetic resin characterised by the use of special additives
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B32LAYERED PRODUCTS
    • B32BLAYERED PRODUCTS, i.e. PRODUCTS BUILT-UP OF STRATA OF FLAT OR NON-FLAT, e.g. CELLULAR OR HONEYCOMB, FORM
    • B32B7/00Layered products characterised by the relation between layers; Layered products characterised by the relative orientation of features between layers, or by the relative values of a measurable parameter between layers, i.e. products comprising layers having different physical, chemical or physicochemical properties; Layered products characterised by the interconnection of layers
    • B32B7/02Physical, chemical or physicochemical properties
    • B32B7/023Optical properties
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03FPHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
    • G03F7/00Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
    • G03F7/004Photosensitive materials
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03FPHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
    • G03F7/00Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
    • G03F7/004Photosensitive materials
    • G03F7/039Macromolecular compounds which are photodegradable, e.g. positive electron resists
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03FPHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
    • G03F7/00Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
    • G03F7/004Photosensitive materials
    • G03F7/09Photosensitive materials characterised by structural details, e.g. supports, auxiliary layers
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03FPHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
    • G03F7/00Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
    • G03F7/20Exposure; Apparatus therefor
    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06FELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F3/00Input arrangements for transferring data to be processed into a form capable of being handled by the computer; Output arrangements for transferring data from processing unit to output unit, e.g. interface arrangements
    • G06F3/01Input arrangements or combined input and output arrangements for interaction between user and computer
    • G06F3/03Arrangements for converting the position or the displacement of a member into a coded form
    • G06F3/041Digitisers, e.g. for touch screens or touch pads, characterised by the transducing means
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H05ELECTRIC TECHNIQUES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • H05KPRINTED CIRCUITS; CASINGS OR CONSTRUCTIONAL DETAILS OF ELECTRIC APPARATUS; MANUFACTURE OF ASSEMBLAGES OF ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
    • H05K3/00Apparatus or processes for manufacturing printed circuits
    • H05K3/02Apparatus or processes for manufacturing printed circuits in which the conductive material is applied to the surface of the insulating support and is thereafter removed from such areas of the surface which are not intended for current conducting or shielding
    • H05K3/06Apparatus or processes for manufacturing printed circuits in which the conductive material is applied to the surface of the insulating support and is thereafter removed from such areas of the surface which are not intended for current conducting or shielding the conductive material being removed chemically or electrolytically, e.g. by photo-etch process

Definitions

  • the present disclosure relates to a photosensitive transfer material, a circuit wiring manufacturing method, and a touch panel manufacturing method.
  • a display device such as an organic electroluminescence (EL) display device and a liquid crystal display device
  • a touch panel such as a capacitance type input device
  • an electrode pattern corresponding to a sensor of a visual recognition part a wiring of a peripheral wiring part
  • a wiring of a lead-out wiring part A conductive layer pattern such as is provided inside the touch panel.
  • the formation of a patterned layer requires a small number of steps for obtaining a required pattern shape.
  • a method of developing after exposure through a mask having the following pattern is widely used.
  • JP 2011-25532 A As a film with a metal film used for manufacturing a conventional circuit board, a film described in JP 2011-25532 A is known.
  • JP 2011-25532 A has a support, a nano-inorganic filler-containing water-soluble polymer release layer formed on the support, and a metal film layer formed on the release layer.
  • a film with a metal film is described.
  • the dye as component (A) is pH sensitive
  • the photosensitive transfer material according to ⁇ 1> which is a dye.
  • the dye as the component (A) contains at least one selected from a dye represented by the following formula I, a ring-opened product of the dye represented by the following formula I, and a neutralized product of the ring-opened product ⁇
  • the photosensitive transfer material according to any one of 1> to ⁇ 3>.
  • Ar and Ar ′ each independently represent an aromatic group.
  • R 1 , R 2 , R 3 and R 4 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a monovalent substituent.
  • ⁇ 6> The maximum absorption wavelength in the wavelength range of 400 nm to 780 nm at the time of coloring of the dye as the component (A) is changed by the acid released from the photoacid generator as the component (C) by exposure.
  • ⁇ 7> The photosensitivity according to ⁇ 6>, wherein the maximum absorption wavelength in the wavelength range of 400 nm to 780 nm at the time of coloring of the dye as component (A) is shortened from the acid released from the (C) photoacid generator upon exposure.
  • Transfer material. ⁇ 8> The acid generated from the photoacid generator as component (C) is phosphoric acid or sulfonic acid, and the pKa is 4 or less, or any one of ⁇ 5> to ⁇ 7> Photosensitive transfer material.
  • the structural unit having a group in which the polymer as the component (B) has an acid group protected by an acid-decomposable group is a structural unit represented by the following formula II ⁇ 5> to ⁇ 8>
  • R 1 and R 2 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, or an aryl group, at least one of R 1 and R 2 is an alkyl group or an aryl group, and R 3 is an alkyl group Alternatively, it represents an aryl group, and R 1 or R 2 and R 3 may be linked to form a cyclic ether.
  • R 4 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, and X represents a single bond or an arylene group.
  • (G) Component: pH adjusting agent ⁇ 11> The photosensitive transfer material according to ⁇ 10>, wherein the pH adjusting agent is a quaternary ammonium salt. ⁇ 12> The photosensitive transfer material according to any one of ⁇ 1> to ⁇ 11>, wherein the resist layer further contains the following component (D).
  • a step of bonding the photosensitive transfer material according to any one of ⁇ 1> to ⁇ 12> to the substrate while bringing the resist layer of the photosensitive transfer material into contact with the substrate, and a step of bonding A step of pattern exposing the resist layer of the subsequent photosensitive transfer material; a step of developing the resist layer after the pattern exposing step to form a pattern; and a step of etching the substrate in a region where the pattern is not disposed. , In this order.
  • a step of bonding the photosensitive transfer material according to any one of ⁇ 1> to ⁇ 12> to the substrate while bringing the resist layer of the photosensitive transfer material into contact with the substrate, and a step of bonding A step of pattern exposing the resist layer of the subsequent photosensitive transfer material; a step of developing the resist layer after the pattern exposing step to form a pattern; and a step of etching the substrate in a region where the pattern is not disposed.
  • the manufacturing method of the touch panel which contains these in this order.
  • the intermediate layer includes a water-soluble resin, particles, an acidic group, a basic group, an anionic group, and a cationic group.
  • a photosensitive transfer material comprising a polymer containing a structural unit, wherein the photosensitive resin layer and the intermediate layer are in contact with each other.
  • ⁇ 2-3> The photosensitive transfer material according to ⁇ 2-1> or ⁇ 2-2>, wherein the acid value of the polymer is 3 mgKOH / g or less.
  • the polar group is a primary to tertiary amino group or a primary to quaternary ammonium group.
  • the photosensitive transfer material as described.
  • ⁇ 2-5> The photosensitive property according to any one of ⁇ 2-1> to ⁇ 2-4>, wherein the alkyl group having 6 or more carbon atoms in the polar compound is an alkyl group having 10 to 16 carbon atoms. Transfer material.
  • ⁇ 2-6> The photosensitive transfer material according to any one of ⁇ 2-1> to ⁇ 2-5>, wherein the particles are silica particles.
  • ⁇ 2-7> The photosensitive transfer material according to ⁇ 2-6>, wherein the silica particles are silica particles having an anionic group on the surface.
  • ⁇ 2-8> The photosensitive transfer material according to any one of ⁇ 2-1> to ⁇ 2-7>, wherein the arithmetic average particle diameter of the particles is 30 nm or less.
  • ⁇ 2-9> Any one of ⁇ 2-1> to ⁇ 2-8>, further comprising a water-soluble resin layer having a particle content of 5% by mass or less between the temporary support and the intermediate layer.
  • the photosensitive transfer material as described in one.
  • ⁇ 2-10> a step of bringing the photosensitive resin layer of the photosensitive transfer material according to any one of ⁇ 2-1> to ⁇ 2-9> into contact with a substrate and bonding the substrate; and the photosensitive resin layer
  • a method for producing a resin pattern which includes a step of pattern exposure and a step of developing the exposed photosensitive resin layer to form a pattern in this order.
  • ⁇ 2-11> a step of bonding the photosensitive resin layer of the photosensitive transfer material according to any one of ⁇ 2-1> to ⁇ 2-9> in contact with a substrate having a conductive layer; A step of pattern exposing the photosensitive resin layer, a step of developing the exposed photosensitive resin layer to form a pattern, and a step of etching a conductive layer in a region where the pattern is not disposed.
  • a circuit wiring manufacturing method including this order.
  • ⁇ 2-12> a step of bonding the photosensitive resin layer of the photosensitive transfer material according to any one of ⁇ 2-1> to ⁇ 2-9> in contact with a substrate having a conductive layer; A step of pattern exposing the photosensitive resin layer, a step of developing the exposed photosensitive resin layer to form a pattern, and a step of etching a conductive layer in a region where the pattern is not disposed. Manufacturing method of touch panel including in this order.
  • a photosensitive transfer material that is excellent in visibility of an exposed portion and an unexposed portion.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of a layer configuration of a photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of a method for manufacturing a circuit wiring for a touch panel using the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram showing the pattern A.
  • FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram showing the pattern B.
  • symbol may be abbreviate
  • a numerical range represented by using “to” means a range including numerical values described before and after “to” as a lower limit value and an upper limit value.
  • an upper limit value or a lower limit value described in a numerical range may be replaced with an upper limit value or a lower limit value in another numerical range.
  • the upper limit value or the lower limit value described in a certain numerical range may be replaced with the values shown in the examples.
  • the amount of each component in the composition is the total amount of the plurality of corresponding substances present in the composition unless there is a specific indication when there are a plurality of substances corresponding to each component in the composition. Means.
  • the term “process” is included in the term as long as the intended purpose of the process is achieved, even when the process is not clearly distinguished from other processes.
  • the notation that does not indicate substitution and non-substitution includes those having no substituent and those having a substituent.
  • the “alkyl group” includes not only an alkyl group having no substituent (unsubstituted alkyl group) but also an alkyl group having a substituent (substituted alkyl group).
  • the chemical structural formula in the present disclosure may be described as a simplified structural formula in which a hydrogen atom is omitted.
  • “mass%” and “weight%” are synonymous, and “part by mass” and “part by weight” are synonymous.
  • a combination of two or more preferred embodiments is a more preferred embodiment.
  • the weight average molecular weight (Mw) and number average molecular weight (Mn) are columns of TSKgel GMHxL, TSKgel G4000HxL, TSKgel G2000HxL (both trade names manufactured by Tosoh Corporation).
  • the molecular weight is detected by a gel permeation chromatography (GPC) analyzer used and detected by a solvent THF (tetrahydrofuran) and a differential refractometer and converted using polystyrene as a standard substance.
  • GPC gel permeation chromatography
  • the first embodiment of the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure has an intermediate layer and a resist layer in this order on a temporary support, and the intermediate layer has a wavelength range of 400 nm during color development as the component (A).
  • a maximum absorption wavelength of ⁇ 780 nm is 450 nm or more, and a dye whose maximum absorption wavelength is changed by an acid, a base, or a radical is contained.
  • a photosensitive transfer material that is a dry film resist is required to have visibility of an exposed portion from the viewpoint of confirmation of the exposed portion.
  • it is known to introduce a color former into the resist layer, but there are concerns about various adverse effects.
  • the present inventors have found that a photosensitive transfer material can be provided in which the concern about various adverse effects is reduced by introducing the coloring mechanism into the intermediate layer instead of the resist layer.
  • the photosensitive transfer material of the present disclosure can suppress the occurrence of coloring or decoloring of the dye in the unexposed area, and can cause the coloring or decoloring of the dye only in the exposed area. As a result, it becomes easy to visually distinguish and distinguish between a portion where color development or decoloration has occurred and a portion where color development or decoloration has not occurred, and it is assumed that excellent visibility is obtained.
  • a material for example, a photoacid generator described later
  • the photosensitive transfer material in the present disclosure may be a so-called negative photosensitive transfer material in which the removability in development is reduced by exposure, or the so-called positive photosensitivity in which the removability in development is increased by exposure. It may be a transfer material. In the case of a positive photosensitive transfer material, the photosensitive transfer material is preferably a chemically amplified positive photosensitive transfer material.
  • the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure can be an NQD-based photosensitive transfer material using NQD (naphthoquinone diazide).
  • NQD naphthoquinone diazide
  • naphthoquinone diazide for example, naphthoquinone diazide described in paragraph 0201 of JP-A No. 2004-126047 can be used.
  • a novolak resin is included.
  • the novolak resin for example, the novolak resin described in paragraph 0201 of JP-A-2004-126047 can be used.
  • the intermediate layer according to the present disclosure contains a dye (component (A)) that has a maximum absorption wavelength of 450 nm or more in a wavelength range of 400 nm to 780 nm at the time of color development, and whose maximum absorption wavelength is changed by an acid, a base, or a radical.
  • middle layer is a layer formed with the intermediate
  • middle layer contains the pigment
  • the intermediate layer described in paragraphs 0084 to 0087 of JP-A-2005-259138 can be used.
  • the intermediate layer is preferably one that is dispersed or dissolved in water or an aqueous alkali solution.
  • the intermediate layer of the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure has a maximum absorption wavelength in the wavelength range of 400 nm to 780 nm at the time of color development of 450 nm or more, and contains a dye whose maximum absorption wavelength is changed by an acid, a base, or a radical.
  • the maximum absorption wavelength is changed by an acid, base or radical when the dye is in a state where the dye in a colored state is decolored by an acid, base or radical, and the dye in a decolored state is colored by an acid, base or radical It may refer to any of the embodiments in which the dye in a colored state changes to a colored state in another hue.
  • the coloring matter may be a compound that changes color from a decolored state upon exposure, or a compound that changes color from a colored state upon exposure.
  • it may be a dye whose color development or decoloring state is changed by introducing an acid, a base or a radical into the composition by exposure, and by introducing an acid, a base or a radical, the properties in the system (
  • it may be a dye whose coloring or decoloring state changes when pH) changes.
  • it may be a dye that changes its color development or decoloration state by being directly applied as a stimulus with acid, base or radical without exposure.
  • a compound that is decolored by exposure is preferable, and a latent dye that is decolored by an acid generated from a photoacid generator, that is, the pH is changed by the generation of an acid to be decolored. More preferably a pH sensitive dye.
  • Confirmation of the pH-sensitive dye can be performed by the following method.
  • Titrate with a 0.01 mol / l (0.01 N) aqueous sodium hydroxide solution to confirm the color change and the pH at which the color change appears.
  • the pH is a value measured at 25 ° C. using a pH meter (model number: HM-31, manufactured by Toa DKK).
  • Examples of the coloring mechanism of the dye in the present disclosure may include the following aspects.
  • a photoacid generator, a photobase generator or a photoradical generator is added to the intermediate layer, and after exposure, an acid-reactive dye or a base-reactive dye is generated by the acid, base or radical generated from the photoacid generator or the like after exposure.
  • a radical reactive dye for example, a water-soluble leuco dye
  • develops color in particular, in the case of a chemically amplified positive-type photosensitive transfer material, the following modes may be employed.
  • a photoacid generator described later is added to the resist layer, and after exposure, the photoacid generator contained in the resist layer moves to the intermediate layer to generate an acid. Then, an acid-reactive dye (for example, a water-soluble leuco dye) is colored by the generated acid.
  • the dye has a maximum absorption wavelength in the wavelength range of 400 nm to 780 nm during color development of 450 nm or more, and from the viewpoint of visibility, is preferably 550 nm or more, more preferably 550 nm to 700 nm, and more preferably 550 nm to 650 nm. More preferably. Further, the dye may have only one maximum absorption wavelength in the wavelength range of 400 nm to 780 nm at the time of color development, or may have two or more.
  • the maximum absorption wavelength at the time of color development having the highest absorbance is 450 nm among at least one of the two or more maximum absorption wavelengths at the time of color development. That is all you need.
  • the maximum absorption wavelength is measured by measuring a transmission spectrum in the range of 400 nm to 780 nm using a spectrophotometer: UV3100 (manufactured by Shimadzu Corporation) at 25 ° C. in the atmosphere of air, and measuring the light intensity.
  • UV3100 manufactured by Shimadzu Corporation
  • the wavelength at which is minimized shall be measured.
  • Examples of the dye that develops and decolors upon exposure include leuco compounds.
  • Examples of the dye that can be erased by exposure include leuco compounds, diarylmethane dyes, oxazine dyes, xanthene dyes, iminonaphthoquinone dyes, azomethine dyes, anthraquinone dyes, and the like.
  • a leuco compound is preferable from the viewpoint of visibility.
  • the leuco compound examples include triarylmethane-based (for example, triphenylmethane-based), spiropyran-based, fluoran-based, diarylmethane-based, rhodamine lactam-based, indolylphthalide-based, and leucooramine-based leuco compounds.
  • a leuco compound (triarylmethane dye) having a triarylmethane skeleton is preferable, and a triphenylmethane dye is more preferable.
  • the leuco compound preferably has a lactone ring, a sultin ring, or a sultone ring from the viewpoint of visibility.
  • the leuco compound When the leuco compound has a lactone ring, a sultin ring, or a sultone ring, it reacts with an acid generated from, for example, a photoacid generator to change to a ring-closed state and disappear, or to a ring-opened state. It can change and color.
  • a lactone ring, a sultin ring, or a sultone ring that is opened is preferable, and a leuco compound that has a sultone ring and that discolors when the sultone ring is closed is more preferable.
  • the dye is preferably a water-soluble compound for the purpose of preventing defects due to precipitation of the dye in the aqueous resist stripping solution. That the dye is water-soluble means that the amount of the dye dissolved in 100 parts by mass of water at 25 ° C. is 0.1 parts by mass or more (preferably 1 part by mass or more, more preferably 5 parts by mass or more). .
  • the dye is at least one selected from a dye represented by the following formula I, a ring-opened product of the dye represented by the following formula I, and a neutralized product of the ring-opened product. It is preferable to include.
  • Ar and Ar ′ each independently represents an aromatic group.
  • R 1 , R 2 , R 3 and R 4 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a monovalent substituent.
  • the ring-closed body, ring-opened body, and neutralized body of the ring-opened body in the present disclosure will be described below using Compound A-1 described below as an example. The same applies to other compounds represented by formula (I).
  • the dye of the present disclosure exists in an equilibrium state of a ring-closed body, a ring-opened body, and a neutralized body of a ring-opened body in an intermediate layer, for example, as shown below. For example, if the pH in the intermediate layer is acidic, the abundance ratio of the ring-closed body increases, and the abundance ratio of the ring-opened body and the neutralized body of the ring-opening body relatively decreases.
  • the abundance ratio of the ring-opened product and the neutralized product of the ring-opened product increases, and the abundance ratio of the ring-closed product relatively decreases.
  • the ring-closed body, ring-opened body, and neutralized body of the ring-opened body have different colors at the time of color development, for example, when the intermediate layer contains a photoacid generator, it is included in the exposed intermediate layer. As a result of the release of the acid from the photoacid generator, the pH of the exposed portion is reduced, and the color of the coloring dye changes. On the other hand, there is no color change in the unexposed area. Thereby, good visibility of the exposed part and the unexposed part can be realized.
  • the component (G) that is a pH adjuster (such as NaOH) Is preferably used.
  • the aromatic group in Ar and Ar ′ in the formula (I) may be an aryl group or a heteroaryl group, and even if it is a monocyclic aromatic group, two or more rings are condensed. It may be a condensed ring.
  • Ar and Ar ′ in formula (I) may combine to form a ring.
  • Ar and Ar ′ are preferably a 5-membered ring or a 6-membered ring.
  • the aromatic group in Ar and Ar ′ in formula (I) may have a substituent.
  • Ar and Ar ′ may have a plurality of the above substituents.
  • substituents examples include a hydroxy group, a halogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, a dialkylamino group, an alkylarylamino group, and a diarylamino group, and a hydroxy group, a halogen group, and a dialkylamino group.
  • Alkylarylamino group and diarylamino group are preferable.
  • the substituent can be bonded to at least one of the ortho position, the meta position, and the para position. Among them, it is preferable to bond to at least one of the ortho position and the para position, and it is more preferable to bond to at least the para position.
  • the halogen atom is preferably a bromo atom (bromine atom) and an iodine atom, and more preferably a bromo atom (bromine atom).
  • the alkyl groups are preferably each independently an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, and more preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms. These substituents may be further substituted with a substituent.
  • Ar and Ar ′ are preferably a phenyl group having a hydroxy group and a phenyl group substituted by a halogen atom.
  • the total carbon number of Ar and Ar ′ in the formula (I) is preferably 4 to 50, more preferably 6 to 40, and more preferably 10 to 30 from the viewpoints of sensitivity and visibility. More preferably.
  • R 1 , R 2 , R 3 and R 4 in formula (I) are each independently a hydrogen atom, hydroxy group, halogen atom, alkyl group, aryl group, alkoxy group, aryloxy group, dialkylamino group, alkylarylamino group And a diarylamino group. Of these, a hydrogen atom is preferable.
  • the dye may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • the content of the dye in the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure is preferably 0.01% by mass to 10% by mass with respect to the total solid content of the intermediate layer composition from the viewpoint of visibility. It is more preferably from 8% by mass to 8% by mass, and further preferably from 0.5% by mass to 5% by mass.
  • the “solid content” in the intermediate layer composition means a component excluding a volatile component (for example, a solvent).
  • the content of the dye means the content of the dye when all of the dyes included in the intermediate layer composition are in a colored state.
  • the absorbance is measured using a spectrophotometer (UV3100, manufactured by Shimadzu Corporation) at 25 ° C. in an air atmosphere to prepare a calibration curve.
  • the amount of the dye contained in the intermediate layer composition is calculated from the calibration curve prepared from the absorbance of the dye and the absorbance of the intermediate layer composition.
  • the intermediate layer can include a polymer.
  • the polymer used for the intermediate layer is preferably a water-soluble resin.
  • water-soluble resins include cellulose resins, polyvinyl alcohol resins, polyvinyl pyrrolidone resins, cellulose resins, acrylamide resins, polyethylene oxide resins, gelatin, vinyl ether resins, polyamide resins, and copolymers thereof. These resins are mentioned. Of these, cellulose-based resins are preferable, and hydroxypropylcellulose and hydroxypropylmethylcellulose are more preferable.
  • the water solubility of the polymer in the present disclosure means that the amount of the polymer dissolved in 100 parts by mass of water at 25 ° C. is 0.1 parts by mass or more (preferably 1 part by mass or more, more preferably 5 parts by mass or more). It means that there is.
  • the content of the polymer in the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure is preferably 20% by mass to 100% by mass, and preferably 50% by mass to the total solid content of the intermediate layer composition from the viewpoint of adhesion. More preferably, it is 100 mass%.
  • the intermediate layer preferably contains a surfactant from the viewpoint of film thickness uniformity.
  • a surfactant any of anionic, cationic, nonionic (nonionic), or amphoteric can be used, but a preferred surfactant is a nonionic surfactant. Examples of nonionic surfactants are those described above.
  • the intermediate layer can contain an inorganic filler.
  • the inorganic filler in the present disclosure is not particularly limited. Silica particles, aluminum oxide particles, zirconium oxide particles and the like can be mentioned, and silica particles are more preferable. From the viewpoint of transparency, particles having a small particle diameter are preferable, and those having an average particle diameter of 100 nm or less are more preferable. For example, if it is a commercial product, Snowtex (registered trademark) is preferably used.
  • volume fraction of the inorganic filler in the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure is based on the total solid content of the intermediate layer composition from the viewpoint of adhesion between the intermediate layer and the photosensitive layer.
  • the content is preferably 10% by mass to 80% by mass, and more preferably 20% by mass to 60% by mass.
  • the intermediate layer can contain a pH adjusting agent.
  • the pH adjusting agent By including the pH adjusting agent, the coloring state or decoloring state of the dye in the composition can be more stably maintained, and the adhesion to the substrate is further improved.
  • Sodium hydroxide is preferred from the viewpoint of water solubility. From the viewpoint of adhesion between the resist layer and the intermediate layer, an organic ammonium salt is preferable.
  • organic ammonium salts include primary ammonium salts, secondary ammonium salts, tertiary ammonium salts, and quaternary ammonium salts, with quaternary ammonium salts being preferred.
  • examples of the quaternary ammonium salt include tetraalkylammonium hydroxide which may have a substituent.
  • tetramethylammonium hydroxide triethylmethylammonium hydroxide, tetraethylammonium hydroxide, tetra
  • examples thereof include propylammonium hydroxide, tetrabutylammonium hydroxide, tetrahexylammonium hydroxide, hexadecyltrimethylammonium hydroxide, choline, benzyltrimethylammonium, benzyltriethylammonium, tris (2-hydroxyethyl) methylammonium hydroxide.
  • tetraalkylammonium hydroxide having an alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms preferably 10 to 30 carbon atoms, more preferably 10 to 25 carbon atoms
  • substituents include an aryl group having 6 to 12 carbon atoms (for example, a phenyl group) and a hydroxy group.
  • the content of the pH adjusting agent in the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure is 1% by mass to 50% by mass with respect to the total solid content of the intermediate layer composition from the viewpoint of stabilizing the coloring or decoloring state of the dye. %, Preferably 3% by mass to 30% by mass.
  • the intermediate layer can contain a photoacid generator.
  • the photoacid generator is not particularly limited. They may be the same as the photoacid generator described below.
  • the photoacid generator can be included in the intermediate layer composition and applied in advance. However, when the resist layer composition is applied, the photoacid generator diffuses and can be included in the intermediate layer.
  • the photosensitive transfer material in the present disclosure is a negative photosensitive transfer material
  • the photosensitive transfer material can contain a photoradical generator.
  • Examples of the photo radical generator include ethyl dimethylaminobenzoate (DBE, CAS No. 10287-53-3), benzoin methyl ether, anisyl (p, p′-dimethoxybenzyl), TAZ-110 (trade name: Midori) Chemical Co., Ltd.), benzophenone, TAZ-111 (trade name: Midori Chemical Co., Ltd.), Irgacure OXE01, OXE02, OXE03 (BASF), Omnirad 651 and 369 (trade names: IGM Resins BV) Examples include 2,2′-bis (2-chlorophenyl) -4,4 ′, 5,5′-tetraphenyl-1,2′-biimidazole (manufactured by Tokyo Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.). Moreover, the photoinitiator mentioned later can also be used as a photoradical generator.
  • DBE ethyl dimethylaminobenzoate
  • anisyl p,
  • the photosensitive transfer material in the present disclosure is a negative photosensitive transfer material
  • the photosensitive transfer material can contain a photobase generator.
  • photobase generators examples include 2-nitrobenzylcyclohexyl carbamate, triphenylmethanol, O-carbamoylhydroxylamide, O-carbamoyloxime, [[(2,6-dinitrobenzyl) oxy] carbonyl] cyclohexylamine, bis [ [(2-Nitrobenzyl) oxy] carbonyl] hexane 1,6-diamine, 4- (methylthiobenzoyl) -1-methyl-1-morpholinoethane, (4-morpholinobenzoyl) -1-benzyl-1-dimethylaminopropane N- (2-nitrobenzyloxycarbonyl) pyrrolidine, hexaamminecobalt (III) tris (triphenylmethylborate), 2-benzyl-2-dimethylamino-1- (4-morpholinophenyl) -butanone, 2,6 -Dimethyl-3, -Diacetyl-4- (2-nitrophenyl)
  • the average film thickness of the intermediate layer is preferably 0.3 ⁇ m to 10 ⁇ m, more preferably 0.3 ⁇ m to 5 ⁇ m, and more preferably 0.3 ⁇ m to 2 ⁇ m from the viewpoints of adhesion between the intermediate layer and the resist layer and pattern formability. Is particularly preferred.
  • the average value is preferably measured and calculated at 10 points or more. Specific examples include surface shape measurement and cross-sectional optical microscope or electron microscope observation. In addition, Bruker's Dektak series can be suitably used for surface shape measurement. Moreover, a scanning electron microscope (SEM) can be used suitably for cross-sectional observation. Moreover, it is preferable that the thickness of the said intermediate
  • the intermediate layer can have two or more layers.
  • the average film thickness of each layer is not particularly limited as long as it is within the above range.
  • the average of the layers closest to the resist layer The film thickness is preferably 0.3 ⁇ m to 10 ⁇ m, more preferably 0.3 ⁇ m to 5 ⁇ m, and particularly preferably 0.3 ⁇ m to 2.0 ⁇ m, from the viewpoints of adhesion between the intermediate layer and the resist layer and pattern formability. .
  • An intermediate layer composition for forming an intermediate layer by mixing each component and a solvent in a predetermined ratio at an arbitrary method, and dissolving by stirring can be prepared.
  • the composition prepared as described above can be used after being filtered using a filter having a pore size of 3.0 ⁇ m.
  • the intermediate layer can be formed on the temporary support by applying the intermediate layer composition to the temporary support and drying it.
  • the coating method is not particularly limited, and the coating can be performed by a known method such as slit coating, spin coating, curtain coating, and inkjet coating.
  • the resist layer according to the present disclosure is a layer that has photosensitivity and can be patterned by developing with a developer after exposure.
  • the resist layer preferably contains a polymer containing a structural unit having a group in which an acid group is protected by an acid-decomposable group, and a photoacid generator. It is preferable that the said resist layer is a layer formed with the resist layer composition in this indication.
  • the resist layer in the present disclosure is preferably a chemically amplified positive resist layer from the viewpoint of high sensitivity.
  • the resist layer composition according to the present disclosure is also referred to as a polymer (also referred to as “specific polymer”) containing a structural unit having an acid group protected by an acid-decomposable group (also referred to as “structural unit b”). ) Can be contained.
  • the resist layer composition according to the present disclosure may contain another polymer.
  • the specific polymer having the structural unit b and other polymers are also collectively referred to as “polymer component”.
  • the structural unit b having an acid-decomposable and protected acid group in the specific polymer undergoes a deprotection reaction to be an acid group by the action of a catalytic amount of an acidic substance generated by exposure.
  • This acid group enables dissolution by development.
  • the specific polymer is preferably an addition polymerization type resin, and more preferably a polymer having a structural unit derived from (meth) acrylic acid or an ester thereof.
  • the resist layer composition is a polymer having a structural unit b1 represented by the following formula II as the structural unit b as a polymer component from the viewpoint of pattern formability, solubility in a developer, and transferability.
  • the polymer component preferably includes a specific polymer having the structural unit b1 represented by the following formula II as the structural unit b and having a glass transition temperature of 90 ° C. or less.
  • a specific polymer having a structural unit b1 represented by the following formula II as the structural unit b and a structural unit bb having an acid group described later and having a glass transition temperature of 90 ° C. or lower is included. More preferably.
  • the specific polymer contained in the resist layer composition may be one type or two or more types.
  • the polymer component includes a polymer having at least a structural unit b having a group in which an acid group is protected with an acid-decomposable group.
  • an extremely sensitive chemically amplified positive resist layer composition can be obtained.
  • the “acid group protected with an acid-decomposable group” in the present disclosure can be any known acid-decomposable group, and is not particularly limited.
  • the acid-decomposable group examples include groups that are relatively easily decomposed by an acid (for example, an acetal functional group such as an ester group, a tetrahydropyranyl ester group, or a tetrahydrofuranyl ester group protected with a group represented by the formula II described later). Group) or a group that is relatively difficult to be decomposed by an acid (for example, a tertiary alkyl group such as a tert-butyl ester group or a tertiary alkyl carbonate group such as a tert-butyl carbonate group).
  • the acid-decomposable group is preferably a group having a structure protected in the form of an acetal.
  • the structural unit b having a group in which the acid group is protected with an acid-decomposable group is preferably a structural unit b1 represented by the following formula II from the viewpoint of sensitivity and resolution.
  • R 1 and R 2 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, or an aryl group, at least one of R 1 and R 2 is an alkyl group or an aryl group, and R 3 is an alkyl group Or an aryl group, R 1 or R 2 and R 3 may be linked to form a cyclic ether, R 4 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, and X represents a single bond or an arylene group.
  • R 1 or R 2 when R 1 or R 2 is an alkyl group, an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms is preferable. When R 1 or R 2 is an aryl group, a phenyl group is preferred. R 1 and R 2 are each preferably a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms.
  • R 3 represents an alkyl group or an aryl group, preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, and more preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms. Further, the alkyl group and aryl group in R 1 to R 3 may have a substituent.
  • R 1 or R 2 and R 3 may be linked to form a cyclic ether, and R 1 or R 2 and R 3 are preferably linked to form a cyclic ether.
  • the number of ring members of the cyclic ether is not particularly limited, but is preferably 5 or 6, and more preferably 5.
  • X represents a single bond or an arylene group, and a single bond is preferable.
  • the arylene group may have a substituent.
  • R 4 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, and is preferably a hydrogen atom from the viewpoint that the glass transition temperature (Tg) of the specific polymer can be further lowered. More specifically, the structural unit in which R 4 in Formula II is a hydrogen atom is preferably 20% by mass or more with respect to the total amount of the structural unit b1 contained in the specific polymer.
  • the content (content ratio: mass ratio) of the structural unit in which R 4 in formula II is a hydrogen atom in the structural unit b1 is calculated by a conventional method from 13 C-nuclear magnetic resonance spectrum (NMR) measurement. It can be confirmed by the intensity ratio of the peak intensity.
  • the structural unit represented by the following formula b2 is more preferable from the viewpoint of further increasing the sensitivity during pattern formation.
  • R 34 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group
  • R 35 to R 41 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms.
  • R 34 is preferably a hydrogen atom.
  • R 35 to R 41 are preferably hydrogen atoms.
  • R 34 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group.
  • the structural unit b is preferably a structural unit b3 represented by the following formula b3 from the viewpoint of suppressing deformation of the pattern shape.
  • R B1 and R B2 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, or an aryl group, at least one of R B1 and R B2 is an alkyl group or an aryl group, and R B3 is an alkyl group or Represents an aryl group, R B1 or R B2 and R B3 may be linked to form a cyclic ether, R B4 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, and X B represents a single bond or a divalent linking group; R B12 represents a substituent, and n represents an integer of 0 to 4.
  • R B1 or R B2 when R B1 or R B2 is an alkyl group, an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms is preferable. When R B1 or R B2 is an aryl group, a phenyl group is preferable.
  • R B1 and R B2 are each preferably a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms.
  • R B3 represents an alkyl group or an aryl group, preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, and more preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms.
  • the alkyl group and aryl group in R B1 to R B3 may have a substituent.
  • R B1 or R B2 and R B3 may be linked to form a cyclic ether, and R B1 or R B2 and R B3 are preferably linked to form a cyclic ether.
  • the number of ring members of the cyclic ether is not particularly limited, but is preferably 5 or 6, and more preferably 5.
  • X B represents a single bond or a divalent linking group, and represents a single bond or an alkylene group, —C ( ⁇ O) O—, —C ( ⁇ O) NR N —, —O—, or a combination thereof.
  • the alkylene group may be linear, branched or cyclic, and may have a substituent.
  • the alkylene group preferably has 1 to 10 carbon atoms, and more preferably 1 to 4 carbon atoms.
  • X B contains —C ( ⁇ O) O—
  • an embodiment in which the carbon atom contained in —C ( ⁇ O) O— and the carbon atom bonded to R B4 are directly bonded is preferable.
  • R N represents an alkyl group or a hydrogen atom, preferably an alkyl group or a hydrogen atom having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, more preferably a hydrogen atom.
  • R B12 represents a substituent, and is preferably an alkyl group or a halogen atom.
  • the alkyl group preferably has 1 to 10 carbon atoms, and more preferably 1 to 4 carbon atoms.
  • n represents an integer of 0 to 4, preferably 0 or 1, and more preferably 0.
  • R B4 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, and is preferably a hydrogen atom from the viewpoint of lowering the Tg of the specific polymer. More specifically, the structural unit in which R B4 in formula b3 is a hydrogen atom is preferably 20% by mass or more with respect to the total content of structural unit b contained in the specific polymer. Incidentally, in the structural unit b, the content of the structural unit R B4 is a hydrogen atom in the formula b3 (content: weight ratio) is calculated by the usual method from the 13 C- nuclear magnetic resonance spectra (NMR) measurements It can be confirmed by the intensity ratio of the peak intensity.
  • NMR 13 C- nuclear magnetic resonance spectra
  • the structural unit represented by the following formula b4 is more preferable from the viewpoint of suppressing deformation of the pattern shape.
  • R B4 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group
  • R B5 to R B11 each independently represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms
  • R B12 represents a substituent
  • n is 0
  • R B4 is preferably a hydrogen atom.
  • R B5 to R B11 are preferably hydrogen atoms.
  • R B12 represents a substituent, and is preferably an alkyl group or a halogen atom.
  • the alkyl group preferably has 1 to 10 carbon atoms, and more preferably 1 to 4 carbon atoms.
  • n represents an integer of 0 to 4, preferably 0 or 1, and more preferably 0.
  • R B4 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group.
  • the structural unit b contained in the specific polymer may be one type or two or more types.
  • the content of the structural unit b in the specific polymer is preferably 20% by mass or more, more preferably 20% by mass to 90% by mass, and more preferably 30% by mass to 30% by mass with respect to the total mass of the specific polymer. More preferably, it is 70 mass%.
  • the content (content ratio: mass ratio) of the structural unit b in the specific polymer can be confirmed by the intensity ratio of the peak intensity calculated by a conventional method from 13 C-NMR measurement.
  • the proportion of the structural unit b is preferably 5% by mass to 80% by mass with respect to the total mass of the polymer component, It is more preferably 10% by mass to 80% by mass, particularly preferably 10% by mass to 40% by mass, and most preferably 10% by mass to 30% by mass.
  • the specific polymer preferably includes a structural unit bb having an acid group.
  • the structural unit bb is a structural unit including a protecting group, for example, an acid group that is not protected by an acid-decomposable group, that is, an acid group that does not have a protecting group.
  • the structural unit containing an acid group which is the structural unit bb, is a structural unit derived from styrene or a structural unit derived from a vinyl compound by an acid group, or a structure derived from (meth) acrylic acid. More preferably it is a unit.
  • the structural unit bb contained in the specific polymer may be only one type or two or more types.
  • the specific polymer preferably contains 0.1% by mass to 20% by mass, and 0.5% by mass to 15% by mass of the structural unit having an acid group (the structural unit bb) with respect to the total mass of the specific polymer.
  • the content is more preferably 1% by mass to 10% by mass. When it is in the above range, the pattern formability becomes better.
  • the content (content ratio: mass ratio) of the structural unit b in the specific polymer can be confirmed by the intensity ratio of the peak intensity calculated by a conventional method from 13 C-NMR measurement.
  • the specific polymer does not impair the effects of the photosensitive transfer material according to an embodiment of the present invention, except for the structural unit b and the structural unit bb described above, other structural units (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the structural unit bbb). It may be included in the range.
  • the monomer for forming the structural unit bbb is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include styrenes, (meth) acrylic acid alkyl esters, (meth) acrylic acid cyclic alkyl esters, (meth) acrylic acid aryl esters, and unsaturated dicarboxylic acid diesters.
  • Bicyclounsaturated compounds maleimide compounds, unsaturated aromatic compounds, conjugated diene compounds, unsaturated monocarboxylic acids, unsaturated dicarboxylic acids, unsaturated dicarboxylic acid anhydrides, groups having an aliphatic cyclic skeleton, other Mention may be made of saturated compounds.
  • Various characteristics of the specific polymer can be adjusted by adjusting at least one of the kind and the content using the structural unit bbb. In particular, the Tg of the specific polymer can be easily adjusted to 90 ° C. or less by appropriately using the structural unit bbb.
  • the specific polymer may contain only one type of structural unit bbb or may contain two or more types.
  • the structural unit bbb specifically includes styrene, tert-butoxystyrene, methylstyrene, ⁇ -methylstyrene, acetoxystyrene, methoxystyrene, ethoxystyrene, chlorostyrene, methyl vinylbenzoate, ethyl vinylbenzoate, (meth) Methyl acrylate, ethyl (meth) acrylate, n-propyl (meth) acrylate, isopropyl (meth) acrylate, 2-hydroxyethyl (meth) acrylate, 2-hydroxypropyl (meth) acrylate, (meth) Mention may be made of structural units formed by polymerizing benzyl acrylate, isobornyl (meth) acrylate, acrylonitrile, ethylene glycol monoacetoacetate mono (meth) acrylate, or the like. In addition, the compounds described in paragraphs 00
  • a structural unit having an aromatic ring or a structural unit having an aliphatic cyclic skeleton is preferable from the viewpoint of improving the electrical characteristics of the resulting photosensitive transfer material.
  • monomers that form these structural units include styrene, tert-butoxystyrene, methylstyrene, ⁇ -methylstyrene, dicyclopentanyl (meth) acrylate, cyclohexyl (meth) acrylate, isobornyl (meth) acrylate, And benzyl (meth) acrylate etc. are mentioned.
  • a structural unit derived from cyclohexyl (meth) acrylate is preferably exemplified.
  • (meth) acrylic acid alkyl ester is preferable from the viewpoint of adhesion.
  • (meth) acrylic acid alkyl ester having an alkyl group having 4 to 12 carbon atoms is more preferable from the viewpoint of adhesion.
  • Specific examples include methyl (meth) acrylate, ethyl (meth) acrylate, propyl (meth) acrylate, n-butyl (meth) acrylate, and 2-ethylhexyl (meth) acrylate.
  • the content of the structural unit bbb is preferably 70% by mass or less, more preferably 60% by mass or less, and still more preferably 50% by mass or less with respect to the total mass of the specific polymer.
  • the lower limit may be 0% by mass, but is preferably 1% by mass or more, and more preferably 5% by mass or more. Within the above range, the resolution and the adhesion of the resist layer formed by the resist layer composition are further improved.
  • the specific polymer includes, as the structural unit bbb, a structural unit having an acid group ester in the structural unit bb from the viewpoint of optimizing the solubility in the developer and the physical properties of the resist layer described later.
  • the specific polymer preferably includes a structural unit having an acid group as the structural unit bb, and further includes a structural unit bbb including a carboxylic acid ester group as a copolymerization component, for example, derived from (meth) acrylic acid.
  • a polymer containing the structural unit bb and a structural unit derived from cyclohexyl (meth) acrylate, 2-ethylhexyl (meth) acrylate or n-butyl (meth) acrylate is more preferred.
  • this indication is not limited to the following illustrations.
  • the ratio of the structural unit and the weight average molecular weight in the following exemplary compounds are appropriately selected in order to obtain preferable physical properties.
  • the glass transition temperature (Tg) of the specific polymer in the present disclosure is preferably 90 ° C. or less.
  • Tg is 90 ° C. or lower, the resist layer formed from the resist layer composition has high adhesion and is excellent in transferability.
  • the Tg is more preferably 60 ° C. or less, and further preferably 40 ° C. or less.
  • the lower limit of Tg is not particularly limited, but is preferably ⁇ 20 ° C. or higher, and more preferably ⁇ 10 ° C. or higher. When the Tg of the specific polymer is ⁇ 20 ° C.
  • the glass transition temperature (Tg) of the entire polymer component in the present disclosure is preferably 90 ° C. or lower, more preferably 60 ° C. or lower, and 40 ° C. or lower from the viewpoint of transferability. Is more preferable.
  • the glass transition temperature of a specific polymer can be measured using differential scanning calorimetry (DSC).
  • DSC differential scanning calorimetry
  • the specific measuring method was performed in accordance with the method described in JIS K 7121 (1987) or JIS K 6240 (2011).
  • the glass transition temperature in the present disclosure uses an extrapolated glass transition start temperature (hereinafter sometimes referred to as Tig).
  • Tig extrapolated glass transition start temperature
  • the method for measuring the glass transition temperature will be described more specifically.
  • the heating rate is about 20 ° C./min and about 30 times higher than the temperature at which the glass transition is completed. Heat to a higher temperature and draw a DTA or DSC curve.
  • the extrapolated glass transition start temperature (Tig) that is, the glass transition temperature Tg in the present disclosure, is a straight line obtained by extending the base line on the low temperature side to the high temperature side in the DTA curve or DSC curve, and the curve of the step-like change portion of the glass transition. The temperature at the point of intersection with the tangent drawn at the point where the slope of the maximum is.
  • the FOX formula is used as a guideline.
  • the FOX formula is used as a guideline.
  • Tg of the homopolymer of the first structural unit contained in the polymer component is Tg1
  • W1 is the mass fraction of the copolymer of the first structural unit
  • a copolymer having a desired Tg can be obtained by adjusting the type and mass fraction of each constituent unit contained in the copolymer using the FOX formula described above. It is also possible to adjust the Tg of the polymer by adjusting the weight average molecular weight of the polymer.
  • the molecular weight of the specific polymer is preferably 60,000 or less in terms of polystyrene-equivalent weight average molecular weight.
  • the weight average molecular weight of the specific polymer is 60,000 or less, the melt viscosity of the resist layer in the photosensitive transfer material described later is kept low, and bonding at a low temperature (for example, 130 ° C. or less) is performed when bonding to the substrate.
  • the weight average molecular weight of the specific polymer is preferably 2,000 to 60,000, more preferably 3,000 to 50,000, and further preferably 10,000 to 30,000. preferable.
  • the weight average molecular weight of the specific polymer can be measured by GPC (gel permeation chromatography), and various commercially available devices can be used as the measuring device. It is known to those skilled in the art.
  • GPC gel permeation chromatography
  • HLC registered trademark
  • -8220GPC manufactured by Tosoh Corp.
  • TSKgel registered trademark
  • Super HZM-M 4 .6 mm ID ⁇ 15 cm, manufactured by Tosoh Corp.
  • Super HZ4000 4 mm ID ⁇ 15 cm, manufactured by Tosoh Corp.
  • Super HZ3000 4.6 mm ID ⁇ 15 cm, manufactured by Tosoh Corp.
  • Super HZ2000 4.6 mm ID) ⁇ 15 cm, manufactured by Tosoh Corporation
  • THF tetrahydrofuran
  • the measurement conditions are 0.2 mass%, the flow rate is 0.35 ml / min, the sample injection amount is 10 ⁇ l, the measurement temperature is 40 ° C., and a differential refractive index (RI) detector is used. be able to.
  • the calibration curve is “Standard sample TSK standard, polystyrene” manufactured by Tosoh Corporation: “F-40”, “F-20”, “F-4”, “F-1”, “A-5000”, “ It can be produced using any of the seven samples of “A-2500” and “A-1000”.
  • the ratio (dispersion degree) between the number average molecular weight and the weight average molecular weight of the specific polymer is preferably 1.0 to 5.0, more preferably 1.05 to 3.5.
  • the production method (synthesis method) of the specific polymer is not particularly limited.
  • a polymerizable monomer for forming the structural unit b1 represented by the formula II and a structural unit bb having an acid group are formed. It can synthesize
  • the resist layer composition according to the present disclosure preferably contains the specific polymer in a proportion of 50% by mass to 99.9% by mass with respect to the total solid content of the resist layer composition from the viewpoint of sensitivity and resolution. More preferably, it is contained in a proportion of 70 mass% to 98 mass%.
  • the resist layer composition includes, as a polymer component, a polymer that does not include the structural unit b (in addition to the specific polymer, in a range that does not impair the effect of the resist layer composition according to the present disclosure (“other polymer”). May be included).
  • the blending amount of the other polymer is preferably 50% by mass or less, more preferably 30% by mass or less in the total polymer component, More preferably, it is 20 mass% or less.
  • all the polymers contained in the said polymer component are polymers which have at least the structural unit which has the acid group mentioned above, respectively.
  • the compound applicable to the plasticizer mentioned later, a heterocyclic compound, and surfactant shall not be contained in the said polymer component.
  • the resist layer composition may contain only one type of other polymer, or may contain two or more types.
  • polyhydroxystyrene can be used, which are commercially available, such as SMA 1000P, SMA 2000P, SMA 3000P, SMA 1440F, SMA 17352P, SMA 2625P, and SMA 3840F (above, manufactured by Sartomer).
  • ARUFON UC-3000, ARUFON UC-3510, ARUFON UC-3900, ARUFON UC-3910, ARUFON UC-3920, and ARUFON UC-3080 (above, manufactured by Toagosei Co., Ltd.), Joncryl 690, Joncryl 6 Joncryl 67, Joncryl 586 (manufactured by BASF) or the like can also be used.
  • the resist layer composition according to the present disclosure preferably contains a photoacid generator.
  • the photoacid generator used in the present disclosure is a compound capable of generating an acid by irradiation with radiation such as ultraviolet rays, far ultraviolet rays, X-rays, and charged particle beams.
  • the photoacid generator used in the present disclosure is preferably a compound that generates an acid in response to an actinic ray having a wavelength of 300 nm or more, preferably 300 nm to 450 nm, but its chemical structure is not limited.
  • a photoacid generator that is not directly sensitive to an actinic ray having a wavelength of 300 nm or more can also be used as a sensitizer if it is a compound that reacts with an actinic ray having a wavelength of 300 nm or more and generates an acid when used in combination with a sensitizer. It can be preferably used in combination.
  • the pKa of the acid generated from the photoacid generator used in the present disclosure is preferably 4.0 or less, more preferably 3.0 or less, from the viewpoint of sensitivity and visibility.
  • the lower limit of the pKa of the acid generated from the photoacid generator is not particularly defined, but is preferably, for example, -10.0 or more, and more preferably -4.0 or more from the viewpoint of sensitivity and visibility.
  • -3.5 or more is more preferable, and -3.0 or more is particularly preferable.
  • the acid generated from the photoacid generator is preferably at least one acid selected from the group consisting of phosphoric acid and sulfonic acid from the viewpoint of sensitivity and visibility, and more preferably sulfonic acid.
  • it is a sulfonic acid represented by the following formula C1 or C2.
  • R S represents an alkyl group
  • L S represents an alkylene group having 2 or more carbon atoms
  • ns represents 0 or 1
  • R S is an alkyl group having a halogen atom.
  • n is 1
  • each X S independently represents an alkyl group, an aryl group, an alkoxy group, or an aryloxy group
  • ms represents an integer of 0 to 5.
  • the alkyl group in R S may have a substituent.
  • substituents include a halogen atom, an aryl group, an alkoxy group, and an aryloxy group.
  • the number of carbon atoms of the alkyl group in R S is preferably 1-20, and more preferably 2-16.
  • L S is preferably an alkylene group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably an alkylene group having 2 to 8 carbon atoms, and particularly preferably an ethylene group.
  • X S each independently is preferably an alkyl group, more preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, still more preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, and a methyl group. Is particularly preferred.
  • ms is preferably an integer of 0 to 3, more preferably 0 or 1, and particularly preferably 1.
  • the photoacid generator examples include an ionic photoacid generator and a nonionic photoacid generator.
  • the photoacid generator preferably contains at least one compound selected from the group consisting of an onium salt compound described later and an oxime sulfonate compound described later from the viewpoint of sensitivity and resolution, and an oxime sulfonate compound. It is more preferable to contain.
  • nonionic photoacid generators examples include trichloromethyl-s-triazines, diazomethane compounds, imide sulfonate compounds, and oxime sulfonate compounds.
  • the photoacid generator is preferably an oxime sulfonate compound from the viewpoints of sensitivity, resolution, and adhesion.
  • These photoacid generators can be used singly or in combination of two or more.
  • Specific examples of trichloromethyl-s-triazines and diazomethane derivatives include the compounds described in paragraphs 0083 to 0088 of JP 2011-212494A.
  • oxime sulfonate compound that is, a compound having an oxime sulfonate structure
  • a compound having an oxime sulfonate structure represented by the following formula C3 is preferable.
  • R 21 represents an alkyl group or an aryl group
  • * represents a bonding site with another atom or another group.
  • any group may be substituted, and the alkyl group in R 21 may be linear or branched, or may have a ring structure. You may have. Acceptable substituents are described below.
  • the alkyl group for R 21 is preferably a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms.
  • the alkyl group of R 21 is an aryl group having 6 to 11 carbon atoms, an alkoxy group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, a cycloalkyl group (7,7-dimethyl-2-oxonorbornyl group or other bridged alicyclic group) , Preferably a bicycloalkyl group or the like) or a halogen atom.
  • a aryl group for R 21 an aryl group having 6 to 18 carbon atoms is preferable, and a phenyl group or a naphthyl group is more preferable.
  • the aryl group of R 21 may be substituted with one or more groups selected from the group consisting of an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, an alkoxy group, and a halogen atom.
  • the compound having an oxime sulfonate structure represented by the formula C3 is also preferably an oxime sulfonate compound described in paragraphs 0078 to 0111 of JP 2014-85643 A. Examples thereof include compounds described in paragraphs 0080 to 0081 of JP-A No. 2015-151347.
  • Examples of the ionic photoacid generator include onium salt compounds such as diaryliodonium salts and triarylsulfonium salts, quaternary ammonium salts, and the like. Of these, onium salt compounds are preferable, and triarylsulfonium salts and diaryliodonium salts are particularly preferable.
  • ionic photoacid generators described in paragraphs 0114 to 0133 of JP-A-2014-85643 can also be preferably used.
  • a photo-acid generator may be used individually by 1 type, and may use 2 or more types together.
  • the content of the photoacid generator in the resist layer composition is preferably 0.1% by mass to 15% by mass with respect to the total solid content of the resist layer composition from the viewpoint of sensitivity and resolution. More preferably, it is 0.5 to 10% by mass.
  • the resist layer composition preferably contains a polymerizable compound.
  • a polymerizable compound an ethylenically unsaturated compound is preferable.
  • the ethylenically unsaturated compound is a component that contributes to the photosensitivity (that is, photocurability) of the photosensitive transfer material and the strength of the cured film.
  • An ethylenically unsaturated compound is a compound having one or more ethylenically unsaturated groups.
  • the resist layer composition preferably includes a bifunctional or higher functional ethylenically unsaturated compound as the ethylenically unsaturated compound.
  • the bifunctional or higher functional ethylenically unsaturated compound means a compound having two or more ethylenically unsaturated groups in one molecule.
  • a (meth) acryloyl group is more preferable.
  • a (meth) acrylate compound is preferable.
  • bifunctional ethylenically unsaturated compound there is no restriction
  • the bifunctional ethylenically unsaturated compound include tricyclodecane dimethanol di (meth) acrylate, tricyclodecane dimethanol di (meth) acrylate, 1,9-nonanediol di (meth) acrylate, and 1,6-hexane. Examples include diol di (meth) acrylate.
  • bifunctional ethylenically unsaturated compound examples include tricyclodecane dimethanol diacrylate (A-DCP, Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd.), tricyclodecane dimenanol dimethacrylate (DCP, Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd.), 1,9-nonanediol diacrylate (A-NOD-N, Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd.), 1,6-hexanediol diacrylate (A-HD-N, Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd.).
  • A-DCP tricyclodecane dimethanol diacrylate
  • DCP Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd.
  • DCP Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd.
  • 1,9-nonanediol diacrylate A-NOD-N, Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd.
  • 1,6-hexanediol diacrylate A-HD-N, Shin
  • bifunctional ethylenically unsaturated compound a bifunctional ethylenically unsaturated compound having a bisphenol structure is also preferably used.
  • the bifunctional ethylenically unsaturated compound having a bisphenol structure include the compounds described in paragraphs 0072 to 0080 of JP-A-2016-224162. Specific examples include alkylene oxide-modified bisphenol A di (meth) acrylate, and 2,2-bis (4- (methacryloxydiethoxy) phenyl) propane, 2,2-bis (4- (methacryloxyethoxy). Propoxy) phenyl) propane and the like are preferred.
  • the trifunctional or higher functional ethylenically unsaturated compound is not particularly limited and may be appropriately selected from known compounds.
  • Examples of the trifunctional or higher functional ethylenically unsaturated compound include dipentaerythritol (tri / tetra / penta / hexa) (meth) acrylate, pentaerythritol (tri / tetra) (meth) acrylate, and trimethylolpropane tri (meth).
  • Examples include acrylate, ditrimethylolpropane tetra (meth) acrylate, isocyanuric acid (meth) acrylate, and (meth) acrylate compounds having a glycerin tri (meth) acrylate skeleton.
  • (tri / tetra / penta / hexa) (meth) acrylate is a concept including tri (meth) acrylate, tetra (meth) acrylate, penta (meth) acrylate, and hexa (meth) acrylate.
  • (Tri / tetra) (meth) acrylate” is a concept including tri (meth) acrylate and tetra (meth) acrylate.
  • Examples of the ethylenically unsaturated compound include a caprolactone-modified compound of (meth) acrylate compound (KAYARAD (registered trademark) DPCA-20 manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd., A-9300-1CL manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd.), Alkylene oxide modified compound of (meth) acrylate compound (KAYARAD RP-1040 manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd., ATM-35E, A-9300 manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd., EBECRYL (registered trademark) 135 manufactured by Daicel Ornex Co., Ltd. Etc.), and ethoxylated glycerin triacrylate (A-GLY-9E manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd.).
  • KAYARAD registered trademark
  • DPCA-20 Alkylene oxide modified compound of (meth) acrylate compound
  • ATM-35E Alkylene oxide modified compound of (meth)
  • Examples of the ethylenically unsaturated compound include urethane (meth) acrylate compounds (preferably trifunctional or higher functional urethane (meth) acrylate compounds).
  • Examples of the tri- or higher functional urethane (meth) acrylate compound include 8UX-015A (manufactured by Taisei Fine Chemical Co., Ltd.), UA-32P (manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd.), and UA-1100H (Shin-Nakamura Chemical Industry ( Etc.).
  • an ethylenically unsaturated compound contains the ethylenically unsaturated compound which has an acid group from a viewpoint of developability improvement.
  • the acid group include a phosphoric acid group, a sulfonic acid group, and a carboxy group, and a carboxy group is preferable.
  • PETA pentaerythritol tri- and tetraacrylate
  • DPHA dipentaerythritol penta and hexaacrylate
  • the ethylenically unsaturated compound having an acid group is preferably at least one selected from the group consisting of a bifunctional or higher functional ethylenically unsaturated compound containing a carboxy group and a carboxylic acid anhydride thereof.
  • the bifunctional or higher functional ethylenically unsaturated compound containing a carboxy group is not particularly limited and can be appropriately selected from known compounds.
  • Examples of the bifunctional or higher functional ethylenically unsaturated compound containing a carboxy group include Aronix (registered trademark) TO-2349 (manufactured by Toagosei Co., Ltd.), Aronix M-520 (manufactured by Toagosei Co., Ltd.), or Aronix M-510 (manufactured by Toagosei Co., Ltd.) can be preferably used.
  • the ethylenically unsaturated compound having an acid group is also preferably a polymerizable compound having an acid group described in paragraphs 0025 to 0030 of JP-A No. 2004-239942.
  • the contents of this publication are incorporated into this disclosure.
  • the weight average molecular weight (Mw) of the polymerizable compound used in the present disclosure is preferably 200 to 3,000, more preferably 250 to 2,600, still more preferably 280 to 2,200, and more preferably 300 to 2,200. Particularly preferred.
  • the ratio of the content of the polymerizable compound having a molecular weight of 300 or less among the polymerizable compounds used in the resist layer composition is based on all the ethylenically unsaturated compounds contained in the resist layer composition. 30 mass% or less is preferable, 25 mass% or less is more preferable, and 20 mass% or less is still more preferable.
  • a polymeric compound may be used individually by 1 type, or may use 2 or more types together.
  • the content of the polymerizable compound in the resist layer composition is preferably 1% by weight to 70% by weight, more preferably 10% by weight to 70% by weight, and more preferably 20% by weight to the total weight of the resist layer composition. 60% by mass is more preferable, and 20% by mass to 50% by mass is particularly preferable.
  • the content of the bifunctional ethylenically unsaturated compound is determined by the resist layer composition. Is preferably 10% by mass to 90% by mass, more preferably 20% by mass to 85% by mass, and still more preferably 30% by mass to 80% by mass with respect to all the ethylenically unsaturated compounds contained in.
  • the content of the trifunctional or higher functional ethylenically unsaturated compound is preferably 10% by mass to 90% by mass, and 15% by mass with respect to all the ethylenically unsaturated compounds contained in the resist layer composition.
  • the content of the bifunctional or higher ethylenically unsaturated compound is 40% by mass or more and 100% with respect to the total content of the bifunctional ethylenically unsaturated compound and the trifunctional or higher ethylenically unsaturated compound. It is preferably less than mass%, more preferably 40 mass% to 90 mass%, further preferably 50 mass% to 80 mass%, and particularly preferably 50 mass% to 70 mass%. .
  • the resist layer composition may further contain a monofunctional ethylenically unsaturated compound.
  • the bifunctional or higher functional ethylenically unsaturated compound is a main component in the ethylenically unsaturated compound contained in the resist layer composition. It is preferable that Specifically, when the resist layer composition contains a bifunctional or higher functional ethylenically unsaturated compound, the content of the bifunctional or higher functional ethylenically unsaturated compound is the ethylene contained in the resist layer composition. 60% by mass to 100% by mass, more preferably 80% by mass to 100% by mass, and particularly preferably 90% by mass to 100% by mass with respect to the total content of the unsaturated unsaturated compounds.
  • the resist layer composition contains an ethylenically unsaturated compound having an acid group (preferably a bifunctional or higher functional ethylenically unsaturated compound containing a carboxy group or a carboxylic acid anhydride thereof), an acid group
  • an acid group preferably a bifunctional or higher functional ethylenically unsaturated compound containing a carboxy group or a carboxylic acid anhydride thereof
  • an acid group preferably 1 to 50% by weight, preferably 1% to 20% by weight, more preferably 1% to 10% by weight, based on the resist layer composition. preferable.
  • the resist layer composition preferably contains a binder polymer having an acid group.
  • a binder polymer having an acid group an alkali-soluble resin is preferable.
  • the acid group include a carboxy group, a sulfo group, a phosphoric acid group, and a phosphonic acid group. Of these, a carboxy group is preferred as the acid group.
  • the acid value of the binder polymer having an acid group is not particularly limited, but from the viewpoint of alkali developability, an acid-soluble resin having an acid value of 60 mgKOH / g or more is preferable, and a carboxy group having an acid value of 60 mgKOH / g or more. It is especially preferable that it is a containing acrylic resin.
  • the carboxyl group-containing acrylic resin having an acid value of 60 mgKOH / g or more (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the specific polymer A) is not particularly limited as long as the above acid value is satisfied, and is appropriately selected from known resins. Can be used.
  • an alkali-soluble resin which is a carboxy group-containing acrylic resin having an acid value of 60 mgKOH / g or more, paragraphs 0033 to 0052 of JP2010-237589A.
  • a containing acrylic resin or the like can be preferably used as the specific polymer A in the present disclosure.
  • the (meth) acrylic resin refers to a resin including at least one of a structural unit derived from (meth) acrylic acid and a structural unit derived from (meth) acrylic acid ester.
  • a preferable range of the copolymerization ratio of the monomer having a carboxy group in the specific polymer A is 5% by mass to 50% by mass, more preferably 10% by mass to 40% by mass, and more preferably 100% by mass of the polymer. Preferably, it is in the range of 12% by mass to 30% by mass.
  • the specific polymer A may have a reactive group, and means for introducing the reactive group into the specific polymer A include a hydroxyl group, a carboxy group, a primary, secondary amino group, an acetoacetyl group, and a sulfonic acid.
  • Examples include a method of reacting an epoxy compound, a blocked isocyanate, an isocyanate, a vinyl sulfone compound, an aldehyde compound, a methylol compound, a carboxylic anhydride, and the like.
  • the specific polymer A the following compound A is preferable.
  • the content ratio of each structural unit shown below can be changed as appropriate according to the purpose.
  • the acid value of the binder polymer having an acid group used in the present disclosure is preferably 60 mgKOH / g to 200 mgKOH / g, more preferably 60 mgKOH / g to 150 mgKOH / g, from the viewpoint of alkali developability. More preferably, it is 60 mgKOH / g to 110 mgKOH / g.
  • the acid value means a value measured according to the method described in JIS K0070 (1992).
  • the weight average molecular weight of the binder polymer having an acid group is preferably 1,000 or more, more preferably 10,000 or more, and further preferably 20,000 to 100,000.
  • any film-forming resin can be appropriately selected and used depending on the purpose.
  • polyhydroxystyrene resin, polyimide resin, polybenzoxazole resin, polysiloxane resin and the like can be preferably exemplified.
  • the binder polymer having an acid group may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • the content of the binder polymer having an acid group in the resist layer composition is preferably 10% by mass or more and 90% by mass or less, and 20% by mass with respect to the total mass of the resist layer composition, from the viewpoint of photosensitivity. % To 80% by mass, more preferably 30% to 70% by mass.
  • the resist layer composition preferably includes a photopolymerization initiator.
  • the photopolymerization initiator receives actinic rays such as ultraviolet rays and visible rays, and initiates polymerization of the polymerizable compound (ethylenically unsaturated compound).
  • actinic rays such as ultraviolet rays and visible rays
  • a well-known photoinitiator can be used.
  • the photopolymerization initiator examples include a photopolymerization initiator having an oxime ester structure (hereinafter also referred to as “oxime-based photopolymerization initiator”) and a photopolymerization initiator having an ⁇ -aminoalkylphenone structure (hereinafter referred to as “ ⁇ - An aminoalkylphenone photopolymerization initiator ”), a photopolymerization initiator having an ⁇ -hydroxyalkylphenone structure (hereinafter also referred to as“ ⁇ -hydroxyalkylphenone polymerization initiator ”), an acylphosphine oxide structure.
  • oxime-based photopolymerization initiator a photopolymerization initiator having an oxime ester structure
  • ⁇ - An aminoalkylphenone photopolymerization initiator a photopolymerization initiator having an ⁇ -aminoalkylphenone structure
  • ⁇ - An aminoalkylphenone photopolymerization initiator a
  • N-phenylglycine photopolymerization initiator photopolymerization initiator having an N-phenylglycine structure
  • N-phenylglycine photopolymerization initiator photopolymerization initiator having an N-phenylglycine structure
  • the photopolymerization initiator is at least selected from the group consisting of an oxime photopolymerization initiator, an ⁇ -aminoalkylphenone photopolymerization initiator, an ⁇ -hydroxyalkylphenone polymerization initiator, and an N-phenylglycine photopolymerization initiator.
  • 1 type is preferably included, and more preferably at least one selected from the group consisting of an oxime photopolymerization initiator, an ⁇ -aminoalkylphenone photopolymerization initiator, and an N-phenylglycine photopolymerization initiator. .
  • the photopolymerization initiator preferably includes at least one selected from the group consisting of 2,4,5-triarylimidazole dimer and derivatives thereof.
  • the 2,4,5-triarylimidazole dimer and its derivative may be a compound represented by the following formula PI.
  • X 1 and X 2 are a chlorine atom.
  • the number of substituents is preferably 1 to 5, more preferably 1 to 3, and preferably 1. Is more preferable.
  • the substitution position is not particularly limited, and is preferably the ortho position or the para position. p and q are each independently an integer of 1 to 5, more preferably an integer of 1 to 3, and still more preferably 1.
  • Examples of the compound represented by the formula PI include 2- (o-chlorophenyl) -4,5-diphenylimidazole dimer, 2- (o-chlorophenyl) -4,5-di (methoxyphenyl) imidazole dimer. 2- (o-fluorophenyl) -4,5-diphenylimidazole dimer, 2- (o-methoxyphenyl) -4,5-diphenylimidazole dimer, 2- (p-methoxyphenyl) -4 , 5-diphenylimidazole dimer.
  • the substituents of the aryl groups of two 2,4,5-triarylimidazoles may be the same to give the target compound, or differently give an asymmetric compound.
  • photopolymerization initiator for example, polymerization initiators described in paragraphs 0031 to 0042 of JP2011-95716A and paragraphs 0064 to 0081 of JP2015-014783A may be used.
  • photopolymerization initiators include 1- [4- (phenylthio)]-1,2-octanedione-2- (O-benzoyloxime) (trade name: IRGACURE (registered trademark) OXE-01, BASF Corporation 1)-[9-ethyl-6- (2-methylbenzoyl) -9H-carbazol-3-yl] ethanone-1- (O-acetyloxime) (trade name: IRGACURE OXE-02, manufactured by BASF) 2- (dimethylamino) -2-[(4-methylphenyl) methyl] -1- [4- (4-morpholinyl) phenyl] -1-butanone (trade name: IRGACURE 379EG, manufactured by BASF), 2- Methyl-1- (4-methylthiophenyl) -2-morpholinopropan-1-one (trade name: IRGACURE 907, manufactured by BASF), 2 Hydroxy-1- ⁇ 4- [4- (2-hydroxy) [
  • a photoinitiator may be used individually by 1 type, or may use 2 or more types together. Although there is no restriction
  • the resist layer composition may contain at least one polymerization inhibitor.
  • the polymerization inhibitor for example, a thermal polymerization inhibitor described in paragraph 0018 of Japanese Patent No. 4502784 can be used. Among these, phenothiazine, phenoxazine or 4-methoxyphenol can be preferably used.
  • the content of the polymerization inhibitor is preferably 0.01% by mass to 3% by mass, and 0.01% by mass with respect to the total mass of the resist layer composition. % To 1% by mass is more preferable, and 0.01% to 0.8% by mass is even more preferable.
  • the resist layer composition according to the present disclosure preferably contains a basic compound.
  • the basic compound can be arbitrarily selected from basic compounds used in chemically amplified resists. Examples thereof include aliphatic amines, aromatic amines, heterocyclic amines, quaternary ammonium hydroxides, and quaternary ammonium salts of carboxylic acids. Specific examples thereof include compounds described in JP-A-2011-212494, paragraphs 0204 to 0207, the contents of which are incorporated in the present disclosure.
  • aliphatic amine examples include trimethylamine, diethylamine, triethylamine, di-n-propylamine, tri-n-propylamine, di-n-pentylamine, tri-n-pentylamine, diethanolamine, triethanolamine, and the like.
  • examples include ethanolamine, dicyclohexylamine, and dicyclohexylmethylamine.
  • aromatic amine examples include aniline, benzylamine, N, N-dimethylaniline, and diphenylamine.
  • heterocyclic amine examples include pyridine, 2-methylpyridine, 4-methylpyridine, 2-ethylpyridine, 4-ethylpyridine, 2-phenylpyridine, 4-phenylpyridine, N-methyl-4-phenylpyridine, 4-dimethylaminopyridine, imidazole, benzimidazole, 4-methylimidazole, 2-phenylbenzimidazole, 2,4,5-triphenylimidazole, nicotine, nicotinic acid, nicotinamide, quinoline, 8-oxyquinoline, pyrazine, Pyrazole, pyridazine, purine, pyrrolidine, piperidine, piperazine, morpholine, 4-methylmorpholine, cyclohexylmorpholinoethylthiourea (CMTU), 1,5-diazabicyclo [4.3.0] -5-nonene, and 1,8- Diazabishi (B) [5.3.0] -7-undecene
  • Examples of the quaternary ammonium hydroxide include tetramethylammonium hydroxide, tetraethylammonium hydroxide, tetra-n-butylammonium hydroxide, and tetra-n-hexylammonium hydroxide.
  • Examples of the quaternary ammonium salt of carboxylic acid include tetramethylammonium acetate, tetramethylammonium benzoate, tetra-n-butylammonium acetate, and tetra-n-butylammonium benzoate.
  • the said basic compound may be used individually by 1 type, or may use 2 or more types together.
  • the content of the basic compound is preferably 0.001% by mass to 5% by mass and more preferably 0.005% by mass to 3% by mass with respect to the total solid content of the resist layer composition. preferable.
  • the resist layer composition according to the present disclosure preferably further contains a solvent (S). Moreover, in order to easily form a resist layer, which will be described later, the resist layer composition once contains a solvent to adjust the viscosity of the resist layer composition, apply and dry the resist layer composition containing the solvent, A resist layer can be suitably formed.
  • a solvent used in the present disclosure, a known solvent can be used.
  • Solvents include ethylene glycol monoalkyl ethers, ethylene glycol dialkyl ethers, ethylene glycol monoalkyl ether acetates, propylene glycol monoalkyl ethers, propylene glycol dialkyl ethers, propylene glycol monoalkyl ether acetates, diethylene glycol dialkyl ethers , Diethylene glycol monoalkyl ether acetates, dipropylene glycol monoalkyl ethers, dipropylene glycol dialkyl ethers, dipropylene glycol monoalkyl ether acetates, esters, ketones, amides, and lactones, ethyl acetate, acetic acid Propyl, isopropyl acetate, isobutyl acetate, butyl acetate, tert-butyl acetate Le, cyclopentyl methyl ether, diisopropyl ether, propylene glycol monoethyl
  • the solvent which can be used for this indication may be used individually by 1 type, and it is more preferable to use 2 types together.
  • two or more solvents for example, combined use of propylene glycol monoalkyl ether acetates and dialkyl ethers, combined use of diacetates and diethylene glycol dialkyl ethers, or esters and butylene glycol alkyl ether acetates A combination with the above is preferred.
  • the solvent is preferably a solvent having a boiling point of 130 ° C. or higher and lower than 160 ° C., a solvent having a boiling point of 160 ° C. or higher, or a mixture thereof. Solvents having a boiling point of 130 ° C. or higher and lower than 160 ° C.
  • propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate (boiling point 146 ° C.), propylene glycol monoethyl ether acetate (boiling point 158 ° C.), propylene glycol methyl-n-butyl ether (boiling point 155 ° C.), and An example is propylene glycol methyl-n-propyl ether (boiling point 131 ° C.).
  • Solvents having a boiling point of 160 ° C or higher include ethyl 3-ethoxypropionate (boiling point 170 ° C), diethylene glycol methyl ethyl ether (boiling point 176 ° C), propylene glycol monomethyl ether propionate (boiling point 160 ° C), dipropylene glycol methyl ether acetate.
  • the content of the solvent in applying the resist layer composition is preferably 50 parts by weight to 1,900 parts by weight, and 100 parts by weight to 900 parts by weight per 100 parts by weight of the total solid content in the resist layer composition. More preferably, it is a part.
  • the content of the solvent in the resist layer described later is preferably 2% by mass or less, more preferably 1% by mass or less, and 0.5% by mass or less with respect to the total mass of the resist layer. More preferably it is.
  • the resist layer composition according to the present disclosure may contain known additives as necessary in addition to the above-described components such as the specific polymer and the photoacid generator.
  • the resist layer composition according to the present disclosure may contain a plasticizer for the purpose of improving plasticity.
  • the plasticizer preferably has a weight average molecular weight smaller than that of the specific polymer.
  • the weight average molecular weight of the plasticizer is preferably 500 or more and less than 10,000, more preferably 700 or more and less than 5,000, and still more preferably 800 or more and less than 4,000 from the viewpoint of imparting plasticity.
  • the plasticizer is not particularly limited as long as it is a compound that is compatible with the specific polymer and exhibits plasticity, but from the viewpoint of imparting plasticity, the plasticizer preferably has an alkyleneoxy group in the molecule.
  • the alkyleneoxy group contained in the plasticizer preferably has the following structure.
  • R represents an alkylene group having 2 to 8 carbon atoms
  • n represents an integer of 1 to 50
  • * represents a bonding site with another atom.
  • a chemically amplified positive resist layer obtained by mixing compound X, a specific polymer and a photoacid generator, even if it is a compound having an alkyleneoxy group having the above structure referred to as “compound X”.
  • compound X a compound having an alkyleneoxy group having the above structure
  • an optional surfactant is not used as a plasticizer in the present disclosure because it is generally not used in an amount that provides plasticity to the resist layer composition.
  • the content of the plasticizer is preferably 1% by mass to 50% by mass with respect to the total solid content of the resist layer composition from the viewpoint of adhesion of the resist layer formed by the resist layer composition. More preferably, the content is 2% by mass to 20% by mass.
  • the said resist layer composition may contain only 1 type of plasticizers, and may contain 2 or more types.
  • the resist layer composition according to the present disclosure may further include a sensitizer.
  • the sensitizer absorbs actinic rays and enters an electronically excited state.
  • the sensitizer in an electronically excited state comes into contact with the photoacid generator, and effects such as electron transfer, energy transfer, and heat generation occur. Thereby, a photo-acid generator raise
  • anthracene derivative a compound selected from the group consisting of an anthracene derivative, an acridone derivative, a thioxanthone derivative, a coumarin derivative, a base styryl derivative, and a distyrylbenzene derivative is preferable, and an anthracene derivative is more preferable.
  • Anthracene derivatives include anthracene, 9,10-dibutoxyanthracene, 9,10-dichloroanthracene, 2-ethyl-9,10-dimethoxyanthracene, 9-hydroxymethylanthracene, 9-bromoanthracene, 9-chloroanthracene, 9 1,10-dibromoanthracene, 2-ethylanthracene or 9,10-dimethoxyanthracene is preferred.
  • Examples of the sensitizer include compounds described in paragraphs 0139 to 0141 of International Publication No. 2015/092731.
  • the content of the sensitizer is preferably 0% by mass to 10% by mass and more preferably 0.1% by mass to 10% by mass with respect to the total solid content of the resist layer composition. .
  • the resist layer composition according to the present disclosure may include a heterocyclic compound.
  • a heterocyclic compound There is no restriction
  • heterocyclic monomers having d electrons such as silicon, sulfur, and phosphorus can be added.
  • the content of the heterocyclic compound in the resist layer composition is preferably 0.01% by mass to 50% by mass with respect to the total solid content of the resist layer composition.
  • the content is more preferably 0.1% by mass to 10% by mass, and further preferably 1% by mass to 5% by mass. It is preferable in the said range from a viewpoint of adhesiveness and etching tolerance. Only 1 type may be used for a heterocyclic compound and it can also use 2 or more types together.
  • Specific examples of the compound having an epoxy group in the molecule include bisphenol A type epoxy resin, bisphenol F type epoxy resin, phenol novolac type epoxy resin, cresol novolac type epoxy resin, aliphatic epoxy resin and the like.
  • a compound having an epoxy group in the molecule can be obtained as a commercial product.
  • JER828, JER1007, JER157S70 (manufactured by Mitsubishi Chemical Co., Ltd.), JER157S65 (manufactured by Mitsubishi Chemical Holdings Co., Ltd.), and the like, such as commercial products described in paragraph 0189 of JP2011-221494A can be mentioned.
  • bisphenol A type epoxy resin bisphenol F type epoxy resin, phenol novolac type epoxy resin and aliphatic epoxy resin are more preferable, and aliphatic epoxy resin is particularly preferable.
  • the compound containing an oxetanyl group is preferably used alone or mixed with a compound containing an epoxy group.
  • the heterocyclic compound is preferably a compound having an epoxy group from the viewpoint of etching resistance and line width stability of the resulting pattern.
  • the resist layer composition according to the present disclosure may contain an alkoxysilane compound.
  • Preferred examples of the alkoxysilane compound include trialkoxysilane compounds.
  • Examples of the alkoxysilane compound include ⁇ -aminopropyltrimethoxysilane, ⁇ -aminopropyltriethoxysilane, ⁇ -glycidoxypropyltriacoxysilane, ⁇ -glycidoxypropylalkyldialkoxysilane, and ⁇ -methacryloxy.
  • ⁇ -glycidoxypropyltrialkoxysilane and ⁇ -methacryloxypropyltrialkoxysilane are more preferable, ⁇ -glycidoxypropyltrialkoxysilane is more preferable, and 3-glycidoxypropyltrimethoxysilane is particularly preferable. preferable.
  • the content of the alkoxysilane compound is preferably 0.1% by mass to 30% by mass and more preferably 0.5% by mass to 20% by mass with respect to the total solid content of the resist layer composition.
  • the resist layer composition according to the present disclosure preferably contains a surfactant from the viewpoint of film thickness uniformity.
  • a surfactant any of anionic, cationic, nonionic (nonionic), or amphoteric can be used, but a preferred surfactant is a nonionic surfactant.
  • nonionic surfactants include polyoxyethylene higher alkyl ethers, polyoxyethylene higher alkyl phenyl ethers, higher fatty acid diesters of polyoxyethylene glycol, silicone-based and fluorine-based surfactants. .
  • KP manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd.
  • Polyflow manufactured by Kyoeisha Chemical Co., Ltd.
  • F-Top manufactured by JEMCO
  • MegaFac manufactured by DIC Corporation
  • Florard Suditomo 3M
  • Surflon manufactured by Asahi Glass Co., Ltd.
  • PolyFox manufactured by OMNOVA
  • SH-8400 manufactured by Toray Dow Corning Co., Ltd.
  • a surfactant it contains a structural unit A and a structural unit B represented by the following formula I-1, and is a weight average molecular weight in terms of polystyrene measured by gel permeation chromatography using tetrahydrofuran (THF) as a solvent.
  • a preferred example is a copolymer having (Mw) of 1,000 or more and 10,000 or less.
  • R 401 and R 403 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a methyl group
  • R 402 represents a linear alkylene group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms
  • R 404 represents a hydrogen atom or a carbon group.
  • L represents an alkylene group having 3 to 6 carbon atoms
  • p and q are mass percentages representing a polymerization ratio
  • p is a numerical value of 10 mass% to 80 mass%.
  • Q represents a numerical value of 20% to 90% by mass
  • r represents an integer of 1 to 18
  • s represents an integer of 1 to 10
  • * represents a bonding site with another structure. Represent.
  • L is preferably a branched alkylene group represented by the following formula (I-2).
  • R 405 in formula (I-2) represents an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, and is preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms in terms of compatibility and wettability to the coated surface. Two or three alkyl groups are more preferred.
  • the weight average molecular weight (Mw) of the copolymer is more preferably from 1,500 to 5,000.
  • Surfactant may be used individually by 1 type and may use 2 or more types together.
  • the addition amount of the surfactant is preferably 10% by mass or less, more preferably 0.001% by mass to 10% by mass with respect to the total solid content of the resist layer composition, and 0.01% More preferably, it is from 3% by mass to 3% by mass.
  • the resist layer composition according to the present disclosure includes metal oxide particles, an antioxidant, a dispersant, an acid multiplier, a development accelerator, a conductive fiber, a thermal radical polymerization initiator, a thermal acid generator, an ultraviolet absorber, Known additives such as thickeners and organic or inorganic suspending agents can be further added. Preferred embodiments of the other components are described in paragraphs 0165 to 0184 of JP 2014-85643 A, respectively, and the contents of this publication are incorporated in the present disclosure.
  • the said resist layer can contain preferably each component in the said resist layer composition other than the said solvent. Further, in the resist layer, the preferable content of each component with respect to the total mass of the resist layer is the same as the preferable content of each component with respect to the total solid content of the resist layer composition in the resist layer composition.
  • the thickness of the resist layer is preferably 0.5 ⁇ m to 20 ⁇ m. When the thickness of the resist layer is 20 ⁇ m or less, the resolution of the obtained pattern is good, and when it is 0.5 ⁇ m or more, it is preferable from the viewpoint of pattern linearity.
  • the thickness of the resist layer is more preferably 0.8 ⁇ m to 15 ⁇ m, and particularly preferably 1.0 ⁇ m to 10 ⁇ m.
  • a resist layer composition for forming a resist layer by mixing each component and a solvent in a predetermined ratio and by an arbitrary method, and dissolving by stirring.
  • a composition by preparing each solution of each component in advance in a solvent and then mixing the obtained solution at a predetermined ratio.
  • the composition prepared as described above can be used after being filtered using a filter having a pore size of 0.2 ⁇ m or the like.
  • the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure having the intermediate layer and the resist layer on the temporary support can be obtained by applying the resist layer composition onto the temporary support on which the intermediate layer is formed and drying.
  • the coating method is not particularly limited, and the coating can be performed by a known method such as slit coating, spin coating, curtain coating, and inkjet coating.
  • the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure has a temporary support.
  • the temporary support is a support that supports the intermediate layer and the resist layer and can be peeled off.
  • the temporary support used in the present disclosure preferably has light transmittance from the viewpoint that the intermediate layer and the resist layer can be exposed through the temporary support. Having light transmittance means that the transmittance of the main wavelength of light used for pattern exposure is 50% or more, and the transmittance of the main wavelength of light used for pattern exposure is a viewpoint of improving exposure sensitivity. Therefore, 60% or more is preferable, and 70% or more is more preferable.
  • Examples of the method for measuring the transmittance include a method of measuring using MCPD Series manufactured by Otsuka Electronics Co., Ltd.
  • Examples of the temporary support include a glass substrate, a resin film, paper, and the like, and a resin film is particularly preferable from the viewpoints of strength and flexibility.
  • Examples of the resin film include a polyethylene terephthalate film, a cellulose triacetate film, a polystyrene film, and a polycarbonate film. Among these, a biaxially stretched polyethylene terephthalate film is particularly preferable.
  • the thickness of the temporary support is not particularly limited, but is preferably in the range of 5 ⁇ m to 200 ⁇ m, and more preferably in the range of 10 ⁇ m to 150 ⁇ m from the viewpoint of ease of handling and versatility.
  • the thickness of the temporary support is selected according to the material from the viewpoints of strength as a support, flexibility required for bonding to a circuit wiring forming substrate, light transmittance required in the first exposure process, etc. do it.
  • a preferred embodiment of the temporary support is described, for example, in paragraphs 0017 to 0018 of JP 2014-85643 A, and the contents of this publication are incorporated in the present disclosure.
  • the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure may have a layer other than the intermediate layer and the resist layer (hereinafter may be referred to as “other layer”).
  • other layers include a contrast enhancement layer, a cover film, and a thermoplastic resin layer.
  • the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure has an intermediate layer and a resist layer in this order on a temporary support.
  • a temporary support 12 a laminate 14 (see FIG. 2) of a resist layer 14-1 and an intermediate layer 14-2, and a cover film 16 are laminated in this order.
  • the intermediate layer 14-2 contains a pigment.
  • constituent materials and the like of the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure will be described. Note that the above configuration in the present disclosure may be referred to as follows in the present disclosure.
  • a polymer having a structural unit having a group in which an acid group is protected with an acid-decomposable group may be referred to as a “specific polymer”.
  • the resist layer When the resist layer is a positive resist layer, it may be referred to as a “positive resist layer”.
  • the first embodiment of the circuit wiring manufacturing method is as follows: A step of bonding the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure to the substrate by bringing the resist layer of the photosensitive transfer material into contact with the substrate (bonding step); A step of exposing the intermediate layer and the resist layer of the photosensitive transfer material after the bonding step (exposure step); The resist layer after the pattern exposure process is developed to form a pattern (development process), and the process of etching the substrate in the region where the pattern is not disposed (etching process) is included in this order.
  • the substrate in the first embodiment of the circuit wiring manufacturing method may be a substrate in which a layer such as a desired conductive layer is provided on a base material such as glass, silicon, or a film. According to the first embodiment of the circuit wiring manufacturing method, a fine pattern can be formed on the substrate surface.
  • the second embodiment of the circuit wiring manufacturing method is And a plurality of conductive layers including a first conductive layer and a second conductive layer having different constituent materials from each other, and on the surface of the base material, in the order farthest from the surface of the base material, Bonding the resist layer of the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure in contact with the first conductive layer to a substrate on which the first conductive layer and the second conductive layer which are layers are laminated Process, A first exposure step of pattern exposing the intermediate layer and the resist layer through the temporary support of the photosensitive transfer material after the bonding step; A first development step of developing the intermediate layer and the resist layer after the first exposure step to form a first pattern after peeling the temporary support from the intermediate layer and the resist layer after the first exposure step; A first etching step of etching at least the first conductive layer and the second conductive layer among the plurality of conductive layers in a region where the first pattern is not disposed; A second exposure step of pattern exposing the first pattern after the first etching step with a pattern
  • the third embodiment of the circuit wiring manufacturing method is a mode in which the first embodiment is repeated twice. That is, a step of bonding the resist layer of the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure to the substrate in contact with the substrate (bonding step); A step of exposing the intermediate layer and the resist layer of the photosensitive transfer material after the bonding step (exposure step); Developing the resist layer after the pattern exposing step to form a pattern (developing step); A step of etching the substrate in the region where the pattern is not disposed (etching step); In this order, the resist layer of the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure is bonded to the remaining resist layer after the etching step in contact with the remaining resist layer (bonding).
  • Combining step) and A step of exposing the intermediate layer and the resist layer of the photosensitive transfer material after the bonding step Exposure step); Developing the resist layer after the pattern exposing step to form a pattern (developing step); A step of etching the substrate in the region where the pattern is not disposed (etching step); Are included in this order.
  • the first and second photosensitive transfer materials may be the same or different.
  • the photosensitive transfer material used in the first bonding step is preferably a positive type, and the photosensitive transfer material used in the second bonding step may be a positive type or a negative type. Also good.
  • the third embodiment of the circuit wiring manufacturing method can be implemented by, for example, the following method.
  • An ITO film is formed on the base material by sputtering, and copper is formed thereon by a vacuum vapor deposition method to form a conductive pattern forming substrate.
  • a photosensitive transfer material is bonded onto the copper layer to form a laminate.
  • the laminated body is subjected to pattern exposure using a photomask provided with a pattern A having a configuration in which conductive layer pads are connected in one direction without peeling off the temporary support. Thereafter, the temporary support is peeled off, developed and washed with water to obtain a resin pattern drawn with pattern A.
  • the ITO layer is etched using an ITO etchant to obtain a substrate on which both copper and ITO are drawn in the pattern A.
  • a photosensitive transfer material is bonded onto the remaining resist layer.
  • pattern exposure is performed using a photomask provided with openings of pattern B in the aligned state, and the temporary support of the photosensitive transfer material is peeled off, followed by development and washing with water.
  • the copper wiring is etched, and the remaining resist layer is stripped using a stripping solution to obtain a circuit wiring board having a conductive pattern.
  • the circuit wiring manufacturing method according to the present disclosure can be used as a circuit wiring manufacturing method for a touch panel or a touch panel display device.
  • a touch panel or a touch panel display device can be used as a circuit wiring manufacturing method for a touch panel or a touch panel display device.
  • the substrate 22 has a plurality of conductive layers including the first conductive layer 24 and the second conductive layer 26 having different constituent materials, and the substrate 22 is formed on the surface of the substrate 22.
  • the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure described above is applied to the substrate (circuit wiring forming substrate) 20 in which the first conductive layer 24 and the second conductive layer 26 which are the outermost surface layers are laminated in order from the surface of the substrate.
  • 100 resist layers 14-1 are brought into contact with the first conductive layer 24 and bonded together.
  • Such a bonding of the circuit wiring forming substrate and the photosensitive transfer material may be referred to as “transfer” or “laminate”.
  • the cover film 16 is provided on the positive resist layer 14 of the photosensitive transfer material 100 as shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, the cover film 16 is removed from the photosensitive transfer material 100 (positive resist layer 14). Thereafter, the resist layer 14-1 of the photosensitive transfer material 100 is brought into contact with the first conductive layer 24 and bonded thereto.
  • the bonding (transfer) of the photosensitive transfer material onto the first conductive layer is performed by stacking the resist layer side of the photosensitive transfer material on the first conductive layer, and applying pressure and heating with a roll or the like. Is preferred.
  • known laminators such as a laminator, a vacuum laminator, and an auto-cut laminator that can further increase productivity can be used.
  • the base material of the circuit wiring forming substrate is a resin film, roll-to-roll bonding can also be performed.
  • a base material is a glass base material or a film base material, and it is more preferable that it is a film base material.
  • the substrate is particularly preferably a sheet-shaped resin composition.
  • a base material is transparent.
  • transparent means that the transmittance in the visible light region of 400 nm to 800 nm is 90% or more.
  • the refractive index of the substrate is preferably 1.50 to 1.52.
  • the base material may be composed of a light-transmitting base material such as a glass base material, and tempered glass represented by gorilla glass manufactured by Corning Inc. can be used. Further, as the above-mentioned transparent base material, materials used in JP 2010-86684 A, JP 2010-152809 A, and JP 2010-257492 A can be preferably used. When a film substrate is used as the substrate, it is more preferable to use a substrate that is not optically distorted and a substrate having high transparency. Specific examples of the material include polyethylene terephthalate (PET), Examples thereof include polyethylene naphthalate, polycarbonate, triacetyl cellulose, and cycloolefin polymer.
  • PET polyethylene terephthalate
  • Examples of the plurality of conductive layers formed on the substrate include arbitrary conductive layers used for general circuit wiring or touch panel wiring.
  • Examples of the material for the conductive layer include metals and metal oxides.
  • Examples of the metal oxide include ITO (Indium Tin Oxide), IZO (Indium Zinc Oxide), and SiO 2 .
  • Examples of the metal include Al, Zn, Cu, Fe, Ni, Cr, and Mo.
  • At least one of the plurality of conductive layers includes a metal oxide.
  • the conductive layer is preferably an electrode pattern corresponding to a sensor of a visual recognition part used in a capacitive touch panel or a wiring of a peripheral extraction part.
  • Circuit wiring formation board It is a board
  • a film substrate such as PET is preferably provided with a plurality of conductive layers such as metal oxides and metals.
  • ⁇ Exposure process (first exposure process)> The exposure process is performed in the first embodiment, and the first exposure process is performed in the second embodiment.
  • An example of the exposure process (first exposure process) is schematically shown in FIG.
  • the positive resist layer 14 is subjected to pattern exposure via the temporary support 12 of the photosensitive transfer material after the bonding step.
  • a mask 30 having a predetermined pattern is disposed above the photosensitive transfer material 100 disposed on the first conductive layer 24 (on the side opposite to the side in contact with the first conductive layer 24), and then For example, a method of exposing with ultraviolet rays from above the mask through the mask 30 may be used.
  • the detailed arrangement and specific size of the pattern are not particularly limited.
  • At least a part is preferably a fine wire of 100 ⁇ m or less, and more preferably 70 ⁇ m or less.
  • the light source used for exposure can be appropriately selected and used as long as it can irradiate light (for example, 365 nm, 405 nm, etc.) in a wavelength region where the exposed portion of the photosensitive transfer material can be dissolved in the developer. .
  • the exposure amount is preferably about 5 mJ / cm 2 to 200 mJ / cm 2 , more preferably about 10 mJ / cm 2 to 100 mJ / cm 2 . It is also preferable to perform heat treatment before development for the purpose of improving the rectangularity and linearity of the pattern after exposure. By a process called PEB (Post Exposure Bake), pattern edge roughness due to standing waves generated in the resist layer during exposure can be reduced.
  • PEB Post Exposure Bake
  • the pattern exposure may be performed after the temporary support is peeled off from the intermediate layer and the resist layer, or before the temporary support is peeled off, it is exposed through the temporary support, and then the temporary support is removed. It may be peeled off. In order to prevent mask contamination due to contact between the intermediate layer and the mask, and to avoid the influence on the exposure caused by the foreign matter adhering to the mask, it is preferable to perform the exposure without peeling off the temporary support.
  • the pattern exposure may be exposure through a mask or digital exposure using a laser or the like.
  • ⁇ Development process (first development process)>
  • the developing step is performed, and in the second embodiment, the first developing step is performed.
  • An example of the development process (first development process) is schematically shown in FIG.
  • the development step after removing the temporary support 12 from the positive resist layer 14 after the exposure step (first exposure step), the positive resist layer 14 after the exposure step (first exposure step). Is developed to form the first pattern 14A.
  • the development process is a process of forming a pattern (first pattern) by developing the pattern-exposed positive resist layer.
  • the development of the pattern-exposed positive resist layer can be performed using a developer.
  • the developer is not particularly limited as long as the exposed portion of the positive resist layer can be removed.
  • a known developer such as the developer described in JP-A-5-72724 can be used. Specific examples include aqueous sodium hydroxide, aqueous potassium hydroxide, aqueous sodium carbonate, aqueous potassium carbonate, and aqueous tetramethylammonium hydroxide.
  • the developer is preferably a developer in which the exposed portion of the positive resist layer exhibits a dissolution type development behavior.
  • an alkaline aqueous developer containing a compound having a pKa of 7 to 13 at a concentration of 0.05 mol / L (liter) to 5 mol / L is preferable.
  • the developer may further contain an organic solvent miscible with water, a surfactant, and the like.
  • Examples of the developer suitably used in the present disclosure include the developer described in Paragraph 0194 of International Publication No. 2015/092731.
  • the development method is not particularly limited and may be any of paddle development, shower development, shower and spin development, dip development, and the like.
  • the shower development will be described.
  • the exposed portion can be removed by spraying a developer onto the positive resist layer after exposure. Further, after the development, it is preferable to remove the development residue while spraying a cleaning agent or the like with a shower and rubbing with a brush or the like.
  • the liquid temperature of the developer is preferably 20 ° C. to 40 ° C.
  • the post-baking process of heat-processing the pattern containing the resist layer obtained by image development.
  • the post-baking is preferably performed in an environment of 8.1 kPa to 121.6 kPa, and more preferably in an environment of 506.6 kPa or more. On the other hand, it is more preferable to carry out in an environment of 114.6 kPa or less, and it is particularly preferable to carry out in an environment of 101.3 kPa or less.
  • the post-baking temperature is preferably 80 ° C. to 250 ° C., more preferably 110 ° C. to 170 ° C., and particularly preferably 130 ° C. to 150 ° C.
  • the post-baking time is preferably 1 to 30 minutes, more preferably 2 to 10 minutes, and particularly preferably 2 to 4 minutes.
  • the post-bake may be performed in an air environment or a nitrogen substitution environment.
  • the circuit wiring manufacturing method according to the present disclosure may include other processes such as a post-exposure process.
  • etching step (first etching step)> The etching process is performed in the first embodiment, and the first etching process is performed in the second embodiment.
  • An example of the etching process (first etching process) is schematically shown in FIG.
  • the etching process (first etching process)
  • at least the first conductive layer 24 and the second conductive layer 26 are etched among the plurality of conductive layers in the region where the first pattern 14A is not disposed.
  • the first conductive layer 24A and the second conductive layer 26A having the same pattern are formed by etching.
  • Etching of the conductive layer can be performed by a known method such as a method described in paragraphs 0048 to 0054 of JP 2010-152155 A or a dry etching method such as a known plasma etching.
  • etching method a commonly performed wet etching method in which the substrate is immersed in an etching solution can be used.
  • an etchant used for wet etching an acid type or alkaline type etchant may be appropriately selected according to an object to be etched.
  • acidic etching solutions include aqueous solutions of acidic components such as hydrochloric acid, sulfuric acid, hydrofluoric acid, and phosphoric acid, and mixed aqueous solutions of acidic components and salts of ferric chloride, ammonium fluoride, potassium permanganate, and the like. Is done.
  • the acidic component a component obtained by combining a plurality of acidic components may be used.
  • alkaline type etchants include aqueous solutions of alkali components such as sodium hydroxide, potassium hydroxide, ammonia, organic amines, salts of organic amines such as tetramethylammonium hydroxide, alkaline components and potassium permanganate. Examples thereof include a mixed aqueous solution of salt.
  • alkali component a component obtained by combining a plurality of alkali components may be used.
  • the temperature of the etching solution is not particularly limited, but is preferably 45 ° C. or lower.
  • the first pattern used as an etching mask (etching pattern) in the present disclosure preferably exhibits particularly excellent resistance to acidic and alkaline etching solutions in a temperature range of 45 ° C. or lower. Therefore, the positive resist layer is prevented from being peeled off during the etching process, and the portion where the positive resist layer does not exist is selectively etched.
  • a cleaning process and a drying process may be performed as necessary to prevent contamination of the process line.
  • the cleaning process is performed by cleaning the substrate with pure water for 10 seconds to 300 seconds at room temperature, for example, and the drying process is performed using an air blow, for example, with an air blow pressure (about 0.1 kg / cm 2 to 5 kg / cm 2 ).
  • the drying may be performed by appropriately adjusting the above.
  • ⁇ Second exposure step> In the second embodiment, the second exposure process is performed. An example of the second exposure step is schematically shown in FIG. After the first etching step, pattern exposure is performed on the first pattern 14A after the first etching step with a pattern different from the first pattern.
  • the first pattern remaining on the first conductive layer is exposed at least at a portion corresponding to a portion to be removed of the first conductive layer in a second development step described later.
  • the same method as the pattern exposure in the first exposure step can be applied except that the mask 40 having a pattern different from that of the mask 30 used in the first exposure step is used.
  • the second development step is performed.
  • An example of the second developing process is schematically shown in FIG.
  • the first pattern 14A after the second exposure step is developed to form a second pattern 14B.
  • the exposed portion of the first pattern in the second exposure step is removed.
  • the same method as the development in the first development step can be applied.
  • the second exposure process is performed.
  • An example of the second etching step is schematically shown in FIG.
  • the second etching step at least the first conductive layer 24A is etched among the plurality of conductive layers in the region where the second pattern 14B is not disposed.
  • the same method as the etching in the first etching step can be applied except that an etching solution corresponding to the conductive layer to be removed by etching is selected.
  • the second etching step it is preferable to selectively etch fewer conductive layers than in the first etching step, depending on the desired pattern. For example, as shown in FIG. 2, the first conductive layer is etched by using an etchant that selectively etches only the first conductive layer 24B in a region where the positive resist layer is not disposed. The pattern can be different from the pattern of the conductive layer.
  • circuit wiring including conductive layers 24B and 26A having at least two types of patterns is formed.
  • ⁇ Positive resist layer removal process An example of the positive resist layer removing process is schematically shown in FIG. After the second etching step, the second pattern 14B remains on a part of the first conductive layer 24B. If the positive resist layer is unnecessary, all the remaining positive resist layer 14B may be removed.
  • a method of removing the remaining positive type resist layer The method of removing by chemical treatment can be mentioned.
  • a method for removing the positive resist layer for example, a substrate having a positive resist layer or the like in a stripping solution being stirred at preferably 30 ° C. to 80 ° C., more preferably 50 ° C. to 80 ° C. for 1 minute to 30 minutes. The method of immersing for a minute is mentioned.
  • the stripping solution examples include inorganic alkali components such as sodium hydroxide and potassium hydroxide, or organic alkali components such as primary amine, secondary amine, tertiary amine, and quaternary ammonium salt. , A stripping solution dissolved in dimethyl sulfoxide, N-methylpyrrolidone or a mixed solution thereof. A stripping solution may be used and stripped by a spray method, a shower method, a paddle method, or the like.
  • inorganic alkali components such as sodium hydroxide and potassium hydroxide
  • organic alkali components such as primary amine, secondary amine, tertiary amine, and quaternary ammonium salt.
  • a stripping solution may be used and stripped by a spray method, a shower method, a paddle method, or the like.
  • the circuit wiring manufacturing method according to the present disclosure may include other optional steps.
  • the following processes are mentioned, it is not limited to these processes.
  • the second embodiment may further include a step of attaching a light-transmitting protective film (not shown) on the first pattern after the first etching step and before the second exposure step. Good.
  • a light-transmitting protective film (not shown) on the first pattern after the first etching step and before the second exposure step.
  • the first pattern is subjected to pattern exposure via the protective film, and after the second exposure step, the protective film is peeled off from the first pattern, and then the second development step is performed.
  • the manufacturing method of the circuit wiring which concerns on this indication can include the process of reducing the visible light reflectance of some or all of the some conductive layers on a base material.
  • the treatment for reducing the visible light reflectance include an oxidation treatment.
  • visible light reflectance can be reduced by oxidizing copper to copper oxide and blackening.
  • paragraphs 0017 to 0025 of JP2014-150118A and paragraphs 0041, 0042, 0048 and 0058 of JP2013-206315A are described. The content of this publication is incorporated into the present disclosure.
  • the method for manufacturing a circuit wiring according to the present disclosure preferably includes a step of forming an insulating film on the formed circuit wiring and a step of forming a new conductive layer on the insulating film.
  • the above-described second electrode pattern can be formed while being insulated from the first electrode pattern.
  • an insulating film having a desired pattern may be formed by photolithography using a photosensitive material having insulating properties.
  • a new conductive layer having a desired pattern may be formed by photolithography using a photosensitive material having conductivity.
  • the case where the circuit wiring having two different patterns is formed on the circuit wiring forming substrate including the two conductive layers has been described.
  • the number of conductive layers of the substrate to which the manufacturing method is applied is not limited to two layers, and a circuit wiring forming substrate in which three or more conductive layers are stacked is used, and the combination of the exposure step, the development step, and the etching step described above is used. By performing it three times or more, three or more conductive layers can be formed in different circuit wiring patterns.
  • the manufacturing method of the circuit wiring which concerns on this indication WHEREIN The base material has a some conductive layer in both surfaces, respectively, and the conductive layer formed in both surfaces of the base material It is also preferable to form circuits sequentially or simultaneously. With such a configuration, it is possible to form a circuit wiring for a touch panel in which a first conductive pattern is formed on one surface of the substrate and a second conductive pattern is formed on the other surface. Moreover, it is also preferable to form the circuit wiring for touch panels of such a structure from both surfaces of a base material by roll-to-roll.
  • the circuit wiring according to the present disclosure is a circuit wiring manufactured by the circuit wiring manufacturing method according to the present disclosure.
  • the circuit board according to the present disclosure is a substrate having circuit wiring manufactured by the method for manufacturing circuit wiring according to the present disclosure.
  • the use of the circuit board concerning this indication is not limited, for example, it is preferred that it is a circuit board for touch panels.
  • the input device in the present disclosure is preferably a capacitive touch panel.
  • the display device according to the present disclosure preferably includes the input device according to the present disclosure.
  • the display device in the present disclosure is preferably an image display device such as an organic EL display device and a liquid crystal display device.
  • the touch panel according to the present disclosure is a touch panel having at least circuit wiring manufactured by the method for manufacturing circuit wiring according to the present disclosure.
  • the touch panel according to the present disclosure preferably includes at least a transparent substrate, an electrode, and an insulating layer or a protective layer.
  • the touch panel display device according to the present disclosure is a touch panel display device having at least circuit wiring manufactured by the circuit wiring manufacturing method according to the present disclosure, and is preferably a touch panel display device including the touch panel according to the present disclosure.
  • the method for manufacturing a touch panel or a touch panel display device according to the present disclosure preferably includes a method for manufacturing a circuit wiring according to the present disclosure.
  • the manufacturing method of the touch panel or the touch panel display device includes a step of bringing the resist layer of the photosensitive transfer material obtained by the method of manufacturing the photosensitive transfer material into contact with the substrate and bonding, and after the bonding step Pattern exposing the resist layer of the photosensitive transfer material, developing the resist layer after the pattern exposing step, forming a pattern, and etching the substrate in a region where the pattern is not disposed It is preferable that the process to include is included in this order.
  • the details of each process are synonymous with the details of each process in the above-described circuit wiring manufacturing method, and the preferred embodiments are also the same.
  • any of known methods such as a resistive film method, a capacitance method, an ultrasonic method, an electromagnetic induction method, and an optical method may be used.
  • the electrostatic capacity method is preferable.
  • the touch panel type a so-called in-cell type (for example, those described in FIGS. 5, 6, 7, and 8 of JP-T-2012-517051), a so-called on-cell type (for example, JP 2013-168125 A). 19 of the gazette, those described in FIGS.
  • JP 2012-89102 A OGS (One Glass Solution) type
  • TOL (Touch-on-Lens) type for example, JP No. 2013-54727 shown in FIG. 2
  • other configurations for example, those shown in FIG. 6 of JP2013-164671A
  • various out-cell types for example, GG, G1, G2, GFF, GF2, GF1, G1F, etc.
  • photosensitive transfer material means “second embodiment of the photosensitive transfer material” unless otherwise specified.
  • a second embodiment of the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure includes a temporary support, an intermediate layer, and a photosensitive resin layer in this order, and the intermediate layer includes a water-soluble resin, particles, and an acidic group.
  • a polymer containing a structural unit having an acid group protected by a decomposable group is contained, and the photosensitive resin layer and the intermediate layer are in contact with each other.
  • the problem to be solved by the second embodiment of the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure is to provide a photosensitive transfer material having excellent adhesion between the photosensitive resin layer and the intermediate layer.
  • the problems to be solved by the second embodiment of the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure include a method of manufacturing a resin pattern, a method of manufacturing circuit wiring, and a method of manufacturing a touch panel using the photosensitive transfer material. Is to provide.
  • the photosensitive transfer material According to the second embodiment of the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure, it is possible to provide a photosensitive transfer material having excellent adhesion between the photosensitive resin layer and the intermediate layer.
  • a method of manufacturing a resin pattern, a method of manufacturing circuit wiring, and a method of manufacturing a touch panel using the photosensitive transfer material are provided. Can do.
  • the photosensitive transfer material includes a positive photosensitive resin layer having a positive photosensitive resin layer containing a polymer containing a structural unit having an acid group protected by an acid-decomposable group. Transfer material.
  • the photosensitive resin layer is preferably a chemically amplified positive photosensitive resin layer.
  • the present inventors have found that when the photosensitive resin layer and the intermediate layer are provided in contact with each other, the adhesion between the photosensitive resin layer and the intermediate layer is not sufficient.
  • the present inventors have found that a photosensitive transfer material having excellent adhesion between the photosensitive resin layer and the intermediate layer can be obtained by using the photosensitive transfer material having the above-described configuration.
  • the intermediate layer is at least one selected from the group consisting of water-soluble resins, particles, and acidic groups, basic groups, anionic groups, and cationic groups.
  • the polar group is adsorbed on the particle surface, and the alkyl group having 6 or more carbon atoms is the photosensitive material. Adhesiveness between the photosensitive resin layer and the intermediate layer because the photosensitive resin layer and the intermediate layer are firmly adhered by penetrating into the resin layer or by hydrophobic interaction (hydrophobic effect) with the photosensitive resin layer. It is estimated to be excellent.
  • the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure has an intermediate layer in contact with the photosensitive resin layer, and the intermediate layer includes a water-soluble resin, particles, an acidic group, a basic group, an anionic group, and a cationic group.
  • a polar compound having at least one polar group selected from the group consisting of and an alkyl group having 6 or more carbon atoms is contained.
  • the intermediate layer contains a polar compound having at least one polar group selected from the group consisting of an acidic group, a basic group, an anionic group, and a cationic group and an alkyl group having 6 or more carbon atoms.
  • the alkyl group having 6 or more carbon atoms in the polar compound may be linear, branched, or have a ring structure, but the adhesion between the photosensitive resin layer and the intermediate layer From the viewpoint of liquid stability in the properties, it is preferably a linear alkyl group or a branched alkyl group, and more preferably a linear alkyl group.
  • the alkyl group having 6 or more carbon atoms in the polar compound is preferably an alkyl group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms and an alkyl group having 8 to 22 carbon atoms from the viewpoint of adhesion between the photosensitive resin layer and the intermediate layer. And more preferably an alkyl group having 10 to 16 carbon atoms.
  • Examples of the polar group include primary to tertiary amino groups, primary to quaternary ammonium groups, pyridyl groups, pyridinium groups, and carboxylic acid groups from the viewpoint of adhesion between the photosensitive resin layer and the intermediate layer.
  • a quaternary ammonium base is a quaternary ammonium base.
  • a quaternary ammonium base is preferable.
  • the betaine structure which has a carboxylate structure and an ammonium structure, or the betaine structure which has a sulfonate structure and an ammonium structure is mentioned preferably, The betaine structure which has a sulfonate structure and an ammonium structure is mentioned more preferably.
  • the polar compound may form a salt with other compounds in the intermediate layer.
  • silica particles having an anionic silanol group on the surface and an amine compound are used, even if the amino group in the amine compound partially reacts with the silanol group to form a salt Good.
  • the amine compound contained in the intermediate layer is generated in two types: a compound having an amino group and a compound having an ammonium base.
  • the polar group is defined as at least one polar group selected from the group consisting of an acidic group, a basic group, an anionic group, and a cationic group.
  • the polar compound may have only one polar group or two or more polar groups, but the adhesion between the photosensitive resin layer and the intermediate layer, and the intermediate layer forming composition From the viewpoint of liquid stability, a compound having only one polar group is preferable.
  • the said betaine structure shall count as one combining a cation site
  • the counter anion in the primary to quaternary ammonium base or the pyridinium group is not particularly limited, but preferably includes a monovalent anion, and includes a halide ion or a hydroxide ion. It is more preferable that it contains a chloride ion or a hydroxide ion.
  • the counter cation in the carboxylate group, the sulfonate group, the phosphonate group, or the phosphate group is not particularly limited, but preferably contains a monovalent cation, an alkali metal ion, or More preferably, it contains primary to quaternary ammonium ions.
  • the polar compound may be an aliphatic compound or an aromatic compound, but from the viewpoint of adhesion between the photosensitive resin layer and the intermediate layer, and liquid stability in the intermediate layer forming composition.
  • An aliphatic compound is preferable.
  • the molecular weight of the polar compound is not particularly limited, but is preferably 100 to 800 from the viewpoint of adhesion between the photosensitive resin layer and the intermediate layer, and liquid stability in the intermediate layer forming composition, More preferably, it is 120 to 600, and particularly preferably 150 to 400.
  • polar compound examples include, for example, primary to tertiary amino compounds, primary to quaternary ammonium salt compounds, carboxylic acid compounds, sulfonic acid compounds, carboxylate compounds, sulfonate compounds, etc. Is mentioned.
  • the intermediate layer may contain the above polar compound singly or in combination of two or more.
  • middle layer is 0.01 with respect to the total mass of an intermediate
  • the intermediate layer contains particles.
  • the particles are preferably metal oxide particles or organic particles, and oxide particles of an element selected from the group consisting of Si, Ti and Zr Or it is more preferable that it is an organic particle.
  • the metal of the metal oxide particles in the present disclosure includes metalloids such as B, Si, Ge, As, Sb, and Te.
  • metal oxide particles Be, Mg, Ca, Sr, Ba, Sc, Y, La, Ce, Gd, Tb, Dy, Yb, Lu, Ti, Zr, Hf, Nb, Mo, W, Zn, B Oxide particles containing atoms such as Al, Si, Ge, Sn, Pb, Sb, Bi, Te, etc. are preferred, silica, titanium oxide, titanium composite oxide, zinc oxide, zirconium oxide, indium / tin oxide, or Antimony / tin oxide is more preferable, silica, titanium oxide, titanium composite oxide, or zirconium oxide is more preferable, silica, titanium oxide, or zirconium oxide is particularly preferable, and silica is most preferable.
  • organic resin particles are preferably exemplified.
  • the organic resin particles include homopolymers and copolymers of acrylic acid monomers such as acrylic acid, methacrylic acid, acrylic ester, and methacrylic ester, and cellulose polymers such as nitrocellulose, methylcellulose, ethylcellulose, and cellulose acetate.
  • acrylic resin particles are preferable as the organic particles, and polymethyl methacrylate particles are more preferable.
  • silica particles are particularly preferable from the viewpoint of adhesion between the intermediate layer and the photosensitive layer.
  • the surface of these particles can be treated with an organic material or an inorganic material in order to impart dispersion stability.
  • the particles are preferably particles having a hydrophilic surface.
  • the surface of particles having a hydrophobic surface may be subjected to a hydrophilic treatment.
  • the particles are particles having an anionic group or a cationic group on the surface from the viewpoint of adhesion between the photosensitive resin layer and the intermediate layer and liquid stability in the intermediate layer forming composition.
  • the particles having an anionic group on the surface are more preferable, and the silica particles having an anionic group on the surface are particularly preferable.
  • the intermediate layer is a particle having an anionic group on the surface, from the viewpoint of adhesion between the photosensitive resin layer and the intermediate layer
  • the polar compound is a polar compound having a basic group or a cationic group. Preferably there is.
  • the said polar compound is a polar compound which has an acidic group or an anionic group from an adhesive viewpoint of the photosensitive resin layer and an intermediate
  • grain has on the surface a silanol group or a carboxy group is mentioned preferably, A silanol group is mentioned more preferably.
  • the cationic group that the particles have on the surface is preferably an amino group.
  • the arithmetic average particle diameter of the above particles is preferably 100 nm or less, more preferably 50 nm or less, still more preferably 6 nm to 30 nm, from the viewpoint of the adhesion between the intermediate layer and the photosensitive layer. It is particularly preferable that the thickness is ⁇ 25 nm.
  • the method for measuring the arithmetic average particle diameter of the particles in the present disclosure refers to an arithmetic average obtained by measuring the particle diameter of 200 arbitrary particles with an electron microscope. When the particle shape is not spherical, the maximum diameter is taken as the diameter.
  • the intermediate layer may contain the above particles alone or in combination of two or more.
  • the content of the particles in the intermediate layer is preferably 1% by mass to 90% by mass with respect to the total mass of the intermediate layer from the viewpoint of adhesion between the intermediate layer and the photosensitive layer, and preferably 3% by mass to 70% by mass. % Is more preferable, and 5% by mass to 50% by mass is particularly preferable.
  • the intermediate layer contains a water-soluble resin.
  • water-soluble means that the solubility in 100 g of water having a pH of 7.0 at 22 ° C. is 0.1 g or more.
  • the water-soluble resin has a solubility in 100 g of water having a pH of 7.0 at 22 ° C. of preferably 1 g or more, and more preferably 5 g or more.
  • water-soluble resins include cellulose resins, polyvinyl alcohol resins, polyvinyl pyrrolidone resins, acrylamide resins, (meth) acrylate resins, polyethylene oxide resins, gelatin, vinyl ether resins, polyamide resins, and copolymers thereof. It is done. Among these, a cellulose resin is preferable, and at least one resin selected from the group consisting of hydroxypropylcellulose and hydroxypropylmethylcellulose is more preferable.
  • the intermediate layer may contain one type of water-soluble resin, or may contain two or more types.
  • the content of the water-soluble resin is preferably 10% by mass to 99% by mass and preferably 30% by mass to 97% by mass with respect to the total mass of the intermediate layer from the viewpoint of adhesion between the photosensitive resin layer and the intermediate layer. More preferably, it is more preferably 50% by mass to 95% by mass.
  • the intermediate layer preferably contains a pH-sensitive dye having a maximum absorption wavelength in the wavelength range of 400 nm to 780 nm during color development of 450 nm or more and the maximum absorption wavelength changing depending on pH.
  • “Maximum absorption wavelength changes” means a mode in which a dye in a colored state is decolored, a mode in which a dye in a decolored state is colored, and a color in a colored state changes to a colored state in another hue It may refer to any aspect of the aspects.
  • the pH-sensitive dye is more preferably a latent dye that is decolored by an acid generated from the photoacid generator.
  • Confirmation of the pH-sensitive dye can be performed by the following method.
  • Titrate with a 0.01 mol / L (0.01 N) aqueous sodium hydroxide solution to confirm the color change and the pH when the color change appears.
  • the pH is a value measured at 25 ° C. using a pH meter (model number: HM-31, manufactured by Toa DKK Co., Ltd.).
  • the measurement method of the maximum absorption wavelength in the present disclosure is to measure a transmission spectrum in the range of 400 nm to 780 nm using a spectrophotometer: UV3100 (manufactured by Shimadzu Corporation) at 25 ° C. in an air atmosphere. The wavelength at which the light intensity is minimized (maximum absorption wavelength) is measured.
  • Examples of the dye that can be erased by exposure include leuco compounds, diphenylmethane dyes, oxazine dyes, xanthene dyes, iminonaphthoquinone dyes, azomethine dyes, anthraquinone dyes, and the like.
  • a leuco compound is preferable from the viewpoint of visibility.
  • leuco compounds include leuco compounds such as triarylmethane (for example, triphenylmethane), spiropyran, fluorane, diphenylmethane, rhodamine lactam, indolylphthalide, and leucooramine.
  • a leuco compound (triarylmethane dye) having a triarylmethane skeleton is preferable, and a triphenylmethane dye is more preferable.
  • the leuco compound preferably has a lactone ring, a sultin ring, or a sultone ring, and the lactone ring, sultin ring, or sultone ring is preferably opened or closed, and has a sultone ring.
  • the pigment is preferably a water-soluble compound for the purpose of preventing defects due to pigment deposition.
  • the solubility of the dye in 100 g of water having a pH of 7.0 at 22 ° C. is preferably 1 g or more, and more preferably 5 g or more.
  • middle layer may contain the pigment
  • the content of the pigment in the intermediate layer is preferably 0.01% by mass to 10% by mass, and preferably 0.5% by mass to 5% by mass with respect to the total mass of the intermediate layer from the viewpoint of visibility. More preferably, the content is 1.0% by mass to 3.0% by mass.
  • the intermediate layer preferably contains a surfactant from the viewpoint of thickness uniformity.
  • a surfactant having a fluorine atom any of a surfactant having a fluorine atom, a surfactant having a silicon atom, and a surfactant having neither a fluorine atom nor a silicon atom can be used.
  • a surfactant having a fluorine atom is preferable from the viewpoint of suppressing generation of streaks in the photosensitive resin layer and the intermediate layer and adhesion, and a perfluoroalkyl group and a polyalkyleneoxy are preferable.
  • a surfactant having a group is more preferable.
  • any of anionic, cationic, nonionic (nonionic), or amphoteric can be used, but a preferable surfactant is a nonionic surfactant.
  • the surfactant preferably has a solubility of 1 g or more in 100 g of water at 25 ° C. from the viewpoint of suppressing the precipitation of the surfactant.
  • the intermediate layer may contain one kind of surfactant, or two or more kinds.
  • the content of the surfactant in the intermediate layer is from 0.05% by mass to 2.0% with respect to the total mass of the intermediate layer, from the viewpoint of suppressing the occurrence of streaks in the photosensitive resin layer and the intermediate layer, and adhesion.
  • the mass is preferably 0.1% by mass, more preferably 0.1% by mass to 1.0% by mass, and particularly preferably 0.2% by mass to 0.5% by mass.
  • the intermediate layer can contain a pH adjusting agent.
  • the pH adjuster By including the pH adjuster, the coloring state or decoloring state of the dye in the intermediate layer can be more stably maintained, and the adhesion between the photosensitive resin layer and the intermediate layer is further improved.
  • the average thickness of the intermediate layer is preferably from 0.3 ⁇ m to 10 ⁇ m, more preferably from 0.3 ⁇ m to 5 ⁇ m, more preferably from 0.3 ⁇ m to 0.3 ⁇ m, from the viewpoints of adhesion between the photosensitive resin layer and the intermediate layer and pattern formability. 3 ⁇ m is particularly preferable. Moreover, it is preferable that the average thickness of an intermediate
  • the intermediate layer in the present disclosure can be formed by preparing a composition for forming an intermediate layer containing a component used for forming the intermediate layer and a water-soluble solvent, and applying and drying the composition. It is also possible to prepare a composition by dissolving each component in a solvent in advance and then mixing the resulting solution at a predetermined ratio.
  • the composition prepared as described above may be filtered using a filter having a pore size of 3.0 ⁇ m.
  • the intermediate layer can be formed on the temporary support by applying the intermediate layer-forming composition to the temporary support and drying it.
  • the coating method is not particularly limited, and the coating can be performed by a known method such as slit coating, spin coating, curtain coating, and inkjet coating.
  • composition for forming an intermediate layer contains the component used for formation of an intermediate
  • An intermediate layer can be suitably formed by adding a water-soluble solvent to each component, adjusting the viscosity, and applying and drying.
  • water-soluble solvent known water-soluble solvents can be used, and examples thereof include water, alcohols having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, and preferably contains water. Specific examples of the alcohol having 1 to 6 carbon atoms include methanol, ethanol, n-propanol, isopropanol, n-butanol, n-pentanol, and n-hexanol. Among these, it is preferable to use at least one selected from the group consisting of methanol, ethanol, n-propanol, and isopropanol.
  • the photosensitive transfer material has an adhesive property between the photosensitive resin layer and the intermediate layer, and an adhesive property between the temporary support and the intermediate layer. It is preferable to further have a water-soluble resin layer having a particle content of 5% by mass or less.
  • the water-soluble resin layer may be a layer containing a water-soluble resin and having a particle content of 5% by mass or less, and the particle content is 0% by mass, that is, even if the particle is not included. Good.
  • the water-soluble resin layer preferably has a smaller content of particles than the intermediate layer from the viewpoints of storage stability and adhesion between the photosensitive resin layer and the intermediate layer.
  • the water-soluble resin layer preferably contains the above polar compound.
  • the polar compound in the water-soluble resin layer is intermediated. It is preferable to diffuse into the layer and form an intermediate layer containing the polar compound and particles from the viewpoint of the storage stability of the liquid and the adhesion between the photosensitive resin layer and the intermediate layer.
  • the water-soluble resin layer contains a water-soluble resin.
  • the water-soluble resin used for the water-soluble resin layer can be the same as the water-soluble resin used for the intermediate layer described above, and the preferred embodiment is also the same.
  • the water-soluble resin layer may contain one type of water-soluble resin, or may contain two or more types.
  • the content of the water-soluble resin is preferably 50% by mass to 100% by mass with respect to the total mass of the water-soluble resin layer, from the viewpoint of adhesion between the photosensitive resin layer and the intermediate layer, and preferably 65% by mass to It is more preferably 99% by mass, and particularly preferably 80% by mass to 98% by mass.
  • the water-soluble resin layer may contain particles as long as the content is 5% by mass or less.
  • the particles used for the water-soluble resin layer can be the same as the particles used for the intermediate layer described above, and the preferred embodiments are also the same.
  • the water-soluble resin layer may contain one kind of particles or two or more kinds.
  • the content of the particles is preferably 3% by mass or less and more preferably 1% by mass or less with respect to the total mass of the water-soluble resin layer from the viewpoint of adhesion between the photosensitive resin layer and the intermediate layer. preferable.
  • the water-soluble resin layer may contain a polar compound.
  • the polar compound used for the water-soluble resin layer can be the same as the polar compound used for the intermediate layer described above, and the preferred embodiment is also the same.
  • the water-soluble resin layer may contain one kind of polar compound or two or more kinds.
  • the content of the polar compound is 0.01% by mass with respect to the total mass of the water-soluble resin layer, from the viewpoint of adhesion between the photosensitive resin layer and the intermediate layer and liquid stability in the intermediate layer forming composition. Is preferably 5% by mass, more preferably 0.05% by mass to 2% by mass, further preferably 0.1% by mass to 1.0% by mass, and more preferably 0.2% by mass to It is especially preferable that it is 0.8 mass%.
  • the water-soluble resin layer may contain other compounds other than those described above. There is no restriction
  • the average thickness of the water-soluble resin layer is preferably from 0.3 ⁇ m to 10 ⁇ m, more preferably from 0.3 ⁇ m to 5 ⁇ m, from the viewpoints of adhesion between the intermediate layer and the photosensitive resin layer and pattern formation. Particularly preferred is 3 ⁇ m to 2.5 ⁇ m.
  • the average thickness of the water-soluble resin layer is preferably larger than the average thickness of the intermediate layer from the viewpoints of adhesion between the intermediate layer and the photosensitive resin layer and pattern formation.
  • ⁇ Method for forming water-soluble resin layer There is no restriction
  • the intermediate layer-forming composition For example, some of the particles in the intermediate layer-forming composition move to the water-soluble resin layer, and part of the polar compound contained in the water-soluble resin layer is the intermediate layer-forming composition, that is, Move to the middle layer.
  • the water-soluble resin layer may be a layer that contains particles, and a particle-containing layer that does not contain the polar compound may be formed.
  • the particle-containing layer is a layer containing the polar compound.
  • the water-soluble resin layer forming composition used for forming the water-soluble resin layer may or may not contain particles. It is preferable that no particles are contained. Moreover, it is preferable that the composition for water-soluble resin layer formation used for formation of the said water-soluble resin layer contains a polar compound from a liquid-stable viewpoint of the composition for water-soluble resin layer formation.
  • the intermediate layer forming composition used for forming the intermediate layer may or may not contain the polar compound. From the viewpoint of the liquid stability of the layer forming composition, it is preferable not to contain the polar compound.
  • the water-soluble resin layer forming composition can be prepared in the same manner as the above-described intermediate layer forming composition except that the content of particles is small.
  • a water-soluble resin layer can be suitably formed by adding a water-soluble solvent to each component, adjusting the viscosity, and applying and drying.
  • the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure has a photosensitive resin layer.
  • the photosensitive resin layer in the present disclosure is a positive photosensitive resin layer.
  • the photosensitive resin layer used in the present disclosure includes an acid-decomposable resin, that is, a polymer having a structural unit having an acid group protected by an acid-decomposable group, and photoacid generation from the viewpoint of sensitivity and resolution.
  • a chemically amplified positive photosensitive resin layer containing an agent is preferable.
  • Photo acid generators such as onium salts and oxime sulfonate compounds described below are produced as a catalyst for the deprotection of protected acid groups in the polymer, as the acid generated in response to actinic radiation (active light).
  • the acid generated by the action of one photon contributes to many deprotection reactions, and the quantum yield exceeds 1, for example, a large value such as the power of 10, which is a so-called chemical amplification.
  • a large value such as the power of 10
  • chemical amplification As a result, high sensitivity is obtained.
  • a quinonediazide compound is used as a photoacid generator sensitive to actinic rays, a carboxy group is generated by a sequential photochemical reaction, but its quantum yield is always 1 or less and does not correspond to a chemical amplification type.
  • the photosensitive resin layer includes a polymer X (also simply referred to as “polymer X”) having a structural unit A having an acid group protected by an acid-decomposable group (also simply referred to as “structural unit A”). It is preferable.
  • the photosensitive resin layer may contain another polymer.
  • the polymer X having the structural unit A and other polymers are collectively referred to as “polymer component”.
  • an acid group protected by an acid-decomposable group in the polymer X undergoes a deprotection reaction to be an acid group by the action of an acidic substance such as a catalytic amount of acid generated by exposure.
  • This acid group enables the photosensitive resin layer to be dissolved in the developer.
  • the polymer X is preferably an addition polymerization type resin, and more preferably a polymer having a structural unit derived from (meth) acrylic acid or an ester thereof.
  • structural unit A preferred embodiments of the structural unit A will be described.
  • the polymer component preferably includes a polymer X having a structural unit A having an acid group protected with an acid-decomposable group.
  • the photosensitive resin layer contains the polymer X having the structural unit A, it can be an extremely sensitive chemical amplification positive type photosensitive resin layer.
  • Known acid groups and acid-decomposable groups in the present disclosure can be used, and are not particularly limited. Specific examples of the acid group preferably include a carboxy group and a phenolic hydroxyl group.
  • the acid-decomposable group is a group that is relatively easily decomposed by an acid (for example, an acetal-type protecting group such as 1-alkoxyalkyl group, tetrahydropyranyl group, or tetrahydrofuranyl group) or an acid-decomposable group.
  • an acid for example, an acetal-type protecting group such as 1-alkoxyalkyl group, tetrahydropyranyl group, or tetrahydrofuranyl group
  • difficult groups for example, tertiary alkyl groups such as tert-butyl group and tertiary alkyloxycarbonyl groups such as tert-butyloxycarbonyl group (carbonate-type protecting group).
  • the acid-decomposable group is preferably a group having a structure protected in the form of an acetal.
  • the acid-decomposable group is preferably an acid-decomposable group having a molecular weight of 300 or less from the viewpoint of suppressing variations in the line width of the conductive wiring when applied to the formation of a conductive pattern.
  • the polymer X contained in the photosensitive resin layer may be one type or two or more types.
  • the structural unit A having an acid group protected with an acid-decomposable group is preferably a structural unit represented by the following formula A1, formula A2 or formula A3 from the viewpoint of sensitivity and resolution.
  • R 11 and R 12 each independently represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group, at least one of R 11 and R 12 is an alkyl group or an aryl group, and R 13 is an alkyl group or an aryl group.
  • R 11 or R 12 and R 13 may be linked to form a cyclic ether
  • R 14 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group
  • X 1 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group.
  • R 15 represents a substituent
  • n represents an integer of 0 to 4.
  • R 21 and R 22 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group, at least one of R 21 and R 22 is an alkyl group or an aryl group, and R 23 is an alkyl group or an aryl group.
  • R 21 or R 22 and R 23 may be linked to form a cyclic ether, and each R 24 independently represents a hydroxy group, a halogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, an alkenyl group, or an aryl group.
  • R 31 and R 32 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group, at least one of R 31 and R 32 is an alkyl group or an aryl group, and R 33 is an alkyl group or an aryl group.
  • R 31 or R 32 and R 33 may be linked to form a cyclic ether
  • R 34 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group
  • X 0 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group.
  • R 31 or R 32 when R 31 or R 32 is an alkyl group, an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms is preferable. When R 31 or R 32 is an aryl group, a phenyl group is preferable. R 31 and R 32 are each preferably a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms.
  • R 33 represents an alkyl group or an aryl group, preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, and more preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms. Further, the alkyl group and aryl group in R 31 to R 33 may have a substituent.
  • R 31 or R 32 and R 33 may be linked to form a cyclic ether, and R 31 or R 32 and R 33 are preferably linked to form a cyclic ether.
  • the number of ring members of the cyclic ether is not particularly limited, but is preferably 5 or 6, and more preferably 5.
  • X 0 represents a single bond or an arylene group, and a single bond is preferable.
  • the arylene group may have a substituent.
  • the structural unit A represented by the formula A3 is a structural unit having a carboxy group protected with an acetal acid-decomposable group. When the polymer X contains the structural unit A represented by the formula A3, the sensitivity at the time of pattern formation is excellent, and the resolution is more excellent.
  • R 34 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, and is preferably a hydrogen atom from the viewpoint that the glass transition temperature (Tg) of the polymer X can be further lowered. More specifically, the structural unit in which R 34 in Formula A3 is a hydrogen atom is preferably 20% by mass or more based on the total amount of the structural unit A contained in the polymer X.
  • the content (content ratio: mass ratio) of the structural unit in which R 34 in formula A3 is a hydrogen atom in the structural unit A is calculated by a conventional method from 13 C-nuclear magnetic resonance spectrum (NMR) measurement. It can be confirmed by the intensity ratio of the peak intensity.
  • the acid-decomposable group is preferably a group having a cyclic structure, more preferably a tetrahydrofuran ring or a group having a tetrahydropyran ring structure, and more preferably a tetrahydrofuran ring structure from the viewpoint of sensitivity. It is more preferably a group, and particularly preferably a tetrahydrofuranyl group.
  • the structural unit A contained in the polymer X may be one type or two or more types.
  • the content of the structural unit A in the polymer X is preferably 10% by mass to 70% by mass, more preferably 15% by mass to 50% by mass, with respect to the total mass of the polymer component. More preferably, it is 40% by mass. If it is within the above range, the resolution is further improved.
  • the content of the structural unit A represents the total content of the two or more structural units A.
  • the content (content ratio: mass ratio) of the structural unit A in the polymer component can be confirmed by the intensity ratio of the peak intensity calculated by a conventional method from 13 C-NMR measurement.
  • the polymer X may include a structural unit B having an acid group (also simply referred to as “structural unit B”).
  • the structural unit B is a structural unit having an acid group that is not protected by an acid-decomposable group, that is, an acid group that does not have a protective group.
  • the acid group in this specification means a proton dissociable group having a pKa of 12 or less.
  • the pKa of the acid group is preferably 10 or less, more preferably 6 or less, from the viewpoint of improving sensitivity.
  • the pKa of the acid group is preferably ⁇ 5 or more.
  • the acid group include a carboxy group, a sulfonamide group, a phosphonic acid group, a sulfo group, a phenolic hydroxyl group, and a sulfonylimide group. Among these, a carboxy group or a phenolic hydroxyl group is preferable, and a carboxy group is more preferable.
  • the structural unit B contained in the polymer X may be only one type or two or more types.
  • the content of the structural unit B in the polymer X is preferably 0.01% by mass to 20% by mass and more preferably 0.01% by mass to 10% by mass with respect to the total mass of the polymer component. More preferably, the content is 0.1 mass% to 5 mass%. If it is in the above range, the resolution will be better.
  • the content of the structural unit B represents the total content of the two or more structural units B.
  • the content (content ratio: mass ratio) of the structural unit B in the polymer X can be confirmed by the intensity ratio of the peak intensity calculated by a conventional method from 13 C-NMR measurement.
  • structural unit C also simply referred to as “structural unit C”
  • structural unit C other than the structural unit A and the structural unit B described above. It is preferable to contain.
  • styrenes (meth) acrylic acid alkyl ester, (meth) acrylic acid cyclic alkyl ester, (meth) acrylic acid aryl ester, unsaturated dicarboxylic acid diester , Bicyclounsaturated compounds, maleimide compounds, unsaturated aromatic compounds, conjugated diene compounds, unsaturated monocarboxylic acids, unsaturated dicarboxylic acids, unsaturated dicarboxylic acid anhydrides, groups having an aliphatic cyclic skeleton, other Mention may be made of saturated compounds.
  • the polymer X can be adjusted by adjusting at least one of the kind and the content using the structural unit C.
  • the Tg, acid value, and hydrophilicity / hydrophobicity of the polymer X can be easily adjusted.
  • the polymer X may contain only 1 type of structural unit C, or may contain 2 or more types.
  • the structural unit C is styrene, ⁇ -methylstyrene, acetoxystyrene, methoxystyrene, ethoxystyrene, chlorostyrene, methyl vinylbenzoate, ethyl vinylbenzoate, methyl (meth) acrylate, (meth) acrylic.
  • the structural unit C preferably includes a structural unit having a basic group from the viewpoint of resolution.
  • the basic group include groups having a nitrogen atom such as an aliphatic amino group, an aromatic amino group, or a nitrogen-containing heteroaromatic ring group, and an aliphatic amino group is preferable.
  • the aliphatic amino group may be a primary amino group, a secondary amino group, or a tertiary amino group, but from the viewpoint of resolution, a secondary amino group or Tertiary amino groups are preferred.
  • the monomer that forms the structural unit having a basic group include 1,2,2,6,6-pentamethyl-4-piperidyl methacrylate, 2- (dimethylamino) ethyl methacrylate, acrylic acid 2 , 2,6,6-Tetramethyl-4-piperidyl, 2,2,6,6-tetramethyl-4-piperidyl methacrylate, 2,2,6,6-tetramethyl-4-piperidyl acrylate, methacrylic acid 2- (diethylamino) ethyl, 2- (dimethylamino) ethyl acrylate, 2- (diethylamino) ethyl acrylate, N- (3-dimethylamino) propyl methacrylate, N- (3-dimethylamino) propyl acrylate, N- (3-diethylamino) propyl methacrylate, N- (3-diethylamino) propyl acrylate, 2-methacrylic acid 2- Diis
  • a structural unit having an aromatic ring or a structural unit having an aliphatic cyclic skeleton is preferable from the viewpoint of improving the electrical characteristics of the obtained transfer material.
  • monomers that form these structural units include styrene, ⁇ -methylstyrene, dicyclopentanyl (meth) acrylate, cyclopentyl (meth) acrylate, cyclohexyl (meth) acrylate, isobornyl (meth) acrylate, and Examples thereof include benzyl (meth) acrylate, and cyclohexyl (meth) acrylate is preferably used.
  • (meth) acrylic acid alkyl ester is preferable from the viewpoint of adhesion.
  • (meth) acrylic acid alkyl ester having an alkyl group having 4 to 12 carbon atoms is more preferable from the viewpoint of adhesion.
  • Specific examples include methyl (meth) acrylate, ethyl (meth) acrylate, propyl (meth) acrylate, n-butyl (meth) acrylate, and 2-ethylhexyl (meth) acrylate.
  • the content of the structural unit C represents the total content of the two or more structural units C.
  • the preferable example of the polymer X in this indication is given, this indication is not limited to the following illustrations.
  • the ratio of the structural unit and the weight average molecular weight in the following exemplary compounds are appropriately selected in order to obtain preferable physical properties.
  • the glass transition temperature (Tg) of the polymer X in the present disclosure is preferably 90 ° C. or lower, more preferably 20 ° C. or higher and 60 ° C. or lower, and 30 ° C. or higher and 50 ° C. or lower. More preferably it is.
  • the FOX formula can be calculated from the Tg of the homopolymer of each constituent unit of the target polymer and the mass ratio of each constituent unit. Using the guideline, it is possible to control the Tg of the target polymer.
  • the FOX formula will be described below. Tg of the homopolymer of the first structural unit contained in the polymer is Tg1, the mass fraction in the copolymer of the first structural unit is W1, and the Tg of the homopolymer of the second structural unit is Tg2.
  • the Tg0 (K) of the copolymer containing the first structural unit and the second structural unit is in accordance with the following formula: It is possible to estimate.
  • FOX formula: 1 / Tg0 (W1 / Tg1) + (W2 / Tg2)
  • a copolymer having a desired Tg can be obtained by adjusting the type and mass fraction of each constituent unit contained in the copolymer using the FOX formula described above. It is also possible to adjust the Tg of the polymer by adjusting the weight average molecular weight of the polymer.
  • the acid value of the polymer X is preferably from 0 mgKOH / g to 50 mgKOH / g, more preferably from 0 mgKOH / g to 20 mgKOH / g, and more preferably from 0 mgKOH / g to 10 mgKOH / g from the viewpoint of resolution. More preferably, it is g or less.
  • the acid value of the polymer X is preferably 10 mgKOH / g or less, more preferably 3 mgKOH / g or less, from the viewpoint of storage stability and adhesion between the photosensitive resin layer and the intermediate layer. preferable.
  • the acid value of the polymer in the present disclosure represents the mass of potassium hydroxide required to neutralize the acidic component per gram of polymer.
  • the solution was neutralized and titrated with a 0.1 mol / L aqueous sodium hydroxide solution at 25 ° C.
  • the acid value is calculated by the following formula using the inflection point of the titration pH curve as the titration end point.
  • A 56.11 ⁇ Vs ⁇ 0.1 ⁇ f / w
  • Vs Amount of 0.1 mol / L sodium hydroxide aqueous solution required for titration (mL)
  • f Potency of 0.1 mol / L sodium hydroxide aqueous solution
  • the molecular weight of the polymer X is preferably 60,000 or less in terms of polystyrene-equivalent weight average molecular weight.
  • the weight average molecular weight of the polymer X is preferably 2,000 to 60,000, and more preferably 3,000 to 50,000.
  • the ratio (dispersion degree) between the number average molecular weight and the weight average molecular weight of the polymer X is preferably 1.0 to 5.0, more preferably 1.05 to 3.5.
  • the weight average molecular weight of the polymer in the present disclosure can be measured by GPC (gel permeation chromatography), and as a measuring device, various commercially available devices can be used. Known measurement techniques can be used.
  • GPC gel permeation chromatography
  • HLC registered trademark
  • -8220GPC manufactured by Tosoh Corp.
  • TSKgel registered trademark
  • Super HZM-M 4 .6 mm ID ⁇ 15 cm, manufactured by Tosoh Corp.
  • Super HZ4000 4 mm ID ⁇ 15 cm, manufactured by Tosoh Corp.
  • Super HZ3000 4.6 mm ID ⁇ 15 cm, manufactured by Tosoh Corp.
  • Super HZ2000 4.6 mm ID
  • THF tetrahydrofuran
  • the measurement conditions are as follows: the sample concentration is 0.2% by mass, the flow rate is 0.35 ml / min, the sample injection amount is 10 ⁇ L, the measurement temperature is 40 ° C., and a differential refractive index (RI) detector is used. be able to.
  • the calibration curve is “Standard sample TSK standard, polystyrene” manufactured by Tosoh Corporation: “F-40”, “F-20”, “F-4”, “F-1”, “A-5000”, “ It can be produced using any of the seven samples of “A-2500” and “A-1000”.
  • the production method (synthetic method) of the polymer X is not particularly limited.
  • the photosensitive resin layer in the present disclosure preferably contains the polymer component in a proportion of 50% by mass to 99.9% by mass with respect to the total mass of the photosensitive resin layer from the viewpoint of adhesion, and is 70% by mass. More preferably, it is contained in a proportion of -98% by mass.
  • the photosensitive resin layer preferably contains the polymer X in a proportion of 50% by mass to 99.9% by mass with respect to the total mass of the photosensitive resin layer, and is preferably 70% by mass to 98%. More preferably, it is contained in a proportion by mass.
  • the photosensitive resin layer does not contain a constituent unit having an acid group protected with an acid-decomposable group as long as the polymer component does not impair the effect of the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure in addition to the polymer X. It may further contain a polymer (also referred to as “other polymer”). Unless otherwise specified, the polymer component in the present disclosure means a polymer including other polymers added in addition to the polymer X. In addition, even if it is a high molecular compound, the compound applicable to the crosslinking agent, a dispersing agent, and surfactant mentioned later shall not be contained in a polymer component.
  • the content of the other polymer is preferably 50% by mass or less, more preferably 30% by mass or less in the total polymer component, More preferably, it is at most mass%.
  • the photosensitive resin layer may contain only one type of other polymer, or may contain two or more types.
  • polyhydroxystyrene can be used, which are commercially available, such as SMA 1000P, SMA 2000P, SMA 3000P, SMA 1440F, SMA 17352P, SMA 2625P, and SMA 3840F (above, manufactured by Sartomer).
  • ARUFON UC-3000, ARUFON UC-3510, ARUFON UC-3900, ARUFON UC-3910, ARUFON UC-3920, and ARUFON UC-3080 (above, manufactured by Toagosei Co., Ltd.), Joncryl 690, Joncryl 6 Joncryl 67, Joncryl 586 (manufactured by BASF) or the like can also be used.
  • the photosensitive resin layer contains a photoacid generator.
  • the photoacid generator used in the present disclosure is a compound capable of generating an acid by irradiating active rays such as ultraviolet rays, far ultraviolet rays, X-rays, and electron beams.
  • the photoacid generator used in the present disclosure is preferably a compound that generates an acid in response to an actinic ray having a wavelength of 300 nm or more, preferably 300 nm to 450 nm, but its chemical structure is not limited.
  • a photoacid generator that is not directly sensitive to an actinic ray having a wavelength of 300 nm or more can also be used as a sensitizer if it is a compound that reacts with an actinic ray having a wavelength of 300 nm or more and generates an acid when used in combination with a sensitizer. It can be preferably used in combination.
  • the photoacid generator used in the present disclosure is preferably a photoacid generator that generates an acid having a pKa of 4 or less, more preferably a photoacid generator that generates an acid having a pKa of 3 or less, and a pKa of 2 or less.
  • a photoacid generator that generates an acid is particularly preferable.
  • the lower limit value of pKa is not particularly defined, but is preferably ⁇ 10.0 or more, for example.
  • Examples of the photoacid generator include an ionic photoacid generator and a nonionic photoacid generator.
  • Examples of the ionic photoacid generator include onium salt compounds such as diaryliodonium salts and triarylsulfonium salts, quaternary ammonium salts, and the like. Of these, onium salt compounds are preferable, and triarylsulfonium salts and diaryliodonium salts are particularly preferable.
  • ionic photoacid generator ionic photoacid generators described in paragraphs 0114 to 0133 of JP 2014-85643 A can also be preferably used.
  • nonionic photoacid generators examples include trichloromethyl-s-triazines, diazomethane compounds, imidosulfonate compounds, and oxime sulfonate compounds.
  • the photoacid generator is preferably an oxime sulfonate compound from the viewpoints of sensitivity, resolution, and adhesion.
  • Specific examples of the trichloromethyl-s-triazines, diazomethane compounds, and imide sulfonate compounds include the compounds described in paragraphs 0083 to 0088 of JP2011-221494A.
  • oxime sulfonate compound those described in paragraphs 0084 to 0088 of International Publication No. 2018/179640 can be suitably used.
  • the photoacid generator preferably includes at least one compound selected from the group consisting of an onium salt compound and an oxime sulfonate compound, and more preferably includes an oxime sulfonate compound from the viewpoint of sensitivity and resolution. .
  • the photoacid generator of the following structures is mentioned, for example.
  • the photosensitive resin layer may contain 1 type of photo-acid generators individually, and may contain 2 or more types.
  • the content of the photoacid generator in the photosensitive resin layer is preferably 0.1% by mass to 10% by mass with respect to the total mass of the photosensitive resin layer from the viewpoint of sensitivity and resolution. More preferably, the content is 5% by mass to 5% by mass.
  • the photosensitive resin layer in the present disclosure may contain other additives as necessary in addition to the polymer X, the photoacid generator, and the solvent.
  • additives known ones can be used, and examples thereof include a plasticizer, a sensitizer, a heterocyclic compound, an alkoxysilane compound, a basic compound, a rust inhibitor, and a surfactant.
  • plasticizer, sensitizer, heterocyclic compound, and alkoxysilane compound include those described in paragraphs 0097 to 0119 of WO2018 / 179640.
  • the photosensitive resin layer in the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure may contain a solvent.
  • the solvent may remain.
  • the content of the solvent in the photosensitive resin layer is preferably 5% by mass or less, more preferably 2% by mass or less, and more preferably 1% by mass or less with respect to the total mass of the photosensitive resin layer. Further preferred.
  • the photosensitive resin layer further contains a basic compound.
  • the basic compound can be arbitrarily selected from basic compounds used in chemically amplified resists. Examples thereof include aliphatic amines, aromatic amines, heterocyclic amines, quaternary ammonium hydroxides, and quaternary ammonium salts of carboxylic acids. Specific examples thereof include compounds described in JP-A-2011-212494, paragraphs 0204 to 0207, the contents of which are incorporated herein.
  • As the basic compound N-cyclohexyl-N ′-[2- (4-morpholinyl) ethyl] thiourea (CMTU) can be preferably used. Moreover, as a commercial item of CMTU, the thing by Toyo Kasei Kogyo Co., Ltd. is mentioned.
  • a benzotriazole compound is preferable from the viewpoint of linearity of the conductive wiring when applied to the formation of a conductive pattern.
  • the benzotriazole compound is not limited as long as it is a compound having a benzotriazole skeleton, and a known benzotriazole compound can be used.
  • Examples of the benzotriazole compound include 1,2,3-benzotriazole, 1- [N, N-bis (2-ethylhexyl) aminomethyl] benzotriazole, 5-carboxybenzotriazole, 1- (hydroxymethyl) -1H.
  • -Benzotriazole 1-acetyl-1H-benzotriazole, 1-aminobenzotriazole, 9- (1H-benzotriazol-1-ylmethyl) -9H-carbazole, 1-chloro-1H-benzotriazole, 1- (2- Pyridinyl) benzotriazole, 1-hydroxybenzotriazole, 1-methylbenzotriazole, 1-ethylbenzotriazole, 1- (1′-hydroxyethyl) benzotriazole, 1- (2′-hydroxyethyl) benzotriazole, 1-propyl Benzoto Azole, 1- (1′-hydroxypropyl) benzotriazole, 1- (2′-hydroxypropyl) benzotriazole, 1- (3′-hydroxypropyl) benzotriazole, 4-hydroxy-1H-benzotriazole, 5-methyl -1H-benzotriazole, methylbenzotriazole-5-carboxylate, ethylbenzotriazole-5-carboxylate,
  • the photosensitive resin layer may contain one type of basic compound or two or more types.
  • the content of the basic compound is preferably 0.001% by mass to 5% by mass and more preferably 0.005% by mass to 3% by mass with respect to the total mass of the photosensitive resin layer.
  • the photosensitive resin layer contains a surfactant from the viewpoint of thickness uniformity.
  • the surfactant include anionic, cationic, nonionic (nonionic), and amphoteric surfactants.
  • a preferred surfactant is a nonionic surfactant.
  • nonionic surfactants include polyoxyethylene higher alkyl ethers, polyoxyethylene higher alkyl phenyl ethers, higher fatty acid diesters of polyoxyethylene glycol, silicone-based and fluorine-based surfactants. .
  • the surfactant for example, the surfactants described in paragraphs 0120 to 0125 of WO2018 / 179640 can be used. Further, as a commercially available surfactant, for example, Megafac F-552 or F-554 (above, manufactured by DIC Corporation) can be used. In addition, surfactants described in Japanese Patent No. 4502784, paragraph 0017 and Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-237362, paragraphs 0060 to 0071 can also be used.
  • the photosensitive resin layer may contain one type of surfactant, or two or more types.
  • the content of the surfactant is preferably 0.001% by mass to 10% by mass and more preferably 0.01% by mass to 3% by mass with respect to the total mass of the photosensitive resin layer.
  • metal oxide particles an antioxidant, a dispersant, an acid proliferation agent, a development accelerator, a conductive fiber, a colorant, a thermal radical polymerization initiator
  • known additives such as a thermal acid generator, an ultraviolet absorber, a thickener, a crosslinking agent, and an organic or inorganic suspending agent can be further added. Preferred embodiments of these components are described in paragraphs 0165 to 0184 of JP-A-2014-85643, respectively, and the contents of this publication are incorporated herein.
  • the average thickness of the photosensitive resin layer is preferably 0.5 ⁇ m to 20 ⁇ m.
  • the average thickness of the photosensitive resin layer is more preferably 0.8 ⁇ m to 15 ⁇ m, and particularly preferably 1.0 ⁇ m to 10 ⁇ m.
  • the average thickness of each layer is measured by observing a cross section in a direction perpendicular to the surface direction of the transfer material with a scanning electron microscope (SEM). The average thickness is the average value of 10 or more thicknesses measured.
  • the photosensitive resin layer in the present disclosure can be formed by preparing a photosensitive resin composition containing a component used for forming the photosensitive resin layer and a solvent, and applying and drying the composition. It is also possible to prepare a composition by preparing each component in a solution previously dissolved in a solvent and then mixing the resulting solution at a predetermined ratio. The composition prepared as described above may be filtered using, for example, a filter having a pore size of 0.2 ⁇ m to 30 ⁇ m.
  • the photosensitive resin layer in this indication can be formed by apply
  • the coating method is not particularly limited, and the coating can be performed by a known method such as slit coating, spin coating, curtain coating, and inkjet coating. Moreover, after forming the below-mentioned intermediate
  • the photosensitive resin composition contains the component used for formation of the photosensitive resin layer, and a solvent.
  • the photosensitive resin layer can be suitably formed by adding a solvent to each component, adjusting the viscosity, and applying and drying.
  • solvent known solvents can be used, and for example, the solvents described in paragraphs 0092 to 0094 of International Publication No. 2018/179640 can be used.
  • a solvent having a vapor pressure of 1 kPa to 16 kPa at 20 ° C. described in paragraph 0014 of JP-A-2018-177889 can be preferably used.
  • the solvent which can be used for this indication may be used individually by 1 type, and may use 2 types together.
  • the content of the solvent in applying the photosensitive resin composition is preferably 50 parts by mass to 1,900 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the total solid content in the photosensitive resin composition, and 100 parts by mass. More preferably, it is 900 parts by mass.
  • the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure has a temporary support.
  • the temporary support is a support that supports the photosensitive resin layer and can be peeled off.
  • the temporary support used in the present disclosure preferably has light transmittance from the viewpoint that the photosensitive resin layer can be exposed through the temporary support when the photosensitive resin layer is subjected to pattern exposure. Having light transmittance means that the transmittance of the main wavelength of light used for pattern exposure is 50% or more, and the transmittance of the main wavelength of light used for pattern exposure is a viewpoint of improving exposure sensitivity. Therefore, 60% or more is preferable, and 70% or more is more preferable.
  • Examples of the method for measuring the transmittance include a method of measuring using MCPD Series manufactured by Otsuka Electronics Co., Ltd.
  • Examples of the temporary support include a glass substrate, a resin film, paper, and the like, and a resin film is particularly preferable from the viewpoints of strength and flexibility.
  • Examples of the resin film include a polyethylene terephthalate film, a cellulose triacetate film, a polystyrene film, and a polycarbonate film. Among these, a biaxially stretched polyethylene terephthalate film is particularly preferable.
  • the average thickness of the temporary support is not particularly limited, but is preferably in the range of 5 ⁇ m to 200 ⁇ m, and more preferably in the range of 10 ⁇ m to 150 ⁇ m in terms of ease of handling and versatility.
  • the thickness of the temporary support depends on the material in terms of strength as a support, flexibility required for bonding with a circuit wiring forming substrate, light transmittance required in the first exposure process, etc. Just choose.
  • a preferred embodiment of the temporary support is described, for example, in paragraphs 0017 to 0018 of JP 2014-85643 A, and the contents of this publication are incorporated in the present disclosure.
  • the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure preferably has a cover film on the surface of the photosensitive transfer material opposite to the surface on which the temporary support is provided.
  • the cover film include a resin film and paper.
  • a resin film is particularly preferable from the viewpoint of strength and flexibility.
  • the resin film include a polyethylene film, a polypropylene film, a polyethylene terephthalate film, a cellulose triacetate film, a polystyrene film, and a polycarbonate film. Among these, a polyethylene film, a polypropylene film, and a polyethylene terephthalate film are preferable.
  • the average thickness of the cover film is not particularly limited, and preferably 1 ⁇ m to 2 mm, for example.
  • the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure may have layers other than those described above (hereinafter also referred to as “other layers”).
  • other layers include a contrast enhancement layer and a thermoplastic resin layer.
  • paragraph 0134 of WO2018 / 179640 for the preferred embodiment of the thermoplastic resin layer, paragraphs 0189 to 0193 of JP 2014-85643 A, and further preferred layers. Aspects are described in paragraphs 0194 to 0196 of JP 2014-85643 A, and the contents of this publication are incorporated in this specification.
  • a photosensitive transfer material 100 shown in FIG. 1 includes a temporary support 12, a transfer layer 14 formed by stacking a photosensitive resin layer 14-1 and an intermediate layer 14-2, and a cover film 16 stacked in this order. Yes.
  • transfer layer when “transfer layer” is described in the present disclosure, it means both the laminated photosensitive resin layer and the intermediate layer.
  • the method for producing the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure is not particularly limited, and a known production method such as a known method for forming each layer can be used.
  • a method for producing a photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure an intermediate layer forming composition is applied on a temporary support and dried to form an intermediate layer, and a photosensitive resin composition is applied to the intermediate layer.
  • a method including a step of applying and drying to form a photosensitive resin layer is preferable.
  • the manufacturing method of the photosensitive transfer material which concerns on this indication further includes the process of providing a cover film on the said photosensitive resin layer after the process of forming the said photosensitive resin layer.
  • the method for producing a resin pattern according to the present disclosure is not particularly limited as long as it is a method for producing a resin pattern using the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure, but the temporary support in the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure.
  • a step of bringing the outermost layer on the side having the photosensitive resin layer into contact with the substrate and bonding (hereinafter, also referred to as “bonding step”), and a step of pattern exposure of the photosensitive resin layer (hereinafter referred to as “bonding step”).
  • an “exposure process”) and a process of developing the exposed photosensitive resin layer to form a pattern hereinafter also referred to as “development process” in this order. Is preferred.
  • the substrate in the method for producing a resin pattern according to the present disclosure is preferably a substrate having a conductive layer, and more preferably a substrate having a conductive layer on the surface.
  • the circuit wiring manufacturing method according to the present disclosure may be any method that uses the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure, but the photosensitive resin layer according to the present disclosure has a photosensitive resin layer on the temporary support.
  • a step of bonding the outermost layer on the side having the conductive layer to a substrate having a conductive layer hereinafter sometimes referred to as a “bonding step”
  • pattern exposure of the photosensitive resin layer in the bonded photosensitive transfer material hereinafter sometimes referred to as a “bonding step”.
  • a process, a process of developing at least the photosensitive resin layer subjected to pattern exposure to form a resin pattern, and a process of etching the substrate in a region where the resin pattern is not disposed (hereinafter referred to as “etching process”). May be included in this order.
  • the substrate in the circuit wiring manufacturing method according to the present disclosure is preferably a substrate having the conductive layer on a surface thereof.
  • the manufacturing method of the circuit wiring which concerns on this indication also has the aspect which repeats several times by making the 4 processes of the said bonding process, the said exposure process, the said image development process, and the said etching process into 1 set.
  • the circuit wiring manufacturing method according to the present disclosure includes four steps of the bonding step, the exposure step, the development step, and the etching step. After that, an embodiment in which the exposure process is performed on the resin pattern, and the development process and the etching process are further performed is also preferable.
  • the photosensitive resin layer is a positive type in which a portion not irradiated with actinic rays is left as an image.
  • the positive type photosensitive resin layer by irradiating actinic rays, for example, using a photosensitizer that generates acid upon irradiation with actinic rays, the solubility of the exposed portions is increased.
  • the substrate can be reused (reworked) by overall exposure or the like.
  • International Publication No. 2006/190405 can be referred to, the contents of which are incorporated herein.
  • the resin pattern manufacturing method according to the present disclosure or the circuit wiring manufacturing method according to the present disclosure includes an outermost layer on the side having the photosensitive resin layer with respect to the temporary support in the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure. It is preferable to include a step of bonding to a substrate, preferably a substrate having a conductive layer (bonding step). In the bonding step, the conductive layer is preferably pressure-bonded so that the outermost layer on the side having the photosensitive resin layer is in contact with the temporary support in the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure. .
  • the patterned photosensitive resin layer after exposure and development can be suitably used as an etching resist when the conductive layer is etched.
  • a well-known transfer method and a lamination method can be used.
  • the bonding of the photosensitive transfer material to the substrate is preferably performed by stacking the outermost layer of the photosensitive transfer material on the side having the photosensitive resin layer on the substrate, and applying pressure and heating with a roll or the like.
  • known laminators such as a laminator, a vacuum laminator, and an auto-cut laminator that can further increase productivity can be used.
  • the method for manufacturing circuit wiring according to the present disclosure is preferably performed by a roll-to-roll method.
  • substrate is a resin film.
  • the roll-to-roll method uses a substrate that can be wound and unwound as a substrate, and unwinds the substrate or a structure including the substrate before any step included in the circuit wiring manufacturing method ( And a step of winding a structure including a base material or a substrate (also referred to as a “winding step”) after any of the steps, and at least one of the steps (Preferably, all processes or all processes other than the heating process) are performed while conveying a structure including a base material or a substrate.
  • the unwinding method in the unwinding step and the winding method in the unwinding step are not particularly limited, and any known method may be used in the manufacturing method applying the roll-to-roll method.
  • the substrate used in the present disclosure is preferably a substrate having a conductive layer, and more preferably a substrate having a conductive layer on the surface of a base material.
  • substrate has a conductive layer on base materials, such as glass, a silicon
  • the substrate is preferably transparent.
  • the refractive index of the substrate is preferably 1.50 to 1.52.
  • the base material may be composed of a light-transmitting base material such as a glass base material, and tempered glass represented by gorilla glass manufactured by Corning Inc. can be used.
  • materials used in JP 2010-86684 A, JP 2010-152809 A, and JP 2010-257492 A can be preferably used.
  • a substrate having a small optical distortion In the case of using a resin film substrate as the substrate, it is more preferable to use a substrate having a small optical distortion and a substrate having a high transparency.
  • the material include polyethylene terephthalate (PET), polyethylene naphthalate, polycarbonate, triacetyl cellulose, and cycloolefin polymer.
  • a film base material is preferable from the viewpoint of manufacturing by a roll-to-roll method.
  • the substrate is particularly preferably a sheet-shaped resin composition.
  • Examples of the conductive layer formed on the substrate include any conductive layer used for general circuit wiring or touch panel wiring.
  • the conductive layer is at least one layer selected from the group consisting of a metal layer, a conductive metal oxide layer, a graphene layer, a carbon nanotube layer, and a conductive polymer layer, from the viewpoints of conductivity and fine wire formability. It is preferably mentioned, more preferably a metal layer, and particularly preferably a copper layer or a silver layer. Moreover, you may have 1 layer of conductive layers on a base material, or you may have 2 or more layers. In the case of two or more layers, it is preferable to have conductive layers of different materials. Examples of the material for the conductive layer include metals and conductive metal oxides.
  • Examples of the metal include Al, Zn, Cu, Fe, Ni, Cr, Mo, Ag, and Au.
  • Examples of the conductive metal oxide include ITO (Indium Tin Oxide), IZO (Indium Zinc Oxide), and SiO 2 . “Conductivity” in the present disclosure means that the volume resistivity is less than 1 ⁇ 10 6 ⁇ cm, and the volume resistivity is preferably less than 1 ⁇ 10 4 ⁇ cm.
  • the circuit wiring manufacturing method when a substrate having a plurality of conductive layers on a base material is used, at least one of the plurality of conductive layers preferably includes a conductive metal oxide.
  • the conductive layer is preferably an electrode pattern corresponding to a sensor of a visual recognition part used in a capacitive touch panel or a wiring of a peripheral extraction part.
  • the manufacturing method of the resin pattern which concerns on this indication, or the manufacturing method of the circuit wiring which concerns on this indication includes the process (exposure process) of carrying out pattern exposure of the said photosensitive resin layer after the said bonding process.
  • the detailed arrangement and specific size of the pattern are not particularly limited. Since it is desired to improve the display quality of a display device (for example, a touch panel) including an input device having a circuit wiring manufactured by the circuit wiring manufacturing method according to the present disclosure and to reduce the area occupied by the extraction wiring as much as possible, At least a part (particularly the electrode pattern of the touch panel and the part of the extraction wiring) is preferably a fine line of 100 ⁇ m or less, and more preferably a fine line of 70 ⁇ m or less.
  • any light source capable of irradiating light in a wavelength region capable of exposing the photosensitive resin layer (for example, 365 nm, 405 nm, etc.) can be appropriately selected and used.
  • a wavelength region capable of exposing the photosensitive resin layer for example, 365 nm, 405 nm, etc.
  • an ultrahigh pressure mercury lamp, a high pressure mercury lamp, a metal halide lamp, LED (LightLEDEmitting Diode) and the like can be mentioned.
  • the exposure dose is preferably 5 mJ / cm 2 to 200 mJ / cm 2 , and more preferably 10 mJ / cm 2 to 100 mJ / cm 2 .
  • pattern exposure may be performed after the temporary support is peeled off from the photosensitive resin layer. Before the temporary support is peeled off, pattern exposure is performed through the temporary support, and then the temporary support is peeled off. May be. In order to prevent mask contamination due to contact between the photosensitive resin layer and the mask and to avoid the influence on the exposure caused by foreign matter attached to the mask, it is preferable to perform pattern exposure without peeling off the temporary support.
  • the pattern exposure may be exposure through a mask or direct exposure using a laser or the like.
  • the method of manufacturing a resin pattern according to the present disclosure or the method of manufacturing a circuit wiring according to the present disclosure includes a step of developing the exposed photosensitive resin layer to form a resin pattern after the exposing step (developing step). ) Is preferably included.
  • the photosensitive transfer material has an intermediate layer
  • the exposed intermediate layer is also removed together with the exposed photosensitive resin layer in the development step.
  • the intermediate layer in the unexposed area may also be removed in a form of being dissolved or dispersed in the developer.
  • the developer is not particularly limited as long as the non-image portion of the photosensitive resin layer can be removed.
  • a known developer such as the developer described in JP-A No. 5-72724 can be used.
  • the developing solution is preferably a developing solution in which the exposed portion (positive type) of the photosensitive resin layer has a dissolution type developing behavior.
  • an alkaline aqueous developer containing a compound having a pKa of 7 to 13 at a concentration of 0.05 mol / L (liter) to 5 mol / L is preferable.
  • the developer may further contain a water-soluble organic solvent, a surfactant and the like. Examples of the developer suitably used in the present disclosure include the developer described in Paragraph 0194 of International Publication No. 2015/092731.
  • the development method is not particularly limited and may be any of paddle development, shower development, shower and spin development, dip development, and the like.
  • the shower development will be described.
  • the exposed portion can be removed by spraying the developer onto the exposed photosensitive resin layer by shower. Further, after the development, it is preferable to remove the development residue while spraying a cleaning agent or the like with a shower and rubbing with a brush or the like.
  • the liquid temperature of the developer is preferably 20 ° C. to 40 ° C.
  • the post-baking process which heat-processes the pattern containing the photosensitive resin layer obtained by image development.
  • the post-baking is preferably performed in an environment of 8.1 kPa to 121.6 kPa, and more preferably in an environment of 50.66 kPa or more. On the other hand, it is more preferable to carry out in an environment of 111.46 kPa or less, and it is particularly preferable to carry out in an environment of 101.3 kPa or less.
  • the post-baking temperature is preferably 80 ° C. to 250 ° C., more preferably 110 ° C. to 170 ° C., and particularly preferably 130 ° C. to 150 ° C.
  • the post-baking time is preferably 1 to 30 minutes, more preferably 2 to 10 minutes, and particularly preferably 2 to 4 minutes.
  • the post-bake may be performed in an air environment or a nitrogen substitution environment.
  • steps such as a post-exposure step may be provided before the etching step described later.
  • the manufacturing method of the circuit wiring which concerns on this indication includes the process (etching process) of carrying out the etching process of the board
  • the conductive layer is etched using the pattern formed from the photosensitive resin layer in the developing step as an etching resist.
  • a method for the etching treatment a known method such as a method described in paragraphs 0048 to 0054 of JP 2010-152155 A, a dry etching method such as a known plasma etching, or the like can be applied.
  • a wet etching method which is generally performed and is immersed in an etching solution can be given.
  • an etchant used for wet etching an acid type or alkaline type etchant may be appropriately selected according to an object to be etched.
  • acidic etching solutions include aqueous solutions of acidic components such as hydrochloric acid, sulfuric acid, hydrofluoric acid, and phosphoric acid, and mixed aqueous solutions of acidic components and salts of ferric chloride, ammonium fluoride, potassium permanganate, etc. Is done.
  • the acidic component a component obtained by combining a plurality of acidic components may be used.
  • alkaline type etchants include aqueous solutions of alkali components such as sodium hydroxide, potassium hydroxide, ammonia, organic amines, salts of organic amines such as tetramethylammonium hydroxide, alkaline components and potassium permanganate. Examples thereof include a mixed aqueous solution of salt.
  • alkali component a component obtained by combining a plurality of alkali components may be used.
  • the temperature of the etching solution is not particularly limited, but is preferably 45 ° C. or lower.
  • the resin pattern used as an etching mask preferably exhibits particularly excellent resistance to acidic and alkaline etching solutions in a temperature range of 45 ° C. or lower. Therefore, the photosensitive resin layer is prevented from being peeled off during the etching process, and a portion where the photosensitive resin layer does not exist is selectively etched. After the etching process, in order to prevent contamination of the process line, a cleaning process for cleaning the etched substrate and a drying process for drying the cleaned substrate may be performed as necessary.
  • the manufacturing method of the circuit wiring which concerns on this indication performs the process (removal process) of removing a resin pattern.
  • the removal step is not particularly limited and can be performed as necessary, but is preferably performed after the etching step.
  • medical treatment can be mentioned, It can mention especially preferably using a removal liquid.
  • a method for removing the photosensitive resin layer the substrate having the photosensitive resin layer or the like is immersed in a removing solution that is being stirred at preferably 30 ° C. to 80 ° C., more preferably 50 ° C. to 80 ° C. for 1 to 30 minutes. A method is mentioned.
  • the removing liquid examples include inorganic alkali components such as sodium hydroxide and potassium hydroxide, or organic alkalis such as primary amine compounds, secondary amine compounds, tertiary amine compounds, and quaternary ammonium salt compounds. Examples thereof include removal solutions in which the components are dissolved in water, dimethyl sulfoxide, N-methylpyrrolidone, or a mixed solution thereof. Alternatively, the removal liquid may be used and removed by a spray method, a shower method, a paddle method, or the like.
  • inorganic alkali components such as sodium hydroxide and potassium hydroxide
  • organic alkalis such as primary amine compounds, secondary amine compounds, tertiary amine compounds, and quaternary ammonium salt compounds. Examples thereof include removal solutions in which the components are dissolved in water, dimethyl sulfoxide, N-methylpyrrolidone, or a mixed solution thereof.
  • the removal liquid may be used and removed by a spray method, a shower method, a paddle method
  • ⁇ Entire exposure of photosensitive resin layer It is preferable to include a step of exposing the entire surface of the photosensitive resin layer (also referred to as “overall exposure step”) before the removing step. Furthermore, if necessary, a step of heating the photosensitive resin layer exposed on the entire surface (also referred to as “heating step”) may be included.
  • the entire surface exposure step and the heating step are preferably performed after the etching step and before the removal step.
  • a well-known exposure light source can be used. From the viewpoint of removability, it is preferable to use a light source including light having the same wavelength as that in the exposure step.
  • the exposure amount in the overall exposure step is preferably 5mJ / cm 2 ⁇ 1,000mJ / cm 2, more preferably 10mJ / cm 2 ⁇ 800mJ / cm 2, 100mJ / Particularly preferred is cm 2 to 500 mJ / cm 2 .
  • the exposure amount in the overall exposure step is preferably greater than or equal to the exposure amount in the exposure step, and more preferably greater than the exposure amount in the exposure step, from the viewpoint of removability.
  • the method for manufacturing circuit wiring according to the present disclosure may include an arbitrary process (other processes) other than those described above.
  • other processes other processes
  • the exposure step, the development step, and other steps in the present disclosure the methods described in paragraphs 0035 to 0051 of JP-A-2006-23696 can be suitably used in the present disclosure.
  • the method of manufacturing a resin pattern according to the present disclosure or the method of manufacturing a circuit wiring according to the present disclosure includes a step of peeling the cover film of the photosensitive transfer material when the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure has a cover film. (Sometimes referred to as a “cover film peeling step”).
  • the method for peeling the cover film is not limited, and a known method can be applied.
  • the manufacturing method of the circuit wiring which concerns on this indication can include the process of reducing the visible light reflectance of some or all of the some conductive layers on a base material.
  • the treatment for reducing the visible light reflectance include an oxidation treatment.
  • the visible light reflectance can be reduced by blackening the copper by oxidizing copper.
  • paragraphs 0017 to 0025 of JP2014-150118A and paragraphs 0041, 0042, 0048 and 0058 of JP2013-206315A are described. The contents of this publication are incorporated herein.
  • the method for manufacturing a circuit wiring preferably includes a step of forming an insulating film on the formed circuit wiring and a step of forming a new conductive layer on the insulating film.
  • the above-described second electrode pattern can be formed while being insulated from the first electrode pattern.
  • an insulating film having a desired pattern may be formed by photolithography using a photosensitive material having insulating properties.
  • a new conductive layer having a desired pattern may be formed by photolithography using a photosensitive material having conductivity.
  • the circuit wiring manufacturing method uses a substrate having a plurality of conductive layers on both surfaces of a base material, and sequentially or simultaneously forms a circuit on the conductive layers formed on both surfaces of the base material. It is also preferable. With such a configuration, it is possible to form a circuit wiring for a touch panel in which a first conductive pattern is formed on one surface of the substrate and a second conductive pattern is formed on the other surface. Moreover, it is also preferable to form the circuit wiring for touch panels of such a structure from both surfaces of a base material by roll-to-roll.
  • the circuit wiring manufactured by the circuit wiring manufacturing method according to the present disclosure can be applied to various apparatuses.
  • an input device etc. are mentioned, for example, it is preferred that it is a touch panel, and it is more preferred that it is a capacitance type touch panel.
  • the input device can be applied to a display device such as an organic EL display device or a liquid crystal display device.
  • the touch panel manufacturing method according to the present disclosure may be a method using the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure, but the side having the photosensitive resin layer with respect to the temporary support in the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure.
  • a step of bringing the outermost layer into contact with a substrate having a conductive layer (bonding step), a step of pattern exposing the photosensitive resin layer (exposure step), and developing the exposed photosensitive resin layer It is preferable to include a step of forming a resin pattern (developing step) and a step of etching the substrate in a region where the resin pattern is not disposed (etching step) in this order.
  • the specific aspects of each process and the embodiments such as the order of performing each process are as described in the above-mentioned section “Method of manufacturing circuit wiring”.
  • the preferred embodiment is also the same.
  • the touch panel manufacturing method according to the present disclosure can refer to a known touch panel manufacturing method except the above.
  • the manufacturing method of the touchscreen which concerns on this indication may also include arbitrary processes (other processes) other than having mentioned above.
  • FIGS. 3 and 4 An example of a mask pattern used in the touch panel manufacturing method according to the present disclosure is shown in FIGS. 3 and 4.
  • SL and G are non-image portions (light-shielding portions), and DL is a virtual alignment alignment frame.
  • the circuit wiring having the pattern A corresponding to SL and G is formed by exposing the photosensitive resin layer through the mask having the pattern A shown in FIG. Touch panel can be manufactured. Specifically, it can be produced by the method described in FIG. 1 of International Publication No. 2016/0190405.
  • G is a portion where a transparent electrode (touch panel electrode) is formed
  • SL is a portion where a wiring of a peripheral extraction portion is formed.
  • the touch panel according to the present disclosure is a touch panel having at least circuit wiring manufactured by the method for manufacturing circuit wiring according to the present disclosure.
  • the touch panel according to the present disclosure preferably includes at least a transparent substrate, an electrode, and an insulating layer or a protective layer.
  • a detection method in the touch panel according to the present disclosure any known method such as a resistance film method, a capacitance method, an ultrasonic method, an electromagnetic induction method, and an optical method may be used. Among these, the electrostatic capacity method is preferable.
  • the touch panel type a so-called in-cell type (for example, those described in FIGS.
  • JP 2013-168125 A a so-called on-cell type
  • OGS One Glass Solution
  • TOL Touch-on-Lens
  • other configurations for example, those shown in FIG. 6 of JP2013-164671A
  • various out-cell types for example, GG, G1, G2, GFF, GF2, GF1, G1F, etc.
  • Examples of the touch panel according to the present disclosure include those described in paragraph 0229 of JP-A-2017-120345.
  • Example and comparative example in the first embodiment of the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure The abbreviation regarding the component used in the Example represents the following compounds, respectively.
  • -Intermediate layer- [Polymer (Binder polymer for intermediate layer)]
  • Polymer B-11 Nissan HPC-SSL (Hydroxypropylcellulose Nippon Soda Co., Ltd.)
  • Polymer B-12 Metroz 60SH-03 (hydroxypropylmethylcellulose, manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd.) [Dye]
  • A-1 Bromophenol blue (manufactured by FUJIFILM Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd., maximum absorption wavelength: 606 nm, water-soluble)
  • A-2 Bromocresol green (manufactured by FUJIFILM Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd., maximum absorption wavelength: 626 nm, water-soluble)
  • A-3 VPB-NAPS (Victoria Pure Blue naphthalene
  • A-1 Color development (that is, maximum absorption wavelength) changed at pH 4.0 or higher.
  • A-2 Color development (that is, maximum absorption wavelength) changed at pH 5.4 or higher.
  • A-3 Even when the pH was changed at pH 1 to 14, the color development (that is, the maximum absorption wavelength) did not change.
  • G-1 0.1N sodium hydroxide aqueous solution (manufactured by FUJIFILM Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.)
  • G-2 0.1N aqueous potassium hydroxide solution (manufactured by FUJIFILM Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.)
  • G-3 0.1N lithium hydroxide aqueous solution (manufactured by FUJIFILM Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.)
  • G-4 Tetrabutylammonium hydroxide (40% by mass aqueous solution) (manufactured by FUJIFILM Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.)
  • G-5 Hexadecyltrimethylammonium hydroxide (10% by mass aqueous solution) (manufactured by Fujifilm Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.)
  • G-6 Choline (50% by mass aqueous solution) (manufactured by Tokyo Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.)
  • G-7 benzyltrimethylam
  • ATHF 2-tetrahydrofuranyl acrylate (synthetic product)
  • MATHF 2-tetrahydrofuranyl methacrylate (synthetic product)
  • ATHP Tetrahydro-2H-pyran-2-yl acrylate (manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd.)
  • MATHP Tetrahydro-2H-pyran-2-yl methacrylate (manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd.)
  • MAEVE 1-ethoxyethyl methacrylate (Fuji Film Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.) TBMA: t-butyl methacrylate (Fuji Film Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.)
  • AA Acrylic acid (manufactured by Tokyo Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.)
  • MAA Methacrylic acid (manufactured
  • C-4 CPI-310TS (triarylsulfonium salt, manufactured by San Apro Co., Ltd.)
  • D-2 2,4,5-triphenylimidazole (manufactured by Tokyo Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.)
  • D-3 1,5-diazabicyclo [4.3.0] -5-nonene (manufactured by Tokyo Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.)
  • E-1 F-552 (fluorine nonionic surfactant, manufactured by DIC Corporation)
  • E-2 F-554 (Fluorine nonionic surfactant, manufactured by DIC Corporation)
  • Example 1 Preparation of intermediate layer composition 1> The following components were mixed and filtered with a polytetrafluoroethylene filter having a pore size of 5.0 ⁇ m to prepare an intermediate layer composition 1.
  • ⁇ Preparation of resist layer composition 1> The following components were mixed and filtered through a polytetrafluoroethylene filter having a pore size of 1.0 ⁇ m to prepare a resist layer composition 1.
  • MEK methyl ethyl ketone: manufactured by Maruzen Petrochemical Co., Ltd.
  • 306.0 parts by mass Normal propyl acetate manufactured by Showa Denko KK
  • 459.9 parts by mass Polymer B-1 solution 423.5 parts by mass
  • Photoacid generation Agent C-1: 9.00 parts by mass Basic compound
  • An intermediate layer composition 1 is formed on a polyethylene terephthalate film (hereinafter also referred to as “PET (A)”) having a thickness of 16 ⁇ m, which is a temporary support, with a dry film thickness of 1.8 ⁇ m using a slit nozzle.
  • PET (A) polyethylene terephthalate film
  • the resist layer composition 1 was applied in an amount such that the dry film thickness was 3.0 ⁇ m using a slit nozzle.
  • a polypropylene film manufactured by Oji F-Tex Co., Ltd., Alphan PK-002 was pressure-bonded as a cover film to prepare a photosensitive transfer material.
  • the intermediate layer compositions 2 to 18 were prepared by dissolving and mixing with a filter of polytetrafluoroethylene having a pore size of 1.0 ⁇ m. Further, as shown in Table 3, an intermediate layer composition 19 was prepared in the same manner as the intermediate layer composition 1 except that 2.0 parts by mass of a photoacid generator C-4 was further added.
  • the polymer, photoacid generator, basic compound, surfactant, and other components are mixed solvents of n-propyl acetate and methyl ethyl ketone so that the solid content ratio (mass ratio) shown in Table 4 below is obtained.
  • the following component was mixed and the resist layer composition 11 was prepared by filtering with the filter made from a polytetrafluoroethylene with a hole diameter of 1.0 micrometer.
  • Example 1 except that the intermediate layer composition 1 was replaced with the intermediate layer compositions 2 to 19 and the resist layer composition 1 was replaced with the resist layer compositions 2 to 11, respectively. In the same manner, a photosensitive transfer material was produced.
  • Comparative Example 1 In Example 1, the intermediate layer composition 1 was replaced with the comparative intermediate layer composition 1 prepared without adding the dye A-1 and the pH adjuster G-1 used for the preparation of the intermediate layer composition 1.
  • a photosensitive transfer material of Comparative Example 1 was produced in the same manner as Example 1 except for the above.
  • Example 1 a photosensitive transfer material was produced in the same manner as in Example 1 except that the intermediate layer composition 1 was replaced with the comparative intermediate layer composition 2.
  • Example 201 instead of the intermediate layer composition 19, as shown in Table 3, it was prepared without adding the dye A-1 and the photoacid generator C-4 used for the preparation of the intermediate layer composition 19.
  • a photosensitive transfer material was produced in the same manner as in Example 201 except that the comparative intermediate layer composition 3 was used.
  • the produced photosensitive transfer material was subjected to a roll temperature of 90 ° C., a linear pressure of 0.8 MPa, and a linear velocity of 3.0 m / min. It laminated on the PET board
  • the temporary support of the photosensitive transfer material is contacted with a glass mask having a line-and-space pattern (duty ratio of 1: 1) having a line width of 10 ⁇ m without peeling off the temporary support, and ultrahigh pressure is passed through the mask.
  • the resist layer was exposed with an exposure dose of 200 mJ / cm 2 with a mercury lamp. After leaving for 4 hours, the exposed line and space pattern was observed with an optical microscope and evaluated according to the following evaluation criteria.
  • Example 1 a photosensitive transfer material was produced in the same manner as in Example 1 except that the intermediate layer composition and the resist layer composition were changed to have the configuration shown in Table 6 below.
  • a PET substrate with a copper layer in which a copper layer was formed by a sputtering method at a thickness of 200 nm on a polyethylene terephthalate (PET) film having a thickness of 100 ⁇ m was used.
  • the produced photosensitive transfer material was cut into a size of 50 cm ⁇ 50 cm to obtain a sample piece, and the cover film of the obtained sample piece was peeled off, and the roll temperature was 90 ° C., the linear pressure was 1.0 MPa, and the linear velocity was 4.0 m / min.
  • the film was laminated on a PET film with a copper layer under the following laminating conditions.
  • Example 101 Indium tin oxide (ITO) was deposited as a second conductive layer on a 100 ⁇ m thick PET substrate by sputtering to a thickness of 150 nm, and copper was deposited thereon as a first conductive layer by vacuum deposition. A film was formed with a thickness of 200 nm to obtain a circuit formation substrate.
  • the photosensitive transfer material 1 obtained in Example 1 was laminated on the copper layer (linear pressure 0.8 MPa, linear velocity 3.0 m / min, roll temperature 90 ° C.). Contact pattern exposure was performed using a photomask provided with a pattern shown in FIG.
  • pattern A having a configuration in which conductive layer pads are connected in one direction without peeling off the temporary support.
  • the solid line portion SL and the gray portion G are light shielding portions, and the dotted line portion DL virtually shows an alignment alignment frame. Thereafter, the temporary support was peeled off, developed and washed with water to obtain a pattern A.
  • the ITO layer is etched using an ITO etching solution (ITO-02 manufactured by Kanto Chemical Co., Ltd.), A substrate on which copper (solid line portion SL) and ITO (gray portion G) were both drawn with the pattern A was obtained.
  • pattern alignment was performed using a photomask provided with openings of the pattern shown in FIG. 4 (hereinafter also referred to as “pattern B”) in the aligned state, and development and washing were performed.
  • the gray portion G is a light shielding portion
  • the dotted line portion DL is a virtual alignment alignment frame.
  • the copper layer was etched using Cu-02, and the remaining resist layer was stripped using a stripping solution (10 mass% sodium hydroxide aqueous solution) to obtain a circuit wiring board. As a result, a circuit wiring board was obtained. When observed with a microscope, there was no peeling or chipping, and the pattern was clean.
  • Example 102 On a 100 ⁇ m-thick PET substrate, ITO was deposited as a second conductive layer by sputtering to a thickness of 150 nm, and copper was deposited thereon as a first conductive layer by vacuum deposition at a thickness of 200 nm. The film was formed into a circuit forming substrate.
  • the photosensitive transfer material 1 obtained in Example 1 was laminated on the copper layer (linear pressure 0.8 MPa, linear velocity 3.0 m / min, roll temperature 90 ° C.).
  • the resist layer was subjected to pattern exposure using a photomask provided with a pattern A shown in FIG. 3 having a configuration in which conductive layer pads were connected in one direction without peeling off the temporary support. Thereafter, the temporary support was peeled off, developed and washed with water to obtain a pattern A.
  • the ITO layer is etched using an ITO etching solution (ITO-02 manufactured by Kanto Chemical Co., Ltd.), A substrate on which copper (solid line portion SL) and ITO (gray portion G) were both drawn with the pattern A was obtained.
  • PET (A) was laminated as a protective layer on the remaining resist.
  • pattern alignment was performed using a photomask provided with an opening of the pattern B shown in FIG. 4 in the aligned state, and after developing the PET (A), development and washing were performed. Thereafter, the copper wiring was etched using Cu-02, and the remaining resist layer was stripped using a stripping solution (KP-301 manufactured by Kanto Chemical Co., Inc.) to obtain a circuit wiring board.
  • a stripping solution KP-301 manufactured by Kanto Chemical Co., Inc.
  • the weight average molecular weights of the polymers A-1 to A-6 were 20,000, respectively.
  • ⁇ Photo acid generator> B-1 Compound having the structure shown below (Compound described in paragraph 0227 of JP 2013-47765 A, synthesized according to the method described in paragraph 0227)
  • the unit of the amount of each component in Table 8 is part by mass.
  • An intermediate layer forming composition 1 was prepared according to the following formulation.
  • composition 1 for Forming Intermediate Layer The composition shown in the following was dissolved and mixed to obtain an intermediate layer forming composition 1.
  • HPC Hydroxypropyl cellulose
  • HPC-SSL Hydroxypropyl cellulose
  • HMPC Hydroxypropyl methylcellulose
  • TC-5 Hydroxypropyl methylcellulose
  • Snowtex O Silica particles, manufactured by Nissan Chemical Industries, arithmetic average particle size 12 nm, surface state anionic (silanol) Snowtex XS: Silica particles, manufactured by Nissan Chemical Industries, arithmetic average particle size 5 nm, surface state anionic (silanol) Snowtex OS: Silica particles, manufactured by Nissan Chemical Industries, arithmetic average particle size 9 nm, surface state anionic (silanol) Snowtex O-40: Silica particles, manufactured by Nissan Chemical Industries, arithmetic average particle size 22 nm, surface state anionic (silanol) Snowtex OL: Silica particles, manufactured by Nissan Chemical Industries, arithmetic average particle size 22 nm, surface state anionic (silanol) Snowtex OL: Silica particles, manufactured
  • Example 2-1 ⁇ Production of photosensitive transfer material>
  • the composition for forming an intermediate layer 1 is formed on a polyethylene terephthalate film having a thickness of 30 ⁇ m serving as a temporary support so that the composition shown in Table 10 below is applied.
  • the film was applied to a thickness of 8 ⁇ m and passed through a drying zone at 100 ° C. over 40 seconds to form an intermediate layer.
  • the photosensitive resin composition A-1 was applied onto the intermediate layer using a slit nozzle so that the coating width was 1.0 m and the film thickness was 3 ⁇ m, and a 100 ° C. drying zone was applied for 40 seconds.
  • the photosensitive resin layer was formed by passing through.
  • a polyethylene film (Tradeger's OSM-N) is pressure-bonded as a cover film (protective film) on the photosensitive resin layer to produce a photosensitive transfer material 2-1, and the photosensitive transfer material 2-1 is wound up. In roll form.
  • Photosensitive transfer materials 2-2 to 2-27 were prepared in the same manner as in Example 2-1, except that the compositions shown in Table 10 below were used.
  • Photosensitive transfer materials 2-C1 to 2-C4 were prepared in the same manner as in Example 2-1, except that the compositions shown in Table 10 below were used.
  • Photosensitive transfer material 2 was prepared in the same manner as in Example 2-1, except that the composition shown in Table 11 below was used to form a water-soluble resin layer, and then an intermediate layer was formed in the same manner as the water-soluble resin layer. -28 to 2-32 were produced.
  • the formation of the water-soluble resin layer used the composition of Table 11 among the compositions for intermediate
  • the layer was composed of 4 layers: (layer) / particle, layer containing the above polar compound and water-soluble resin (intermediate layer) / photosensitive resin layer. Further, when the cross sections of the obtained photosensitive transfer materials of Examples 2-28 to 2-32 were observed using the SIMS method, it was found that any of the above polar compounds was contained in the intermediate layer. It was.
  • a PET substrate with a copper layer was used in which a copper film was formed to a thickness of 200 nm by a vacuum deposition method on a polyethylene terephthalate (PET) film having a thickness of 100 ⁇ m.
  • PET polyethylene terephthalate
  • the cover film was peeled from the photosensitive transfer material of Example 2-1, and the photosensitive transfer material obtained on the copper layer in the above-mentioned PET substrate with a copper layer was transferred at 100 ° C., a speed of 4 m / min, and a linear pressure of 0.6 MPa. After laminating under the above conditions, the temporary support was peeled off to produce a laminate in which a positive photosensitive layer was laminated on the copper layer.
  • the initial filtration pressure is 0.1 MPa or less, and the filtration pressure change when 10 L is filtered is 0.01 MPa or more and less than 0.05 MPa.
  • the initial filtration pressure is a value exceeding 0.1 MPa, or the filtration pressure change after 10 L filtration is 0.05 MPa or more.
  • the photosensitive transfer materials of the examples are superior in adhesion between the intermediate layer and the photosensitive resin layer as compared with the photosensitive transfer materials of the comparative examples.
  • Table 11 it can be seen from Table 11 that by further producing a water-soluble resin layer, the adhesion between the intermediate layer and the photosensitive resin layer, storage stability, and liquid stability are all excellent.
  • the photosensitive transfer material or the intermediate layer forming composition can be used without being stored for a long time from the time of preparation, and there is no practical problem. Can be used.
  • Example 2-101 On the 100 ⁇ m-thick PET substrate, ITO was deposited as a second conductive layer by sputtering to a thickness of 150 nm, and copper was deposited thereon as a first conductive layer at a thickness of 200 nm by vacuum evaporation. Thus, a circuit forming substrate was obtained.
  • the photosensitive transfer material obtained in Example 2-1 on the copper layer was peeled off the protective film and bonded to the substrate (lamination roll temperature 100 ° C., linear pressure 0.8 MPa, linear velocity 3.0 m / min.), a laminate. The obtained laminate was exposed to a contact pattern using a photomask provided with a pattern A shown in FIG.
  • Example 3 having a configuration in which conductive layer pads were connected in one direction without peeling off the temporary support.
  • a high pressure mercury lamp having i-line (365 nm) as an exposure dominant wavelength was used for the exposure.
  • the temporary support was peeled off, developed and washed with water to obtain a pattern A.
  • the ITO layer is etched using an ITO etching solution (ITO-02 manufactured by Kanto Chemical Co., Ltd.), A substrate on which both copper and ITO were drawn in pattern A was obtained.
  • a temporary support similar to that in Example 2-1 was laminated as a protective layer on the remaining resist.
  • Example 2-102 In the same manner as in Example 2-101, after obtaining the substrate drawn with pattern A, the protective transfer film was peeled off the photosensitive transfer material obtained in Example 1 on the remaining resist, Bonding was again performed under the same conditions as in Example 2-101. With the alignment aligned, pattern exposure is performed using a photomask provided with an opening of pattern B without peeling off the temporary support, and then the temporary support is peeled off, followed by development and washing to obtain pattern B. It was. Next, the copper wiring was etched under the same conditions as in Example 2-101, and the remaining photosensitive resin layer was peeled off to obtain a circuit wiring board having a conductive pattern. When the obtained circuit wiring board was observed with a microscope, it was a clean pattern with no peeling or chipping.

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • General Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Theoretical Computer Science (AREA)
  • Architecture (AREA)
  • Structural Engineering (AREA)
  • Spectroscopy & Molecular Physics (AREA)
  • Manufacturing & Machinery (AREA)
  • Microelectronics & Electronic Packaging (AREA)
  • Human Computer Interaction (AREA)
  • Materials For Photolithography (AREA)

Abstract

A photosensitive transfer material having a temporary support body, an intermediate layer, and a resist layer in the stated order, the intermediate layer containing a component (A) that is a pigment having a maximum absorption wavelength of 450 nm or greater in the wavelength range of 400-780 nm when color is produced, the maximum absorption wavelength varying depending on whether an acid, base, or radical is involved; a manufacturing method for circuit wiring; and a manufacturing method for a touch panel.

Description

感光性転写材料、回路配線の製造方法、及び、タッチパネルの製造方法Photosensitive transfer material, circuit wiring manufacturing method, and touch panel manufacturing method
 本開示は、感光性転写材料、回路配線の製造方法、及び、タッチパネルの製造方法に関する。 The present disclosure relates to a photosensitive transfer material, a circuit wiring manufacturing method, and a touch panel manufacturing method.
 静電容量型入力装置などのタッチパネルを備えた表示装置(有機エレクトロルミネッセンス(EL)表示装置及び液晶表示装置など)では、視認部のセンサーに相当する電極パターン、周辺配線部分及び取り出し配線部分の配線などの導電性層パターンがタッチパネル内部に設けられている。
 一般的にパターン化した層の形成には、必要とするパターン形状を得るための工程数が少ないといったことから、感光性転写材料を用いて任意の基板上に設けたレジスト層に対して、所望のパターンを有するマスクを介して露光した後に現像する方法が広く使用されている。
In a display device (such as an organic electroluminescence (EL) display device and a liquid crystal display device) having a touch panel such as a capacitance type input device, an electrode pattern corresponding to a sensor of a visual recognition part, a wiring of a peripheral wiring part, and a wiring of a lead-out wiring part A conductive layer pattern such as is provided inside the touch panel.
In general, the formation of a patterned layer requires a small number of steps for obtaining a required pattern shape. A method of developing after exposure through a mask having the following pattern is widely used.
 また、従来のレジスト層組成物および感光性転写材料としては、特開2008-64908号公報、特開2004-54106号公報、特開2009-3000号公報及び特開2002-341544号公報に記載されたものが知られている。更に、支持体と染料を含有するクッション層と感光層とを有する感光性転写材料が開示されている(例えば、特開2006-85116号公報)。 Conventional resist layer compositions and photosensitive transfer materials are described in JP-A-2008-64908, JP-A-2004-54106, JP-A-2009-3000, and JP-A-2002-341544. Is known. Furthermore, a photosensitive transfer material having a support, a cushion layer containing a dye, and a photosensitive layer is disclosed (for example, JP-A-2006-85116).
 また、従来の回路基板の製造に使用する金属膜付きフィルムとしては、特開2011-25532号公報に記載されたものが知られている。
 特開2011-25532号公報には、支持体、上記支持体上に形成されたナノ無機充填材含有水溶性高分子離型層、及び上記離型層上に形成された金属膜層を有することを特徴とする金属膜付きフィルムが記載されている。
Further, as a film with a metal film used for manufacturing a conventional circuit board, a film described in JP 2011-25532 A is known.
JP 2011-25532 A has a support, a nano-inorganic filler-containing water-soluble polymer release layer formed on the support, and a metal film layer formed on the release layer. A film with a metal film is described.
 本開示の一実施形態が解決しようとする課題は、露光部及び未露光部の視認性に優れる感光性転写材料を提供することである。
 また、本開示の他の一実施形態が解決しようとする課題は、上記感光性転写材料を用いた、回路配線の製造方法、又は、タッチパネルの製造方法を提供することである。
A problem to be solved by an embodiment of the present disclosure is to provide a photosensitive transfer material that is excellent in visibility of an exposed portion and an unexposed portion.
Another problem to be solved by another embodiment of the present disclosure is to provide a method for manufacturing circuit wiring or a method for manufacturing a touch panel using the photosensitive transfer material.
 上記課題を解決するための手段には、以下の態様が含まれる。
<1> 仮支持体、中間層およびレジスト層をこの順番に有し、中間層は、下記(A)成分を含有する感光性転写材料。
(A)成分:発色時の波長範囲400nm~780nmにおける極大吸収波長が450nm以上であり、酸、塩基又はラジカルにより極大吸収波長が変化する色素
<2> (A)成分である色素は、pH感受性色素である<1>に記載の感光性転写材料。
<3> (A)成分である色素は、トリアリールメタン骨格を有する<1>または<2>に記載の感光性転写材料。
<4> (A)成分である色素が、下記式Iで表される色素、下記式Iで表される色素の開環体及び開環体の中和体から選ばれる少なくとも1つを含む<1>~<3>のいずれか1つに記載の感光性転写材料。
Means for solving the above problems include the following aspects.
<1> A photosensitive transfer material having a temporary support, an intermediate layer, and a resist layer in this order, and the intermediate layer contains the following component (A).
Component (A): Dye whose maximum absorption wavelength in the wavelength range of 400 nm to 780 nm during color development is 450 nm or more, and whose maximum absorption wavelength changes due to acid, base or radical <2> The dye as component (A) is pH sensitive The photosensitive transfer material according to <1>, which is a dye.
<3> The photosensitive transfer material according to <1> or <2>, wherein the dye as the component (A) has a triarylmethane skeleton.
<4> The dye as the component (A) contains at least one selected from a dye represented by the following formula I, a ring-opened product of the dye represented by the following formula I, and a neutralized product of the ring-opened product < The photosensitive transfer material according to any one of 1> to <3>.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000003

 
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000003

 
 式I中、ArおよびAr’は、それぞれ独立に芳香族基を表す。R、R、RおよびRは、それぞれ独立に水素原子または1価の置換基を表す。
<5> レジスト層は下記(B)成分及び(C)成分を含有する<1>~<4>のいずれか1つに記載の感光性転写材料。
(B)成分:酸基が酸分解性基で保護された基を有する構成単位を含有する重合体
(C)成分:光酸発生剤
In formula I, Ar and Ar ′ each independently represent an aromatic group. R 1 , R 2 , R 3 and R 4 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a monovalent substituent.
<5> The photosensitive transfer material according to any one of <1> to <4>, wherein the resist layer contains the following components (B) and (C).
(B) Component: Polymer (C) component containing a structural unit having a group in which an acid group is protected with an acid-decomposable group: Photoacid generator
<6> 露光により(C)成分である光酸発生剤から放出された酸により、(A)成分である色素の発色時における波長範囲400nm~780nmの極大吸収波長が変化する<5>に記載の感光性転写材料。
<7> 露光により(C)光酸発生剤から放出された酸より、(A)成分である色素の発色時における波長範囲400nm~780nmの極大吸収波長が短波化する<6>に記載の感光性転写材料。
<8> (C)成分である光酸発生剤から生じる酸が、リン酸、又はスルホン酸であり、且つpKaが4以下の酸である<5>~<7>のいずれか1つに記載の感光性転写材料。
<6> The maximum absorption wavelength in the wavelength range of 400 nm to 780 nm at the time of coloring of the dye as the component (A) is changed by the acid released from the photoacid generator as the component (C) by exposure. Photosensitive transfer material.
<7> The photosensitivity according to <6>, wherein the maximum absorption wavelength in the wavelength range of 400 nm to 780 nm at the time of coloring of the dye as component (A) is shortened from the acid released from the (C) photoacid generator upon exposure. Transfer material.
<8> The acid generated from the photoacid generator as component (C) is phosphoric acid or sulfonic acid, and the pKa is 4 or less, or any one of <5> to <7> Photosensitive transfer material.
<9> (B)成分である重合体が有する、酸基が酸分解性基で保護された基を有する構成単位が、下記式IIで表される構成単位である<5>~<8>のいずれか1つに記載の感光性転写材料。 <9> The structural unit having a group in which the polymer as the component (B) has an acid group protected by an acid-decomposable group is a structural unit represented by the following formula II <5> to <8> The photosensitive transfer material as described in any one of.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000004

 
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000004

 
 式II中、R及びRはそれぞれ独立に、水素原子、アルキル基又はアリール基を表し、少なくともR及びRのいずれか一方が、アルキル基又はアリール基であり、Rはアルキル基又はアリール基を表し、R又はRと、Rと、が連結して環状エーテルを形成してもよい。Rは水素原子又はメチル基を表し、Xは単結合又はアリーレン基を表す。
<10> 中間層が、更に、下記(G)成分を含有する<1>~<9>のいずれか1つに記載の感光性転写材料。
(G)成分:pH調整剤
<11> pH調整剤が、4級アンモニウム塩である<10>に記載の感光性転写材料。
<12> レジスト層に、さらに下記(D)成分を含有する<1>~<11>のいずれか1つに記載の感光性転写材料。
 (D)成分:塩基性化合物
In Formula II, R 1 and R 2 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, or an aryl group, at least one of R 1 and R 2 is an alkyl group or an aryl group, and R 3 is an alkyl group Alternatively, it represents an aryl group, and R 1 or R 2 and R 3 may be linked to form a cyclic ether. R 4 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, and X represents a single bond or an arylene group.
<10> The photosensitive transfer material according to any one of <1> to <9>, wherein the intermediate layer further contains the following component (G).
(G) Component: pH adjusting agent <11> The photosensitive transfer material according to <10>, wherein the pH adjusting agent is a quaternary ammonium salt.
<12> The photosensitive transfer material according to any one of <1> to <11>, wherein the resist layer further contains the following component (D).
Component (D): basic compound
<13> 基板に対し、<1>~<12>のいずれか1つに記載の感光性転写材料を、上記感光性転写材料のレジスト層を基板に接触させて貼り合わせる工程と、貼り合わせる工程後の感光性転写材料のレジスト層をパターン露光する工程と、パターン露光する工程後のレジスト層を現像してパターンを形成する工程と、パターンが配置されていない領域における基板をエッチング処理する工程と、をこの順に含む回路配線の製造方法。 <13> A step of bonding the photosensitive transfer material according to any one of <1> to <12> to the substrate while bringing the resist layer of the photosensitive transfer material into contact with the substrate, and a step of bonding A step of pattern exposing the resist layer of the subsequent photosensitive transfer material; a step of developing the resist layer after the pattern exposing step to form a pattern; and a step of etching the substrate in a region where the pattern is not disposed. , In this order.
<14> 基板に対し、<1>~<12>のいずれか1つに記載の感光性転写材料を、上記感光性転写材料のレジスト層を基板に接触させて貼り合わせる工程と、貼り合わせる工程後の感光性転写材料のレジスト層をパターン露光する工程と、パターン露光する工程後のレジスト層を現像してパターンを形成する工程と、パターンが配置されていない領域における基板をエッチング処理する工程と、をこの順に含むタッチパネルの製造方法。 <14> A step of bonding the photosensitive transfer material according to any one of <1> to <12> to the substrate while bringing the resist layer of the photosensitive transfer material into contact with the substrate, and a step of bonding A step of pattern exposing the resist layer of the subsequent photosensitive transfer material; a step of developing the resist layer after the pattern exposing step to form a pattern; and a step of etching the substrate in a region where the pattern is not disposed. The manufacturing method of the touch panel which contains these in this order.
<2-1> 仮支持体、中間層、及び、感光性樹脂層をこの順に有し、上記中間層が、水溶性樹脂、粒子、並びに、酸性基、塩基性基、アニオン性基及びカチオン性基よりなる群から選ばれた少なくとも1種の極性基と炭素数6以上のアルキル基とを有する極性化合物を含有し、上記感光性樹脂層が、酸分解性基で保護された酸基を有する構成単位を含有する重合体を含有し、上記感光性樹脂層と上記中間層とが接している感光性転写材料。
<2-2> 上記重合体の酸価が、10mgKOH/g以下である<2-1>に記載の感光性転写材料。
<2-3> 上記重合体の酸価が、3mgKOH/g以下である、<2-1>又は<2-2>に記載の感光性転写材料。
<2-4> 上記極性基が、第一級~第三級アミノ基、又は、第一級~第四級アンモニウム基である<2-1>~<2-3>のいずれか1つに記載の感光性転写材料。
<2-5> 上記極性化合物における上記炭素数6以上のアルキル基が、炭素数10~16のアルキル基である<2-1>~<2-4>のいずれか1つに記載の感光性転写材料。
<2-6> 上記粒子が、シリカ粒子である、<2-1>~<2-5>のいずれか1つに記載の感光性転写材料。
<2-7> 上記シリカ粒子が、アニオン性基を表面に有するシリカ粒子である、<2-6>に記載の感光性転写材料。
<2-8> 上記粒子の算術平均粒径が、30nm以下である、<2-1>~<2-7>のいずれか1つに記載の感光性転写材料。
<2-9> 上記仮支持体と上記中間層との間に、粒子の含有量が5質量%以下である水溶性樹脂層を更に有する<2-1>~<2-8>のいずれか1つに記載の感光性転写材料。
<2-10> <2-1>~<2-9>のいずれか1つに記載の感光性転写材料における上記感光性樹脂層を基板に接触させて貼り合わせる工程と、上記感光性樹脂層をパターン露光する工程と、露光された上記感光性樹脂層を現像してパターンを形成する工程と、をこの順に含む樹脂パターンの製造方法。
<2-11> <2-1>~<2-9>のいずれか1つに記載の感光性転写材料の上記感光性樹脂層を、導電層を有する基板に接触させて貼り合わせる工程と、上記感光性樹脂層をパターン露光する工程と、露光された上記感光性樹脂層を現像してパターンを形成する工程と、上記パターンが配置されていない領域における導電層をエッチング処理する工程と、をこの順に含む回路配線の製造方法。
<2-12> <2-1>~<2-9>のいずれか1つに記載の感光性転写材料の上記感光性樹脂層を、導電層を有する基板に接触させて貼り合わせる工程と、上記感光性樹脂層をパターン露光する工程と、露光された上記感光性樹脂層を現像してパターンを形成する工程と、上記パターンが配置されていない領域における導電層をエッチング処理する工程と、をこの順に含むタッチパネルの製造方法。
<2-1> A temporary support, an intermediate layer, and a photosensitive resin layer are provided in this order. The intermediate layer includes a water-soluble resin, particles, an acidic group, a basic group, an anionic group, and a cationic group. A polar compound having at least one polar group selected from the group consisting of a group and an alkyl group having 6 or more carbon atoms, wherein the photosensitive resin layer has an acid group protected with an acid-decomposable group A photosensitive transfer material comprising a polymer containing a structural unit, wherein the photosensitive resin layer and the intermediate layer are in contact with each other.
<2-2> The photosensitive transfer material according to <2-1>, wherein the acid value of the polymer is 10 mgKOH / g or less.
<2-3> The photosensitive transfer material according to <2-1> or <2-2>, wherein the acid value of the polymer is 3 mgKOH / g or less.
<2-4> In any one of <2-1> to <2-3>, the polar group is a primary to tertiary amino group or a primary to quaternary ammonium group. The photosensitive transfer material as described.
<2-5> The photosensitive property according to any one of <2-1> to <2-4>, wherein the alkyl group having 6 or more carbon atoms in the polar compound is an alkyl group having 10 to 16 carbon atoms. Transfer material.
<2-6> The photosensitive transfer material according to any one of <2-1> to <2-5>, wherein the particles are silica particles.
<2-7> The photosensitive transfer material according to <2-6>, wherein the silica particles are silica particles having an anionic group on the surface.
<2-8> The photosensitive transfer material according to any one of <2-1> to <2-7>, wherein the arithmetic average particle diameter of the particles is 30 nm or less.
<2-9> Any one of <2-1> to <2-8>, further comprising a water-soluble resin layer having a particle content of 5% by mass or less between the temporary support and the intermediate layer. The photosensitive transfer material as described in one.
<2-10> a step of bringing the photosensitive resin layer of the photosensitive transfer material according to any one of <2-1> to <2-9> into contact with a substrate and bonding the substrate; and the photosensitive resin layer A method for producing a resin pattern, which includes a step of pattern exposure and a step of developing the exposed photosensitive resin layer to form a pattern in this order.
<2-11> a step of bonding the photosensitive resin layer of the photosensitive transfer material according to any one of <2-1> to <2-9> in contact with a substrate having a conductive layer; A step of pattern exposing the photosensitive resin layer, a step of developing the exposed photosensitive resin layer to form a pattern, and a step of etching a conductive layer in a region where the pattern is not disposed. A circuit wiring manufacturing method including this order.
<2-12> a step of bonding the photosensitive resin layer of the photosensitive transfer material according to any one of <2-1> to <2-9> in contact with a substrate having a conductive layer; A step of pattern exposing the photosensitive resin layer, a step of developing the exposed photosensitive resin layer to form a pattern, and a step of etching a conductive layer in a region where the pattern is not disposed. Manufacturing method of touch panel including in this order.
 本開示の一実施形態によれば、露光部及び未露光部の視認性に優れる感光性転写材料を提供することができる。
 また、本開示の他の一実施形態によれば、上記感光性転写材料を用いた、回路配線の製造方法、及び、タッチパネルの製造方法を提供することができる。
According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, it is possible to provide a photosensitive transfer material that is excellent in visibility of an exposed portion and an unexposed portion.
In addition, according to another embodiment of the present disclosure, it is possible to provide a circuit wiring manufacturing method and a touch panel manufacturing method using the photosensitive transfer material.
図1は、本開示に係る感光性転写材料の層構成の一例を示す概略図である。FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of a layer configuration of a photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure. 図2は、本開示に係る感光性転写材料を用いたタッチパネル用回路配線の製造方法の一例を示す概略図である。FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of a method for manufacturing a circuit wiring for a touch panel using the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure. 図3は、パターンAを示す概略図である。FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram showing the pattern A. 図4は、パターンBを示す概略図である。FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram showing the pattern B.
 以下、本開示の内容について説明する。なお、添付の図面を参照しながら説明するが、符号は省略する場合がある。
 また、本開示において「~」を用いて表される数値範囲は、「~」の前後に記載される数値を下限値及び上限値として含む範囲を意味する。本開示に段階的に記載されている数値範囲において、ある数値範囲で記載された上限値又は下限値は、他の段階的な記載の数値範囲の上限値又は下限値に置き換えてもよい。また、本開示に記載されている数値範囲において、ある数値範囲で記載された上限値又は下限値は、実施例に示されている値に置き換えてもよい。
 また、本開示において、「(メタ)アクリル」はアクリル及びメタクリルの双方、又は、いずれかを表し、「(メタ)アクリレート」はアクリレート及びメタクリレートの双方、又は、いずれかを表す。
 更に、本開示において組成物中の各成分の量は、組成物中に各成分に該当する物質が複数存在する場合、特に断らない限り、組成物中に存在する該当する複数の物質の合計量を意味する。
Hereinafter, the contents of the present disclosure will be described. In addition, although it demonstrates referring an accompanying drawing, a code | symbol may be abbreviate | omitted.
In the present disclosure, a numerical range represented by using “to” means a range including numerical values described before and after “to” as a lower limit value and an upper limit value. In a numerical range described in stages in the present disclosure, an upper limit value or a lower limit value described in a numerical range may be replaced with an upper limit value or a lower limit value in another numerical range. Further, in the numerical ranges described in the present disclosure, the upper limit value or the lower limit value described in a certain numerical range may be replaced with the values shown in the examples.
In the present disclosure, “(meth) acryl” represents both and / or acryl and methacryl, and “(meth) acrylate” represents both and / or acrylate and methacrylate.
Furthermore, in the present disclosure, the amount of each component in the composition is the total amount of the plurality of corresponding substances present in the composition unless there is a specific indication when there are a plurality of substances corresponding to each component in the composition. Means.
 本開示において「工程」との語は、独立した工程だけでなく、他の工程と明確に区別できない場合であっても工程の所期の目的が達成されれば、本用語に含まれる。
 本開示における基(原子団)の表記において、置換及び無置換を記していない表記は、置換基を有さないものと共に置換基を有するものをも包含するものである。例えば「アルキル基」とは、置換基を有さないアルキル基(無置換アルキル基)のみならず、置換基を有するアルキル基(置換アルキル基)をも包含するものである。
 また、本開示における化学構造式は、水素原子を省略した簡略構造式で記載する場合もある。
 本開示において、「質量%」と「重量%」とは同義であり、「質量部」と「重量部」とは同義である。
 また、本開示において、2以上の好ましい態様の組み合わせは、より好ましい態様である。
In the present disclosure, the term “process” is included in the term as long as the intended purpose of the process is achieved, even when the process is not clearly distinguished from other processes.
In the notation of a group (atomic group) in the present disclosure, the notation that does not indicate substitution and non-substitution includes those having no substituent and those having a substituent. For example, the “alkyl group” includes not only an alkyl group having no substituent (unsubstituted alkyl group) but also an alkyl group having a substituent (substituted alkyl group).
In addition, the chemical structural formula in the present disclosure may be described as a simplified structural formula in which a hydrogen atom is omitted.
In the present disclosure, “mass%” and “weight%” are synonymous, and “part by mass” and “part by weight” are synonymous.
In the present disclosure, a combination of two or more preferred embodiments is a more preferred embodiment.
 また、本開示において、重量平均分子量(Mw)及び数平均分子量(Mn)は、特に断りのない限り、TSKgel GMHxL、TSKgel G4000HxL、TSKgel G2000HxL(何れも東ソー(株)製の商品名)のカラムを使用したゲルパーミエーションクロマトグラフィ(GPC)分析装置により、溶媒THF(テトラヒドロフラン)、示差屈折計により検出し、標準物質としてポリスチレンを用いて換算した分子量である。 In the present disclosure, unless otherwise specified, the weight average molecular weight (Mw) and number average molecular weight (Mn) are columns of TSKgel GMHxL, TSKgel G4000HxL, TSKgel G2000HxL (both trade names manufactured by Tosoh Corporation). The molecular weight is detected by a gel permeation chromatography (GPC) analyzer used and detected by a solvent THF (tetrahydrofuran) and a differential refractometer and converted using polystyrene as a standard substance.
(感光性転写材料)
((感光性転写材料の第1の実施態様))
 本開示に係る感光性転写材料の第1の実施態様は、仮支持体上に中間層、およびレジスト層をこの順番に有し、中間層が、(A)成分として、発色時における波長範囲400nm~780nmの極大吸収波長が450nm以上であり、酸、塩基又はラジカルにより極大吸収波長が変化する色素を含有する。
 なお、上述した課題及び効果は、本開示に係る感光性転写材料の第1の実施態様における課題及び効果である。
(Photosensitive transfer material)
((First Embodiment of Photosensitive Transfer Material))
The first embodiment of the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure has an intermediate layer and a resist layer in this order on a temporary support, and the intermediate layer has a wavelength range of 400 nm during color development as the component (A). A maximum absorption wavelength of ˜780 nm is 450 nm or more, and a dye whose maximum absorption wavelength is changed by an acid, a base, or a radical is contained.
The problems and effects described above are the problems and effects in the first embodiment of the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure.
 ドライフィルムレジストである感光性転写材料は、露光部分の確認の観点から、露光部分の視認性が求められる。視認性付与のために、発色剤をレジスト層に導入することが知られているが、それは様々な悪影響が懸念される。本発明者らは発色機構をレジスト層ではなく、中間層に導入することで、様々な悪影響の懸念が低減された感光性転写材料を提供できることを見出した。 A photosensitive transfer material that is a dry film resist is required to have visibility of an exposed portion from the viewpoint of confirmation of the exposed portion. In order to impart visibility, it is known to introduce a color former into the resist layer, but there are concerns about various adverse effects. The present inventors have found that a photosensitive transfer material can be provided in which the concern about various adverse effects is reduced by introducing the coloring mechanism into the intermediate layer instead of the resist layer.
 本発明者らは鋭意検討を重ねた結果、上記構成の感光性転写材料とすることにより、露光部及び未露光部の視認性に優れる感光性転写材料が得られることを見出した。 As a result of intensive studies, the present inventors have found that a photosensitive transfer material excellent in the visibility of exposed and unexposed areas can be obtained by using the photosensitive transfer material having the above-described configuration.
 本開示の感光性転写材料は、露光をした場合、未露光部において色素の発色又は消色の発生を抑制し、露光部においてのみ色素の発色又は消色を発生させることができる。その結果、発色又は消色が発生した部分と発生していない部分とを視認して区別することが容易となり、優れた視認性が得られると推察される。
 上記の点において、露光によって(A)成分である色素の発色又は消色を促す材料(例えば、後述する光酸発生剤等)を含むことが好ましい。
When exposed, the photosensitive transfer material of the present disclosure can suppress the occurrence of coloring or decoloring of the dye in the unexposed area, and can cause the coloring or decoloring of the dye only in the exposed area. As a result, it becomes easy to visually distinguish and distinguish between a portion where color development or decoloration has occurred and a portion where color development or decoloration has not occurred, and it is assumed that excellent visibility is obtained.
In view of the above, it is preferable to include a material (for example, a photoacid generator described later) that promotes color development or decoloration of the pigment as component (A) by exposure.
 本開示における感光性転写材料は、現像における除去性が露光により低下する、いわゆるネガ型の感光性転写材料であってもよいし、現像における除去性が露光により増加する、いわゆるポジ型の感光性転写材料であってもよい。
 ポジ型感光性転写材料である場合、感光性転写材料は、化学増幅ポジ型感光性転写材料であることが好ましい。
The photosensitive transfer material in the present disclosure may be a so-called negative photosensitive transfer material in which the removability in development is reduced by exposure, or the so-called positive photosensitivity in which the removability in development is increased by exposure. It may be a transfer material.
In the case of a positive photosensitive transfer material, the photosensitive transfer material is preferably a chemically amplified positive photosensitive transfer material.
 また、本開示に係る感光性転写材料は、NQD(ナフトキノンジアジド)を用いるNQD系感光性転写材料とすることができる。
 ナフトキノンジアジドとしては、例えば、特開2004-126047号公報の段落0201に記載のナフトキノンジアジドを用いることができる。
 また、本開示の感光性転写材料をNQD系感光性転写材料とする場合には、ノボラック樹脂を含むことが好ましい。
 ノボラック樹脂としては、例えば、特開2004-126047号公報の段落0201に記載のノボラック樹脂を用いることができる。
 以下、本開示に係る感光性転写材料の第1の実施態様について、詳細に説明する。
 なお、以下の発明の詳細な説明欄の本開示に係る感光性転写材料の第2の実施態様の説明部分よりも前の部分において、単に「感光性転写材料」という場合は、断りのない限り、「感光性転写材料の第1の実施態様」を指すものとする。
The photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure can be an NQD-based photosensitive transfer material using NQD (naphthoquinone diazide).
As the naphthoquinone diazide, for example, naphthoquinone diazide described in paragraph 0201 of JP-A No. 2004-126047 can be used.
Moreover, when making the photosensitive transfer material of this indication into a NQD type photosensitive transfer material, it is preferable that a novolak resin is included.
As the novolak resin, for example, the novolak resin described in paragraph 0201 of JP-A-2004-126047 can be used.
Hereinafter, the first embodiment of the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure will be described in detail.
In the following detailed description section of the invention, in the part before the explanation part of the second embodiment of the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure, when simply referred to as “photosensitive transfer material”, unless otherwise noted. , “First embodiment of photosensitive transfer material”.
[中間層]
 本開示に係る中間層は、発色時における波長範囲400nm~780nmの極大吸収波長が450nm以上であり、酸、塩基又はラジカルにより極大吸収波長が変化する色素〔(A)成分〕を含有する。また、上記中間層は、本開示に係る中間層組成物により形成された層であることが好ましい。さらに、上記中間層は、本開示に係る色素を含むことが好ましい。
 中間層としては、特開2005-259138号公報の段落0084~0087に記載の中間層を用いることができる。中間層としては、水又はアルカリ水溶液に分散又は溶解するものが好ましい。
[Middle layer]
The intermediate layer according to the present disclosure contains a dye (component (A)) that has a maximum absorption wavelength of 450 nm or more in a wavelength range of 400 nm to 780 nm at the time of color development, and whose maximum absorption wavelength is changed by an acid, a base, or a radical. Moreover, it is preferable that the said intermediate | middle layer is a layer formed with the intermediate | middle layer composition which concerns on this indication. Furthermore, it is preferable that the said intermediate | middle layer contains the pigment | dye which concerns on this indication.
As the intermediate layer, the intermediate layer described in paragraphs 0084 to 0087 of JP-A-2005-259138 can be used. The intermediate layer is preferably one that is dispersed or dissolved in water or an aqueous alkali solution.
<色素〔(A)成分〕>
 本開示に係る感光性転写材料の中間層は、発色時における波長範囲400nm~780nmの極大吸収波長が450nm以上であり、酸、塩基又はラジカルにより極大吸収波長が変化する色素を含有する。
<Dye [(A) component]>
The intermediate layer of the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure has a maximum absorption wavelength in the wavelength range of 400 nm to 780 nm at the time of color development of 450 nm or more, and contains a dye whose maximum absorption wavelength is changed by an acid, a base, or a radical.
 色素が「酸、塩基又はラジカルにより極大吸収波長が変化する」とは、発色状態にある色素が酸、塩基又はラジカルにより消色する態様、消色状態にある色素が酸、塩基又はラジカルにより発色する態様、発色状態にある色素が他の色相の発色状態に変化する態様のいずれの態様を指すものであってもよい。
 具体的には、色素は、露光により消色状態から変化して発色する化合物であってもよいし、露光により発色状態から変化して消色する化合物であってもよい。この場合、露光により酸、塩基またはラジカルが組成物内に導入されることにより、発色または消色の状態が変化する色素でもよく、酸、塩基またはラジカルが導入されることで系内の性状(例えばpH)が変化することで発色または消色の状態が変化する色素でもよい。また、露光を介さずに、酸、塩基またはラジカルが刺激として直接的に与えられて発色または消色の状態が変化する色素でもよい。
 中でも、視認性の観点から、露光により消色する化合物であることが好ましく、光酸発生剤から発生する酸により消色する潜在性色素、即ち、酸の発生によりpHが変化して消色するpH感受性色素であることがより好ましい。
“The maximum absorption wavelength is changed by an acid, base or radical” when the dye is in a state where the dye in a colored state is decolored by an acid, base or radical, and the dye in a decolored state is colored by an acid, base or radical It may refer to any of the embodiments in which the dye in a colored state changes to a colored state in another hue.
Specifically, the coloring matter may be a compound that changes color from a decolored state upon exposure, or a compound that changes color from a colored state upon exposure. In this case, it may be a dye whose color development or decoloring state is changed by introducing an acid, a base or a radical into the composition by exposure, and by introducing an acid, a base or a radical, the properties in the system ( For example, it may be a dye whose coloring or decoloring state changes when pH) changes. Further, it may be a dye that changes its color development or decoloration state by being directly applied as a stimulus with acid, base or radical without exposure.
Among these, from the viewpoint of visibility, a compound that is decolored by exposure is preferable, and a latent dye that is decolored by an acid generated from a photoacid generator, that is, the pH is changed by the generation of an acid to be decolored. More preferably a pH sensitive dye.
 pH感受性色素であることの確認は、以下の方法により行える。
 色素0.1gを、エタノール及び水の混合溶液(エタノール/水=1/2[質量比])100mLに溶かし、0.1mol/l(1N)の塩酸水溶液を加えてpH=1に調整する。0.01mol/l(0.01N)の水酸化ナトリウム水溶液で滴定し、発色変化と発色変化が現れた際のpHとを確認する。なお、pHは、pHメーター(型番:HM-31、東亜DKK社製)を用いて25℃で測定される値である。
Confirmation of the pH-sensitive dye can be performed by the following method.
0.1 g of the dye is dissolved in 100 mL of a mixed solution of ethanol and water (ethanol / water = 1/2 [mass ratio]), and 0.1 mol / l (1N) aqueous hydrochloric acid solution is added to adjust to pH = 1. Titrate with a 0.01 mol / l (0.01 N) aqueous sodium hydroxide solution to confirm the color change and the pH at which the color change appears. The pH is a value measured at 25 ° C. using a pH meter (model number: HM-31, manufactured by Toa DKK).
 本開示における色素の発色機構の例としては、例えば以下の態様があり得る。
 中間層に光酸発生剤、光塩基発生剤又は光ラジカル発生剤を添加して、露光した後に上記光酸発生剤等から発生する酸、塩基又はラジカルによって、酸反応性色素、塩基反応性色素又はラジカル反応性色素(例えば水溶性のロイコ色素)が発色する。
 特に、化学増幅ポジ型の感光性転写材料の場合には、以下の態様もあり得る。
 レジスト層に後述する光酸発生剤を添加して、露光した後にレジスト層に含まれる光酸発生剤が中間層に移動して酸を発生させる。そして、上記発生した酸によって酸反応性色素(例えば水溶性のロイコ色素)が発色する。
Examples of the coloring mechanism of the dye in the present disclosure may include the following aspects.
A photoacid generator, a photobase generator or a photoradical generator is added to the intermediate layer, and after exposure, an acid-reactive dye or a base-reactive dye is generated by the acid, base or radical generated from the photoacid generator or the like after exposure. Alternatively, a radical reactive dye (for example, a water-soluble leuco dye) develops color.
In particular, in the case of a chemically amplified positive-type photosensitive transfer material, the following modes may be employed.
A photoacid generator described later is added to the resist layer, and after exposure, the photoacid generator contained in the resist layer moves to the intermediate layer to generate an acid. Then, an acid-reactive dye (for example, a water-soluble leuco dye) is colored by the generated acid.
 色素は、発色時における波長範囲400nm~780nmにおける極大吸収波長が450nm以上であり、視認性の観点から、550nm以上であることが好ましく、550nm以上700nm以下であることがより好ましく、550nm以上650nm以下であることが更に好ましい。
 また、色素は、発色時における波長範囲400nm~780nmの極大吸収波長を1つのみ有していてもよく、2つ以上有していてもよい。色素が発色時における波長範囲400nm~780nmの極大吸収波長を2つ以上有する場合は、少なくとも1つの2つ以上の発色時における極大吸収波長のうち、吸光度の最も高い発色時における極大吸収波長が450nm以上であればよい。
The dye has a maximum absorption wavelength in the wavelength range of 400 nm to 780 nm during color development of 450 nm or more, and from the viewpoint of visibility, is preferably 550 nm or more, more preferably 550 nm to 700 nm, and more preferably 550 nm to 650 nm. More preferably.
Further, the dye may have only one maximum absorption wavelength in the wavelength range of 400 nm to 780 nm at the time of color development, or may have two or more. When the dye has two or more maximum absorption wavelengths in the wavelength range of 400 nm to 780 nm at the time of color development, the maximum absorption wavelength at the time of color development having the highest absorbance is 450 nm among at least one of the two or more maximum absorption wavelengths at the time of color development. That is all you need.
 極大吸収波長の測定方法は、大気の雰囲気下で、25℃にて分光光度計:UV3100((株)島津製作所製)を用いて、400nm~780nmの範囲で透過スペクトルを測定し、光の強度が極小となる波長(極大吸収波長)を測定するものとする。 The maximum absorption wavelength is measured by measuring a transmission spectrum in the range of 400 nm to 780 nm using a spectrophotometer: UV3100 (manufactured by Shimadzu Corporation) at 25 ° C. in the atmosphere of air, and measuring the light intensity. The wavelength at which is minimized (maximum absorption wavelength) shall be measured.
 露光により発色および消色する色素としては、例えば、ロイコ化合物が挙げられる。
 また、露光により消色する色素としては、例えば、ロイコ化合物、ジアリールメタン系色素、オキザジン系色素、キサンテン系色素、イミノナフトキノン系色素、アゾメチン系色素、アントラキノン系色素等が挙げられる。
 中でも、色素としては、視認性の観点から、ロイコ化合物が好ましい。
 ロイコ化合物としては、トリアリールメタン系(例えばトリフェニルメタン系)、スピロピラン系、フルオラン系、ジアリールメタン系、ローダミンラクタム系、インドリルフタリド系、ロイコオーラミン系等のロイコ化合物が挙げられる。中でも、トリアリールメタン骨格を有するロイコ化合物(トリアリールメタン系色素)が好ましく、トリフェニルメタン系色素がより好ましい。
 また、ロイコ化合物としては、視認性の観点から、ラクトン環、スルチン環、又はスルトン環を有していることが好ましい。ロイコ化合物が、ラクトン環、スルチン環、又はスルトン環を有していることにより、例えば光酸発生剤から発生する酸と反応して、閉環状態に変化して消色する、または開環状態に変化して発色することができる。ラクトン環、スルチン環、又はスルトン環が開環するものが好ましく、スルトン環を有し、スルトン環が閉環して消色するロイコ化合物がより好ましい。
Examples of the dye that develops and decolors upon exposure include leuco compounds.
Examples of the dye that can be erased by exposure include leuco compounds, diarylmethane dyes, oxazine dyes, xanthene dyes, iminonaphthoquinone dyes, azomethine dyes, anthraquinone dyes, and the like.
Among these, as the pigment, a leuco compound is preferable from the viewpoint of visibility.
Examples of the leuco compound include triarylmethane-based (for example, triphenylmethane-based), spiropyran-based, fluoran-based, diarylmethane-based, rhodamine lactam-based, indolylphthalide-based, and leucooramine-based leuco compounds. Among them, a leuco compound (triarylmethane dye) having a triarylmethane skeleton is preferable, and a triphenylmethane dye is more preferable.
In addition, the leuco compound preferably has a lactone ring, a sultin ring, or a sultone ring from the viewpoint of visibility. When the leuco compound has a lactone ring, a sultin ring, or a sultone ring, it reacts with an acid generated from, for example, a photoacid generator to change to a ring-closed state and disappear, or to a ring-opened state. It can change and color. A lactone ring, a sultin ring, or a sultone ring that is opened is preferable, and a leuco compound that has a sultone ring and that discolors when the sultone ring is closed is more preferable.
 色素は、水系レジスト剥離液への色素の析出による欠陥を防止する目的で、水溶性の化合物であることが好ましい。
 色素が水溶性であるとは、25℃の水100質量部に対する色素の溶解量が0.1質量部以上(好ましくは1質量部以上、より好ましくは5質量部以上)であることを意味する。
The dye is preferably a water-soluble compound for the purpose of preventing defects due to precipitation of the dye in the aqueous resist stripping solution.
That the dye is water-soluble means that the amount of the dye dissolved in 100 parts by mass of water at 25 ° C. is 0.1 parts by mass or more (preferably 1 part by mass or more, more preferably 5 parts by mass or more). .
 上記の中でも、色素は、視認性の観点から、下記式Iで表される色素、下記式Iで表される色素の開環体及び上記開環体の中和体から選ばれる少なくとも1つを含むことが好ましい。 Among the above, from the viewpoint of visibility, the dye is at least one selected from a dye represented by the following formula I, a ring-opened product of the dye represented by the following formula I, and a neutralized product of the ring-opened product. It is preferable to include.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000005

 
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000005

 
 式(I)中、ArおよびAr’は、それぞれ独立に芳香族基を表す。R、R、RおよびRは、それぞれ独立に、水素原子または1価の置換基を表す。 In formula (I), Ar and Ar ′ each independently represents an aromatic group. R 1 , R 2 , R 3 and R 4 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a monovalent substituent.
 本開示における色素の閉環体、開環体、及び、開環体の中和体について、後述の化合物A-1を一例として以下に説明する。式(I)で表される他の化合物についても同様である。
 本開示の色素は、例えば以下に示すように、中間層中で閉環体、開環体及び開環体の中和体の平衡状態で存在する。例えば、中間層中のpHが酸性であれば、閉環体の存在比率が増大し、相対的に開環体及び開環体の中和体の存在比率が減少する。反対に中間層中のpHがアルカリ性であれば、開環体及び開環体の中和体の存在比率が増大し、相対的に閉環体の存在比率が減少する。
 そして、閉環体、開環体及び開環体の中和体では、それぞれ発色の際の色が異なるため、例えば中間層に光酸発生剤を含む場合に、露光した部分の中間層に含まれる光酸発生剤から酸が放出された結果、露光部分のpHが小さくなり、発色する色素の色が変化する。
 一方、未露光部については色の変化はない。これによって、露光部及び未露光部の良好な視認性を実現することができる。
The ring-closed body, ring-opened body, and neutralized body of the ring-opened body in the present disclosure will be described below using Compound A-1 described below as an example. The same applies to other compounds represented by formula (I).
The dye of the present disclosure exists in an equilibrium state of a ring-closed body, a ring-opened body, and a neutralized body of a ring-opened body in an intermediate layer, for example, as shown below. For example, if the pH in the intermediate layer is acidic, the abundance ratio of the ring-closed body increases, and the abundance ratio of the ring-opened body and the neutralized body of the ring-opening body relatively decreases. On the contrary, if the pH in the intermediate layer is alkaline, the abundance ratio of the ring-opened product and the neutralized product of the ring-opened product increases, and the abundance ratio of the ring-closed product relatively decreases.
Since the ring-closed body, ring-opened body, and neutralized body of the ring-opened body have different colors at the time of color development, for example, when the intermediate layer contains a photoacid generator, it is included in the exposed intermediate layer. As a result of the release of the acid from the photoacid generator, the pH of the exposed portion is reduced, and the color of the coloring dye changes.
On the other hand, there is no color change in the unexposed area. Thereby, good visibility of the exposed part and the unexposed part can be realized.
 上記平衡状態において、中間層中のpHを調整し、閉環体、開環体及び開環体の中和体の存在比率を調整するために、pH調整剤である(G)成分(NaOHなど)を用いることが好ましい。 In the above equilibrium state, in order to adjust the pH in the intermediate layer and adjust the abundance of the ring-closed body, ring-opened body and neutralized body of the ring-opened body, the component (G) that is a pH adjuster (such as NaOH) Is preferably used.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000006

 
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000006

 
 式(I)のAr及びAr’における芳香族基は、アリール基であっても、ヘテロアリール基であってもよく、また、単環の芳香族基であっても、2環以上が縮合した縮合環であってもよい。
 また、式(I)のAr及びAr’は、結合して環を形成してもよい。さらに、Ar及びAr’は、五員環又は六員環であることが好ましい。
 式(I)のAr及びAr’における芳香族基は、置換基を有していてもよい。また、Ar及びAr’は、上記置換基を複数有していてもよい。
 上記置換基としては、ヒドロキシ基、ハロゲン原子、アルキル基、アリール基、アルコキシ基、アリーロキシ基、ジアルキルアミノ基、アルキルアリールアミノ基、ジアリールアミノ基等が挙げられ、ヒドロキシ基、ハロゲン基、ジアルキルアミノ基、アルキルアリールアミノ基、ジアリールアミノ基であることが好ましい。
 上記置換基は、オルト位、メタ位又はパラ位の少なくとも1つに結合することができる。中でも、オルト位又はパラ位の少なくとも1つに結合することが好ましく、少なくともパラ位に結合することがより好ましい。
 上記ハロゲン原子は、ブロモ原子(臭素原子)およびヨウ素原子であることが好ましく、ブロモ原子(臭素原子)であることがより好ましい。また、上記アルキル基はそれぞれ独立に炭素数が1~20のアルキル基であることが好ましく、炭素数が1~10のアルキル基であることがより好ましい。
 これらの置換基は、更に置換基により置換されていてもよい。中でもAr及びAr’は、ヒドロキシ基を有するフェニル基、及びハロゲン原子によって置換されたフェニル基が好ましい。
 式(I)のAr及びAr’の総炭素数はそれぞれ独立に、感度及び視認性の観点から、4~50であることが好ましく、6~40であることがより好ましく、10~30であることが更に好ましい。
The aromatic group in Ar and Ar ′ in the formula (I) may be an aryl group or a heteroaryl group, and even if it is a monocyclic aromatic group, two or more rings are condensed. It may be a condensed ring.
Ar and Ar ′ in formula (I) may combine to form a ring. Furthermore, Ar and Ar ′ are preferably a 5-membered ring or a 6-membered ring.
The aromatic group in Ar and Ar ′ in formula (I) may have a substituent. Ar and Ar ′ may have a plurality of the above substituents.
Examples of the substituent include a hydroxy group, a halogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, a dialkylamino group, an alkylarylamino group, and a diarylamino group, and a hydroxy group, a halogen group, and a dialkylamino group. , Alkylarylamino group and diarylamino group are preferable.
The substituent can be bonded to at least one of the ortho position, the meta position, and the para position. Among them, it is preferable to bond to at least one of the ortho position and the para position, and it is more preferable to bond to at least the para position.
The halogen atom is preferably a bromo atom (bromine atom) and an iodine atom, and more preferably a bromo atom (bromine atom). The alkyl groups are preferably each independently an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, and more preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms.
These substituents may be further substituted with a substituent. Among them, Ar and Ar ′ are preferably a phenyl group having a hydroxy group and a phenyl group substituted by a halogen atom.
The total carbon number of Ar and Ar ′ in the formula (I) is preferably 4 to 50, more preferably 6 to 40, and more preferably 10 to 30 from the viewpoints of sensitivity and visibility. More preferably.
 式(I)のR、R、RおよびRは、それぞれ独立に水素原子、ヒドロキシ基、ハロゲン原子、アルキル基、アリール基、アルコキシ基、アリーロキシ基、ジアルキルアミノ基、アルキルアリールアミノ基、ジアリールアミノ基等が挙げられる。中でも水素原子が好ましい。 R 1 , R 2 , R 3 and R 4 in formula (I) are each independently a hydrogen atom, hydroxy group, halogen atom, alkyl group, aryl group, alkoxy group, aryloxy group, dialkylamino group, alkylarylamino group And a diarylamino group. Of these, a hydrogen atom is preferable.
 色素の好ましい具体例として、化合物A-1~A-15を以下に記載するが、本開示における色素はこれらに限定されないことは言うまでもない。 As preferred specific examples of the dye, compounds A-1 to A-15 are described below, but it goes without saying that the dye in the present disclosure is not limited thereto.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000007

 
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000007

 
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000008

 
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000008

 
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000009

 
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000009

 
 色素は、1種単独で使用しても、2種以上を使用してもよい。
 本開示に係る感光性転写材料における色素の含有量は、視認性の観点から、中間層組成物の全固形分に対し、0.01質量%~10質量%であることが好ましく、0.1質量%~8質量%であることがより好ましく、0.5質量%~5質量%であることが更に好ましい。
 なお、本開示において、中間層組成物における「固形分」とは、揮発性成分(例えば、溶剤)を除いた成分を意味する。
The dye may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
The content of the dye in the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure is preferably 0.01% by mass to 10% by mass with respect to the total solid content of the intermediate layer composition from the viewpoint of visibility. It is more preferably from 8% by mass to 8% by mass, and further preferably from 0.5% by mass to 5% by mass.
In the present disclosure, the “solid content” in the intermediate layer composition means a component excluding a volatile component (for example, a solvent).
 ここで、色素の含有量は、中間層組成物に含まれる色素の全てを発色状態にした場合の色素の含有量を意味する。以下に、色素がpH感受性色素である場合における定量方法を説明する。
 中間層組成物に含まれる色素0.001g、および0.01gを、エタノール及び水の混合溶液(エタノール/水=1/2[質量比])100mLに溶かし、0.1mol/l(1N)の塩酸水溶液を加えてpH=1に調製し、または、0.01mol/l(0.01N)の水酸化ナトリウム水溶液を加えてpH=14に調製し、全ての色素を発色状態にする。その後、大気の雰囲気下で、25℃にて分光光度計(UV3100、(株)島津製作所製)を用いて、吸光度を測定し、検量線を作製する。
 次に、色素0.1gを中間層組成物0.1gに変更した以外は上記と同様の方法で、pH=1に調製、または、pH=14に調製して、吸光度を測定する。そして色素の吸光度から作製した検量線と中間層組成物の吸光度から、中間層組成物に含まれる色素の量を算出する。
Here, the content of the dye means the content of the dye when all of the dyes included in the intermediate layer composition are in a colored state. Below, the quantification method in case a pigment | dye is a pH sensitive pigment | dye is demonstrated.
Dissolve 0.001 g and 0.01 g of the dye contained in the intermediate layer composition in 100 mL of a mixed solution of ethanol and water (ethanol / water = 1/2 [mass ratio]), and add 0.1 mol / l (1 N). A hydrochloric acid aqueous solution is added to adjust to pH = 1, or a 0.01 mol / l (0.01N) aqueous sodium hydroxide solution is added to adjust to pH = 14, and all the dyes are brought into a colored state. Thereafter, the absorbance is measured using a spectrophotometer (UV3100, manufactured by Shimadzu Corporation) at 25 ° C. in an air atmosphere to prepare a calibration curve.
Next, the absorbance is measured by adjusting to pH = 1 or pH = 14 in the same manner as described above except that 0.1 g of the dye is changed to 0.1 g of the intermediate layer composition. Then, the amount of the dye contained in the intermediate layer composition is calculated from the calibration curve prepared from the absorbance of the dye and the absorbance of the intermediate layer composition.
<重合体>
 中間層は、重合体を含むことができる。
 中間層に用いられる重合体としては、水溶性樹脂が好ましい。水溶性樹脂としては、例えばセルロース系樹脂、ポリビニルアルコール系樹脂、ポリビニルピロリドン系樹脂、セルロース系樹脂、アクリルアミド系樹脂、ポリエチレンオキサイド系樹脂、ゼラチン、ビニルエーテル系樹脂、ポリアミド樹脂、及びこれらの共重合体などの樹脂が挙げられる。中でも好ましいのはセルロース系樹脂であり、更に好ましいのはヒドロキシプロピルセルロースとヒドロキシプロピルメチルセルロースである。
 なお、本開示における重合体の水溶性とは、25℃の水100質量部に対する重合体の溶解量が0.1質量部以上(好ましくは1質量部以上、より好ましくは5質量部以上)であることを意味する。
<Polymer>
The intermediate layer can include a polymer.
The polymer used for the intermediate layer is preferably a water-soluble resin. Examples of water-soluble resins include cellulose resins, polyvinyl alcohol resins, polyvinyl pyrrolidone resins, cellulose resins, acrylamide resins, polyethylene oxide resins, gelatin, vinyl ether resins, polyamide resins, and copolymers thereof. These resins are mentioned. Of these, cellulose-based resins are preferable, and hydroxypropylcellulose and hydroxypropylmethylcellulose are more preferable.
The water solubility of the polymer in the present disclosure means that the amount of the polymer dissolved in 100 parts by mass of water at 25 ° C. is 0.1 parts by mass or more (preferably 1 part by mass or more, more preferably 5 parts by mass or more). It means that there is.
 本開示に係る感光性転写材料における重合体の含有量は、密着性の観点から、中間層組成物の全固形分に対し、20質量%~100質量%であることが好ましく、50質量%~100質量%であることがより好ましい。 The content of the polymer in the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure is preferably 20% by mass to 100% by mass, and preferably 50% by mass to the total solid content of the intermediate layer composition from the viewpoint of adhesion. More preferably, it is 100 mass%.
<界面活性剤>
 中間層には、膜厚均一性の観点から界面活性剤を含有することが好ましい。界面活性剤としては、アニオン系、カチオン系、ノニオン系(非イオン系)、又は、両性のいずれでも使用することができるが、好ましい界面活性剤はノニオン系界面活性剤である。
 ノニオン系界面活性剤の例としては、前述したものである。
<Surfactant>
The intermediate layer preferably contains a surfactant from the viewpoint of film thickness uniformity. As the surfactant, any of anionic, cationic, nonionic (nonionic), or amphoteric can be used, but a preferred surfactant is a nonionic surfactant.
Examples of nonionic surfactants are those described above.
<無機フィラー>
 中間層には無機フィラーを含むことができる。本開示における無機フィラーは特に制限はない。シリカ粒子、酸化アルミニウム粒子、酸化ジルコニウム粒子等が挙げられ、シリカ粒子がより好ましい。透明性の観点から粒径の小さい粒子が好ましく、100nm以下の平均粒径のものが更に好ましい。例えば市販品であればスノーテックス(登録商標)が好適に用いられる。
<Inorganic filler>
The intermediate layer can contain an inorganic filler. The inorganic filler in the present disclosure is not particularly limited. Silica particles, aluminum oxide particles, zirconium oxide particles and the like can be mentioned, and silica particles are more preferable. From the viewpoint of transparency, particles having a small particle diameter are preferable, and those having an average particle diameter of 100 nm or less are more preferable. For example, if it is a commercial product, Snowtex (registered trademark) is preferably used.
 本開示に係る感光性転写材料における無機フィラーの体積分率(中間層における粒子が占める体積割合)は、中間層と感光層との密着性の観点から、中間層組成物の全固形分に対し、10質量%~80質量%であることが好ましく、20質量%~60質量%であることがより好ましい。 The volume fraction of the inorganic filler in the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure (volume ratio of particles in the intermediate layer) is based on the total solid content of the intermediate layer composition from the viewpoint of adhesion between the intermediate layer and the photosensitive layer. The content is preferably 10% by mass to 80% by mass, and more preferably 20% by mass to 60% by mass.
<pH調整剤〔(G)成分〕>
 中間層にはpH調整剤を含むことができる。pH調整剤を含むことで、組成物中の色素の発色状態または消色状態をより安定的に維持することができ、基板への密着性がより向上する。
 本開示におけるpH調整剤は特に制限はない。例えば水酸化ナトリウム、水酸化カリウム、水酸化リチウム、有機アミン、有機アンモニウム塩等が挙げられる。水溶性の観点から水酸化ナトリウムが好ましい。レジスト層と中間層との密着性の観点からは、有機アンモニウム塩が好ましい。
 有機アンモニウム塩としては、1級アンモニウム塩、2級アンモニウム塩、3級アンモニウム塩、4級アンモニウム塩が挙げられ、4級アンモニウム塩が好ましい。
 4級アンモニウム塩としては、置換基を有していてもよいテトラアルキルアンモニウムヒドロキシドが挙げられ、具体的な例としては、テトラメチルアンモニウムヒドロキシド、トリエチルメチルアンモニウムヒドロキシド、テトラエチルアンモニウムヒドロキシド、テトラプロピルアンモニウムヒドロキシド、テトラブチルアンモニウムヒドロキシド、テトラヘキシルアンモニウムヒドロキシド、ヘキサデシルトリメチルアンモニウムヒドロキシド、コリン、ベンジルトリメチルアンモニウム、ベンジルトリエチルアンモニウム、トリス(2-ヒドロキシエチル)メチルアンモニウムヒドロキシド等が挙げられる。
 中でも、炭素数1~30(好ましくは炭素数10~30、より好ましくは炭素数10~25)のアルキル基を有するテトラアルキルアンモニウムヒドロキシドがより好ましい。置換基を有する場合の置換基としては、炭素数6~12のアリール基(例えばフェニル基)、ヒドロキシ基等を挙げることができる。
<PH adjuster [(G) component]>
The intermediate layer can contain a pH adjusting agent. By including the pH adjusting agent, the coloring state or decoloring state of the dye in the composition can be more stably maintained, and the adhesion to the substrate is further improved.
There is no restriction | limiting in particular in the pH adjuster in this indication. Examples thereof include sodium hydroxide, potassium hydroxide, lithium hydroxide, organic amine, and organic ammonium salt. Sodium hydroxide is preferred from the viewpoint of water solubility. From the viewpoint of adhesion between the resist layer and the intermediate layer, an organic ammonium salt is preferable.
Examples of organic ammonium salts include primary ammonium salts, secondary ammonium salts, tertiary ammonium salts, and quaternary ammonium salts, with quaternary ammonium salts being preferred.
Examples of the quaternary ammonium salt include tetraalkylammonium hydroxide which may have a substituent. Specific examples include tetramethylammonium hydroxide, triethylmethylammonium hydroxide, tetraethylammonium hydroxide, tetra Examples thereof include propylammonium hydroxide, tetrabutylammonium hydroxide, tetrahexylammonium hydroxide, hexadecyltrimethylammonium hydroxide, choline, benzyltrimethylammonium, benzyltriethylammonium, tris (2-hydroxyethyl) methylammonium hydroxide.
Among them, tetraalkylammonium hydroxide having an alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms (preferably 10 to 30 carbon atoms, more preferably 10 to 25 carbon atoms) is more preferable. In the case of having a substituent, examples of the substituent include an aryl group having 6 to 12 carbon atoms (for example, a phenyl group) and a hydroxy group.
 本開示に係る感光性転写材料におけるpH調整剤の含有量は、色素の発色状態または消色状態を安定的にする観点から、中間層組成物の全固形分に対し、1質量%~50質量%であることが好ましく、3質量%~30質量%であることがより好ましい。 The content of the pH adjusting agent in the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure is 1% by mass to 50% by mass with respect to the total solid content of the intermediate layer composition from the viewpoint of stabilizing the coloring or decoloring state of the dye. %, Preferably 3% by mass to 30% by mass.
<光酸発生剤>
 本開示における感光性転写材料がネガ型感光性転写材料である場合、中間層には光酸発生剤を含むことができる。上記光酸発生剤は特に制限はない。それらは後述の光酸発生剤と同様のものであってもよい。光酸発生剤は中間層組成物に含有させて予め塗設することもできるが、レジスト層組成物を塗布した際に拡散を起こし、中間層に含有させることもできる。
<Photo acid generator>
When the photosensitive transfer material in the present disclosure is a negative photosensitive transfer material, the intermediate layer can contain a photoacid generator. The photoacid generator is not particularly limited. They may be the same as the photoacid generator described below. The photoacid generator can be included in the intermediate layer composition and applied in advance. However, when the resist layer composition is applied, the photoacid generator diffuses and can be included in the intermediate layer.
<光ラジカル発生剤>
 本開示における感光性転写材料がネガ型感光性転写材料である場合、上記感光性転写材料は光ラジカル発生剤を含有することができる。
<Photoradical generator>
When the photosensitive transfer material in the present disclosure is a negative photosensitive transfer material, the photosensitive transfer material can contain a photoradical generator.
 光ラジカル発生剤としては、例えば、ジメチルアミノ安息香酸エチル(DBE、CAS No.10287-53-3)、ベンゾインメチルエーテル、アニシル(p,p’-ジメトキシベンジル)、TAZ-110(商品名:みどり化学株式会社製)、ベンゾフェノン、TAZ-111(商品名:みどり化学株式会社製)、IrgacureOXE01、OXE02、OXE03(BASF社製)、Omnirad651及び369(商品名:IGM Resins B.V.社製)、2,2’-ビス(2-クロロフェニル)-4,4’,5,5’-テトラフェニル-1,2’-ビイミダゾール(東京化成社製)などを挙げることができる。
 また、後述する光重合開始剤も光ラジカル発生剤として用いることができる。
Examples of the photo radical generator include ethyl dimethylaminobenzoate (DBE, CAS No. 10287-53-3), benzoin methyl ether, anisyl (p, p′-dimethoxybenzyl), TAZ-110 (trade name: Midori) Chemical Co., Ltd.), benzophenone, TAZ-111 (trade name: Midori Chemical Co., Ltd.), Irgacure OXE01, OXE02, OXE03 (BASF), Omnirad 651 and 369 (trade names: IGM Resins BV) Examples include 2,2′-bis (2-chlorophenyl) -4,4 ′, 5,5′-tetraphenyl-1,2′-biimidazole (manufactured by Tokyo Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.).
Moreover, the photoinitiator mentioned later can also be used as a photoradical generator.
<光塩基発生剤>
 本開示における感光性転写材料がネガ型感光性転写材料である場合、上記感光性転写材料は光塩基発生剤を含有することができる。
<Photobase generator>
When the photosensitive transfer material in the present disclosure is a negative photosensitive transfer material, the photosensitive transfer material can contain a photobase generator.
 光塩基発生剤の例としては、2-ニトロベンジルシクロヘキシルカルバメート、トリフェニルメタノール、O-カルバモイルヒドロキシルアミド、O-カルバモイルオキシム、[[(2,6-ジニトロベンジル)オキシ]カルボニル]シクロヘキシルアミン、ビス[[(2-ニトロベンジル)オキシ]カルボニル]ヘキサン1,6-ジアミン、4-(メチルチオベンゾイル)-1-メチル-1-モルホリノエタン、(4-モルホリノベンゾイル)-1-ベンジル-1-ジメチルアミノプロパン、N-(2-ニトロベンジルオキシカルボニル)ピロリジン、ヘキサアンミンコバルト(III)トリス(トリフェニルメチルボレート)、2-ベンジル-2-ジメチルアミノ-1-(4-モルホリノフェニル)-ブタノン、2,6-ジメチル-3,5-ジアセチル-4-(2-ニトロフェニル)-1,4-ジヒドロピリジン、2,6-ジメチル-3,5-ジアセチル-4-(2,4-ジニトロフェニル)-1,4-ジヒドロピリジン等を挙げることができる。
 熱塩基発生剤の例としては、国際公開第2015/199219号に記載の化合物を用いることができる。
Examples of photobase generators include 2-nitrobenzylcyclohexyl carbamate, triphenylmethanol, O-carbamoylhydroxylamide, O-carbamoyloxime, [[(2,6-dinitrobenzyl) oxy] carbonyl] cyclohexylamine, bis [ [(2-Nitrobenzyl) oxy] carbonyl] hexane 1,6-diamine, 4- (methylthiobenzoyl) -1-methyl-1-morpholinoethane, (4-morpholinobenzoyl) -1-benzyl-1-dimethylaminopropane N- (2-nitrobenzyloxycarbonyl) pyrrolidine, hexaamminecobalt (III) tris (triphenylmethylborate), 2-benzyl-2-dimethylamino-1- (4-morpholinophenyl) -butanone, 2,6 -Dimethyl-3, -Diacetyl-4- (2-nitrophenyl) -1,4-dihydropyridine, 2,6-dimethyl-3,5-diacetyl-4- (2,4-dinitrophenyl) -1,4-dihydropyridine, etc. Can do.
As examples of the thermal base generator, compounds described in International Publication No. 2015/199219 can be used.
-中間層の平均膜厚-
 上記中間層の平均膜厚は、中間層とレジスト層との密着性、及び、パターン形成性の観点から、0.3μm~10μmが好ましく、0.3μm~5μmがより好ましく、0.3μm~2μmが特に好ましい。
 本開示における各層の平均膜厚の測定方法は、特に制限はなく、公知の方法を用いることができる。また、平均値は10点以上測定し算出することが好ましい。
 具体的には例えば、表面形状測定や、断面の光学顕微鏡又は電子顕微鏡観察等が挙げられる。また、表面形状測定には、ブルカー社製Dektakシリーズを好適に使用することができる。また、断面観察には、走査型電子顕微鏡(SEM)を好適に用いることができる。
 また、上記中間層の厚みは、上記レジスト層の厚みより薄いことが好ましい。
-Average thickness of intermediate layer-
The average film thickness of the intermediate layer is preferably 0.3 μm to 10 μm, more preferably 0.3 μm to 5 μm, and more preferably 0.3 μm to 2 μm from the viewpoints of adhesion between the intermediate layer and the resist layer and pattern formability. Is particularly preferred.
There is no restriction | limiting in particular in the measuring method of the average film thickness of each layer in this indication, A well-known method can be used. The average value is preferably measured and calculated at 10 points or more.
Specific examples include surface shape measurement and cross-sectional optical microscope or electron microscope observation. In addition, Bruker's Dektak series can be suitably used for surface shape measurement. Moreover, a scanning electron microscope (SEM) can be used suitably for cross-sectional observation.
Moreover, it is preferable that the thickness of the said intermediate | middle layer is thinner than the thickness of the said resist layer.
 上記中間層は、2層以上の層を有することができる。
 上記中間層が2層以上の層を有する場合、各層の平均膜厚は上記範囲内であれば特に限定されないが、上記中間層における2層以上の層のうち、レジスト層に最も近い層の平均膜厚は、中間層とレジスト層との密着性、及び、パターン形成性の観点から、0.3μm~10μmが好ましく、0.3μm~5μmがより好ましく、0.3μm~2.0μmが特に好ましい。
The intermediate layer can have two or more layers.
When the intermediate layer has two or more layers, the average film thickness of each layer is not particularly limited as long as it is within the above range. Of the two or more layers in the intermediate layer, the average of the layers closest to the resist layer The film thickness is preferably 0.3 μm to 10 μm, more preferably 0.3 μm to 5 μm, and particularly preferably 0.3 μm to 2.0 μm, from the viewpoints of adhesion between the intermediate layer and the resist layer and pattern formability. .
-中間層の形成方法-
 各成分、及び、溶剤をあらかじめ定めた割合でかつ任意の方法で混合し、撹拌溶解して中間層を形成するための中間層組成物を調製することができる。例えば、各成分を、それぞれ予め溶剤に溶解させた溶液とした後、得られた溶液をあらかじめ定めた割合で混合して組成物を調製することもできる。以上の如くして調製した組成物は、孔径3.0μmのフィルター等を用いてろ過した後に、使用に供することもできる。
-Formation method of intermediate layer-
An intermediate layer composition for forming an intermediate layer by mixing each component and a solvent in a predetermined ratio at an arbitrary method, and dissolving by stirring can be prepared. For example, it is possible to prepare a composition by preparing each solution of each component in advance in a solvent and then mixing the obtained solution at a predetermined ratio. The composition prepared as described above can be used after being filtered using a filter having a pore size of 3.0 μm.
 中間層組成物を仮支持体に塗布し、乾燥させることで、仮支持体上に中間層を形成することができる。塗布方法は特に限定されず、スリット塗布、スピン塗布、カーテン塗布、インクジェット塗布などの公知の方法で塗布することができる。 The intermediate layer can be formed on the temporary support by applying the intermediate layer composition to the temporary support and drying it. The coating method is not particularly limited, and the coating can be performed by a known method such as slit coating, spin coating, curtain coating, and inkjet coating.
[レジスト層]
 本開示に係るレジスト層は、感光性を有し、露光後に現像液で現像することでパターンニング可能な層である。レジスト層は、酸基が酸分解性基で保護された基を有する構成単位を含有する重合体、及び光酸発生剤を含有することが好ましい。上記レジスト層は、本開示におけるレジスト層組成物により形成された層であることが好ましい。
 また、本開示におけるレジスト層は、高感度の観点で化学増幅ポジ型レジスト層であることが好ましい。
[Resist layer]
The resist layer according to the present disclosure is a layer that has photosensitivity and can be patterned by developing with a developer after exposure. The resist layer preferably contains a polymer containing a structural unit having a group in which an acid group is protected by an acid-decomposable group, and a photoacid generator. It is preferable that the said resist layer is a layer formed with the resist layer composition in this indication.
The resist layer in the present disclosure is preferably a chemically amplified positive resist layer from the viewpoint of high sensitivity.
<酸基が酸分解性基で保護された基を有する構成単位を含有する重合体〔(B)成分〕>
 本開示に係るレジスト層組成物は、酸基が酸分解性基で保護された基を有する構成単位(「構成単位b」ともいう。)を含有する重合体(「特定重合体」ともいう。)を含有することができる。
 また、本開示に係るレジスト層組成物は、構成単位bを有する特定重合体に加え、他の重合体を含んでいてもよい。本開示においては、構成単位bを有する特定重合体及び他の重合体をあわせて、「重合体成分」ともいう。
 上記特定重合体は、露光により生じる触媒量の酸性物質の作用により、特定重合体中の酸分解性で保護された酸基を有する構成単位bが脱保護反応を受け酸基となる。この酸基により、現像による溶解が可能となる。
 以下に構成単位bの好ましい態様について説明する。
<Polymer Containing Constituent Unit Having Acid Group Derived from Acid-Decomposable Group [Component (B)]>
The resist layer composition according to the present disclosure is also referred to as a polymer (also referred to as “specific polymer”) containing a structural unit having an acid group protected by an acid-decomposable group (also referred to as “structural unit b”). ) Can be contained.
In addition to the specific polymer having the structural unit b, the resist layer composition according to the present disclosure may contain another polymer. In the present disclosure, the specific polymer having the structural unit b and other polymers are also collectively referred to as “polymer component”.
In the specific polymer, the structural unit b having an acid-decomposable and protected acid group in the specific polymer undergoes a deprotection reaction to be an acid group by the action of a catalytic amount of an acidic substance generated by exposure. This acid group enables dissolution by development.
Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the structural unit b are described.
 特定重合体は、付加重合型の樹脂であることが好ましく、(メタ)アクリル酸又はそのエステルに由来する構成単位を有する重合体であることがより好ましい。なお、(メタ)アクリル酸又はそのエステルに由来する構成単位以外の構成単位、例えば、スチレンに由来する構成単位、ビニル化合物に由来する構成単位等を有していてもよい。 The specific polymer is preferably an addition polymerization type resin, and more preferably a polymer having a structural unit derived from (meth) acrylic acid or an ester thereof. In addition, you may have structural units other than the structural unit derived from (meth) acrylic acid or its ester, for example, the structural unit derived from styrene, the structural unit derived from a vinyl compound, etc.
 上記レジスト層組成物は、パターン形状の形成性、現像液への溶解性及び転写性の観点から、重合体成分として、上記構成単位bとして下記式IIで表される構成単位b1を有する重合体を含むことが好ましく、重合体成分として、上記構成単位bとして下記式IIで表される構成単位b1を有し、かつガラス転移温度が90℃以下である特定重合体を含むことが好ましく、重合体成分として、上記構成単位bとして下記式IIで表される構成単位b1、及び、後述する酸基を有する構成単位bbを有し、かつガラス転移温度が90℃以下である特定重合体を含むことが更に好ましい。
 上記レジスト層組成物に含まれる特定重合体は、1種のみであっても、2種以上であってもよい。
The resist layer composition is a polymer having a structural unit b1 represented by the following formula II as the structural unit b as a polymer component from the viewpoint of pattern formability, solubility in a developer, and transferability. The polymer component preferably includes a specific polymer having the structural unit b1 represented by the following formula II as the structural unit b and having a glass transition temperature of 90 ° C. or less. As a coalescence component, a specific polymer having a structural unit b1 represented by the following formula II as the structural unit b and a structural unit bb having an acid group described later and having a glass transition temperature of 90 ° C. or lower is included. More preferably.
The specific polymer contained in the resist layer composition may be one type or two or more types.
<<構成単位b>>
 上記重合体成分は、酸基が酸分解性基で保護された基を有する構成単位bを少なくとも有する重合体を含む。上記重合体成分が構成単位bを有する重合体を含むことにより、極めて高感度な化学増幅ポジ型のレジスト層組成物とすることができる。
 本開示における「酸分解性基で保護された酸基」は、酸分解性基として公知のものを使用でき、特に限定されない。酸分解性基としては、酸により比較的分解し易い基(例えば、後述する式IIで表される基で保護されたエステル基、テトラヒドロピラニルエステル基、又は、テトラヒドロフラニルエステル基等のアセタール系官能基)や酸により比較的分解し難い基(例えば、tert-ブチルエステル基等の第三級アルキル基、tert-ブチルカーボネート基等の第三級アルキルカーボネート基)を用いることができる。
 これらの中でも、上記酸分解性基としては、アセタールの形で保護された構造を有する基であることが好ましい。
<< constituent unit b >>
The polymer component includes a polymer having at least a structural unit b having a group in which an acid group is protected with an acid-decomposable group. By including the polymer having the structural unit b in the polymer component, an extremely sensitive chemically amplified positive resist layer composition can be obtained.
The “acid group protected with an acid-decomposable group” in the present disclosure can be any known acid-decomposable group, and is not particularly limited. Examples of the acid-decomposable group include groups that are relatively easily decomposed by an acid (for example, an acetal functional group such as an ester group, a tetrahydropyranyl ester group, or a tetrahydrofuranyl ester group protected with a group represented by the formula II described later). Group) or a group that is relatively difficult to be decomposed by an acid (for example, a tertiary alkyl group such as a tert-butyl ester group or a tertiary alkyl carbonate group such as a tert-butyl carbonate group).
Among these, the acid-decomposable group is preferably a group having a structure protected in the form of an acetal.
 上記酸基が酸分解性基で保護された基を有する構成単位bは、感度及び解像度の観点から、下記式IIで表される構成単位b1であることが好ましい。 The structural unit b having a group in which the acid group is protected with an acid-decomposable group is preferably a structural unit b1 represented by the following formula II from the viewpoint of sensitivity and resolution.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000010

 
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000010

 
 式II中、R及びRはそれぞれ独立に、水素原子、アルキル基又はアリール基を表し、少なくともR及びRのいずれか一方が、アルキル基又はアリール基であり、Rはアルキル基又はアリール基を表し、R又はRと、Rとが連結して環状エーテルを形成してもよく、Rは水素原子又はメチル基を表し、Xは単結合又はアリーレン基を表す。 In Formula II, R 1 and R 2 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, or an aryl group, at least one of R 1 and R 2 is an alkyl group or an aryl group, and R 3 is an alkyl group Or an aryl group, R 1 or R 2 and R 3 may be linked to form a cyclic ether, R 4 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, and X represents a single bond or an arylene group.
 式II中、R又はRがアルキル基の場合、炭素数は1~10のアルキル基が好ましい。R又はRがアリール基の場合、フェニル基が好ましい。R及びRは、それぞれ、水素原子又は炭素数1~4のアルキル基が好ましい。
 式II中、Rは、アルキル基又はアリール基を表し、炭素数1~10のアルキル基が好ましく、炭素数1~6のアルキル基がより好ましい。
 また、R~Rにおけるアルキル基及びアリール基は、置換基を有していてもよい。
 式II中、R又はRと、Rとが連結して環状エーテルを形成してもよく、R又はRと、Rとが連結して環状エーテルを形成することが好ましい。環状エーテルの環員数は特に制限はないが、5又は6であることが好ましく、5であることがより好ましい。
 式II中、Xは単結合又はアリーレン基を表し、単結合が好ましい。アリーレン基は、置換基を有していてもよい。
 特定重合体が式IIで表される構成単位b1を含むことで、パターン形成時の感度に優れ、また、解像度より優れる。
In the formula II, when R 1 or R 2 is an alkyl group, an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms is preferable. When R 1 or R 2 is an aryl group, a phenyl group is preferred. R 1 and R 2 are each preferably a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms.
In Formula II, R 3 represents an alkyl group or an aryl group, preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, and more preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms.
Further, the alkyl group and aryl group in R 1 to R 3 may have a substituent.
In Formula II, R 1 or R 2 and R 3 may be linked to form a cyclic ether, and R 1 or R 2 and R 3 are preferably linked to form a cyclic ether. The number of ring members of the cyclic ether is not particularly limited, but is preferably 5 or 6, and more preferably 5.
In Formula II, X represents a single bond or an arylene group, and a single bond is preferable. The arylene group may have a substituent.
When the specific polymer includes the structural unit b1 represented by the formula II, the sensitivity at the time of pattern formation is excellent and the resolution is superior.
 式II中、Rは水素原子又はメチル基を表し、特定重合体のガラス転移温度(Tg)をより低くし得るという観点から、水素原子であることが好ましい。
 より具体的には、特定重合体に含まれる構成単位b1の全量に対し、式IIにおけるRが水素原子である構成単位は20質量%以上であることが好ましい。
 なお、構成単位b1中の、式IIにおけるRが水素原子である構成単位の含有量(含有割合:質量比)は、13C-核磁気共鳴スペクトル(NMR)測定から常法により算出されるピーク強度の強度比により確認することができる。
In Formula II, R 4 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, and is preferably a hydrogen atom from the viewpoint that the glass transition temperature (Tg) of the specific polymer can be further lowered.
More specifically, the structural unit in which R 4 in Formula II is a hydrogen atom is preferably 20% by mass or more with respect to the total amount of the structural unit b1 contained in the specific polymer.
The content (content ratio: mass ratio) of the structural unit in which R 4 in formula II is a hydrogen atom in the structural unit b1 is calculated by a conventional method from 13 C-nuclear magnetic resonance spectrum (NMR) measurement. It can be confirmed by the intensity ratio of the peak intensity.
 式IIで表される構成単位b1の中でも、下記式b2で表される構成単位が、パターン形成時の感度を更に高める観点からより好ましい。 Among the structural unit b1 represented by the formula II, the structural unit represented by the following formula b2 is more preferable from the viewpoint of further increasing the sensitivity during pattern formation.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000011

 
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000011

 
 式b2中、R34は水素原子又はメチル基を表し、R35~R41はそれぞれ独立に、水素原子又は炭素数1~4のアルキル基を表す。
 式b2中、R34は水素原子が好ましい。
 式b2中、R35~R41は、水素原子が好ましい。
In the formula b2, R 34 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, and R 35 to R 41 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms.
In the formula b2, R 34 is preferably a hydrogen atom.
In the formula b2, R 35 to R 41 are preferably hydrogen atoms.
 式IIで表される、酸基が酸分解性基で保護された基を有する構成単位b1の好ましい具体例としては、下記の構成単位が例示できる。なお、R34は水素原子又はメチル基を表す。 Preferred specific examples of the structural unit b1 represented by formula II having a group in which an acid group is protected with an acid-decomposable group include the following structural units. R 34 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000012

 
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000012

 
<<構成単位b3>>
 また、上記構成単位bとしては、パターン形状の変形抑制の観点から、下記式b3で表される構成単位b3が好ましい。
<< Structural Unit b3 >>
The structural unit b is preferably a structural unit b3 represented by the following formula b3 from the viewpoint of suppressing deformation of the pattern shape.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000013

 
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000013

 
 式b3中、RB1及びRB2はそれぞれ独立に、水素原子、アルキル基又はアリール基を表し、少なくともRB1及びRB2のいずれか一方がアルキル基又はアリール基であり、RB3はアルキル基又はアリール基を表し、RB1又はRB2と、RB3とが連結して環状エーテルを形成してもよく、RB4は水素原子又はメチル基を表し、Xは単結合又は二価の連結基を表し、RB12は置換基を表し、nは0~4の整数を表す。 In Formula b3, R B1 and R B2 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, or an aryl group, at least one of R B1 and R B2 is an alkyl group or an aryl group, and R B3 is an alkyl group or Represents an aryl group, R B1 or R B2 and R B3 may be linked to form a cyclic ether, R B4 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, and X B represents a single bond or a divalent linking group; R B12 represents a substituent, and n represents an integer of 0 to 4.
 式b3中、RB1又はRB2がアルキル基の場合、炭素数は1~10のアルキル基が好ましい。RB1又はRB2がアリール基の場合、フェニル基が好ましい。RB1及びRB2は、それぞれ、水素原子又は炭素数1~4のアルキル基が好ましい。
 式b3中、RB3は、アルキル基又はアリール基を表し、炭素数1~10のアルキル基が好ましく、炭素数1~6のアルキル基がより好ましい。
 また、RB1~RB3におけるアルキル基及びアリール基は、置換基を有していてもよい。
 式b3中、RB1又はRB2と、RB3とが連結して環状エーテルを形成してもよく、RB1又はRB2と、RB3とが連結して環状エーテルを形成することが好ましい。環状エーテルの環員数は特に制限はないが、5又は6であることが好ましく、5であることがより好ましい。
 式b3中、Xは単結合又は二価の連結基を表し、単結合又はアルキレン基、-C(=O)O-、-C(=O)NR-、-O-又はこれらの組み合わせが好ましく、単結合がより好ましい。アルキレン基は、直鎖状でも分岐を有していても環状構造を有していてもよく、置換基を有していてもよい。アルキレン基の炭素数は1~10が好ましく、1~4がより好ましい。Xが-C(=O)O-を含む場合、-C(=O)O-に含まれる炭素原子と、RB4が結合した炭素原子とが直接結合する態様が好ましい。Xが-C(=O)NR-を含む場合、-C(=O)NR-に含まれる炭素原子と、RB4が結合した炭素原子とが直接結合する態様が好ましい。Rはアルキル基又は水素原子を表し、炭素数1~4のアルキル基又は水素原子が好ましく、水素原子がより好ましい。
 式b3中、RB1~RB3を含む基と、Xとは、互いにパラ位で結合することが好ましい。
 式b3中、RB12は置換基を表し、アルキル基又はハロゲン原子が好ましい。アルキル基の炭素数は、1~10が好ましく、1~4がより好ましい。
 式b3中、nは0~4の整数を表し、0又は1が好ましく、0がより好ましい。
In the formula b3, when R B1 or R B2 is an alkyl group, an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms is preferable. When R B1 or R B2 is an aryl group, a phenyl group is preferable. R B1 and R B2 are each preferably a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms.
In Formula b3, R B3 represents an alkyl group or an aryl group, preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, and more preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms.
In addition, the alkyl group and aryl group in R B1 to R B3 may have a substituent.
In Formula b3, R B1 or R B2 and R B3 may be linked to form a cyclic ether, and R B1 or R B2 and R B3 are preferably linked to form a cyclic ether. The number of ring members of the cyclic ether is not particularly limited, but is preferably 5 or 6, and more preferably 5.
In Formula b3, X B represents a single bond or a divalent linking group, and represents a single bond or an alkylene group, —C (═O) O—, —C (═O) NR N —, —O—, or a combination thereof. Are preferable, and a single bond is more preferable. The alkylene group may be linear, branched or cyclic, and may have a substituent. The alkylene group preferably has 1 to 10 carbon atoms, and more preferably 1 to 4 carbon atoms. When X B contains —C (═O) O—, an embodiment in which the carbon atom contained in —C (═O) O— and the carbon atom bonded to R B4 are directly bonded is preferable. When containing, -C (= O) NR N - - is X B -C (= O) NR N and carbon atoms contained in a mode in which the carbon atom to which R B4 is bonded is directly bonded is preferable. R N represents an alkyl group or a hydrogen atom, preferably an alkyl group or a hydrogen atom having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, more preferably a hydrogen atom.
In the formula b3, the group containing R B1 to R B3 and X B are preferably bonded to each other at the para position.
In Formula b3, R B12 represents a substituent, and is preferably an alkyl group or a halogen atom. The alkyl group preferably has 1 to 10 carbon atoms, and more preferably 1 to 4 carbon atoms.
In the formula b3, n represents an integer of 0 to 4, preferably 0 or 1, and more preferably 0.
 式b3中、RB4は水素原子又はメチル基を表し、特定重合体のTgをより低くし得るという観点から、水素原子であることが好ましい。
 より具体的には、特定重合体に含まれる構成単位bの全含有量に対し、式b3におけるRB4が水素原子である構成単位は20質量%以上であることが好ましい。
 なお、構成単位b中の、式b3におけるRB4が水素原子である構成単位の含有量(含有割合:質量比)は、13C-核磁気共鳴スペクトル(NMR)測定から常法により算出されるピーク強度の強度比により確認することができる。
In formula b3, R B4 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, and is preferably a hydrogen atom from the viewpoint of lowering the Tg of the specific polymer.
More specifically, the structural unit in which R B4 in formula b3 is a hydrogen atom is preferably 20% by mass or more with respect to the total content of structural unit b contained in the specific polymer.
Incidentally, in the structural unit b, the content of the structural unit R B4 is a hydrogen atom in the formula b3 (content: weight ratio) is calculated by the usual method from the 13 C- nuclear magnetic resonance spectra (NMR) measurements It can be confirmed by the intensity ratio of the peak intensity.
 式b3で表される構成単位の中でも、パターン形状の変形抑制の観点から、下記式b4で表される構成単位がより好ましい。 Among the structural units represented by the formula b3, the structural unit represented by the following formula b4 is more preferable from the viewpoint of suppressing deformation of the pattern shape.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000014

 
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000014

 
 式b4中、RB4は水素原子又はメチル基を表し、RB5~RB11はそれぞれ独立に、水素原子又は炭素数1~4のアルキル基を表し、RB12は置換基を表し、nは0~4の整数を表す。
 式b4中、RB4は水素原子が好ましい。
 式b4中、RB5~RB11は、水素原子が好ましい。
 式b4中、RB12は置換基を表し、アルキル基又はハロゲン原子が好ましい。アルキル基の炭素数は、1~10が好ましく、1~4がより好ましい。
 式b4中、nは0~4の整数を表し、0又は1が好ましく、0がより好ましい。
In formula b4, R B4 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, R B5 to R B11 each independently represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, R B12 represents a substituent, and n is 0 Represents an integer of ~ 4.
In formula b4, R B4 is preferably a hydrogen atom.
In formula b4, R B5 to R B11 are preferably hydrogen atoms.
In Formula b4, R B12 represents a substituent, and is preferably an alkyl group or a halogen atom. The alkyl group preferably has 1 to 10 carbon atoms, and more preferably 1 to 4 carbon atoms.
In the formula b4, n represents an integer of 0 to 4, preferably 0 or 1, and more preferably 0.
 式b4で表される構成単位b4の好ましい具体例としては、下記の構成単位が例示できる。なお、RB4は水素原子又はメチル基を表す。 Preferable specific examples of the structural unit b4 represented by the formula b4 include the following structural units. R B4 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000015

 
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000015

 
 特定重合体に含まれる構成単位bは、1種であっても、2種以上であってもよい。
 特定重合体における構成単位bの含有量は、特定重合体の全質量に対して、20質量%以上であることが好ましく、20質量%~90質量%であることがより好ましく、30質量%~70質量%であることが更に好ましい。
 特定重合体における構成単位bの含有量(含有割合:質量比)は、13C-NMR測定から常法により算出されるピーク強度の強度比により確認することができる。
また、全ての重合体成分を構成単位(モノマー単位)に分解したうえで、構成単位bの割合は、重合体成分の全質量に対して、5質量%~80質量%であることが好ましく、10質量%~80質量%であることがより好ましく、10質量%~40質量%であることが特に好ましく、10質量%~30質量%であることが最も好ましい。
The structural unit b contained in the specific polymer may be one type or two or more types.
The content of the structural unit b in the specific polymer is preferably 20% by mass or more, more preferably 20% by mass to 90% by mass, and more preferably 30% by mass to 30% by mass with respect to the total mass of the specific polymer. More preferably, it is 70 mass%.
The content (content ratio: mass ratio) of the structural unit b in the specific polymer can be confirmed by the intensity ratio of the peak intensity calculated by a conventional method from 13 C-NMR measurement.
Further, after decomposing all the polymer components into structural units (monomer units), the proportion of the structural unit b is preferably 5% by mass to 80% by mass with respect to the total mass of the polymer component, It is more preferably 10% by mass to 80% by mass, particularly preferably 10% by mass to 40% by mass, and most preferably 10% by mass to 30% by mass.
<<構成単位bb>>
 上記特定重合体は、酸基を有する構成単位bbを含むことが好ましい。
 構成単位bbは、保護基、例えば、酸分解性基で保護されていない酸基、すなわち、保護基を有さない酸基を含む構成単位である。特定重合体が構成単位bbを含むことで、パターン形成時の感度が良好となり、パターン露光後の現像工程においてアルカリ性の現像液に溶けやすくなり、現像時間の短縮化を図ることができる。
<< Structural Unit bb >>
The specific polymer preferably includes a structural unit bb having an acid group.
The structural unit bb is a structural unit including a protecting group, for example, an acid group that is not protected by an acid-decomposable group, that is, an acid group that does not have a protecting group. When the specific polymer contains the structural unit bb, the sensitivity at the time of pattern formation becomes good, and it becomes easy to dissolve in an alkaline developer in the development step after pattern exposure, and the development time can be shortened.
 特定重合体への酸基を有する構成単位の導入は、酸基を有するモノマーを共重合させることで行うことができる。
 構成単位bbである、酸基を含む構成単位は、スチレンに由来する構成単位若しくはビニル化合物に由来する構成単位に対して酸基が置換した構成単位、又は、(メタ)アクリル酸に由来する構成単位であることがより好ましい。
Introduction of a structural unit having an acid group into a specific polymer can be carried out by copolymerizing a monomer having an acid group.
The structural unit containing an acid group, which is the structural unit bb, is a structural unit derived from styrene or a structural unit derived from a vinyl compound by an acid group, or a structure derived from (meth) acrylic acid. More preferably it is a unit.
 特定重合体に含まれる構成単位bbは、1種のみであっても、2種以上であってもよい。
 特定重合体は、特定重合体の全質量に対し、酸基を有する構成単位(構成単位bb)を0.1質量%~20質量%含むことが好ましく、0.5質量%~15質量%含むことがより好ましく、1質量%~10質量%含むことが更に好ましい。上記範囲であると、パターン形成性がより良好となる。
 特定重合体における構成単位bの含有量(含有割合:質量比)は、13C-NMR測定から常法により算出されるピーク強度の強度比により確認することができる。
The structural unit bb contained in the specific polymer may be only one type or two or more types.
The specific polymer preferably contains 0.1% by mass to 20% by mass, and 0.5% by mass to 15% by mass of the structural unit having an acid group (the structural unit bb) with respect to the total mass of the specific polymer. The content is more preferably 1% by mass to 10% by mass. When it is in the above range, the pattern formability becomes better.
The content (content ratio: mass ratio) of the structural unit b in the specific polymer can be confirmed by the intensity ratio of the peak intensity calculated by a conventional method from 13 C-NMR measurement.
<<その他の構成単位>>
 特定重合体は、既述の構成単位b及び構成単位bb以外の、他の構成単位(以下、構成単位bbbと称することがある。)を、本開示に係る感光性転写材料の効果を損なわない範囲で含んでいてもよい。
 構成単位bbbを形成するモノマーとしては、特に制限はなく、例えば、スチレン類、(メタ)アクリル酸アルキルエステル、(メタ)アクリル酸環状アルキルエステル、(メタ)アクリル酸アリールエステル、不飽和ジカルボン酸ジエステル、ビシクロ不飽和化合物、マレイミド化合物、不飽和芳香族化合物、共役ジエン系化合物、不飽和モノカルボン酸、不飽和ジカルボン酸、不飽和ジカルボン酸無水物、脂肪族環式骨格を有する基、その他の不飽和化合物を挙げることができる。
 構成単位bbbを用いて、種類及び含有量の少なくともいずれかを調整することで、特定重合体の諸特性を調整することができる。特に、構成単位bbbを適切に使用することで、特定重合体のTgを90℃以下に容易に調整することができる。
 特定重合体は、構成単位bbbを1種のみ含んでもよく、2種以上含んでいてもよい。
<< Other structural units >>
The specific polymer does not impair the effects of the photosensitive transfer material according to an embodiment of the present invention, except for the structural unit b and the structural unit bb described above, other structural units (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the structural unit bbb). It may be included in the range.
The monomer for forming the structural unit bbb is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include styrenes, (meth) acrylic acid alkyl esters, (meth) acrylic acid cyclic alkyl esters, (meth) acrylic acid aryl esters, and unsaturated dicarboxylic acid diesters. , Bicyclounsaturated compounds, maleimide compounds, unsaturated aromatic compounds, conjugated diene compounds, unsaturated monocarboxylic acids, unsaturated dicarboxylic acids, unsaturated dicarboxylic acid anhydrides, groups having an aliphatic cyclic skeleton, other Mention may be made of saturated compounds.
Various characteristics of the specific polymer can be adjusted by adjusting at least one of the kind and the content using the structural unit bbb. In particular, the Tg of the specific polymer can be easily adjusted to 90 ° C. or less by appropriately using the structural unit bbb.
The specific polymer may contain only one type of structural unit bbb or may contain two or more types.
 構成単位bbbは、具体的には、スチレン、tert-ブトキシスチレン、メチルスチレン、α-メチルスチレン、アセトキシスチレン、メトキシスチレン、エトキシスチレン、クロロスチレン、ビニル安息香酸メチル、ビニル安息香酸エチル、(メタ)アクリル酸メチル、(メタ)アクリル酸エチル、(メタ)アクリル酸n-プロピル、(メタ)アクリル酸イソプロピル、(メタ)アクリル酸2-ヒドロキシエチル、(メタ)アクリル酸2-ヒドロキシプロピル、(メタ)アクリル酸ベンジル、(メタ)アクリル酸イソボルニル、アクリロニトリル、又は、エチレングリコールモノアセトアセテートモノ(メタ)アクリレートなどを重合して形成される構成単位を挙げることができる。その他、特開2004-264623号公報の段落0021~段落0024に記載の化合物を挙げることができる。 The structural unit bbb specifically includes styrene, tert-butoxystyrene, methylstyrene, α-methylstyrene, acetoxystyrene, methoxystyrene, ethoxystyrene, chlorostyrene, methyl vinylbenzoate, ethyl vinylbenzoate, (meth) Methyl acrylate, ethyl (meth) acrylate, n-propyl (meth) acrylate, isopropyl (meth) acrylate, 2-hydroxyethyl (meth) acrylate, 2-hydroxypropyl (meth) acrylate, (meth) Mention may be made of structural units formed by polymerizing benzyl acrylate, isobornyl (meth) acrylate, acrylonitrile, ethylene glycol monoacetoacetate mono (meth) acrylate, or the like. In addition, the compounds described in paragraphs 0021 to 0024 of JP-A No. 2004-264623 can be given.
 また、構成単位bbbとしては、芳香環を有する構成単位、又は、脂肪族環式骨格を有する構成単位が、得られる感光性転写材料の電気特性を向上させる観点で好ましい。これら構成単位を形成するモノマーとして、具体的には、スチレン、tert-ブトキシスチレン、メチルスチレン、α-メチルスチレン、ジシクロペンタニル(メタ)アクリレート、シクロヘキシル(メタ)アクリレート、イソボルニル(メタ)アクリレート、及び、ベンジル(メタ)アクリレート等が挙げられる。中でも、構成単位bbbとしては、シクロヘキシル(メタ)アクリレート由来の構成単位が好ましく挙げられる。 As the structural unit bbb, a structural unit having an aromatic ring or a structural unit having an aliphatic cyclic skeleton is preferable from the viewpoint of improving the electrical characteristics of the resulting photosensitive transfer material. Specific examples of monomers that form these structural units include styrene, tert-butoxystyrene, methylstyrene, α-methylstyrene, dicyclopentanyl (meth) acrylate, cyclohexyl (meth) acrylate, isobornyl (meth) acrylate, And benzyl (meth) acrylate etc. are mentioned. Among these, as the structural unit bbb, a structural unit derived from cyclohexyl (meth) acrylate is preferably exemplified.
 また、構成単位bbbを形成するモノマーとしては、例えば、(メタ)アクリル酸アルキルエステルが、密着性の観点で好ましい。中でも、炭素数4~12のアルキル基を有する(メタ)アクリル酸アルキルエステルが密着性の観点でより好ましい。具体的には、(メタ)アクリル酸メチル、(メタ)アクリル酸エチル、(メタ)アクリル酸プロピル、(メタ)アクリル酸n-ブチル、及び、(メタ)アクリル酸2-エチルヘキシルが挙げられる。 Further, as a monomer for forming the structural unit bbb, for example, (meth) acrylic acid alkyl ester is preferable from the viewpoint of adhesion. Among them, (meth) acrylic acid alkyl ester having an alkyl group having 4 to 12 carbon atoms is more preferable from the viewpoint of adhesion. Specific examples include methyl (meth) acrylate, ethyl (meth) acrylate, propyl (meth) acrylate, n-butyl (meth) acrylate, and 2-ethylhexyl (meth) acrylate.
 構成単位bbbの含有量は、特定重合体の全質量に対し、70質量%以下が好ましく、60質量%以下がより好ましく、50質量%以下が更に好ましい。下限値としては、0質量%でもよいが、1質量%以上であることが好ましく、5質量%以上であることがより好ましい。上記範囲であると、解像度及びレジスト層組成物により形成されるレジスト層の密着性がより向上する。 The content of the structural unit bbb is preferably 70% by mass or less, more preferably 60% by mass or less, and still more preferably 50% by mass or less with respect to the total mass of the specific polymer. The lower limit may be 0% by mass, but is preferably 1% by mass or more, and more preferably 5% by mass or more. Within the above range, the resolution and the adhesion of the resist layer formed by the resist layer composition are further improved.
 特定重合体が、構成単位bbbとして、上記構成単位bbにおける酸基のエステルを有する構成単位を含むことも、現像液に対する溶解性、及び、後述するレジスト層の物理物性を最適化する観点から好ましい。
 中でも、特定重合体は、構成単位bbとして、酸基を有する構成単位を含み、更に、カルボン酸エステル基を含む構成単位bbbを共重合成分として含むことが好ましく、例えば、(メタ)アクリル酸由来の構成単位bbと、(メタ)アクリル酸シクロヘキシル、(メタ)アクリル酸2-エチルヘキシル又は(メタ)アクリル酸n-ブチル由来の構成単位とを含む重合体がより好ましい。
 以下、本開示における特定重合体の好ましい例を挙げるが、本開示は以下の例示に限定されない。なお、下記例示化合物における構成単位の比率、重量平均分子量は、好ましい物性を得るために適宜選択される。
It is also preferable that the specific polymer includes, as the structural unit bbb, a structural unit having an acid group ester in the structural unit bb from the viewpoint of optimizing the solubility in the developer and the physical properties of the resist layer described later. .
Among them, the specific polymer preferably includes a structural unit having an acid group as the structural unit bb, and further includes a structural unit bbb including a carboxylic acid ester group as a copolymerization component, for example, derived from (meth) acrylic acid. A polymer containing the structural unit bb and a structural unit derived from cyclohexyl (meth) acrylate, 2-ethylhexyl (meth) acrylate or n-butyl (meth) acrylate is more preferred.
Hereinafter, although the preferable example of the specific polymer in this indication is given, this indication is not limited to the following illustrations. In addition, the ratio of the structural unit and the weight average molecular weight in the following exemplary compounds are appropriately selected in order to obtain preferable physical properties.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000016

 
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000016

 
<<特定重合体のガラス転移温度:Tg>>
 本開示における特定重合体のガラス転移温度(Tg)は、90℃以下であることが好ましい。Tgが90℃以下であることで、レジスト層組成物により形成されるレジスト層は高い密着性を有し、転写性により優れる。
 上記Tgは、60℃以下であることがより好ましく、40℃以下であることが更に好ましい。
 また、上記Tgの下限値には特に制限はないが、-20℃以上が好ましく、-10℃以上がより好ましい。特定重合体のTgが-20℃以上であることで、良好なパターン形成性が維持され、また、例えば、カバーフィルムを用いる場合、カバーフィルムを剥離する際の剥離性低下が抑制される。
 更に、本開示における上記重合体成分全体のガラス転移温度(Tg)は、転写性の観点から、90℃以下であることが好ましく、60℃以下であることがより好ましく、40℃以下であることが更に好ましい。
<< Glass transition temperature of specific polymer: Tg >>
The glass transition temperature (Tg) of the specific polymer in the present disclosure is preferably 90 ° C. or less. When Tg is 90 ° C. or lower, the resist layer formed from the resist layer composition has high adhesion and is excellent in transferability.
The Tg is more preferably 60 ° C. or less, and further preferably 40 ° C. or less.
The lower limit of Tg is not particularly limited, but is preferably −20 ° C. or higher, and more preferably −10 ° C. or higher. When the Tg of the specific polymer is −20 ° C. or higher, good pattern formability is maintained, and, for example, when a cover film is used, a decrease in peelability when the cover film is peeled is suppressed.
Furthermore, the glass transition temperature (Tg) of the entire polymer component in the present disclosure is preferably 90 ° C. or lower, more preferably 60 ° C. or lower, and 40 ° C. or lower from the viewpoint of transferability. Is more preferable.
 特定重合体のガラス転移温度は、示差走査熱量測定(DSC)を用いて測定することができる。
 具体的な測定方法は、JIS K 7121(1987年)又はJIS K 6240(2011年)に記載の方法に順じて行なった。本開示におけるガラス転移温度は、補外ガラス転移開始温度(以下、Tigと称することがある)を用いている。
 ガラス転移温度の測定方法をより具体的に説明する。
 ガラス転移温度を求める場合、予想される重合体のTgより約50℃低い温度にて装置が安定するまで保持した後、加熱速度:20℃/分で、ガラス転移が終了した温度よりも約30℃高い温度まで加熱し,DTA曲線又はDSC曲線を描かせる。
 補外ガラス転移開始温度(Tig)、すなわち、本開示におけるガラス転移温度Tgは、DTA曲線又はDSC曲線における低温側のベースラインを高温側に延長した直線と、ガラス転移の階段状変化部分の曲線の勾配が最大になる点で引いた接線との交点の温度として求める。
The glass transition temperature of a specific polymer can be measured using differential scanning calorimetry (DSC).
The specific measuring method was performed in accordance with the method described in JIS K 7121 (1987) or JIS K 6240 (2011). The glass transition temperature in the present disclosure uses an extrapolated glass transition start temperature (hereinafter sometimes referred to as Tig).
The method for measuring the glass transition temperature will be described more specifically.
When determining the glass transition temperature, after maintaining the apparatus at a temperature about 50 ° C. lower than the expected Tg of the polymer until the apparatus is stabilized, the heating rate is about 20 ° C./min and about 30 times higher than the temperature at which the glass transition is completed. Heat to a higher temperature and draw a DTA or DSC curve.
The extrapolated glass transition start temperature (Tig), that is, the glass transition temperature Tg in the present disclosure, is a straight line obtained by extending the base line on the low temperature side to the high temperature side in the DTA curve or DSC curve, and the curve of the step-like change portion of the glass transition. The temperature at the point of intersection with the tangent drawn at the point where the slope of the maximum is.
 特定重合体のTgを、既述の好ましい範囲に調整する方法としては、例えば、目的とする重合体の各構成単位の単独重合体のTgと各構成単位の質量比より、FOX式を指針にして、目的とする特定重合体のTgを制御することが可能である。
 FOX式について
 重合体成分に含まれる第1の構成単位の単独重合体のTgをTg1、第1の構成単位の共重合体における質量分率をW1とし、第2の構成単位の単独重合体のTgをTg2とし、第2の構成単位の共重合体における質量分率をW2とした場合に、第1の構成単位と第2の構成単位とを含む共重合体のTg0(K)は、以下の式にしたがって推定することが可能である。
 FOX式:1/Tg0=(W1/Tg1)+(W2/Tg2)
 既述のFOX式を用いて、共重合体に含まれる各構成単位の種類と質量分率を調整して、所望のTgを有する共重合体を得ることができる。
 また、重合体の重量平均分子量を調整することにより、重合体のTgを調整することも可能である。
As a method for adjusting the Tg of the specific polymer to the above-described preferable range, for example, based on the Tg of the homopolymer of each constituent unit of the target polymer and the mass ratio of each constituent unit, the FOX formula is used as a guideline. Thus, it is possible to control the Tg of the target specific polymer.
About FOX Formula Tg of the homopolymer of the first structural unit contained in the polymer component is Tg1, W1 is the mass fraction of the copolymer of the first structural unit, and the homopolymer of the second structural unit When Tg is Tg2 and the mass fraction in the copolymer of the second structural unit is W2, the Tg0 (K) of the copolymer containing the first structural unit and the second structural unit is as follows: It is possible to estimate according to the following equation.
FOX formula: 1 / Tg0 = (W1 / Tg1) + (W2 / Tg2)
A copolymer having a desired Tg can be obtained by adjusting the type and mass fraction of each constituent unit contained in the copolymer using the FOX formula described above.
It is also possible to adjust the Tg of the polymer by adjusting the weight average molecular weight of the polymer.
<<特定重合体の分子量:Mw>>
 特定重合体の分子量は、ポリスチレン換算重量平均分子量で、60,000以下であることが好ましい。特定重合体の重量平均分子量が60,000以下であることで、後述する感光性転写材料におけるレジスト層の溶融粘度を低く抑え、基板と貼り合わせる際において低温(例えば130℃以下)での貼り合わせを実現することができる。
 また、特定重合体の重量平均分子量は、2,000~60,000であることが好ましく、3,000~50,000であることがより好ましく、10,000~30,000であることが更に好ましい。
 なお、特定重合体の重量平均分子量は、GPC(ゲルパーミエーションクロマトグラフィ)によって測定することができ、測定装置としては、様々な市販の装置を用いることができ、装置の内容、及び、測定技術は同当業者に公知である。
 ゲルパーミエーションクロマトグラフィ(GPC)による重量平均分子量の測定は、測定装置として、HLC(登録商標)-8220GPC(東ソー(株)製)を用い、カラムとして、TSKgel(登録商標)Super HZM-M(4.6mmID×15cm、東ソー(株)製)、Super HZ4000(4.6mmID×15cm、東ソー(株)製)、Super HZ3000(4.6mmID×15cm、東ソー(株)製)、Super HZ2000(4.6mmID×15cm、東ソー(株)製)をそれぞれ1本、直列に連結したものを用い、溶離液として、THF(テトラヒドロフラン)を用いることができる。
 また、測定条件としては、試料濃度を0.2質量%、流速を0.35ml/min、サンプル注入量を10μl、及び測定温度を40℃とし、示差屈折率(RI)検出器を用いて行うことができる。
 検量線は、東ソー(株)製の「標準試料TSK standard,polystyrene」:「F-40」、「F-20」、「F-4」、「F-1」、「A-5000」、「A-2500」及び「A-1000」の7サンプルのいずれかを用いて作製できる。
<< Molecular weight of specific polymer: Mw >>
The molecular weight of the specific polymer is preferably 60,000 or less in terms of polystyrene-equivalent weight average molecular weight. When the weight average molecular weight of the specific polymer is 60,000 or less, the melt viscosity of the resist layer in the photosensitive transfer material described later is kept low, and bonding at a low temperature (for example, 130 ° C. or less) is performed when bonding to the substrate. Can be realized.
The weight average molecular weight of the specific polymer is preferably 2,000 to 60,000, more preferably 3,000 to 50,000, and further preferably 10,000 to 30,000. preferable.
The weight average molecular weight of the specific polymer can be measured by GPC (gel permeation chromatography), and various commercially available devices can be used as the measuring device. It is known to those skilled in the art.
For the measurement of the weight average molecular weight by gel permeation chromatography (GPC), HLC (registered trademark) -8220GPC (manufactured by Tosoh Corp.) was used as a measuring device, and TSKgel (registered trademark) Super HZM-M (4 .6 mm ID × 15 cm, manufactured by Tosoh Corp.), Super HZ4000 (4.6 mm ID × 15 cm, manufactured by Tosoh Corp.), Super HZ3000 (4.6 mm ID × 15 cm, manufactured by Tosoh Corp.), Super HZ2000 (4.6 mm ID) × 15 cm, manufactured by Tosoh Corporation), one each connected in series, and THF (tetrahydrofuran) can be used as an eluent.
Further, the measurement conditions are 0.2 mass%, the flow rate is 0.35 ml / min, the sample injection amount is 10 μl, the measurement temperature is 40 ° C., and a differential refractive index (RI) detector is used. be able to.
The calibration curve is “Standard sample TSK standard, polystyrene” manufactured by Tosoh Corporation: “F-40”, “F-20”, “F-4”, “F-1”, “A-5000”, “ It can be produced using any of the seven samples of “A-2500” and “A-1000”.
 特定重合体の数平均分子量と重量平均分子量との比(分散度)は、1.0~5.0が好ましく、1.05~3.5がより好ましい。 The ratio (dispersion degree) between the number average molecular weight and the weight average molecular weight of the specific polymer is preferably 1.0 to 5.0, more preferably 1.05 to 3.5.
<<特定重合体の製造方法>>
 特定重合体の製造方法(合成法)は特に限定されないが、一例を挙げると、式IIで表される構成単位b1を形成するための重合性単量体、酸基を有する構成単位bbを形成するための重合性単量体、更に必要に応じて、その他の構成単位bbbを形成するための重合性単量体を含む溶剤中、重合開始剤を用いて重合することにより合成することができる。また、いわゆる高分子反応で合成することもできる。
<< Method for Producing Specific Polymer >>
The production method (synthesis method) of the specific polymer is not particularly limited. For example, a polymerizable monomer for forming the structural unit b1 represented by the formula II and a structural unit bb having an acid group are formed. It can synthesize | combine by superposing | polymerizing using a polymerization initiator in the solvent containing the polymerizable monomer for forming, and also the polymerizable monomer for forming other structural unit bbb as needed. . It can also be synthesized by a so-called polymer reaction.
 本開示に係るレジスト層組成物は、感度及び解像性の観点から、レジスト層組成物の全固形分に対し、特定重合体を50質量%~99.9質量%の割合で含むことが好ましく、70質量%~98質量%の割合で含むことがより好ましい。 The resist layer composition according to the present disclosure preferably contains the specific polymer in a proportion of 50% by mass to 99.9% by mass with respect to the total solid content of the resist layer composition from the viewpoint of sensitivity and resolution. More preferably, it is contained in a proportion of 70 mass% to 98 mass%.
<<他の重合体>>
 上記レジスト層組成物は、重合体成分として、特定重合体に加え、本開示に係るレジスト層組成物の効果を損なわない範囲において、構成単位bを含まない重合体(「他の重合体」と称する場合がある。)を更に含んでいてもよい。
 上記レジスト層組成物が他の重合体を含む場合、他の重合体の配合量は、全重合体成分中、50質量%以下であることが好ましく、30質量%以下であることがより好ましく、20質量%以下であることが更に好ましい。
 また、上記重合体成分に含まれる全ての重合体がそれぞれ、上述する酸基を有する構成単位を少なくとも有する重合体であることが好ましい。
 なお、後述する可塑剤、ヘテロ環状化合物及び界面活性剤に該当する化合物は、高分子化合物であっても、上記重合体成分に含まないものとする。
<< other polymers >>
The resist layer composition includes, as a polymer component, a polymer that does not include the structural unit b (in addition to the specific polymer, in a range that does not impair the effect of the resist layer composition according to the present disclosure (“other polymer”). May be included).
When the resist layer composition contains another polymer, the blending amount of the other polymer is preferably 50% by mass or less, more preferably 30% by mass or less in the total polymer component, More preferably, it is 20 mass% or less.
Moreover, it is preferable that all the polymers contained in the said polymer component are polymers which have at least the structural unit which has the acid group mentioned above, respectively.
In addition, even if it is a high molecular compound, the compound applicable to the plasticizer mentioned later, a heterocyclic compound, and surfactant shall not be contained in the said polymer component.
 上記レジスト層組成物は、特定重合体に加え、他の重合体を1種類のみ含んでいてもよいし、2種類以上含んでいてもよい。
 他の重合体として、例えばポリヒドロキシスチレンを用いることができ、市販されている、SMA 1000P、SMA 2000P、SMA 3000P、SMA 1440F、SMA 17352P、SMA 2625P、及び、SMA 3840F(以上、サートマー社製)、ARUFON UC-3000、ARUFON UC-3510、ARUFON UC-3900、ARUFON UC-3910、ARUFON UC-3920、及び、ARUFON UC-3080(以上、東亞合成(株)製)、並びに、Joncryl 690、Joncryl 678、Joncryl 67、及び、Joncryl 586(以上、BASF社製)等を用いることもできる。
In addition to the specific polymer, the resist layer composition may contain only one type of other polymer, or may contain two or more types.
As other polymers, for example, polyhydroxystyrene can be used, which are commercially available, such as SMA 1000P, SMA 2000P, SMA 3000P, SMA 1440F, SMA 17352P, SMA 2625P, and SMA 3840F (above, manufactured by Sartomer). , ARUFON UC-3000, ARUFON UC-3510, ARUFON UC-3900, ARUFON UC-3910, ARUFON UC-3920, and ARUFON UC-3080 (above, manufactured by Toagosei Co., Ltd.), Joncryl 690, Joncryl 6 Joncryl 67, Joncryl 586 (manufactured by BASF) or the like can also be used.
<光酸発生剤〔(C)成分〕>
 本開示に係るレジスト層組成物は、光酸発生剤を含有することが好ましい。
 本開示で使用される光酸発生剤としては、紫外線、遠紫外線、X線、及び、荷電粒子線等の放射線を照射することにより酸を発生することができる化合物である。
 本開示で使用される光酸発生剤としては、波長300nm以上、好ましくは波長300nm~450nmの活性光線に感応し、酸を発生する化合物が好ましいが、その化学構造は制限されない。また、波長300nm以上の活性光線に直接感応しない光酸発生剤についても、増感剤と併用することによって波長300nm以上の活性光線に感応し、酸を発生する化合物であれば、増感剤と組み合わせて好ましく用いることができる。
 本開示で使用される光酸発生剤から発生する酸のpKaは、感度及び視認性の観点から、4.0以下であることが好ましく、3.0以下であることがより好ましく、2.0以下であることが特に好ましい。光酸発生剤から発生する酸のpKaの下限値は特に定めないが、例えば、-10.0以上であることが好ましく、感度及び視認性の観点から、-4.0以上であることがより好ましく、-3.5以上が更に好ましく、-3.0以上が特に好ましい。
<Photoacid generator [component (C)]>
The resist layer composition according to the present disclosure preferably contains a photoacid generator.
The photoacid generator used in the present disclosure is a compound capable of generating an acid by irradiation with radiation such as ultraviolet rays, far ultraviolet rays, X-rays, and charged particle beams.
The photoacid generator used in the present disclosure is preferably a compound that generates an acid in response to an actinic ray having a wavelength of 300 nm or more, preferably 300 nm to 450 nm, but its chemical structure is not limited. Further, a photoacid generator that is not directly sensitive to an actinic ray having a wavelength of 300 nm or more can also be used as a sensitizer if it is a compound that reacts with an actinic ray having a wavelength of 300 nm or more and generates an acid when used in combination with a sensitizer. It can be preferably used in combination.
The pKa of the acid generated from the photoacid generator used in the present disclosure is preferably 4.0 or less, more preferably 3.0 or less, from the viewpoint of sensitivity and visibility. It is particularly preferred that The lower limit of the pKa of the acid generated from the photoacid generator is not particularly defined, but is preferably, for example, -10.0 or more, and more preferably -4.0 or more from the viewpoint of sensitivity and visibility. Preferably, -3.5 or more is more preferable, and -3.0 or more is particularly preferable.
 また、上記光酸発生剤から生じる酸が、感度及び視認性の観点から、リン酸及びスルホン酸よりなる群から選ばれた少なくとも1種の酸であることが好ましく、スルホン酸であることがより好ましく、下記式C1又は式C2で表されるスルホン酸であることが更に好ましい。 The acid generated from the photoacid generator is preferably at least one acid selected from the group consisting of phosphoric acid and sulfonic acid from the viewpoint of sensitivity and visibility, and more preferably sulfonic acid. Preferably, it is a sulfonic acid represented by the following formula C1 or C2.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000017

 
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000017

 
 式C1及び式C2中、Rは、アルキル基を表し、Lは、炭素数2以上のアルキレン基を表し、nsは0又は1を表し、ただし、Rがハロゲン原子を有するアルキル基である場合はnが1であり、Xはそれぞれ独立に、アルキル基、アリール基、アルコキシ基又はアリーロキシ基を表し、msは、0~5の整数を表す。 In formula C1 and formula C2, R S represents an alkyl group, L S represents an alkylene group having 2 or more carbon atoms, ns represents 0 or 1, provided that R S is an alkyl group having a halogen atom. In some cases, n is 1, each X S independently represents an alkyl group, an aryl group, an alkoxy group, or an aryloxy group, and ms represents an integer of 0 to 5.
 Rにおけるアルキル基は、置換基を有していてもよい。
 上記置換基としては、ハロゲン原子、アリール基、アルコキシ基、及び、アリーロキシ基等が挙げられる。
 Rにおけるアルキル基の炭素数は、1~20であることが好ましく、2~16であることがより好ましい。
 Lは、炭素数2~20のアルキレン基であることが好ましく、炭素数2~8のアルキレン基であることがより好ましく、エチレン基であることが特に好ましい。
 Xはそれぞれ独立に、アルキル基であることが好ましく、炭素数1~20のアルキル基であることがより好ましく、炭素数1~8のアルキル基であることが更に好ましく、メチル基であることが特に好ましい。
 msは、0~3の整数であることが好ましく、0又は1であることがより好ましく、1であることが特に好ましい。
The alkyl group in R S may have a substituent.
Examples of the substituent include a halogen atom, an aryl group, an alkoxy group, and an aryloxy group.
The number of carbon atoms of the alkyl group in R S is preferably 1-20, and more preferably 2-16.
L S is preferably an alkylene group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably an alkylene group having 2 to 8 carbon atoms, and particularly preferably an ethylene group.
X S each independently is preferably an alkyl group, more preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, still more preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, and a methyl group. Is particularly preferred.
ms is preferably an integer of 0 to 3, more preferably 0 or 1, and particularly preferably 1.
 光酸発生剤としては、イオン性光酸発生剤と、非イオン性光酸発生剤とを挙げることができる。
 また、光酸発生剤としては、感度及び解像度の観点から、後述するオニウム塩化合物、及び、後述するオキシムスルホネート化合物よりなる群から選ばれた少なくとも1種の化合物を含むことが好ましく、オキシムスルホネート化合物を含むことがより好ましい。
Examples of the photoacid generator include an ionic photoacid generator and a nonionic photoacid generator.
The photoacid generator preferably contains at least one compound selected from the group consisting of an onium salt compound described later and an oxime sulfonate compound described later from the viewpoint of sensitivity and resolution, and an oxime sulfonate compound. It is more preferable to contain.
 非イオン性光酸発生剤の例として、トリクロロメチル-s-トリアジン類、ジアゾメタン化合物、イミドスルホネート化合物、及び、オキシムスルホネート化合物などを挙げることができる。これらの中でも、感度、解像度、及び、密着性の観点から、光酸発生剤がオキシムスルホネート化合物であることが好ましい。これら光酸発生剤は、1種単独又は2種類以上を組み合わせて使用することができる。トリクロロメチル-s-トリアジン類、及び、ジアゾメタン誘導体の具体例としては、特開2011-221494号公報の段落0083~段落0088に記載の化合物が例示できる。 Examples of nonionic photoacid generators include trichloromethyl-s-triazines, diazomethane compounds, imide sulfonate compounds, and oxime sulfonate compounds. Among these, the photoacid generator is preferably an oxime sulfonate compound from the viewpoints of sensitivity, resolution, and adhesion. These photoacid generators can be used singly or in combination of two or more. Specific examples of trichloromethyl-s-triazines and diazomethane derivatives include the compounds described in paragraphs 0083 to 0088 of JP 2011-212494A.
 オキシムスルホネート化合物、すなわち、オキシムスルホネート構造を有する化合物としては、下記式C3で表されるオキシムスルホネート構造を有する化合物が好ましい。 As the oxime sulfonate compound, that is, a compound having an oxime sulfonate structure, a compound having an oxime sulfonate structure represented by the following formula C3 is preferable.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000018

 
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000018

 
 式C3中、R21は、アルキル基又はアリール基を表し、*は他の原子又は他の基との結合部位を表す。 In Formula C3, R 21 represents an alkyl group or an aryl group, and * represents a bonding site with another atom or another group.
 式C3で表されるオキシムスルホネート構造を有する化合物は、いずれの基も置換されてもよく、R21におけるアルキル基は、直鎖状であっても、分岐構造を有していても、環構造を有していてもよい。許容される置換基は以下に説明する。
 R21のアルキル基としては、炭素数1~10の、直鎖状又は分岐状アルキル基が好ましい。R21のアルキル基は、炭素数6~11のアリール基、炭素数1~10のアルコキシ基、シクロアルキル基(7,7-ジメチル-2-オキソノルボルニル基などの有橋式脂環基を含む、好ましくはビシクロアルキル基等)、又は、ハロゲン原子で置換されてもよい。
 R21のアリール基としては、炭素数6~18のアリール基が好ましく、フェニル基又はナフチル基がより好ましい。R21のアリール基は、炭素数1~4のアルキル基、アルコキシ基及びハロゲン原子よりなる群から選ばれた1つ以上の基で置換されてもよい。
In the compound having an oxime sulfonate structure represented by the formula C3, any group may be substituted, and the alkyl group in R 21 may be linear or branched, or may have a ring structure. You may have. Acceptable substituents are described below.
The alkyl group for R 21 is preferably a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms. The alkyl group of R 21 is an aryl group having 6 to 11 carbon atoms, an alkoxy group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, a cycloalkyl group (7,7-dimethyl-2-oxonorbornyl group or other bridged alicyclic group) , Preferably a bicycloalkyl group or the like) or a halogen atom.
As the aryl group for R 21, an aryl group having 6 to 18 carbon atoms is preferable, and a phenyl group or a naphthyl group is more preferable. The aryl group of R 21 may be substituted with one or more groups selected from the group consisting of an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, an alkoxy group, and a halogen atom.
 式C3で表されるオキシムスルホネート構造を有する化合物は、特開2014-85643号公報の段落0078~0111に記載のオキシムスルホネート化合物であることも好ましい。
 特開2015-151347号公報の段落0080~0081に記載の化合物が挙げられる。
The compound having an oxime sulfonate structure represented by the formula C3 is also preferably an oxime sulfonate compound described in paragraphs 0078 to 0111 of JP 2014-85643 A.
Examples thereof include compounds described in paragraphs 0080 to 0081 of JP-A No. 2015-151347.
 イオン性光酸発生剤の例として、ジアリールヨードニウム塩類及びトリアリールスルホニウム塩類等のオニウム塩化合物、第四級アンモニウム塩類等を挙げることができる。これらのうち、オニウム塩化合物が好ましく、トリアリールスルホニウム塩類及びジアリールヨードニウム塩類が特に好ましい。 Examples of the ionic photoacid generator include onium salt compounds such as diaryliodonium salts and triarylsulfonium salts, quaternary ammonium salts, and the like. Of these, onium salt compounds are preferable, and triarylsulfonium salts and diaryliodonium salts are particularly preferable.
 イオン性光酸発生剤としては特開2014-85643号公報の段落0114~0133に記載のイオン性光酸発生剤も好ましく用いることができる。 As the ionic photoacid generator, ionic photoacid generators described in paragraphs 0114 to 0133 of JP-A-2014-85643 can also be preferably used.
 光酸発生剤は、1種単独で使用してもよいし、2種以上を併用してもよい。
 上記レジスト層組成物における光酸発生剤の含有量は、感度、解像度の観点から、上記レジスト層組成物の全固形分に対して、0.1質量%~15質量%であることが好ましく、0.5質量%~10質量%であることがより好ましい。
A photo-acid generator may be used individually by 1 type, and may use 2 or more types together.
The content of the photoacid generator in the resist layer composition is preferably 0.1% by mass to 15% by mass with respect to the total solid content of the resist layer composition from the viewpoint of sensitivity and resolution. More preferably, it is 0.5 to 10% by mass.
<重合性化合物>
 本開示における感光性転写材料がネガ型感光性転写材料である場合、レジスト層組成物は重合性化合物を含有することが好ましい。
 重合性化合物としては、エチレン性不飽和化合物が好ましい。
 エチレン性不飽和化合物は、上記感光性転写材料の感光性(すなわち、光硬化性)及び硬化膜の強度に寄与する成分である。
 また、エチレン性不飽和化合物は、1つ以上のエチレン性不飽和基を有する化合物である。
<Polymerizable compound>
When the photosensitive transfer material in the present disclosure is a negative photosensitive transfer material, the resist layer composition preferably contains a polymerizable compound.
As the polymerizable compound, an ethylenically unsaturated compound is preferable.
The ethylenically unsaturated compound is a component that contributes to the photosensitivity (that is, photocurability) of the photosensitive transfer material and the strength of the cured film.
An ethylenically unsaturated compound is a compound having one or more ethylenically unsaturated groups.
 上記レジスト層組成物は、エチレン性不飽和化合物として、2官能以上のエチレン性不飽和化合物を含むことが好ましい。
 ここで、2官能以上のエチレン性不飽和化合物とは、一分子中にエチレン性不飽和基を2つ以上有する化合物を意味する。
 エチレン性不飽和基としては、(メタ)アクリロイル基がより好ましい。
 エチレン性不飽和化合物としては、(メタ)アクリレート化合物が好ましい。
The resist layer composition preferably includes a bifunctional or higher functional ethylenically unsaturated compound as the ethylenically unsaturated compound.
Here, the bifunctional or higher functional ethylenically unsaturated compound means a compound having two or more ethylenically unsaturated groups in one molecule.
As the ethylenically unsaturated group, a (meth) acryloyl group is more preferable.
As the ethylenically unsaturated compound, a (meth) acrylate compound is preferable.
 2官能のエチレン性不飽和化合物としては、特に制限はなく、公知の化合物の中から適宜選択できる。
 2官能のエチレン性不飽和化合物としては、トリシクロデカンジメタノールジ(メタ)アクリレート、トリシクロデカンジメタノールジ(メタ)アクリレート、1,9-ノナンジオールジ(メタ)アクリレート、1,6-ヘキサンジオールジ(メタ)アクリレート等が挙げられる。
 2官能のエチレン性不飽和化合物としては、より具体的には、トリシクロデカンジメタノールジアクリレート(A-DCP、新中村化学工業(株)製)、トリシクロデカンジメナノールジメタクリレート(DCP、新中村化学工業(株)製)、1,9-ノナンジオールジアクリレート(A-NOD-N、新中村化学工業(株)製)、1,6-ヘキサンジオールジアクリレート(A-HD-N、新中村化学工業(株)製)等が挙げられる。
 また、2官能のエチレン性不飽和化合物としては、ビスフェノール構造を有する2官能エチレン性不飽和化合物も好適に用いられる。
 ビスフェノール構造を有する2官能エチレン性不飽和化合物としては、特開2016-224162号公報の段落0072~段落0080に記載の化合物が挙げられる。
 具体的には、アルキレンオキサイド変性ビスフェノールAジ(メタ)アクリレート等が挙げられ、2,2-ビス(4-(メタクリロキシジエトキシ)フェニル)プロパン、2,2-ビス(4-(メタクリロキシエトキシプロポキシ)フェニル)プロパン等が好ましく挙げられる。
There is no restriction | limiting in particular as a bifunctional ethylenically unsaturated compound, It can select suitably from well-known compounds.
Examples of the bifunctional ethylenically unsaturated compound include tricyclodecane dimethanol di (meth) acrylate, tricyclodecane dimethanol di (meth) acrylate, 1,9-nonanediol di (meth) acrylate, and 1,6-hexane. Examples include diol di (meth) acrylate.
More specific examples of the bifunctional ethylenically unsaturated compound include tricyclodecane dimethanol diacrylate (A-DCP, Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd.), tricyclodecane dimenanol dimethacrylate (DCP, Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd.), 1,9-nonanediol diacrylate (A-NOD-N, Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd.), 1,6-hexanediol diacrylate (A-HD-N, Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd.).
As the bifunctional ethylenically unsaturated compound, a bifunctional ethylenically unsaturated compound having a bisphenol structure is also preferably used.
Examples of the bifunctional ethylenically unsaturated compound having a bisphenol structure include the compounds described in paragraphs 0072 to 0080 of JP-A-2016-224162.
Specific examples include alkylene oxide-modified bisphenol A di (meth) acrylate, and 2,2-bis (4- (methacryloxydiethoxy) phenyl) propane, 2,2-bis (4- (methacryloxyethoxy). Propoxy) phenyl) propane and the like are preferred.
 3官能以上のエチレン性不飽和化合物としては、特に制限はなく、公知の化合物の中から適宜選択できる。
 3官能以上のエチレン性不飽和化合物としては、例えば、ジペンタエリスリトール(トリ/テトラ/ペンタ/ヘキサ)(メタ)アクリレート、ペンタエリスリトール(トリ/テトラ)(メタ)アクリレート、トリメチロールプロパントリ(メタ)アクリレート、ジトリメチロールプロパンテトラ(メタ)アクリレート、イソシアヌル酸(メタ)アクリレート、グリセリントリ(メタ)アクリレート骨格の(メタ)アクリレート化合物、等が挙げられる。
The trifunctional or higher functional ethylenically unsaturated compound is not particularly limited and may be appropriately selected from known compounds.
Examples of the trifunctional or higher functional ethylenically unsaturated compound include dipentaerythritol (tri / tetra / penta / hexa) (meth) acrylate, pentaerythritol (tri / tetra) (meth) acrylate, and trimethylolpropane tri (meth). Examples include acrylate, ditrimethylolpropane tetra (meth) acrylate, isocyanuric acid (meth) acrylate, and (meth) acrylate compounds having a glycerin tri (meth) acrylate skeleton.
 ここで、「(トリ/テトラ/ペンタ/ヘキサ)(メタ)アクリレート」は、トリ(メタ)アクリレート、テトラ(メタ)アクリレート、ペンタ(メタ)アクリレート、及びヘキサ(メタ)アクリレートを包含する概念であり、「(トリ/テトラ)(メタ)アクリレート」は、トリ(メタ)アクリレート及びテトラ(メタ)アクリレートを包含する概念である。 Here, “(tri / tetra / penta / hexa) (meth) acrylate” is a concept including tri (meth) acrylate, tetra (meth) acrylate, penta (meth) acrylate, and hexa (meth) acrylate. "(Tri / tetra) (meth) acrylate" is a concept including tri (meth) acrylate and tetra (meth) acrylate.
 エチレン性不飽和化合物としては、(メタ)アクリレート化合物のカプロラクトン変性化合物(日本化薬(株)製KAYARAD(登録商標)DPCA-20、新中村化学工業(株)製A-9300-1CL等)、(メタ)アクリレート化合物のアルキレンオキサイド変性化合物(日本化薬(株)製KAYARAD RP-1040、新中村化学工業(株)製ATM-35E、A-9300、ダイセル・オルネクス社製 EBECRYL(登録商標) 135等)、エトキシル化グリセリントリアクリレート(新中村化学工業(株)製A-GLY-9E等)等も挙げられる。 Examples of the ethylenically unsaturated compound include a caprolactone-modified compound of (meth) acrylate compound (KAYARAD (registered trademark) DPCA-20 manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd., A-9300-1CL manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd.), Alkylene oxide modified compound of (meth) acrylate compound (KAYARAD RP-1040 manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd., ATM-35E, A-9300 manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd., EBECRYL (registered trademark) 135 manufactured by Daicel Ornex Co., Ltd. Etc.), and ethoxylated glycerin triacrylate (A-GLY-9E manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd.).
 エチレン性不飽和化合物としては、ウレタン(メタ)アクリレート化合物(好ましくは3官能以上のウレタン(メタ)アクリレート化合物)も挙げられる。
 3官能以上のウレタン(メタ)アクリレート化合物としては、例えば、8UX-015A(大成ファインケミカル(株)製)、UA-32P(新中村化学工業(株)製)、UA-1100H(新中村化学工業(株)製)等が挙げられる。
Examples of the ethylenically unsaturated compound include urethane (meth) acrylate compounds (preferably trifunctional or higher functional urethane (meth) acrylate compounds).
Examples of the tri- or higher functional urethane (meth) acrylate compound include 8UX-015A (manufactured by Taisei Fine Chemical Co., Ltd.), UA-32P (manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd.), and UA-1100H (Shin-Nakamura Chemical Industry ( Etc.).
 また、エチレン性不飽和化合物は、現像性向上の観点から、酸基を有するエチレン性不飽和化合物を含むことが好ましい。
 酸基としては、例えば、リン酸基、スルホン酸基、及び、カルボキシ基が挙げられ、カルボキシ基が好ましい。
 酸基を有するエチレン性不飽和化合物としては、例えば、酸基を有する3~4官能のエチレン性不飽和化合物(ペンタエリスリトールトリ及びテトラアクリレート(PETA)骨格にカルボキシ基を導入したもの(酸価=80mgKOH/g~120mgKOH/g))、酸基を有する5~6官能のエチレン性不飽和化合物(ジペンタエリスリトールペンタ及びヘキサアクリレート(DPHA)骨格にカルボキシ基を導入したもの(酸価=25mgKOH/g~70mgKOH/g))、等が挙げられる。
 これら酸基を有する3官能以上のエチレン性不飽和化合物は、必要に応じ、酸基を有する2官能のエチレン性不飽和化合物と併用してもよい。
Moreover, it is preferable that an ethylenically unsaturated compound contains the ethylenically unsaturated compound which has an acid group from a viewpoint of developability improvement.
Examples of the acid group include a phosphoric acid group, a sulfonic acid group, and a carboxy group, and a carboxy group is preferable.
As the ethylenically unsaturated compound having an acid group, for example, a tri- to tetrafunctional ethylenically unsaturated compound having an acid group (a compound in which a carboxy group is introduced into a pentaerythritol tri- and tetraacrylate (PETA) skeleton (acid value = 80 mg KOH / g to 120 mg KOH / g)), 5- to 6-functional ethylenically unsaturated compounds having acid groups (dipentaerythritol penta and hexaacrylate (DPHA) skeletons with carboxy groups introduced (acid value = 25 mg KOH / g) ˜70 mg KOH / g)), and the like.
These trifunctional or higher functional ethylenically unsaturated compounds having an acid group may be used in combination with a bifunctional ethylenically unsaturated compound having an acid group, if necessary.
 酸基を有するエチレン性不飽和化合物としては、カルボキシ基を含有する2官能以上のエチレン性不飽和化合物及びそのカルボン酸無水物よりなる群から選ばれる少なくとも1種が好ましい。
 カルボキシ基を含有する2官能以上のエチレン性不飽和化合物は、特に制限されず、公知の化合物の中から適宜選択できる。
 カルボキシ基を含有する2官能以上のエチレン性不飽和化合物としては、例えば、アロニックス(登録商標)TO-2349(東亞合成(株)製)、アロニックスM-520(東亞合成(株)製)、又は、アロニックスM-510(東亞合成(株)製)を好ましく用いることができる。
The ethylenically unsaturated compound having an acid group is preferably at least one selected from the group consisting of a bifunctional or higher functional ethylenically unsaturated compound containing a carboxy group and a carboxylic acid anhydride thereof.
The bifunctional or higher functional ethylenically unsaturated compound containing a carboxy group is not particularly limited and can be appropriately selected from known compounds.
Examples of the bifunctional or higher functional ethylenically unsaturated compound containing a carboxy group include Aronix (registered trademark) TO-2349 (manufactured by Toagosei Co., Ltd.), Aronix M-520 (manufactured by Toagosei Co., Ltd.), or Aronix M-510 (manufactured by Toagosei Co., Ltd.) can be preferably used.
 酸基を有するエチレン性不飽和化合物は、特開2004-239942号公報の段落0025~段落0030に記載の酸基を有する重合性化合物であることも好ましい。この公報の内容は本開示に組み込まれる。 The ethylenically unsaturated compound having an acid group is also preferably a polymerizable compound having an acid group described in paragraphs 0025 to 0030 of JP-A No. 2004-239942. The contents of this publication are incorporated into this disclosure.
 本開示に用いられる重合性化合物の重量平均分子量(Mw)としては、200~3,000が好ましく、250~2,600がより好ましく、280~2,200が更に好ましく、300~2,200が特に好ましい。
 また、上記レジスト層組成物に用いられる重合性化合物のうち、分子量300以下の重合性化合物の含有量の割合は、上記レジスト層組成物に含有されるすべてのエチレン性不飽和化合物に対して、30質量%以下が好ましく、25質量%以下がより好ましく、20質量%以下が更に好ましい。
The weight average molecular weight (Mw) of the polymerizable compound used in the present disclosure is preferably 200 to 3,000, more preferably 250 to 2,600, still more preferably 280 to 2,200, and more preferably 300 to 2,200. Particularly preferred.
Moreover, the ratio of the content of the polymerizable compound having a molecular weight of 300 or less among the polymerizable compounds used in the resist layer composition is based on all the ethylenically unsaturated compounds contained in the resist layer composition. 30 mass% or less is preferable, 25 mass% or less is more preferable, and 20 mass% or less is still more preferable.
 重合性化合物は、1種単独で使用しても、2種以上を併用してもよい。
 上記レジスト層組成物における重合性化合物の含有量は、上記レジスト層組成物の全質量に対し、1質量%~70質量%が好ましく、10質量%~70質量%がより好ましく、20質量%~60質量%が更に好ましく、20質量%~50質量%が特に好ましい。
A polymeric compound may be used individually by 1 type, or may use 2 or more types together.
The content of the polymerizable compound in the resist layer composition is preferably 1% by weight to 70% by weight, more preferably 10% by weight to 70% by weight, and more preferably 20% by weight to the total weight of the resist layer composition. 60% by mass is more preferable, and 20% by mass to 50% by mass is particularly preferable.
 また、上記レジスト層組成物が2官能のエチレン性不飽和化合物と3官能以上のエチレン性不飽和化合物とを含有する場合、2官能のエチレン性不飽和化合物の含有量は、上記レジスト層組成物に含まれる全てのエチレン性不飽和化合物に対し、10質量%~90質量%が好ましく、20質量%~85質量%がより好ましく、30質量%~80質量%が更に好ましい。
 また、この場合、3官能以上のエチレン性不飽和化合物の含有量は、上記レジスト層組成物に含まれる全てのエチレン性不飽和化合物に対し、10質量%~90質量%が好ましく、15質量%~80質量%がより好ましく、20質量%~70質量%が更に好ましい。
 また、この場合、2官能以上のエチレン性不飽和化合物の含有量は、2官能のエチレン性不飽和化合物と3官能以上のエチレン性不飽和化合物との総含有量に対し、40質量%以上100質量%未満であることが好ましく、40質量%~90質量%であることがより好ましく、50質量%~80質量%であることが更に好ましく、50質量%~70質量%であることが特に好ましい。
When the resist layer composition contains a bifunctional ethylenically unsaturated compound and a trifunctional or higher functional ethylenically unsaturated compound, the content of the bifunctional ethylenically unsaturated compound is determined by the resist layer composition. Is preferably 10% by mass to 90% by mass, more preferably 20% by mass to 85% by mass, and still more preferably 30% by mass to 80% by mass with respect to all the ethylenically unsaturated compounds contained in.
In this case, the content of the trifunctional or higher functional ethylenically unsaturated compound is preferably 10% by mass to 90% by mass, and 15% by mass with respect to all the ethylenically unsaturated compounds contained in the resist layer composition. More preferably, it is ˜80% by mass, and further preferably 20% by mass to 70% by mass.
In this case, the content of the bifunctional or higher ethylenically unsaturated compound is 40% by mass or more and 100% with respect to the total content of the bifunctional ethylenically unsaturated compound and the trifunctional or higher ethylenically unsaturated compound. It is preferably less than mass%, more preferably 40 mass% to 90 mass%, further preferably 50 mass% to 80 mass%, and particularly preferably 50 mass% to 70 mass%. .
 また、上記レジスト層組成物が2官能以上のエチレン性不飽和化合物を含有する場合、上記レジスト層組成物は、更に単官能エチレン性不飽和化合物を含有してもよい。
 更に、上記レジスト層組成物が2官能以上のエチレン性不飽和化合物を含有する場合、上記レジスト層組成物に含有されるエチレン性不飽和化合物において、2官能以上のエチレン性不飽和化合物が主成分であることが好ましい。
 具体的には、上記レジスト層組成物が2官能以上のエチレン性不飽和化合物を含有する場合において、2官能以上のエチレン性不飽和化合物の含有量は、上記レジスト層組成物に含有されるエチレン性不飽和化合物の総含有量に対し、60質量%~100質量%が好ましく、80質量%~100質量%がより好ましく、90質量%~100質量%が特に好ましい。
When the resist layer composition contains a bifunctional or higher functional ethylenically unsaturated compound, the resist layer composition may further contain a monofunctional ethylenically unsaturated compound.
Further, when the resist layer composition contains a bifunctional or higher functional ethylenically unsaturated compound, the bifunctional or higher functional ethylenically unsaturated compound is a main component in the ethylenically unsaturated compound contained in the resist layer composition. It is preferable that
Specifically, when the resist layer composition contains a bifunctional or higher functional ethylenically unsaturated compound, the content of the bifunctional or higher functional ethylenically unsaturated compound is the ethylene contained in the resist layer composition. 60% by mass to 100% by mass, more preferably 80% by mass to 100% by mass, and particularly preferably 90% by mass to 100% by mass with respect to the total content of the unsaturated unsaturated compounds.
 また、上記レジスト層組成物が、酸基を有するエチレン性不飽和化合物(好ましくは、カルボキシ基を含有する2官能以上のエチレン性不飽和化合物又はそのカルボン酸無水物)を含有する場合、酸基を有するエチレン性不飽和化合物の含有量は、上記レジスト層組成物に対し、1質量%~50質量%が好ましく、1質量%~20質量%がより好ましく、1質量%~10質量%が更に好ましい。 When the resist layer composition contains an ethylenically unsaturated compound having an acid group (preferably a bifunctional or higher functional ethylenically unsaturated compound containing a carboxy group or a carboxylic acid anhydride thereof), an acid group The content of the ethylenically unsaturated compound having 1 to 50% by weight, preferably 1% to 20% by weight, more preferably 1% to 10% by weight, based on the resist layer composition. preferable.
<酸基を有するバインダーポリマー>
 本開示における感光性転写材料がネガ型感光性転写材料である場合、上記レジスト層組成物は、酸基を有するバインダーポリマーを含有することが好ましい。
 酸基を有するバインダーポリマーとしては、アルカリ可溶性樹脂が好ましい。
 酸基としては、カルボキシ基、スルホ基、リン酸基、ホスホン酸基等が挙げられる。
 中でも、酸基としては、カルボキシ基が好ましく挙げられる。
 上記酸基を有するバインダーポリマーの酸価は、特に制限はないが、アルカリ現像性の観点から、酸価60mgKOH/g以上のアルカリ可溶性樹脂であることが好ましく、酸価60mgKOH/g以上のカルボキシ基含有アクリル樹脂であることが特に好ましい。
<Binder polymer having acid group>
When the photosensitive transfer material in the present disclosure is a negative photosensitive transfer material, the resist layer composition preferably contains a binder polymer having an acid group.
As the binder polymer having an acid group, an alkali-soluble resin is preferable.
Examples of the acid group include a carboxy group, a sulfo group, a phosphoric acid group, and a phosphonic acid group.
Of these, a carboxy group is preferred as the acid group.
The acid value of the binder polymer having an acid group is not particularly limited, but from the viewpoint of alkali developability, an acid-soluble resin having an acid value of 60 mgKOH / g or more is preferable, and a carboxy group having an acid value of 60 mgKOH / g or more. It is especially preferable that it is a containing acrylic resin.
 酸価60mgKOH/g以上のカルボキシ基含有アクリル樹脂(以下、特定重合体Aと称することがある。)としては、上記酸価の条件を満たす限りにおいて特に制限はなく、公知の樹脂から適宜選択して用いることができる。
 例えば、特開2011-95716号公報の段落0025に記載のポリマーのうちの酸価60mgKOH/g以上のカルボキシ基含有アクリル樹脂であるアルカリ可溶性樹脂、特開2010-237589号公報の段落0033~段落0052に記載のポリマーのうちの酸価60mgKOH/g以上のカルボキシ基含有アクリル樹脂、特開2016-224162号公報の段落0053~段落0068に記載のバインダーポリマーのうちの酸価60mgKOH/g以上のカルボキシ基含有アクリル樹脂等が、本開示における特定重合体Aとして好ましく用いることができる。
 ここで、(メタ)アクリル樹脂は、(メタ)アクリル酸に由来する構成単位及び(メタ)アクリル酸エステルに由来する構成単位の少なくとも一方を含む樹脂を指す。
 (メタ)アクリル樹脂中における(メタ)アクリル酸に由来する構成単位及び(メタ)アクリル酸エステルに由来する構成単位の合計割合は、30モル%以上が好ましく、50モル%以上がより好ましい。
The carboxyl group-containing acrylic resin having an acid value of 60 mgKOH / g or more (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the specific polymer A) is not particularly limited as long as the above acid value is satisfied, and is appropriately selected from known resins. Can be used.
For example, among the polymers described in paragraph 0025 of JP2011-95716A, an alkali-soluble resin which is a carboxy group-containing acrylic resin having an acid value of 60 mgKOH / g or more, paragraphs 0033 to 0052 of JP2010-237589A. A carboxyl group-containing acrylic resin having an acid value of 60 mgKOH / g or more among the polymers described in 1), a carboxy group having an acid value of 60 mgKOH / g or more among the binder polymers described in paragraphs 0053 to 0068 of JP-A-2016-224162. A containing acrylic resin or the like can be preferably used as the specific polymer A in the present disclosure.
Here, the (meth) acrylic resin refers to a resin including at least one of a structural unit derived from (meth) acrylic acid and a structural unit derived from (meth) acrylic acid ester.
30 mol% or more is preferable and, as for the total ratio of the structural unit derived from the (meth) acrylic acid in the (meth) acrylic resin and the structural unit derived from the (meth) acrylic acid ester, 50 mol% or more is more preferable.
 特定重合体Aにおける、カルボキシ基を有するモノマーの共重合比の好ましい範囲は、ポリマー100質量%に対して、5質量%~50質量%であり、より好ましくは10質量%~40質量%、更に好ましくは12質量%~30質量%の範囲内である。
 特定重合体Aは、反応性基を有していてもよく、反応性基を特定重合体Aに導入する手段としては、水酸基、カルボキシ基、一級、二級アミノ基、アセトアセチル基、スルホン酸などに、エポキシ化合物、ブロックイソシアネート、イソシアネート、ビニルスルホン化合物、アルデヒド化合物、メチロール化合物、カルボン酸無水物などを反応させる方法が挙げられる。
 特定重合体Aとしては、以下に示す化合物Aが好ましい。なお、以下に示す各構成単位の含有比率は目的に応じて適宜変更することができる。
A preferable range of the copolymerization ratio of the monomer having a carboxy group in the specific polymer A is 5% by mass to 50% by mass, more preferably 10% by mass to 40% by mass, and more preferably 100% by mass of the polymer. Preferably, it is in the range of 12% by mass to 30% by mass.
The specific polymer A may have a reactive group, and means for introducing the reactive group into the specific polymer A include a hydroxyl group, a carboxy group, a primary, secondary amino group, an acetoacetyl group, and a sulfonic acid. Examples include a method of reacting an epoxy compound, a blocked isocyanate, an isocyanate, a vinyl sulfone compound, an aldehyde compound, a methylol compound, a carboxylic anhydride, and the like.
As the specific polymer A, the following compound A is preferable. In addition, the content ratio of each structural unit shown below can be changed as appropriate according to the purpose.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000019

 
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000019

 
 本開示に用いられる酸基を有するバインダーポリマーの酸価は、アルカリ現像性の観点から、60mgKOH/g~200mgKOH/gであることが好ましく、60mgKOH/g~150mgKOH/gであることがより好ましく、60mgKOH/g~110mgKOH/gであることが更に好ましい。
 本開示において、酸価は、JIS K0070(1992年)に記載の方法に従って、測定された値を意味する。
The acid value of the binder polymer having an acid group used in the present disclosure is preferably 60 mgKOH / g to 200 mgKOH / g, more preferably 60 mgKOH / g to 150 mgKOH / g, from the viewpoint of alkali developability. More preferably, it is 60 mgKOH / g to 110 mgKOH / g.
In the present disclosure, the acid value means a value measured according to the method described in JIS K0070 (1992).
 酸基を有するバインダーポリマーの重量平均分子量は、1,000以上が好ましく、1万以上がより好ましく、2万~10万が更に好ましい。 The weight average molecular weight of the binder polymer having an acid group is preferably 1,000 or more, more preferably 10,000 or more, and further preferably 20,000 to 100,000.
 また、上記酸基を有するバインダーポリマーは、上記特定重合体A以外にも、任意の膜形成樹脂を目的に応じて適宜選択して用いることができる。例えば、ポリヒドロキシスチレン樹脂、ポリイミド樹脂、ポリベンゾオキサゾール樹脂、ポリシロキサン樹脂などを好ましく挙げることができる。 Further, as the binder polymer having an acid group, in addition to the specific polymer A, any film-forming resin can be appropriately selected and used depending on the purpose. For example, polyhydroxystyrene resin, polyimide resin, polybenzoxazole resin, polysiloxane resin and the like can be preferably exemplified.
 酸基を有するバインダーポリマーは、1種単独で使用しても、2種以上を含有してもよい。
 上記レジスト層組成物における酸基を有するバインダーポリマーの含有量は、感光性の観点から、上記レジスト層組成物の全質量に対し、10質量%以上90質量%以下であることが好ましく、20質量%以上80質量%以下であることがより好ましく、30質量%以上70質量%以下であることが更に好ましい。
The binder polymer having an acid group may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
The content of the binder polymer having an acid group in the resist layer composition is preferably 10% by mass or more and 90% by mass or less, and 20% by mass with respect to the total mass of the resist layer composition, from the viewpoint of photosensitivity. % To 80% by mass, more preferably 30% to 70% by mass.
<光重合開始剤>
 本開示における感光性転写材料がネガ型感光性転写材料である場合、上記レジスト層組成物は、光重合開始剤を含むことが好ましい。光重合開始剤は、紫外線、可視光線等の活性光線を受けて、重合性化合物(エチレン性不飽和化合物)の重合を開始する。
 光重合開始剤としては特に制限はなく、公知の光重合開始剤を用いることができる。
 光重合開始剤としては、オキシムエステル構造を有する光重合開始剤(以下、「オキシム系光重合開始剤」ともいう。)、α-アミノアルキルフェノン構造を有する光重合開始剤(以下、「α-アミノアルキルフェノン系光重合開始剤」ともいう。)、α-ヒドロキシアルキルフェノン構造を有する光重合開始剤(以下、「α-ヒドロキシアルキルフェノン系重合開始剤」ともいう。)、アシルフォスフィンオキサイド構造を有する光重合開始剤(以下、「アシルフォスフィンオキサイド系光重合開始剤」ともいう。)、N-フェニルグリシン構造を有する光重合開始剤(以下、「N-フェニルグリシン系光重合開始剤」ともいう。)等が挙げられる。
<Photopolymerization initiator>
When the photosensitive transfer material in the present disclosure is a negative photosensitive transfer material, the resist layer composition preferably includes a photopolymerization initiator. The photopolymerization initiator receives actinic rays such as ultraviolet rays and visible rays, and initiates polymerization of the polymerizable compound (ethylenically unsaturated compound).
There is no restriction | limiting in particular as a photoinitiator, A well-known photoinitiator can be used.
Examples of the photopolymerization initiator include a photopolymerization initiator having an oxime ester structure (hereinafter also referred to as “oxime-based photopolymerization initiator”) and a photopolymerization initiator having an α-aminoalkylphenone structure (hereinafter referred to as “α- An aminoalkylphenone photopolymerization initiator ”), a photopolymerization initiator having an α-hydroxyalkylphenone structure (hereinafter also referred to as“ α-hydroxyalkylphenone polymerization initiator ”), an acylphosphine oxide structure. (Hereinafter also referred to as “acylphosphine oxide photopolymerization initiator”), photopolymerization initiator having an N-phenylglycine structure (hereinafter “N-phenylglycine photopolymerization initiator”) Or the like)).
 光重合開始剤は、オキシム系光重合開始剤、α-アミノアルキルフェノン系光重合開始剤、α-ヒドロキシアルキルフェノン系重合開始剤及びN-フェニルグリシン系光重合開始剤よりなる群から選ばれる少なくとも1種を含むことが好ましく、オキシム系光重合開始剤、α-アミノアルキルフェノン系光重合開始剤及びN-フェニルグリシン系光重合開始剤よりなる群から選ばれる少なくとも1種を含むことがより好ましい。 The photopolymerization initiator is at least selected from the group consisting of an oxime photopolymerization initiator, an α-aminoalkylphenone photopolymerization initiator, an α-hydroxyalkylphenone polymerization initiator, and an N-phenylglycine photopolymerization initiator. 1 type is preferably included, and more preferably at least one selected from the group consisting of an oxime photopolymerization initiator, an α-aminoalkylphenone photopolymerization initiator, and an N-phenylglycine photopolymerization initiator. .
 また、光重合開始剤としては、2,4,5-トリアリールイミダゾール二量体及びその誘導体からなる群より選択される少なくとも1種を含むことも好ましい。なお、2,4,5-トリアリールイミダゾール二量体及びその誘導体は、下記式PIで表される化合物であってもよい。 In addition, the photopolymerization initiator preferably includes at least one selected from the group consisting of 2,4,5-triarylimidazole dimer and derivatives thereof. The 2,4,5-triarylimidazole dimer and its derivative may be a compound represented by the following formula PI.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000020

 
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000020

 
 式PI中、X及びXのうち少なくとも1つは塩素原子であることが好ましい。Ar、Ar、Ar及びArが、それぞれ独立に置換基を有する場合、置換基の数は1~5であることが好ましく、1~3であることがより好ましく、1であることが更に好ましい。また、Ar、Ar、Ar及びArが、それぞれ独立に置換基を有する場合、その置換位置は特に限定されず、オルト位又はパラ位であることが好ましい。p及びqは、それぞれ独立に、1~5の整数であり、1~3の整数であることがより好ましく、1であることが更に好ましい。 In the formula PI, it is preferable that at least one of X 1 and X 2 is a chlorine atom. When Ar 1 , Ar 2 , Ar 3 and Ar 4 each independently have a substituent, the number of substituents is preferably 1 to 5, more preferably 1 to 3, and preferably 1. Is more preferable. Moreover, when Ar 1 , Ar 2 , Ar 3 and Ar 4 each independently have a substituent, the substitution position is not particularly limited, and is preferably the ortho position or the para position. p and q are each independently an integer of 1 to 5, more preferably an integer of 1 to 3, and still more preferably 1.
 式PIで表される化合物としては、例えば、2-(o-クロロフェニル)-4,5-ジフェニルイミダゾール二量体、2-(o-クロロフェニル)-4,5-ジ(メトキシフェニル)イミダゾール二量体、2-(o-フルオロフェニル)-4,5-ジフェニルイミダゾール二量体、2-(o-メトキシフェニル)-4,5-ジフェニルイミダゾール二量体、2-(p-メトキシフェニル)-4,5-ジフェニルイミダゾール二量体が挙げられる。なお、2つの2,4,5-トリアリールイミダゾールのアリール基の置換基は同一で対象な化合物を与えてもよいし、相違して非対称な化合物を与えてもよい。 Examples of the compound represented by the formula PI include 2- (o-chlorophenyl) -4,5-diphenylimidazole dimer, 2- (o-chlorophenyl) -4,5-di (methoxyphenyl) imidazole dimer. 2- (o-fluorophenyl) -4,5-diphenylimidazole dimer, 2- (o-methoxyphenyl) -4,5-diphenylimidazole dimer, 2- (p-methoxyphenyl) -4 , 5-diphenylimidazole dimer. In addition, the substituents of the aryl groups of two 2,4,5-triarylimidazoles may be the same to give the target compound, or differently give an asymmetric compound.
 また、光重合開始剤としては、例えば、特開2011-95716号公報の段落0031~0042、特開2015-014783号公報の段落0064~0081に記載された重合開始剤を用いてもよい。 As the photopolymerization initiator, for example, polymerization initiators described in paragraphs 0031 to 0042 of JP2011-95716A and paragraphs 0064 to 0081 of JP2015-014783A may be used.
 光重合開始剤の市販品としては、1-[4-(フェニルチオ)]-1,2-オクタンジオン-2-(O-ベンゾイルオキシム)(商品名:IRGACURE(登録商標) OXE-01、BASF社製)、1-[9-エチル-6-(2-メチルベンゾイル)-9H-カルバゾール-3-イル]エタノン-1-(O-アセチルオキシム)(商品名:IRGACURE OXE-02、BASF社製)、2-(ジメチルアミノ)-2-[(4-メチルフェニル)メチル]-1-[4-(4-モルフォリニル)フェニル]-1-ブタノン(商品名:IRGACURE 379EG、BASF社製)、2-メチル-1-(4-メチルチオフェニル)-2-モルフォリノプロパン-1-オン(商品名:IRGACURE 907、BASF社製)、2-ヒドロキシ-1-{4-[4-(2-ヒドロキシ-2-メチルプロピオニル)ベンジル]フェニル}-2-メチルプロパン-1-オン(商品名:IRGACURE 127、BASF社製)、2-ベンジル-2-ジメチルアミノ-1-(4-モルフォリノフェニル)ブタノン-1(商品名:IRGACURE 369、BASF社製)、2-ヒドロキシ-2-メチル-1-フェニルプロパン-1-オン(商品名:IRGACURE 1173、BASF社製)、1-ヒドロキシシクロヘキシルフェニルケトン(商品名:IRGACURE 184、BASF社製)、2,2-ジメトキシ-1,2-ジフェニルエタン-1-オン(商品名:IRGACURE 651、BASF社製)、オキシムエステル系の光重合開始剤(商品名:Lunar 6、DKSHジャパン(株)製)、2,2′-ビス(2-クロロフェニル)-4,4′,5,5′-テトラフェニルビスイミダゾール(2-(2-クロロフェニル)-4,5-ジフェニルイミダゾール二量体)(商品名:B-CIM、Hampford社製)などが挙げられる。 Commercially available photopolymerization initiators include 1- [4- (phenylthio)]-1,2-octanedione-2- (O-benzoyloxime) (trade name: IRGACURE (registered trademark) OXE-01, BASF Corporation 1)-[9-ethyl-6- (2-methylbenzoyl) -9H-carbazol-3-yl] ethanone-1- (O-acetyloxime) (trade name: IRGACURE OXE-02, manufactured by BASF) 2- (dimethylamino) -2-[(4-methylphenyl) methyl] -1- [4- (4-morpholinyl) phenyl] -1-butanone (trade name: IRGACURE 379EG, manufactured by BASF), 2- Methyl-1- (4-methylthiophenyl) -2-morpholinopropan-1-one (trade name: IRGACURE 907, manufactured by BASF), 2 Hydroxy-1- {4- [4- (2-hydroxy-2-methylpropionyl) benzyl] phenyl} -2-methylpropan-1-one (trade name: IRGACURE 127, manufactured by BASF), 2-benzyl-2 -Dimethylamino-1- (4-morpholinophenyl) butanone-1 (trade name: IRGACURE 369, manufactured by BASF), 2-hydroxy-2-methyl-1-phenylpropan-1-one (trade name: IRGACURE 1173) BASF), 1-hydroxycyclohexyl phenyl ketone (trade name: IRGACURE 184, manufactured by BASF), 2,2-dimethoxy-1,2-diphenylethane-1-one (trade name: IRGACURE 651, manufactured by BASF) ), Oxime ester photopolymerization initiator (trade name: Luna) 6, DKSH Japan Co., Ltd.), 2,2'-bis (2-chlorophenyl) -4,4 ', 5,5'-tetraphenylbisimidazole (2- (2-chlorophenyl) -4,5-diphenyl Imidazole dimer) (trade name: B-CIM, manufactured by Hampford).
 光重合開始剤は、1種単独で使用しても、2種以上を併用してもよい。
 上記レジスト層組成物における光重合開始剤の含有量は、特に制限はないが、上記レジスト層組成物の全質量に対し、0.1質量%以上が好ましく、0.5質量%以上がより好ましく、1.0質量%以上が更に好ましい。
 また、光重合開始剤の含有量は、レジスト層組成物の全質量に対し、10質量%以下が好ましく、5質量%以下がより好ましい。
A photoinitiator may be used individually by 1 type, or may use 2 or more types together.
Although there is no restriction | limiting in particular in content of the photoinitiator in the said resist layer composition, 0.1 mass% or more is preferable with respect to the total mass of the said resist layer composition, and 0.5 mass% or more is more preferable. 1.0 mass% or more is still more preferable.
Moreover, 10 mass% or less is preferable with respect to the total mass of a resist layer composition, and, as for content of a photoinitiator, 5 mass% or less is more preferable.
-重合禁止剤-
 本開示に係る感光性転写材料がネガ型感光性転写材料である場合、上記レジスト層組成物は、重合禁止剤を少なくとも1種含有してもよい。
 重合禁止剤としては、例えば、特許第4502784号公報の段落0018に記載された熱重合防止剤を用いることができる。
 中でも、フェノチアジン、フェノキサジン又は4-メトキシフェノールを好適に用いることができる。
-Polymerization inhibitor-
When the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure is a negative photosensitive transfer material, the resist layer composition may contain at least one polymerization inhibitor.
As the polymerization inhibitor, for example, a thermal polymerization inhibitor described in paragraph 0018 of Japanese Patent No. 4502784 can be used.
Among these, phenothiazine, phenoxazine or 4-methoxyphenol can be preferably used.
 上記レジスト層組成物が重合禁止剤を含有する場合、重合禁止剤の含有量は、上記レジスト層組成物の全質量に対して、0.01質量%~3質量%が好ましく、0.01質量%~1質量%がより好ましく、0.01質量%~0.8質量%が更に好ましい。 When the resist layer composition contains a polymerization inhibitor, the content of the polymerization inhibitor is preferably 0.01% by mass to 3% by mass, and 0.01% by mass with respect to the total mass of the resist layer composition. % To 1% by mass is more preferable, and 0.01% to 0.8% by mass is even more preferable.
<塩基性化合物〔(D)成分〕>
 本開示に係るレジスト層組成物は、塩基性化合物含有することが好ましい。
 塩基性化合物としては、化学増幅レジストで用いられる塩基性化合物の中から任意に選択して使用することができる。例えば、脂肪族アミン、芳香族アミン、複素環式アミン、第四級アンモニウムヒドロキシド、及び、カルボン酸の第四級アンモニウム塩等が挙げられる。これらの具体例としては、特開2011-221494号公報の段落0204~段落0207に記載の化合物が挙げられ、これらの内容は本開示に組み込まれる。
<Basic Compound [Component (D)]>
The resist layer composition according to the present disclosure preferably contains a basic compound.
The basic compound can be arbitrarily selected from basic compounds used in chemically amplified resists. Examples thereof include aliphatic amines, aromatic amines, heterocyclic amines, quaternary ammonium hydroxides, and quaternary ammonium salts of carboxylic acids. Specific examples thereof include compounds described in JP-A-2011-212494, paragraphs 0204 to 0207, the contents of which are incorporated in the present disclosure.
 具体的には、脂肪族アミンとしては、例えば、トリメチルアミン、ジエチルアミン、トリエチルアミン、ジ-n-プロピルアミン、トリ-n-プロピルアミン、ジ-n-ペンチルアミン、トリ-n-ペンチルアミン、ジエタノールアミン、トリエタノールアミン、ジシクロヘキシルアミン、及び、ジシクロヘキシルメチルアミンなどが挙げられる。
 芳香族アミンとしては、例えば、アニリン、ベンジルアミン、N,N-ジメチルアニリン、及び、ジフェニルアミンなどが挙げられる。
 複素環式アミンとしては、例えば、ピリジン、2-メチルピリジン、4-メチルピリジン、2-エチルピリジン、4-エチルピリジン、2-フェニルピリジン、4-フェニルピリジン、N-メチル-4-フェニルピリジン、4-ジメチルアミノピリジン、イミダゾール、ベンズイミダゾール、4-メチルイミダゾール、2-フェニルベンズイミダゾール、2,4,5-トリフェニルイミダゾール、ニコチン、ニコチン酸、ニコチン酸アミド、キノリン、8-オキシキノリン、ピラジン、ピラゾール、ピリダジン、プリン、ピロリジン、ピペリジン、ピペラジン、モルホリン、4-メチルモルホリン、シクロヘキシルモルホリノエチルチオウレア(CMTU)、1,5-ジアザビシクロ[4.3.0]-5-ノネン、及び、1,8-ジアザビシクロ[5.3.0]-7-ウンデセンなどが挙げられる。
 第四級アンモニウムヒドロキシドとしては、例えば、テトラメチルアンモニウムヒドロキシド、テトラエチルアンモニウムヒドロキシド、テトラ-n-ブチルアンモニウムヒドロキシド、及び、テトラ-n-ヘキシルアンモニウムヒドロキシドなどが挙げられる。
 カルボン酸の第四級アンモニウム塩としては、例えば、テトラメチルアンモニウムアセテート、テトラメチルアンモニウムベンゾエート、テトラ-n-ブチルアンモニウムアセテート、及び、テトラ-n-ブチルアンモニウムベンゾエートなどが挙げられる。
Specific examples of the aliphatic amine include trimethylamine, diethylamine, triethylamine, di-n-propylamine, tri-n-propylamine, di-n-pentylamine, tri-n-pentylamine, diethanolamine, triethanolamine, and the like. Examples include ethanolamine, dicyclohexylamine, and dicyclohexylmethylamine.
Examples of the aromatic amine include aniline, benzylamine, N, N-dimethylaniline, and diphenylamine.
Examples of the heterocyclic amine include pyridine, 2-methylpyridine, 4-methylpyridine, 2-ethylpyridine, 4-ethylpyridine, 2-phenylpyridine, 4-phenylpyridine, N-methyl-4-phenylpyridine, 4-dimethylaminopyridine, imidazole, benzimidazole, 4-methylimidazole, 2-phenylbenzimidazole, 2,4,5-triphenylimidazole, nicotine, nicotinic acid, nicotinamide, quinoline, 8-oxyquinoline, pyrazine, Pyrazole, pyridazine, purine, pyrrolidine, piperidine, piperazine, morpholine, 4-methylmorpholine, cyclohexylmorpholinoethylthiourea (CMTU), 1,5-diazabicyclo [4.3.0] -5-nonene, and 1,8- Diazabishi (B) [5.3.0] -7-undecene and the like.
Examples of the quaternary ammonium hydroxide include tetramethylammonium hydroxide, tetraethylammonium hydroxide, tetra-n-butylammonium hydroxide, and tetra-n-hexylammonium hydroxide.
Examples of the quaternary ammonium salt of carboxylic acid include tetramethylammonium acetate, tetramethylammonium benzoate, tetra-n-butylammonium acetate, and tetra-n-butylammonium benzoate.
 上記塩基性化合物は、1種単独で使用しても、2種以上を併用してもよい。
 塩基性化合物の含有量は、上記レジスト層組成物の全固形分に対して、0.001質量%~5質量%であることが好ましく、0.005質量%~3質量%であることがより好ましい。
The said basic compound may be used individually by 1 type, or may use 2 or more types together.
The content of the basic compound is preferably 0.001% by mass to 5% by mass and more preferably 0.005% by mass to 3% by mass with respect to the total solid content of the resist layer composition. preferable.
<溶剤>
 本開示に係るレジスト層組成物は、溶剤(S)を更に含有することが好ましい。
 また、上記レジスト層組成物は、後述するレジスト層を容易に形成するため、一旦溶剤を含有させてレジスト層組成物の粘度を調節し、溶剤を含むレジスト層組成物を塗布及び乾燥して、レジスト層を好適に形成することができる。
 本開示に使用される溶剤としては、公知の溶剤を用いることができる。溶剤としては、エチレングリコールモノアルキルエーテル類、エチレングリコールジアルキルエーテル類、エチレングリコールモノアルキルエーテルアセテート類、プロピレングリコールモノアルキルエーテル類、プロピレングリコールジアルキルエーテル類、プロピレングリコールモノアルキルエーテルアセテート類、ジエチレングリコールジアルキルエーテル類、ジエチレングリコールモノアルキルエーテルアセテート類、ジプロピレングリコールモノアルキルエーテル類、ジプロピレングリコールジアルキルエーテル類、ジプロピレングリコールモノアルキルエーテルアセテート類、エステル類、ケトン類、アミド類、及び、ラクトン類、酢酸エチル、酢酸プロピル、酢酸イソプロピル、酢酸イソブチル、酢酸ブチル、酢酸tertブチル、シクロペンチルメチルエーテル、ジイソプロピルエーテル、プロピレングリコールモノエチルエーテル、メチルn-ブチルケトン、メチルエチルケトン、メチルイソブチルケトン、メチルn-プロピルケトン、メチルイソプロピルケトン又はトルエン等が例示できる。また、溶剤の具体例としては特開2011-221494号公報の段落0174~段落0178に記載の溶剤も挙げられ、これらの内容は本開示に組み込まれる。
<Solvent>
The resist layer composition according to the present disclosure preferably further contains a solvent (S).
Moreover, in order to easily form a resist layer, which will be described later, the resist layer composition once contains a solvent to adjust the viscosity of the resist layer composition, apply and dry the resist layer composition containing the solvent, A resist layer can be suitably formed.
As the solvent used in the present disclosure, a known solvent can be used. Solvents include ethylene glycol monoalkyl ethers, ethylene glycol dialkyl ethers, ethylene glycol monoalkyl ether acetates, propylene glycol monoalkyl ethers, propylene glycol dialkyl ethers, propylene glycol monoalkyl ether acetates, diethylene glycol dialkyl ethers , Diethylene glycol monoalkyl ether acetates, dipropylene glycol monoalkyl ethers, dipropylene glycol dialkyl ethers, dipropylene glycol monoalkyl ether acetates, esters, ketones, amides, and lactones, ethyl acetate, acetic acid Propyl, isopropyl acetate, isobutyl acetate, butyl acetate, tert-butyl acetate Le, cyclopentyl methyl ether, diisopropyl ether, propylene glycol monoethyl ether, methyl n- butyl ketone, methyl ethyl ketone, methyl isobutyl ketone, methyl n- propyl ketone, methyl isopropyl ketone or toluene and the like. Specific examples of the solvent include the solvents described in paragraphs 0174 to 0178 of JP2011-221494A, the contents of which are incorporated in the present disclosure.
 また、既述の溶剤に、更に必要に応じて、ベンジルエチルエーテル、ジヘキシルエーテル、エチレングリコールモノフェニルエーテルアセテート、ジエチレングリコールモノメチルエーテル、ジエチレングリコールモノエチルエーテル、イソホロン、カプロン酸、カプリル酸、1-オクタノール、1-ノナール、ベンジルアルコール、アニソール、酢酸ベンジル、安息香酸エチル、シュウ酸ジエチル、マレイン酸ジエチル、炭酸エチレン、又は、炭酸プロピレン等の溶剤を添加することもできる。
 溶剤は、1種のみ用いてもよく、2種以上を使用してもよい。
 本開示に用いることができる溶剤は、1種単独で用いてもよく、2種を併用することがより好ましい。溶剤を2種以上使用する場合には、例えば、プロピレングリコールモノアルキルエーテルアセテート類とジアルキルエーテル類との併用、ジアセテート類とジエチレングリコールジアルキルエーテル類との併用、又は、エステル類とブチレングリコールアルキルエーテルアセテート類との併用が好ましい。
In addition, benzyl ethyl ether, dihexyl ether, ethylene glycol monophenyl ether acetate, diethylene glycol monomethyl ether, diethylene glycol monoethyl ether, isophorone, caproic acid, caprylic acid, 1-octanol, -Solvents such as nonal, benzyl alcohol, anisole, benzyl acetate, ethyl benzoate, diethyl oxalate, diethyl maleate, ethylene carbonate or propylene carbonate can also be added.
Only 1 type may be used for a solvent and 2 or more types may be used for it.
The solvent which can be used for this indication may be used individually by 1 type, and it is more preferable to use 2 types together. When two or more solvents are used, for example, combined use of propylene glycol monoalkyl ether acetates and dialkyl ethers, combined use of diacetates and diethylene glycol dialkyl ethers, or esters and butylene glycol alkyl ether acetates A combination with the above is preferred.
 また、溶剤としては、沸点130℃以上160℃未満の溶剤、沸点160℃以上の溶剤、又は、これらの混合物であることが好ましい。
 沸点130℃以上160℃未満の溶剤としては、プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテート(沸点146℃)、プロピレングリコールモノエチルエーテルアセテート(沸点158℃)、プロピレングリコールメチル-n-ブチルエーテル(沸点155℃)、及び、プロピレングリコールメチル-n-プロピルエーテル(沸点131℃)が例示できる。
 沸点160℃以上の溶剤としては、3-エトキシプロピオン酸エチル(沸点170℃)、ジエチレングリコールメチルエチルエーテル(沸点176℃)、プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルプロピオネート(沸点160℃)、ジプロピレングリコールメチルエーテルアセテート(沸点213℃)、3-メトキシブチルエーテルアセテート(沸点171℃)、ジエチレングリコールジエチエルエーテル(沸点189℃)、ジエチレングリコールジメチルエーテル(沸点162℃)、プロピレングリコールジアセテート(沸点190℃)、ジエチレングリコールモノエチルエーテルアセテート(沸点220℃)、ジプロピレングリコールジメチルエーテル(沸点175℃)、及び、1,3-ブチレングリコールジアセテート(沸点232℃)が例示できる。
Further, the solvent is preferably a solvent having a boiling point of 130 ° C. or higher and lower than 160 ° C., a solvent having a boiling point of 160 ° C. or higher, or a mixture thereof.
Solvents having a boiling point of 130 ° C. or higher and lower than 160 ° C. include propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate (boiling point 146 ° C.), propylene glycol monoethyl ether acetate (boiling point 158 ° C.), propylene glycol methyl-n-butyl ether (boiling point 155 ° C.), and An example is propylene glycol methyl-n-propyl ether (boiling point 131 ° C.).
Solvents having a boiling point of 160 ° C or higher include ethyl 3-ethoxypropionate (boiling point 170 ° C), diethylene glycol methyl ethyl ether (boiling point 176 ° C), propylene glycol monomethyl ether propionate (boiling point 160 ° C), dipropylene glycol methyl ether acetate. (Boiling point 213 ° C), 3-methoxybutyl ether acetate (boiling point 171 ° C), diethylene glycol diethyl ether (boiling point 189 ° C), diethylene glycol dimethyl ether (boiling point 162 ° C), propylene glycol diacetate (boiling point 190 ° C), diethylene glycol monoethyl ether acetate (Boiling point 220 ° C), dipropylene glycol dimethyl ether (boiling point 175 ° C), and 1,3-butylene glycol diacetate (boiling point 232 ° C) There can be exemplified.
 レジスト層組成物を塗布する際における溶剤の含有量は、レジスト層組成物中の全固形分100質量部あたり、50質量部~1,900質量部であることが好ましく、100質量部~900質量部であることがより好ましい。
 また、後述する上記レジスト層における溶剤の含有量は、レジスト層の全質量に対し、2質量%以下であることが好ましく、1質量%以下であることがより好ましく、0.5質量%以下であることが更に好ましい。
The content of the solvent in applying the resist layer composition is preferably 50 parts by weight to 1,900 parts by weight, and 100 parts by weight to 900 parts by weight per 100 parts by weight of the total solid content in the resist layer composition. More preferably, it is a part.
In addition, the content of the solvent in the resist layer described later is preferably 2% by mass or less, more preferably 1% by mass or less, and 0.5% by mass or less with respect to the total mass of the resist layer. More preferably it is.
<その他の添加剤>
 本開示に係るレジスト層組成物は、特定重合体及び光酸発生剤等の上記各成分に加え、必要に応じて公知の添加剤を含むことができる。
<Other additives>
The resist layer composition according to the present disclosure may contain known additives as necessary in addition to the above-described components such as the specific polymer and the photoacid generator.
-可塑剤-
 本開示に係るレジスト層組成物は、可塑性を改良する目的で、可塑剤を含有してもよい。
 上記可塑剤は、特定重合体よりも重量平均分子量が小さいことが好ましい。
 可塑剤の重量平均分子量は、可塑性付与の観点から500以上10,000未満が好ましく、700以上5,000未満がより好ましく、800以上4,000未満が更に好ましい。
 可塑剤は、特定重合体と相溶して可塑性を発現する化合物であれば特に限定されないが、可塑性付与の観点から、可塑剤は、分子中にアルキレンオキシ基を有することが好ましい。可塑剤に含まれるアルキレンオキシ基は下記構造を有することが好ましい。
-Plasticizer-
The resist layer composition according to the present disclosure may contain a plasticizer for the purpose of improving plasticity.
The plasticizer preferably has a weight average molecular weight smaller than that of the specific polymer.
The weight average molecular weight of the plasticizer is preferably 500 or more and less than 10,000, more preferably 700 or more and less than 5,000, and still more preferably 800 or more and less than 4,000 from the viewpoint of imparting plasticity.
The plasticizer is not particularly limited as long as it is a compound that is compatible with the specific polymer and exhibits plasticity, but from the viewpoint of imparting plasticity, the plasticizer preferably has an alkyleneoxy group in the molecule. The alkyleneoxy group contained in the plasticizer preferably has the following structure.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000021

 
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000021

 
 上記式中、Rは炭素数2~8のアルキレン基であり、nは1~50の整数を表し、*は他の原子との結合部位を表す。 In the above formula, R represents an alkylene group having 2 to 8 carbon atoms, n represents an integer of 1 to 50, and * represents a bonding site with another atom.
 なお、例えば、上記構造のアルキレンオキシ基を有する化合物(「化合物X」とする。)であっても、化合物X、特定重合体及び光酸発生剤を混合して得た化学増幅ポジ型レジスト層組成物が、化合物Xを含まずに形成した化学増幅ポジ型レジスト層組成物に比べて可塑性が向上しない場合は、本開示における可塑剤には該当しない。例えば、任意に添加される界面活性剤は、一般にレジスト層組成物に可塑性をもたらす量で使用されることはないため、本開示における可塑剤には該当しない。 For example, a chemically amplified positive resist layer obtained by mixing compound X, a specific polymer and a photoacid generator, even if it is a compound having an alkyleneoxy group having the above structure (referred to as “compound X”). When the composition does not improve the plasticity as compared with the chemically amplified positive resist layer composition formed without containing the compound X, it does not fall under the plasticizer in the present disclosure. For example, an optional surfactant is not used as a plasticizer in the present disclosure because it is generally not used in an amount that provides plasticity to the resist layer composition.
 可塑剤の含有量は、レジスト層組成物により形成されるレジスト層の密着性の観点から、上記レジスト層組成物の全固形分に対して、1質量%~50質量%であることが好ましく、2質量%~20質量%であることがより好ましい。
 上記レジスト層組成物は、可塑剤を1種のみを含んでいてもよく、2種以上を含んでいてもよい。
The content of the plasticizer is preferably 1% by mass to 50% by mass with respect to the total solid content of the resist layer composition from the viewpoint of adhesion of the resist layer formed by the resist layer composition. More preferably, the content is 2% by mass to 20% by mass.
The said resist layer composition may contain only 1 type of plasticizers, and may contain 2 or more types.
-増感剤-
 本開示に係るレジスト層組成物は、増感剤を更に含むことができる。
 増感剤は、活性光線を吸収して電子励起状態となる。電子励起状態となった増感剤は、光酸発生剤と接触して、電子移動、エネルギー移動、及び、発熱などの作用が生じる。これにより光酸発生剤は化学変化を起こして分解し、酸を生成する。
 増感剤を含有させることで、露光感度を向上させることができる。
-Sensitizer-
The resist layer composition according to the present disclosure may further include a sensitizer.
The sensitizer absorbs actinic rays and enters an electronically excited state. The sensitizer in an electronically excited state comes into contact with the photoacid generator, and effects such as electron transfer, energy transfer, and heat generation occur. Thereby, a photo-acid generator raise | generates a chemical change and decomposes | disassembles and produces | generates an acid.
Exposure sensitivity can be improved by containing a sensitizer.
 増感剤としては、アントラセン誘導体、アクリドン誘導体、チオキサントン誘導体、クマリン誘導体、ベーススチリル誘導体、及び、ジスチリルベンゼン誘導体よりなる群からえらばれた化合物が好ましく、アントラセン誘導体がより好ましい。
 アントラセン誘導体としては、アントラセン、9,10-ジブトキシアントラセン、9,10-ジクロロアントラセン、2-エチル-9,10-ジメトキシアントラセン、9-ヒドロキシメチルアントラセン、9-ブロモアントラセン、9-クロロアントラセン、9,10-ジブロモアントラセン、2-エチルアントラセン、又は、9,10-ジメトキシアントラセンが好ましい。
As the sensitizer, a compound selected from the group consisting of an anthracene derivative, an acridone derivative, a thioxanthone derivative, a coumarin derivative, a base styryl derivative, and a distyrylbenzene derivative is preferable, and an anthracene derivative is more preferable.
Anthracene derivatives include anthracene, 9,10-dibutoxyanthracene, 9,10-dichloroanthracene, 2-ethyl-9,10-dimethoxyanthracene, 9-hydroxymethylanthracene, 9-bromoanthracene, 9-chloroanthracene, 9 1,10-dibromoanthracene, 2-ethylanthracene or 9,10-dimethoxyanthracene is preferred.
 上記増感剤としては、国際公開第2015/093271号の段落0139~段落0141に記載の化合物を挙げることができる。 Examples of the sensitizer include compounds described in paragraphs 0139 to 0141 of International Publication No. 2015/092731.
 増感剤の含有量は、上記感レジスト層組成物の全固形分に対して、0質量%~10質量%であることが好ましく、0.1質量%~10質量%であることがより好ましい。 The content of the sensitizer is preferably 0% by mass to 10% by mass and more preferably 0.1% by mass to 10% by mass with respect to the total solid content of the resist layer composition. .
-ヘテロ環状化合物-
 本開示に係るレジスト層組成物は、ヘテロ環状化合物を含むことができる。
 本開示におけるヘテロ環状化合物には、特に制限はない。例えば、以下に述べる分子内にエポキシ基又はオキセタニル基を有する化合物、アルコキシメチル基含有ヘテロ環状化合物、その他、各種環状エーテル、環状エステル(ラクトン)などの含酸素モノマー、環状アミン、オキサゾリンといった含窒素モノマー、更には珪素、硫黄、リンなどのd電子をもつヘテロ環モノマー等を添加することができる。
-Heterocyclic compounds-
The resist layer composition according to the present disclosure may include a heterocyclic compound.
There is no restriction | limiting in particular in the heterocyclic compound in this indication. For example, compounds having an epoxy group or oxetanyl group in the molecule described below, alkoxymethyl group-containing heterocyclic compounds, other oxygen-containing monomers such as various cyclic ethers and cyclic esters (lactones), nitrogen-containing monomers such as cyclic amines and oxazolines Furthermore, heterocyclic monomers having d electrons such as silicon, sulfur, and phosphorus can be added.
 レジスト層組成物中におけるヘテロ環状化合物の含有量は、ヘテロ環状化合物を添加する場合には、上記レジスト層組成物の全固形分に対し、0.01質量%~50質量%であることが好ましく、0.1質量%~10質量%であることがより好ましく、1質量%~5質量%であることが更に好ましい。上記範囲であると、密着性及びエッチング耐性の観点で好ましい。ヘテロ環状化合物は1種のみを用いてもよく、2種以上を併用することもできる。 When the heterocyclic compound is added, the content of the heterocyclic compound in the resist layer composition is preferably 0.01% by mass to 50% by mass with respect to the total solid content of the resist layer composition. The content is more preferably 0.1% by mass to 10% by mass, and further preferably 1% by mass to 5% by mass. It is preferable in the said range from a viewpoint of adhesiveness and etching tolerance. Only 1 type may be used for a heterocyclic compound and it can also use 2 or more types together.
 分子内にエポキシ基を有する化合物の具体例としては、ビスフェノールA型エポキシ樹脂、ビスフェノールF型エポキシ樹脂、フェノールノボラック型エポキシ樹脂、クレゾールノボラック型エポキシ樹脂、脂肪族エポキシ樹脂等を挙げることができる。 Specific examples of the compound having an epoxy group in the molecule include bisphenol A type epoxy resin, bisphenol F type epoxy resin, phenol novolac type epoxy resin, cresol novolac type epoxy resin, aliphatic epoxy resin and the like.
 分子内にエポキシ基を有する化合物は市販品として入手できる。例えば、JER828、JER1007、JER157S70(三菱ケミカル(株)製)、JER157S65((株)三菱ケミカルホールディングス製)など、特開2011-221494号公報の段落0189に記載の市販品などが挙げられる。
 その他の市販品として、ADEKA RESIN EP-4000S、同EP-4003S、同EP-4010S、同EP-4011S(以上、(株)ADEKA製)、NC-2000、NC-3000、NC-7300、XD-1000、EPPN-501、EPPN-502(以上、(株)ADEKA製)、デナコールEX-611、EX-612、EX-614、EX-614B、EX-622、EX-512、EX-521、EX-411、EX-421、EX-313、EX-314、EX-321、EX-211、EX-212、EX-810、EX-811、EX-850、EX-851、EX-821、EX-830、EX-832、EX-841、EX-911、EX-941、EX-920、EX-931、EX-212L、EX-214L、EX-216L、EX-321L、EX-850L、DLC-201、DLC-203、DLC-204、DLC-205、DLC-206、DLC-301、DLC-402、EX-111,EX-121、EX-141、EX-145、EX-146、EX-147、EX-171、EX-192(以上ナガセケムテック製)、YH-300、YH-301、YH-302、YH-315、YH-324、YH-325(以上、新日鐵住金化学(株)製)セロキサイド2021P、2081、2000、3000、EHPE3150、エポリードGT400、セルビナースB0134、B0177((株)ダイセル製)などが挙げられる。
 分子内にエポキシ基を有する化合物は1種単独で用いてもよく、2種以上を併用してもよい。
A compound having an epoxy group in the molecule can be obtained as a commercial product. For example, JER828, JER1007, JER157S70 (manufactured by Mitsubishi Chemical Co., Ltd.), JER157S65 (manufactured by Mitsubishi Chemical Holdings Co., Ltd.), and the like, such as commercial products described in paragraph 0189 of JP2011-221494A can be mentioned.
Other commercially available products include ADEKA RESIN EP-4000S, EP-4003S, EP-4010S, EP-4011S (above, manufactured by ADEKA Corporation), NC-2000, NC-3000, NC-7300, XD- 1000, EPPN-501, EPPN-502 (above, manufactured by ADEKA Corporation), Denacol EX-611, EX-612, EX-614, EX-614B, EX-622, EX-512, EX-521, EX- 411, EX-421, EX-313, EX-314, EX-321, EX-211, EX-212, EX-810, EX-811, EX-850, EX-851, EX-821, EX-830, EX-832, EX-841, EX-911, EX-941, EX-920, EX-931, EX-212 EX-214L, EX-216L, EX-321L, EX-850L, DLC-201, DLC-203, DLC-204, DLC-205, DLC-206, DLC-301, DLC-402, EX-111, EX -121, EX-141, EX-145, EX-146, EX-147, EX-171, EX-192 (manufactured by Nagase Chemtech), YH-300, YH-301, YH-302, YH-315, YH-324, YH-325 (manufactured by Nippon Steel & Sumikin Chemical Co., Ltd.) Celoxide 2021P, 2081, 2000, 3000, EHPE3150, Epolide GT400, Cellbiners B0134, B0177 (manufactured by Daicel Corporation), and the like.
The compound which has an epoxy group in a molecule | numerator may be used individually by 1 type, and may use 2 or more types together.
 分子内にエポキシ基を有する化合物の中でも、ビスフェノールA型エポキシ樹脂、ビスフェノールF型エポキシ樹脂、フェノールノボラック型エポキシ樹脂及び脂肪族エポキシ樹脂がより好ましく挙げられ、脂肪族エポキシ樹脂が特に好ましく挙げられる。 Among the compounds having an epoxy group in the molecule, bisphenol A type epoxy resin, bisphenol F type epoxy resin, phenol novolac type epoxy resin and aliphatic epoxy resin are more preferable, and aliphatic epoxy resin is particularly preferable.
 分子内にオキセタニル基を有する化合物の具体例としては、アロンオキセタンOXT-201、OXT-211、OXT-212、OXT-213、OXT-121、OXT-221、OX-SQ、PNOX(以上、東亞合成(株)製)を用いることができる。 Specific examples of compounds having an oxetanyl group in the molecule include Aron Oxetane OXT-201, OXT-211, OXT-212, OXT-213, OXT-121, OXT-221, OX-SQ, PNOX (and above, Toagosei) Can be used.
 また、オキセタニル基を含む化合物は、単独で又はエポキシ基を含む化合物と混合して使用することが好ましい。 In addition, the compound containing an oxetanyl group is preferably used alone or mixed with a compound containing an epoxy group.
 本開示に係るレジスト層組成物においては、ヘテロ環状化合物がエポキシ基を有する化合物であることが、得られるパターンのエッチング耐性及び線幅安定性の観点から好ましい。 In the resist layer composition according to the present disclosure, the heterocyclic compound is preferably a compound having an epoxy group from the viewpoint of etching resistance and line width stability of the resulting pattern.
-アルコキシシラン化合物-
 本開示に係るレジスト層組成物は、アルコキシシラン化合物を含有してもよい。アルコキシシラン化合物としては、トリアルコキシシラン化合物が好ましく挙げられる。
 アルコキシシラン化合物としては、例えば、γ-アミノプロピルトリメトキシシラン、γ-アミノプロピルトリエトキシシラン、γ-グリシドキシプロピルトリアコキシシラン、γ-グリシドキシプロピルアルキルジアルコキシシラン、γ-メタクリロキシプロピルトリアルコキシシラン、γ-メタクリロキシプロピルアルキルジアルコキシシラン、γ-クロロプロピルトリアルコキシシラン、γ-メルカプトプロピルトリアルコキシシラン、β-(3,4-エポキシシクロヘキシル)エチルトリアルコキシシラン、ビニルトリアルコキシシランが挙げられる。これらのうち、γ-グリシドキシプロピルトリアルコキシシランやγ-メタクリロキシプロピルトリアルコキシシランがより好ましく、γ-グリシドキシプロピルトリアルコキシシランが更に好ましく、3-グリシドキシプロピルトリメトキシシランが特に好ましい。これらは1種単独又は2種以上を組み合わせて使用することができる。
 アルコキシシラン化合物の含有量は、レジスト層組成物の全固形分に対し、0.1質量%~30質量%であることが好ましく、0.5質量%~20質量%であることがより好ましい。
-Alkoxysilane compounds-
The resist layer composition according to the present disclosure may contain an alkoxysilane compound. Preferred examples of the alkoxysilane compound include trialkoxysilane compounds.
Examples of the alkoxysilane compound include γ-aminopropyltrimethoxysilane, γ-aminopropyltriethoxysilane, γ-glycidoxypropyltriacoxysilane, γ-glycidoxypropylalkyldialkoxysilane, and γ-methacryloxy. Propyltrialkoxysilane, γ-methacryloxypropylalkyldialkoxysilane, γ-chloropropyltrialkoxysilane, γ-mercaptopropyltrialkoxysilane, β- (3,4-epoxycyclohexyl) ethyltrialkoxysilane, vinyltrialkoxysilane Is mentioned. Of these, γ-glycidoxypropyltrialkoxysilane and γ-methacryloxypropyltrialkoxysilane are more preferable, γ-glycidoxypropyltrialkoxysilane is more preferable, and 3-glycidoxypropyltrimethoxysilane is particularly preferable. preferable. These can be used alone or in combination of two or more.
The content of the alkoxysilane compound is preferably 0.1% by mass to 30% by mass and more preferably 0.5% by mass to 20% by mass with respect to the total solid content of the resist layer composition.
-界面活性剤-
 本開示に係るレジスト層組成物は、膜厚均一性の観点から界面活性剤を含有することが好ましい。界面活性剤としては、アニオン系、カチオン系、ノニオン系(非イオン系)、又は、両性のいずれでも使用することができるが、好ましい界面活性剤はノニオン系界面活性剤である。
 ノニオン系界面活性剤の例としては、ポリオキシエチレン高級アルキルエーテル類、ポリオキシエチレン高級アルキルフェニルエーテル類、ポリオキシエチレングリコールの高級脂肪酸ジエステル類、シリコーン系、フッ素系界面活性剤を挙げることができる。また、以下商品名で、KP(信越化学工業(株)製)、ポリフロー(共栄社化学(株)製)、エフトップ(JEMCO社製)、メガファック(DIC(株)製)、フロラード(住友スリーエム(株)製)、アサヒガード、サーフロン(旭硝子(株)製)、PolyFox(OMNOVA社製)、及び、SH-8400(東レ・ダウコーニング(株)製)等の各シリーズを挙げることができる。
 また、界面活性剤として、下記式I-1で表される構成単位A及び構成単位Bを含み、テトラヒドロフラン(THF)を溶剤とした場合のゲルパーミエーションクロマトグラフィで測定されるポリスチレン換算の重量平均分子量(Mw)が1,000以上10,000以下である共重合体を好ましい例として挙げることができる。
-Surfactant-
The resist layer composition according to the present disclosure preferably contains a surfactant from the viewpoint of film thickness uniformity. As the surfactant, any of anionic, cationic, nonionic (nonionic), or amphoteric can be used, but a preferred surfactant is a nonionic surfactant.
Examples of nonionic surfactants include polyoxyethylene higher alkyl ethers, polyoxyethylene higher alkyl phenyl ethers, higher fatty acid diesters of polyoxyethylene glycol, silicone-based and fluorine-based surfactants. . In addition, the following trade names are KP (manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd.), Polyflow (manufactured by Kyoeisha Chemical Co., Ltd.), F-Top (manufactured by JEMCO), MegaFac (manufactured by DIC Corporation), Florard (Sumitomo 3M) Asahi Guard, Surflon (manufactured by Asahi Glass Co., Ltd.), PolyFox (manufactured by OMNOVA), and SH-8400 (manufactured by Toray Dow Corning Co., Ltd.).
Further, as a surfactant, it contains a structural unit A and a structural unit B represented by the following formula I-1, and is a weight average molecular weight in terms of polystyrene measured by gel permeation chromatography using tetrahydrofuran (THF) as a solvent. A preferred example is a copolymer having (Mw) of 1,000 or more and 10,000 or less.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000022

 
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000022

 
 式(I-1)中、R401及びR403はそれぞれ独立に、水素原子又はメチル基を表し、R402は炭素数1以上4以下の直鎖アルキレン基を表し、R404は水素原子又は炭素数1以上4以下のアルキル基を表し、Lは炭素数3以上6以下のアルキレン基を表し、p及びqは重合比を表す質量百分率であり、pは10質量%以上80質量%以下の数値を表し、qは20質量%以上90質量%以下の数値を表し、rは1以上18以下の整数を表し、sは1以上10以下の整数を表し、*は他の構造との結合部位を表す。 In formula (I-1), R 401 and R 403 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, R 402 represents a linear alkylene group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, and R 404 represents a hydrogen atom or a carbon group. Represents an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, L represents an alkylene group having 3 to 6 carbon atoms, p and q are mass percentages representing a polymerization ratio, and p is a numerical value of 10 mass% to 80 mass%. Q represents a numerical value of 20% to 90% by mass, r represents an integer of 1 to 18, s represents an integer of 1 to 10, and * represents a bonding site with another structure. Represent.
 Lは、下記式(I-2)で表される分岐アルキレン基であることが好ましい。式(I-2)におけるR405は、炭素数1以上4以下のアルキル基を表し、相溶性と被塗布面に対する濡れ性の点で、炭素数1以上3以下のアルキル基が好ましく、炭素数2又は3のアルキル基がより好ましい。pとqとの和(p+q)は、p+q=100、すなわち、100質量%であることが好ましい。 L is preferably a branched alkylene group represented by the following formula (I-2). R 405 in formula (I-2) represents an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, and is preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms in terms of compatibility and wettability to the coated surface. Two or three alkyl groups are more preferred. The sum (p + q) of p and q is preferably p + q = 100, that is, 100% by mass.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000023

 
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000023

 
 共重合体の重量平均分子量(Mw)は、1,500以上5,000以下がより好ましい。 The weight average molecular weight (Mw) of the copolymer is more preferably from 1,500 to 5,000.
 その他、特許第4502784号公報の段落0017、特開2009-237362号公報の段落0060~段落0071に記載の界面活性剤も用いることができる。 In addition, surfactants described in paragraph 0017 of Japanese Patent No. 4502784 and paragraphs 0060 to 0071 of JP-A-2009-237362 can also be used.
 界面活性剤は、1種単独で用いてもよく、2種以上を併用してもよい。
 界面活性剤の添加量は、上記レジスト層組成物の全固形分に対して、10質量%以下であることが好ましく、0.001質量%~10質量%であることがより好ましく、0.01質量%~3質量%であることが更に好ましい。
Surfactant may be used individually by 1 type and may use 2 or more types together.
The addition amount of the surfactant is preferably 10% by mass or less, more preferably 0.001% by mass to 10% by mass with respect to the total solid content of the resist layer composition, and 0.01% More preferably, it is from 3% by mass to 3% by mass.
-その他の成分-
 本開示に係るレジスト層組成物には、金属酸化物粒子、酸化防止剤、分散剤、酸増殖剤、現像促進剤、導電性繊維、熱ラジカル重合開始剤、熱酸発生剤、紫外線吸収剤、増粘剤、及び、有機又は無機の沈殿防止剤などの公知の添加剤を更に加えることができる。
 その他の成分の好ましい態様については特開2014-85643号公報の段落0165~段落0184にそれぞれ記載があり、この公報の内容は本開示に組み込まれる。
-Other ingredients-
The resist layer composition according to the present disclosure includes metal oxide particles, an antioxidant, a dispersant, an acid multiplier, a development accelerator, a conductive fiber, a thermal radical polymerization initiator, a thermal acid generator, an ultraviolet absorber, Known additives such as thickeners and organic or inorganic suspending agents can be further added.
Preferred embodiments of the other components are described in paragraphs 0165 to 0184 of JP 2014-85643 A, respectively, and the contents of this publication are incorporated in the present disclosure.
 また、上記レジスト層は、上記溶剤以外の上記レジスト層組成物における各成分を好ましく含有することができる。
 更に、上記レジスト層において、上記レジスト層の全質量に対する各成分の好ましい含有量は、上記レジスト層組成物における、上記レジスト層組成物の全固形分に対する各成分の好ましい含有量と同様である。
Moreover, the said resist layer can contain preferably each component in the said resist layer composition other than the said solvent.
Further, in the resist layer, the preferable content of each component with respect to the total mass of the resist layer is the same as the preferable content of each component with respect to the total solid content of the resist layer composition in the resist layer composition.
-レジスト層の厚み-
 上記レジスト層の厚みは、0.5μm~20μmが好ましい。レジスト層の厚みが20μm以下であると得られるパターンの解像度が良好であり、0.5μm以上であるとパターン直線性の観点から好ましい。
 レジスト層の厚みとしては、0.8μm~15μmがより好ましく、1.0μm~10μmが特に好ましい。
-Resist layer thickness-
The thickness of the resist layer is preferably 0.5 μm to 20 μm. When the thickness of the resist layer is 20 μm or less, the resolution of the obtained pattern is good, and when it is 0.5 μm or more, it is preferable from the viewpoint of pattern linearity.
The thickness of the resist layer is more preferably 0.8 μm to 15 μm, and particularly preferably 1.0 μm to 10 μm.
-レジスト層の形成方法-
 各成分、及び、溶剤をあらかじめ定めた割合でかつ任意の方法で混合し、撹拌溶解してレジスト層を形成するためのレジスト層組成物を調製することができる。例えば、各成分を、それぞれ予め溶剤に溶解させた溶液とした後、得られた溶液をあらかじめ定めた割合で混合して組成物を調製することもできる。以上の如くして調製した組成物は、孔径0.2μmのフィルター等を用いてろ過した後に、使用に供することもできる。
-Formation method of resist layer-
It is possible to prepare a resist layer composition for forming a resist layer by mixing each component and a solvent in a predetermined ratio and by an arbitrary method, and dissolving by stirring. For example, it is possible to prepare a composition by preparing each solution of each component in advance in a solvent and then mixing the obtained solution at a predetermined ratio. The composition prepared as described above can be used after being filtered using a filter having a pore size of 0.2 μm or the like.
 レジスト層組成物を、中間層が形成された仮支持体上に塗布し、乾燥させることで、仮支持体上に中間層及びレジスト層を有する本開示に係る感光性転写材料を得ることができる。塗布方法は特に限定されず、スリット塗布、スピン塗布、カーテン塗布、インクジェット塗布などの公知の方法で塗布することができる。 The photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure having the intermediate layer and the resist layer on the temporary support can be obtained by applying the resist layer composition onto the temporary support on which the intermediate layer is formed and drying. . The coating method is not particularly limited, and the coating can be performed by a known method such as slit coating, spin coating, curtain coating, and inkjet coating.
[仮支持体]
 本開示に係る感光性転写材料は、仮支持体を有する。
 仮支持体は、中間層およびレジスト層を支持し、剥離可能な支持体である。
 本開示に用いられる仮支持体は、中間層およびレジスト層をパターン露光する場合において、仮支持体を介して中間層およびレジスト層を露光し得る観点から光透過性を有することが好ましい。
 光透過性を有するとは、パターン露光に使用する光の主波長の透過率が50%以上であることを意味し、パターン露光に使用する光の主波長の透過率は、露光感度向上の観点から、60%以上が好ましく、70%以上がより好ましい。透過率の測定方法としては、大塚電子(株)製MCPD Seriesを用いて測定する方法が挙げられる。
 仮支持体としては、ガラス基板、樹脂フィルム、紙等が挙げられ、強度及び可撓性等の観点から、樹脂フィルムが特に好ましい。樹脂フィルムとしては、ポリエチレンテレフタレートフィルム、トリ酢酸セルロースフィルム、ポリスチレンフィルム、ポリカーボネートフィルム等が挙げられる。中でも、2軸延伸ポリエチレンテレフタレートフィルムが特に好ましい。
[Temporary support]
The photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure has a temporary support.
The temporary support is a support that supports the intermediate layer and the resist layer and can be peeled off.
In the case where the intermediate layer and the resist layer are subjected to pattern exposure, the temporary support used in the present disclosure preferably has light transmittance from the viewpoint that the intermediate layer and the resist layer can be exposed through the temporary support.
Having light transmittance means that the transmittance of the main wavelength of light used for pattern exposure is 50% or more, and the transmittance of the main wavelength of light used for pattern exposure is a viewpoint of improving exposure sensitivity. Therefore, 60% or more is preferable, and 70% or more is more preferable. Examples of the method for measuring the transmittance include a method of measuring using MCPD Series manufactured by Otsuka Electronics Co., Ltd.
Examples of the temporary support include a glass substrate, a resin film, paper, and the like, and a resin film is particularly preferable from the viewpoints of strength and flexibility. Examples of the resin film include a polyethylene terephthalate film, a cellulose triacetate film, a polystyrene film, and a polycarbonate film. Among these, a biaxially stretched polyethylene terephthalate film is particularly preferable.
 仮支持体の厚みは、特に限定されず、5μm~200μmの範囲が好ましく、取扱い易さ、汎用性などの点で、10μm~150μmの範囲がより好ましい。
 仮支持体の厚みは、支持体としての強度、回路配線形成用基板との貼り合わせに求められる可撓性、最初の露光工程で要求される光透過性などの観点から、材質に応じて選択すればよい。
The thickness of the temporary support is not particularly limited, but is preferably in the range of 5 μm to 200 μm, and more preferably in the range of 10 μm to 150 μm from the viewpoint of ease of handling and versatility.
The thickness of the temporary support is selected according to the material from the viewpoints of strength as a support, flexibility required for bonding to a circuit wiring forming substrate, light transmittance required in the first exposure process, etc. do it.
 仮支持体の好ましい態様については、例えば、特開2014-85643号公報の段落0017~段落0018に記載があり、この公報の内容は本開示に組み込まれる。 A preferred embodiment of the temporary support is described, for example, in paragraphs 0017 to 0018 of JP 2014-85643 A, and the contents of this publication are incorporated in the present disclosure.
[その他の層]
 本開示に係る感光性転写材料は、上記中間層およびレジスト層以外の層(以下、「その他の層」と称することがある)を有していてもよい。その他の層としては、コントラストエンハンスメント層、カバーフィルム、熱可塑性樹脂層等を挙げることができる。
[Other layers]
The photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure may have a layer other than the intermediate layer and the resist layer (hereinafter may be referred to as “other layer”). Examples of other layers include a contrast enhancement layer, a cover film, and a thermoplastic resin layer.
 本開示に係る感光性転写材料は、仮支持体上に中間層、およびレジスト層をこの順番に有する。
 ここで図1及び図2を参照して、本開示に係る感光性転写材料の層構成の一例を概略的に示す。
 図1に示す感光性転写材料100は、仮支持体12と、レジスト層14-1及び中間層14-2の積層体14(図2参照)と、カバーフィルム16とがこの順に積層されている。中間層14-2は色素を含有する。
 以下、本開示に係る感光性転写材料の構成材料等について説明する。なお、本開示における上記構成について本開示では以下のように称する場合がある。
 酸基が酸分解性基で保護された基を有する構成単位を有する重合体を「特定重合体」と称する場合がある。
 上記レジスト層がポジ型のレジスト層の場合、「ポジ型レジスト層」と称することがある。また、上記レジスト層がネガ型のレジスト層の場合、「ネガ型レジスト層」と称することがある。
The photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure has an intermediate layer and a resist layer in this order on a temporary support.
Here, with reference to FIG.1 and FIG.2, an example of the layer structure of the photosensitive transfer material which concerns on this indication is shown roughly.
In the photosensitive transfer material 100 shown in FIG. 1, a temporary support 12, a laminate 14 (see FIG. 2) of a resist layer 14-1 and an intermediate layer 14-2, and a cover film 16 are laminated in this order. . The intermediate layer 14-2 contains a pigment.
Hereinafter, constituent materials and the like of the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure will be described. Note that the above configuration in the present disclosure may be referred to as follows in the present disclosure.
A polymer having a structural unit having a group in which an acid group is protected with an acid-decomposable group may be referred to as a “specific polymer”.
When the resist layer is a positive resist layer, it may be referred to as a “positive resist layer”. When the resist layer is a negative resist layer, it may be referred to as a “negative resist layer”.
(回路配線の製造方法)
 本開示に係る感光性転写材料を用いた、回路配線の製造方法の第1の実施態様について説明する。
 回路配線の製造方法の第1の実施態様は、
 基板に対し、本開示に係る感光性転写材料を、上記感光性転写材料の上記レジスト層を上記基板に接触させて貼り合わせる工程(貼り合わせ工程)と、
 上記貼り合わせる工程後の上記感光性転写材料の上記中間層およびレジスト層をパターン露光する工程(露光工程)と、
 上記パターン露光する工程後のレジスト層を現像してパターンを形成する工程(現像工程)と、上記パターンが配置されていない領域における基板をエッチング処理する工程(エッチング工程)と、をこの順に含む。
 回路配線の製造方法の第1の実施態様における基板は、ガラス、シリコン、フィルムなどの基材上に、所望の導電層などの層が設けられた基板であってもよい。
 回路配線の製造方法の第1の実施態様によれば、基板表面に微細パターンを形成することができる。
(Method for manufacturing circuit wiring)
A first embodiment of a circuit wiring manufacturing method using the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure will be described.
The first embodiment of the circuit wiring manufacturing method is as follows:
A step of bonding the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure to the substrate by bringing the resist layer of the photosensitive transfer material into contact with the substrate (bonding step);
A step of exposing the intermediate layer and the resist layer of the photosensitive transfer material after the bonding step (exposure step);
The resist layer after the pattern exposure process is developed to form a pattern (development process), and the process of etching the substrate in the region where the pattern is not disposed (etching process) is included in this order.
The substrate in the first embodiment of the circuit wiring manufacturing method may be a substrate in which a layer such as a desired conductive layer is provided on a base material such as glass, silicon, or a film.
According to the first embodiment of the circuit wiring manufacturing method, a fine pattern can be formed on the substrate surface.
 回路配線の製造方法の第2の実施形態は、
 基材、及び、互いに構成材料が異なる第1導電層及び第2導電層を含む複数の導電層と、を有し、上記基材の表面上に、上記基材の表面から遠い順に、最表面層である上記第1導電層及び上記第2導電層が積層されている基板に対し、本開示に係る感光性転写材料の上記レジスト層を上記第1導電層に接触させて貼り合わせる、貼り合わせ工程と、
 上記貼り合わせ工程後の上記感光性転写材料の上記仮支持体を介して上記中間層およびレジスト層をパターン露光する第1露光工程と、
 上記第1露光工程後の中間層およびレジスト層から上記仮支持体を剥離した後、上記第1露光工程後の中間層およびレジスト層を現像して第1パターンを形成する第1現像工程と、
 上記第1パターンが配置されていない領域における上記複数の導電層のうち少なくとも上記第1導電層及び上記第2導電層をエッチング処理する第1エッチング工程と、
 上記第1エッチング工程後の上記第1パターンを上記第1パターンとは異なるパターンでパターン露光する第2露光工程と、
 上記第2露光工程後の上記第1パターンを現像して第2パターンを形成する第2現像工程と、
 上記第2パターンが配置されていない領域における上記複数の導電層のうち少なくとも上記第1導電層をエッチング処理する第2エッチング工程と、をこの順に含む。上記第2の実施形態としては、国際公開第2006/190405号を参考にすることができ、この内容は本開示に組み込まれる。
The second embodiment of the circuit wiring manufacturing method is
And a plurality of conductive layers including a first conductive layer and a second conductive layer having different constituent materials from each other, and on the surface of the base material, in the order farthest from the surface of the base material, Bonding the resist layer of the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure in contact with the first conductive layer to a substrate on which the first conductive layer and the second conductive layer which are layers are laminated Process,
A first exposure step of pattern exposing the intermediate layer and the resist layer through the temporary support of the photosensitive transfer material after the bonding step;
A first development step of developing the intermediate layer and the resist layer after the first exposure step to form a first pattern after peeling the temporary support from the intermediate layer and the resist layer after the first exposure step;
A first etching step of etching at least the first conductive layer and the second conductive layer among the plurality of conductive layers in a region where the first pattern is not disposed;
A second exposure step of pattern exposing the first pattern after the first etching step with a pattern different from the first pattern;
A second development step of developing the first pattern after the second exposure step to form a second pattern;
A second etching step of etching at least the first conductive layer among the plurality of conductive layers in the region where the second pattern is not disposed. As the second embodiment, International Publication No. 2006/190405 can be referred to, and the contents thereof are incorporated in the present disclosure.
 回路配線の製造方法の第3の実施形態は、第1の実施形態を2回繰り返す形態である。
 即ち、基板に対し、本開示に係る感光性転写材料の上記レジスト層を上記基板に接触させて貼り合わせる工程(貼り合わせ工程)と、
 上記貼り合わせる工程後の上記感光性転写材料の上記中間層およびレジスト層をパターン露光する工程(露光工程)と、
 上記パターン露光する工程後のレジスト層を現像してパターンを形成する工程(現像工程)と、
 上記パターンが配置されていない領域における基板をエッチング処理する工程(エッチング工程)と、
 をこの順に含み、さらに、上記エッチング工程後の残存しているレジスト層に対し、本開示に係る感光性転写材料の上記レジスト層を上記残存しているレジスト層に接触させて貼り合わせる工程(貼り合わせ工程)と、
 上記貼り合わせる工程後の上記感光性転写材料の上記中間層およびレジスト層をパターン露光する工程(露光工程)と、
 上記パターン露光する工程後のレジスト層を現像してパターンを形成する工程(現像工程)と、
 上記パターンが配置されていない領域における基板をエッチング処理する工程(エッチング工程)と、
 をこの順に含む。
 なお、1回目及び2回目の感光性転写材料は同じものであってもよく、異なっていてもよい。また、1回目の貼り合わせ工程に用いる感光性転写材料はポジ型であることが好ましく、2回目の貼り合わせ工程に用いる感光性転写材料は、ポジ型であってもよく、ネガ型であってもよい。
The third embodiment of the circuit wiring manufacturing method is a mode in which the first embodiment is repeated twice.
That is, a step of bonding the resist layer of the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure to the substrate in contact with the substrate (bonding step);
A step of exposing the intermediate layer and the resist layer of the photosensitive transfer material after the bonding step (exposure step);
Developing the resist layer after the pattern exposing step to form a pattern (developing step);
A step of etching the substrate in the region where the pattern is not disposed (etching step);
In this order, the resist layer of the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure is bonded to the remaining resist layer after the etching step in contact with the remaining resist layer (bonding). Combining step) and
A step of exposing the intermediate layer and the resist layer of the photosensitive transfer material after the bonding step (exposure step);
Developing the resist layer after the pattern exposing step to form a pattern (developing step);
A step of etching the substrate in the region where the pattern is not disposed (etching step);
Are included in this order.
The first and second photosensitive transfer materials may be the same or different. The photosensitive transfer material used in the first bonding step is preferably a positive type, and the photosensitive transfer material used in the second bonding step may be a positive type or a negative type. Also good.
 回路配線の製造方法の第3の実施形態は、具体的には、例えば以下の方法で実施することができる。
 基材上に、ITOをスパッタリングで成膜し、その上に銅を真空蒸着法で成膜して、導電パターン形成用の基板とする。
 次に銅層上に感光性転写材料を貼り合わせて、積層体とする。積層体を、仮支持体を剥離せずに一方向に導電層パッドが連結された構成を持つパターンAを設けたフォトマスクを用いてパターン露光する。その後仮支持体を剥離し、現像、水洗を行ってパターンAで描画された樹脂パターンを得る。次いで銅エッチング液を用いて銅層をエッチングした後、ITOエッチング液を用いてITO層をエッチングし、銅とITOが共にパターンAで描画された基板を得る。
 次いで、残存しているレジスト層上に、感光性転写材料を貼り合わせる。この状態で、アライメントを合わせた状態でパターンBの開口部を設けたフォトマスクを用いてパターン露光し、感光性転写材料の仮支持体を剥離した後に現像、水洗を行う。その後、銅配線をエッチングし、残ったレジスト層を剥離液を用いて剥離し、導電パターンを有する回路配線基板を得る。
Specifically, the third embodiment of the circuit wiring manufacturing method can be implemented by, for example, the following method.
An ITO film is formed on the base material by sputtering, and copper is formed thereon by a vacuum vapor deposition method to form a conductive pattern forming substrate.
Next, a photosensitive transfer material is bonded onto the copper layer to form a laminate. The laminated body is subjected to pattern exposure using a photomask provided with a pattern A having a configuration in which conductive layer pads are connected in one direction without peeling off the temporary support. Thereafter, the temporary support is peeled off, developed and washed with water to obtain a resin pattern drawn with pattern A. Next, after the copper layer is etched using a copper etchant, the ITO layer is etched using an ITO etchant to obtain a substrate on which both copper and ITO are drawn in the pattern A.
Next, a photosensitive transfer material is bonded onto the remaining resist layer. In this state, pattern exposure is performed using a photomask provided with openings of pattern B in the aligned state, and the temporary support of the photosensitive transfer material is peeled off, followed by development and washing with water. Thereafter, the copper wiring is etched, and the remaining resist layer is stripped using a stripping solution to obtain a circuit wiring board having a conductive pattern.
 本開示に係る回路配線の製造方法は、タッチパネル又はタッチパネル表示装置用の回路配線の製造方法として用いることができる。
 以下、第2の実施形態を元に、各工程の詳細について説明する。
The circuit wiring manufacturing method according to the present disclosure can be used as a circuit wiring manufacturing method for a touch panel or a touch panel display device.
Hereinafter, details of each step will be described based on the second embodiment.
<貼り合わせ工程>
 貼り合わせ工程の一例を、図2(a)に概略的に示した。
 まず、貼り合わせ工程では、基材22と、互いに構成材料が異なる第1導電層24及び第2導電層26を含む複数の導電層とを有し、基材22の表面上に、基材22の表面から遠い順に、最表面層である第1導電層24と第2導電層26とが積層されている基板(回路配線形成用基板)20に対し、上述した本開示に係る感光性転写材料100のレジスト層14-1(図1参照)を第1導電層24に接触させて貼り合わせる。なお、このような回路配線形成用基板と感光性転写材料との貼り合わせを「転写」又は「ラミネート」と称する場合がある。
<Lamination process>
An example of the bonding process is schematically shown in FIG.
First, in the bonding step, the substrate 22 has a plurality of conductive layers including the first conductive layer 24 and the second conductive layer 26 having different constituent materials, and the substrate 22 is formed on the surface of the substrate 22. The photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure described above is applied to the substrate (circuit wiring forming substrate) 20 in which the first conductive layer 24 and the second conductive layer 26 which are the outermost surface layers are laminated in order from the surface of the substrate. 100 resist layers 14-1 (see FIG. 1) are brought into contact with the first conductive layer 24 and bonded together. Such a bonding of the circuit wiring forming substrate and the photosensitive transfer material may be referred to as “transfer” or “laminate”.
 図1~図2に示したように感光性転写材料100のポジ型レジスト層14上にカバーフィルム16を有する場合は、感光性転写材料100(ポジ型レジスト層14)からカバーフィルム16を除去した後、感光性転写材料100のレジスト層14-1を第1導電層24に接触させて貼り合わせる。
 感光性転写材料の第1導電層上への貼り合わせ(転写)は、感光性転写材料のレジスト層側を第1導電層の上に重ね、ロール等による加圧及び加熱することに行われることが好ましい。貼り合わせには、ラミネータ、真空ラミネータ、及び、より生産性を高めることができるオートカットラミネーター等の公知のラミネータを使用することができる。
 回路配線形成用基板の基材が樹脂フィルムである場合は、ロールツーロールでの貼り合わせも行うこともできる。
When the cover film 16 is provided on the positive resist layer 14 of the photosensitive transfer material 100 as shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, the cover film 16 is removed from the photosensitive transfer material 100 (positive resist layer 14). Thereafter, the resist layer 14-1 of the photosensitive transfer material 100 is brought into contact with the first conductive layer 24 and bonded thereto.
The bonding (transfer) of the photosensitive transfer material onto the first conductive layer is performed by stacking the resist layer side of the photosensitive transfer material on the first conductive layer, and applying pressure and heating with a roll or the like. Is preferred. For laminating, known laminators such as a laminator, a vacuum laminator, and an auto-cut laminator that can further increase productivity can be used.
When the base material of the circuit wiring forming substrate is a resin film, roll-to-roll bonding can also be performed.
〔基材〕
 基材上に複数の導電層が積層された基板は、基材がガラス基材又はフィルム基材であることが好ましく、フィルム基材であることがより好ましい。本開示に係る回路配線の製造方法は、タッチパネル用の回路配線である場合、基材がシート状樹脂組成物であることが特に好ましい。
 また、基材は透明であることが好ましい。透明とは、可視光領域である400nm~800nmの透過率が90%以上であることをいう。
 基材の屈折率は、1.50~1.52であることが好ましい。
 基材は、ガラス基材等の透光性基材で構成されていてもよく、コーニング社のゴリラガラスに代表される強化ガラスなどを用いることができる。また、前述の透明基材としては、特開2010-86684号公報、特開2010-152809号公報及び特開2010-257492号公報に用いられている材料を好ましく用いることができる。
 基材としてフィルム基材を用いる場合は、光学的に歪みがない基材、及び、透明度が高い基材を用いることがより好ましく、具体的な素材には、ポリエチレンテレフタレート(polyethylene terephthalate;PET)、ポリエチレンナフタレート、ポリカーボネート、トリアセチルセルロース、シクロオレフィンポリマーをあげることができる。
〔Base material〕
As for the board | substrate with which the some electroconductive layer was laminated | stacked on the base material, it is preferable that a base material is a glass base material or a film base material, and it is more preferable that it is a film base material. When the circuit wiring manufacturing method according to the present disclosure is a circuit wiring for a touch panel, the substrate is particularly preferably a sheet-shaped resin composition.
Moreover, it is preferable that a base material is transparent. The term “transparent” means that the transmittance in the visible light region of 400 nm to 800 nm is 90% or more.
The refractive index of the substrate is preferably 1.50 to 1.52.
The base material may be composed of a light-transmitting base material such as a glass base material, and tempered glass represented by gorilla glass manufactured by Corning Inc. can be used. Further, as the above-mentioned transparent base material, materials used in JP 2010-86684 A, JP 2010-152809 A, and JP 2010-257492 A can be preferably used.
When a film substrate is used as the substrate, it is more preferable to use a substrate that is not optically distorted and a substrate having high transparency. Specific examples of the material include polyethylene terephthalate (PET), Examples thereof include polyethylene naphthalate, polycarbonate, triacetyl cellulose, and cycloolefin polymer.
〔導電層〕
 基材上に形成されている複数の導電層としては、一般的な回路配線又はタッチパネル配線に用いられる任意の導電層を挙げることができる。
 導電層の材料としては、金属及び金属酸化物などを挙げることができる。
 金属酸化物としては、ITO(Indium Tin Oxide)、IZO(Indium Zinc Oxide)、SiO等を挙げることができる。金属としては、Al、Zn、Cu、Fe、Ni、Cr、Mo等を挙げることができる。
[Conductive layer]
Examples of the plurality of conductive layers formed on the substrate include arbitrary conductive layers used for general circuit wiring or touch panel wiring.
Examples of the material for the conductive layer include metals and metal oxides.
Examples of the metal oxide include ITO (Indium Tin Oxide), IZO (Indium Zinc Oxide), and SiO 2 . Examples of the metal include Al, Zn, Cu, Fe, Ni, Cr, and Mo.
 本開示に係る回路配線の製造方法は、複数の導電層のうち少なくとも一つの導電層が金属酸化物を含むことが好ましい。
 導電層としては、静電容量型タッチパネルに用いられる視認部のセンサーに相当する電極パターン又は周辺取り出し部の配線であることが好ましい。
In the circuit wiring manufacturing method according to the present disclosure, it is preferable that at least one of the plurality of conductive layers includes a metal oxide.
The conductive layer is preferably an electrode pattern corresponding to a sensor of a visual recognition part used in a capacitive touch panel or a wiring of a peripheral extraction part.
〔回路配線形成用基板〕
 基材の表面に導電層を有する基板である。導電層をパターンニングすることで回路配線とする。本例では、PETなどのフィルム基材に金属酸化物や金属などの複数の導電層が設けられたものであることが好ましい。
[Circuit wiring formation board]
It is a board | substrate which has a conductive layer on the surface of a base material. Circuit wiring is formed by patterning the conductive layer. In this example, a film substrate such as PET is preferably provided with a plurality of conductive layers such as metal oxides and metals.
<露光工程(第1露光工程)>
 上記第1の実施態様においては露光工程が、上記第2の実施態様においては第1露光工程が行われる。露光工程(第1露光工程)の一例を、図2(b)に概略的に示した。
 露光工程(第1露光工程)では、貼り合わせ工程後の感光性転写材料の仮支持体12を介してポジ型レジスト層14をパターン露光する。
<Exposure process (first exposure process)>
The exposure process is performed in the first embodiment, and the first exposure process is performed in the second embodiment. An example of the exposure process (first exposure process) is schematically shown in FIG.
In the exposure step (first exposure step), the positive resist layer 14 is subjected to pattern exposure via the temporary support 12 of the photosensitive transfer material after the bonding step.
 本開示における露光工程、現像工程、及びその他の工程の例としては、特開2006-23696号公報の段落0035~段落0051に記載の方法を本開示においても好適に用いることができる。 As examples of the exposure step, the development step, and other steps in the present disclosure, the methods described in paragraphs 0035 to 0051 of JP-A-2006-23696 can be suitably used in the present disclosure.
 例えば、第1導電層24の上に配置された感光性転写材料100の上方(第1導電層24と接する側とは反対側)にあらかじめ定められたパターンを有するマスク30を配置し、その後、マスク30を介してマスク上方から紫外線で露光する方法などが挙げられる。
 本開示においてパターンの詳細な配置及び具体的サイズは特に限定されない。本開示に係る回路配線の製造方法により製造された回路配線を有する入力装置を備えた表示装置(例えばタッチパネル)の表示品質を高め、また、取り出し配線の占める面積をできるだけ小さくしたいことから、パターンの少なくとも一部(特にタッチパネルの電極パターン及び取り出し配線の部分)は100μm以下の細線であることが好ましく、70μm以下であることが更に好ましい。
 ここで、露光に使用する光源としては、感光性転写材料の露光された箇所が現像液に溶解しうる波長域の光(例えば、365nm、405nmなど)を照射できれば適宜選定して用いることができる。具体的には、超高圧水銀灯、高圧水銀灯、メタルハライドランプ等が挙げられる。
 露光量としては、好ましくは5mJ/cm~200mJ/cm程度であり、より好ましくは10mJ/cm~100mJ/cm程度である。
 また、露光後にパターンの矩形性、直線性を向上させる目的で、現像前に熱処理を行うことも好ましい。いわゆるPEB(Post Exposure Bake)と呼ばれる工程により、露光時にレジスト層で生じた定在波によるパターンエッジの荒れを低減することが可能である。
For example, a mask 30 having a predetermined pattern is disposed above the photosensitive transfer material 100 disposed on the first conductive layer 24 (on the side opposite to the side in contact with the first conductive layer 24), and then For example, a method of exposing with ultraviolet rays from above the mask through the mask 30 may be used.
In the present disclosure, the detailed arrangement and specific size of the pattern are not particularly limited. Since it is desired to improve the display quality of a display device (for example, a touch panel) including an input device having a circuit wiring manufactured by the circuit wiring manufacturing method according to the present disclosure and to make the area occupied by the extraction wiring as small as possible, At least a part (particularly, the electrode pattern of the touch panel and the part of the extraction wiring) is preferably a fine wire of 100 μm or less, and more preferably 70 μm or less.
Here, the light source used for exposure can be appropriately selected and used as long as it can irradiate light (for example, 365 nm, 405 nm, etc.) in a wavelength region where the exposed portion of the photosensitive transfer material can be dissolved in the developer. . Specifically, an ultrahigh pressure mercury lamp, a high pressure mercury lamp, a metal halide lamp, etc. are mentioned.
The exposure amount is preferably about 5 mJ / cm 2 to 200 mJ / cm 2 , more preferably about 10 mJ / cm 2 to 100 mJ / cm 2 .
It is also preferable to perform heat treatment before development for the purpose of improving the rectangularity and linearity of the pattern after exposure. By a process called PEB (Post Exposure Bake), pattern edge roughness due to standing waves generated in the resist layer during exposure can be reduced.
 なお、パターン露光は、仮支持体を中間層およびレジスト層から剥離してから行っても良いし、仮支持体を剥離する前に、仮支持体を介して露光し、その後、仮支持体を剥離してもよい。中間層とマスクの接触によるマスク汚染の防止や、マスクに付着した異物による露光への影響を避けるためには、仮支持体を剥離せずに露光することが好ましい。なお、パターン露光は、マスクを介した露光でもよいし、レーザー等を用いたデジタル露光でもよい。 The pattern exposure may be performed after the temporary support is peeled off from the intermediate layer and the resist layer, or before the temporary support is peeled off, it is exposed through the temporary support, and then the temporary support is removed. It may be peeled off. In order to prevent mask contamination due to contact between the intermediate layer and the mask, and to avoid the influence on the exposure caused by the foreign matter adhering to the mask, it is preferable to perform the exposure without peeling off the temporary support. The pattern exposure may be exposure through a mask or digital exposure using a laser or the like.
<現像工程(第1現像工程)>
 上記第1の実施態様においては現像工程が、上記第2の実施態様においては第1現像工程が行われる。現像工程(第1現像工程)の一例を、図2(c)に概略的に示した。
 現像工程(第1現像工程)では、露光工程(第1露光工程)後のポジ型レジスト層14から仮支持体12を剥離した後、露光工程(第1露光工程)後のポジ型レジスト層14を現像して第1パターン14Aを形成する。
<Development process (first development process)>
In the first embodiment, the developing step is performed, and in the second embodiment, the first developing step is performed. An example of the development process (first development process) is schematically shown in FIG.
In the development step (first development step), after removing the temporary support 12 from the positive resist layer 14 after the exposure step (first exposure step), the positive resist layer 14 after the exposure step (first exposure step). Is developed to form the first pattern 14A.
 現像工程(第1現像工程)は、パターン露光されたポジ型レジスト層を現像することによりパターン(第1パターン)を形成する工程である。
 パターン露光されたポジ型レジスト層の現像は、現像液を用いて行うことができる。
 現像液としては、ポジ型レジスト層の露光部分を除去することができれば特に制限はなく、例えば、特開平5-72724号公報に記載の現像液など、公知の現像液を使用することができる。
具体例としては、水酸化ナトリウム水溶液、水酸化カリウム水溶液、炭酸ナトリウム水溶液、炭酸カリウム水溶液、及び水酸化テトラメチルアンモニウム水溶液を挙げることができる。
 尚、現像液はポジ型レジスト層の露光部が溶解型の現像挙動をする現像液が好ましい。例えば、pKa=7~13の化合物を0.05mol/L(リットル)~5mol/Lの濃度で含むアルカリ水溶液系の現像液が好ましい。現像液は、さらに、水と混和性を有する有機溶剤、界面活性剤等を含有してもよい。本開示において好適に用いられる現像液としては、例えば、国際公開第2015/093271号の段落0194に記載の現像液が挙げられる。
The development process (first development process) is a process of forming a pattern (first pattern) by developing the pattern-exposed positive resist layer.
The development of the pattern-exposed positive resist layer can be performed using a developer.
The developer is not particularly limited as long as the exposed portion of the positive resist layer can be removed. For example, a known developer such as the developer described in JP-A-5-72724 can be used.
Specific examples include aqueous sodium hydroxide, aqueous potassium hydroxide, aqueous sodium carbonate, aqueous potassium carbonate, and aqueous tetramethylammonium hydroxide.
The developer is preferably a developer in which the exposed portion of the positive resist layer exhibits a dissolution type development behavior. For example, an alkaline aqueous developer containing a compound having a pKa of 7 to 13 at a concentration of 0.05 mol / L (liter) to 5 mol / L is preferable. The developer may further contain an organic solvent miscible with water, a surfactant, and the like. Examples of the developer suitably used in the present disclosure include the developer described in Paragraph 0194 of International Publication No. 2015/092731.
 現像方式としては、特に制限はなくパドル現像、シャワー現像、シャワー及びスピン現像、ディップ現像等のいずれでもよい。ここで、シャワー現像について説明すると、露光後のポジ型レジスト層に現像液をシャワーにより吹き付けることにより、露光部分を除去することができる。また、現像の後に、洗浄剤などをシャワーにより吹き付け、ブラシなどで擦りながら、現像残渣を除去することが好ましい。現像液の液温度は20℃~40℃が好ましい。 The development method is not particularly limited and may be any of paddle development, shower development, shower and spin development, dip development, and the like. Here, the shower development will be described. The exposed portion can be removed by spraying a developer onto the positive resist layer after exposure. Further, after the development, it is preferable to remove the development residue while spraying a cleaning agent or the like with a shower and rubbing with a brush or the like. The liquid temperature of the developer is preferably 20 ° C. to 40 ° C.
 更に、現像して得られたレジスト層を含むパターンを加熱処理するポストベーク工程を有していてもよい。
 ポストベークの加熱は8.1kPa~121.6kPaの環境下で行うことが好ましく、506.6kPa以上の環境下で行うことがより好ましい。一方、1114.6kPa以下の環境下で行うことがより好ましく、101.3kPa以下の環境下で行うことが特に好ましい。
 ポストベークの温度は、80℃~250℃であることが好ましく、110℃~170℃であることがより好ましく、130℃~150℃であることが特に好ましい。
 ポストベークの時間は、1分~30分であることが好ましく、2分~10分であることがより好ましく、2分~4分であることが特に好ましい。
 ポストベークは、空気環境下で行っても、窒素置換環境下で行ってもよい。
Furthermore, you may have the post-baking process of heat-processing the pattern containing the resist layer obtained by image development.
The post-baking is preferably performed in an environment of 8.1 kPa to 121.6 kPa, and more preferably in an environment of 506.6 kPa or more. On the other hand, it is more preferable to carry out in an environment of 114.6 kPa or less, and it is particularly preferable to carry out in an environment of 101.3 kPa or less.
The post-baking temperature is preferably 80 ° C. to 250 ° C., more preferably 110 ° C. to 170 ° C., and particularly preferably 130 ° C. to 150 ° C.
The post-baking time is preferably 1 to 30 minutes, more preferably 2 to 10 minutes, and particularly preferably 2 to 4 minutes.
The post-bake may be performed in an air environment or a nitrogen substitution environment.
 本開示に係る回路配線の製造方法は、ポスト露光工程等のその他の工程を有していてもよい。 The circuit wiring manufacturing method according to the present disclosure may include other processes such as a post-exposure process.
<エッチング工程(第1エッチング工程)>
 上記第1の実施態様においてはエッチング工程が、上記第2の実施態様においては第1エッチング工程が行われる。エッチング工程(第1エッチング工程)の一例を、図2(d)に概略的に示した。
 エッチング工程(第1エッチング工程)では、第1パターン14Aが配置されていない領域における複数の導電層のうち少なくとも第1導電層24及び第2導電層26をエッチング処理する。エッチングにより、同じパターンを有する第1導電層24A及び第2導電層26Aが形成される。
<Etching step (first etching step)>
The etching process is performed in the first embodiment, and the first etching process is performed in the second embodiment. An example of the etching process (first etching process) is schematically shown in FIG.
In the etching process (first etching process), at least the first conductive layer 24 and the second conductive layer 26 are etched among the plurality of conductive layers in the region where the first pattern 14A is not disposed. The first conductive layer 24A and the second conductive layer 26A having the same pattern are formed by etching.
 導電層のエッチングは、特開2010-152155号公報の段落0048~段落0054等に記載の方法、公知のプラズマエッチング等のドライエッチングによる方法など、公知の方法でエッチングを適用することができる。 Etching of the conductive layer can be performed by a known method such as a method described in paragraphs 0048 to 0054 of JP 2010-152155 A or a dry etching method such as a known plasma etching.
 例えば、エッチングの方法としては、一般的に行われている、エッチング液に浸漬するウェットエッチング法が挙げられる。ウェットエッチングに用いられるエッチング液は、エッチングの対象に合わせて酸性タイプ又はアルカリ性タイプのエッチング液を適宜選択すればよい。
 酸性タイプのエッチング液としては、塩酸、硫酸、フッ酸、リン酸等の酸性成分単独の水溶液、酸性成分と塩化第2鉄、フッ化アンモニウム、過マンガン酸カリウム等の塩の混合水溶液等が例示される。酸性成分は、複数の酸性成分を組み合わせた成分を使用してもよい。
 アルカリ性タイプのエッチング液としては、水酸化ナトリウム、水酸化カリウム、アンモニア、有機アミン、テトラメチルアンモニウムハイドロオキサイドのような有機アミンの塩等のアルカリ成分単独の水溶液、アルカリ成分と過マンガン酸カリウム等の塩の混合水溶液等が例示される。アルカリ成分は、複数のアルカリ成分を組み合わせた成分を使用してもよい。
For example, as an etching method, a commonly performed wet etching method in which the substrate is immersed in an etching solution can be used. As an etchant used for wet etching, an acid type or alkaline type etchant may be appropriately selected according to an object to be etched.
Examples of acidic etching solutions include aqueous solutions of acidic components such as hydrochloric acid, sulfuric acid, hydrofluoric acid, and phosphoric acid, and mixed aqueous solutions of acidic components and salts of ferric chloride, ammonium fluoride, potassium permanganate, and the like. Is done. As the acidic component, a component obtained by combining a plurality of acidic components may be used.
Examples of alkaline type etchants include aqueous solutions of alkali components such as sodium hydroxide, potassium hydroxide, ammonia, organic amines, salts of organic amines such as tetramethylammonium hydroxide, alkaline components and potassium permanganate. Examples thereof include a mixed aqueous solution of salt. As the alkali component, a component obtained by combining a plurality of alkali components may be used.
 エッチング液の温度は特に限定されないが、45℃以下であることが好ましい。本開示においてエッチングマスク(エッチングパターン)として使用される第1パターンは、45℃以下の温度域における酸性及びアルカリ性のエッチング液に対して特に優れた耐性を発揮することが好ましい。したがって、エッチング工程中にポジ型レジスト層が剥離することが防止され、ポジ型レジスト層の存在しない部分が選択的にエッチングされることになる。 The temperature of the etching solution is not particularly limited, but is preferably 45 ° C. or lower. The first pattern used as an etching mask (etching pattern) in the present disclosure preferably exhibits particularly excellent resistance to acidic and alkaline etching solutions in a temperature range of 45 ° C. or lower. Therefore, the positive resist layer is prevented from being peeled off during the etching process, and the portion where the positive resist layer does not exist is selectively etched.
 エッチング工程後、工程ラインの汚染を防ぐために、必要に応じて洗浄工程及び乾燥工程を行ってもよい。洗浄工程については、例えば常温で純水により10秒~300秒間基板を洗浄して行い、乾燥工程については、例えばエアブローを使用し、エアブロー圧(0.1kg/cm~5kg/cm程度)を適宜調整して乾燥を行えばよい。 After the etching process, a cleaning process and a drying process may be performed as necessary to prevent contamination of the process line. The cleaning process is performed by cleaning the substrate with pure water for 10 seconds to 300 seconds at room temperature, for example, and the drying process is performed using an air blow, for example, with an air blow pressure (about 0.1 kg / cm 2 to 5 kg / cm 2 ). The drying may be performed by appropriately adjusting the above.
<第2露光工程>
 上記第2の実施態様においては第2露光工程が行われる。第2露光工程の一例を、図2(e)に概略的に示した。
 第1エッチング工程後、第1エッチング工程後の第1パターン14Aを第1パターンとは異なるパターンでパターン露光する。
<Second exposure step>
In the second embodiment, the second exposure process is performed. An example of the second exposure step is schematically shown in FIG.
After the first etching step, pattern exposure is performed on the first pattern 14A after the first etching step with a pattern different from the first pattern.
 第2露光工程では、第1導電層上に残存する第1パターンに対し、後述する第2現像工程において少なくとも第1導電層の除去しようとする部分に相当する箇所を露光する。
 第2露光工程におけるパターン露光は、第1露光工程で用いたマスク30とはパターンが異なるマスク40を用いること以外は第1露光工程におけるパターン露光と同じ方法を適用することができる。
In the second exposure step, the first pattern remaining on the first conductive layer is exposed at least at a portion corresponding to a portion to be removed of the first conductive layer in a second development step described later.
For the pattern exposure in the second exposure step, the same method as the pattern exposure in the first exposure step can be applied except that the mask 40 having a pattern different from that of the mask 30 used in the first exposure step is used.
<第2現像工程>
 上記第2の実施態様においては第2現像工程が行われる。第2現像工程の一例を、図2(f)に概略的に示した。
 第2現像工程では、第2露光工程後の第1パターン14Aを現像して第2パターン14Bを形成する。
 現像により、第1パターンのうち第2露光工程において露光された部分が除去される。
 なお、第2現像工程では、第1現像工程における現像と同じ方法を適用することができる。
<Second development process>
In the second embodiment, the second development step is performed. An example of the second developing process is schematically shown in FIG.
In the second development step, the first pattern 14A after the second exposure step is developed to form a second pattern 14B.
By the development, the exposed portion of the first pattern in the second exposure step is removed.
In the second development step, the same method as the development in the first development step can be applied.
<第2エッチング工程>
 上記第2の実施態様においては第2露光工程が行われる。第2エッチング工程の一例を、図2(g)に概略的に示した。
 第2エッチング工程では、第2パターン14Bが配置されていない領域における複数の導電層のうち少なくとも第1導電層24Aをエッチング処理する。
<Second etching process>
In the second embodiment, the second exposure process is performed. An example of the second etching step is schematically shown in FIG.
In the second etching step, at least the first conductive layer 24A is etched among the plurality of conductive layers in the region where the second pattern 14B is not disposed.
 第2エッチング工程におけるエッチングは、エッチングにより除去しようとする導電層に応じたエッチング液を選択すること以外は、第1エッチング工程におけるエッチングと同じ方法を適用することができる。
 第2エッチング工程では、所望のパターンに応じて、第1エッチング工程よりも少ない導電層を選択的にエッチングすることが好ましい。例えば、図2に示すように、ポジ型レジスト層が配置されていない領域において第1導電層24Bのみを選択的にエッチングするエッチング液を用いてエッチングを行うことで、第1導電層を第2導電層のパターンとは異なるパターンにすることができる。
 第2エッチング工程の終了後、少なくとも2種類のパターンの導電層24B,26Aを含む回路配線が形成される。
For the etching in the second etching step, the same method as the etching in the first etching step can be applied except that an etching solution corresponding to the conductive layer to be removed by etching is selected.
In the second etching step, it is preferable to selectively etch fewer conductive layers than in the first etching step, depending on the desired pattern. For example, as shown in FIG. 2, the first conductive layer is etched by using an etchant that selectively etches only the first conductive layer 24B in a region where the positive resist layer is not disposed. The pattern can be different from the pattern of the conductive layer.
After the second etching step is completed, circuit wiring including conductive layers 24B and 26A having at least two types of patterns is formed.
<ポジ型レジスト層除去工程>
 ポジ型レジスト層除去工程の一例を、図2(h)に概略的に示した。
 第2エッチング工程の終了後、第1導電層24B上の一部には第2パターン14Bが残存している。ポジ型レジスト層が不要であれば、残存する全てのポジ型レジスト層14Bを除去すればよい。
<Positive resist layer removal process>
An example of the positive resist layer removing process is schematically shown in FIG.
After the second etching step, the second pattern 14B remains on a part of the first conductive layer 24B. If the positive resist layer is unnecessary, all the remaining positive resist layer 14B may be removed.
 残存するポジ型レジスト層を除去する方法としては特に制限はないが、薬品処理により除去する方法を挙げることができる。
 ポジ型レジスト層の除去方法としては、例えば、好ましくは30℃~80℃、より好ましくは50℃~80℃にて撹拌中の剥離液にポジ型レジスト層などを有する基材を1分~30分間浸漬する方法が挙げられる。
Although there is no restriction | limiting in particular as a method of removing the remaining positive type resist layer, The method of removing by chemical treatment can be mentioned.
As a method for removing the positive resist layer, for example, a substrate having a positive resist layer or the like in a stripping solution being stirred at preferably 30 ° C. to 80 ° C., more preferably 50 ° C. to 80 ° C. for 1 minute to 30 minutes. The method of immersing for a minute is mentioned.
 剥離液としては、例えば、水酸化ナトリウム、水酸化カリウム等の無機アルカリ成分、又は、第1級アミン、第2級アミン、第3級アミン、第4級アンモニウム塩等の有機アルカリ成分を、水、ジメチルスルホキシド、N-メチルピロリドン又はこれらの混合溶液に溶解させた剥離液が挙げられる。剥離液を使用し、スプレー法、シャワー法、パドル法等により剥離してもよい。 Examples of the stripping solution include inorganic alkali components such as sodium hydroxide and potassium hydroxide, or organic alkali components such as primary amine, secondary amine, tertiary amine, and quaternary ammonium salt. , A stripping solution dissolved in dimethyl sulfoxide, N-methylpyrrolidone or a mixed solution thereof. A stripping solution may be used and stripped by a spray method, a shower method, a paddle method, or the like.
 本開示に係る回路配線の製造方法は、他の任意の工程を含んでもよい。例えば、以下のような工程が挙げられるが、これらの工程に限定されない。 The circuit wiring manufacturing method according to the present disclosure may include other optional steps. For example, although the following processes are mentioned, it is not limited to these processes.
<保護フィルムを貼り付ける工程>
 上記第2の実施態様において、第1エッチング工程の後、第2露光工程の前に、第1パターン上に、光透過性を有する保護フィルム(不図示)を貼り付ける工程をさらに有してもよい。
 この場合、第2露光工程において、保護フィルムを介して第1パターンをパターン露光し、第2露光工程後、第1パターンから保護フィルムを剥離した後、第2現像工程を行うことが好ましい。
<Process for attaching protective film>
The second embodiment may further include a step of attaching a light-transmitting protective film (not shown) on the first pattern after the first etching step and before the second exposure step. Good.
In this case, it is preferable that in the second exposure step, the first pattern is subjected to pattern exposure via the protective film, and after the second exposure step, the protective film is peeled off from the first pattern, and then the second development step is performed.
<可視光線反射率を低下させる工程>
 本開示に係る回路配線の製造方法は、基材上の複数の導電層の一部又は全ての可視光線反射率を低下させる処理をする工程を含むことが可能である。
 可視光線反射率を低下させる処理としては、酸化処理などを挙げることができる。例えば、銅を酸化処理して酸化銅とし、黒化することにより、可視光線反射率を低下させることができる。
 可視光線反射率を低下させる処理の好ましい態様については、特開2014-150118号公報の段落0017~段落0025、並びに、特開2013-206315号公報の段落0041、段落0042、段落0048及び段落0058に記載があり、この公報の内容は本開示に組み込まれる。
<Step of reducing visible light reflectance>
The manufacturing method of the circuit wiring which concerns on this indication can include the process of reducing the visible light reflectance of some or all of the some conductive layers on a base material.
Examples of the treatment for reducing the visible light reflectance include an oxidation treatment. For example, visible light reflectance can be reduced by oxidizing copper to copper oxide and blackening.
Regarding preferred embodiments of the processing for reducing the visible light reflectance, paragraphs 0017 to 0025 of JP2014-150118A and paragraphs 0041, 0042, 0048 and 0058 of JP2013-206315A are described. The content of this publication is incorporated into the present disclosure.
<絶縁膜上に新たな導電層を形成する工程>
 本開示に係る回路配線の製造方法は、形成した回路配線上に絶縁膜を形成する工程と、絶縁膜上に新たな導電層を形成する工程を含むことも好ましい。
 このような構成により、上述の第二の電極パターンを、第一の電極パターンと絶縁しつつ、形成することができる。
 絶縁膜を形成する工程については、特に制限はなく、公知の永久膜を形成する方法を挙げることができる。また、絶縁性を有する感光性材料を用いて、フォトリソグラフィにより所望のパターンの絶縁膜を形成してもよい。
 絶縁膜上に新たな導電層を形成する工程については、特に制限はない。導電性を有する感光性材料を用いて、フォトリソグラフィにより所望のパターンの新たな導電層を形成してもよい。
<Step of forming a new conductive layer on the insulating film>
The method for manufacturing a circuit wiring according to the present disclosure preferably includes a step of forming an insulating film on the formed circuit wiring and a step of forming a new conductive layer on the insulating film.
With such a configuration, the above-described second electrode pattern can be formed while being insulated from the first electrode pattern.
There is no restriction | limiting in particular about the process of forming an insulating film, The method of forming a well-known permanent film can be mentioned. Alternatively, an insulating film having a desired pattern may be formed by photolithography using a photosensitive material having insulating properties.
There is no particular limitation on the process of forming a new conductive layer on the insulating film. A new conductive layer having a desired pattern may be formed by photolithography using a photosensitive material having conductivity.
 また、図2を参照した説明では、2層の導電層を備えた回路配線形成用基板に対して2つの異なるパターンを有する回路配線を形成する場合について説明したが、本開示に係る回路配線の製造方法を適用する基板の導電層の数は2層に限定されず、導電層が3層以上積層された回路配線形成用基板を用い、前述した露光工程、現像工程、及びエッチング工程の組み合わせを3回以上行うことで、3層以上の導電層をそれぞれ異なる回路配線パターンに形成することもできる。 Further, in the description with reference to FIG. 2, the case where the circuit wiring having two different patterns is formed on the circuit wiring forming substrate including the two conductive layers has been described. The number of conductive layers of the substrate to which the manufacturing method is applied is not limited to two layers, and a circuit wiring forming substrate in which three or more conductive layers are stacked is used, and the combination of the exposure step, the development step, and the etching step described above is used. By performing it three times or more, three or more conductive layers can be formed in different circuit wiring patterns.
 また、図2には示していないが、本開示に係る回路配線の製造方法は、基材が両方の表面にそれぞれ複数の導電層を有し、基材の両方の表面に形成された導電層に対して逐次又は同時に回路形成することも好ましい。このような構成により、基材の一方の表面に第一の導電パターン、もう一方の表面に第二の導電パターンを形成したタッチパネル用回路配線を形成することができる。また、このような構成のタッチパネル用回路配線を、ロールツーロールで基材の両面から形成することも好ましい。 Moreover, although not shown in FIG. 2, the manufacturing method of the circuit wiring which concerns on this indication WHEREIN: The base material has a some conductive layer in both surfaces, respectively, and the conductive layer formed in both surfaces of the base material It is also preferable to form circuits sequentially or simultaneously. With such a configuration, it is possible to form a circuit wiring for a touch panel in which a first conductive pattern is formed on one surface of the substrate and a second conductive pattern is formed on the other surface. Moreover, it is also preferable to form the circuit wiring for touch panels of such a structure from both surfaces of a base material by roll-to-roll.
(回路配線及び回路基板)
 本開示に係る回路配線は、本開示に係る回路配線の製造方法により製造された回路配線である。
 本開示に係る回路基板は、本開示に係る回路配線の製造方法により製造された回路配線を有する基板である。
 本開示に係る回路基板の用途は限定されないが、例えば、タッチパネル用回路基板であることが好ましい。
(Circuit wiring and circuit board)
The circuit wiring according to the present disclosure is a circuit wiring manufactured by the circuit wiring manufacturing method according to the present disclosure.
The circuit board according to the present disclosure is a substrate having circuit wiring manufactured by the method for manufacturing circuit wiring according to the present disclosure.
Although the use of the circuit board concerning this indication is not limited, for example, it is preferred that it is a circuit board for touch panels.
(入力装置及び表示装置)
 本開示に係る回路配線の製造方法により製造される回路配線を備えた装置として、入力装置が挙げられる。
 本開示における入力装置は、静電容量型タッチパネルであることが好ましい。
 本開示における表示装置は、本開示における入力装置を備えることが好ましい。
 また、本開示における表示装置は、有機EL表示装置、及び、液晶表示装置等の画像表示装置であることが好ましい。
(Input device and display device)
An input device is mentioned as an apparatus provided with the circuit wiring manufactured by the manufacturing method of the circuit wiring concerning this indication.
The input device in the present disclosure is preferably a capacitive touch panel.
The display device according to the present disclosure preferably includes the input device according to the present disclosure.
The display device in the present disclosure is preferably an image display device such as an organic EL display device and a liquid crystal display device.
(タッチパネル、及び、タッチパネル表示装置並びにこれらの製造方法)
 本開示に係るタッチパネルは、本開示に係る回路配線の製造方法により製造された回路配線を少なくとも有するタッチパネルである。また、本開示に係るタッチパネルは、透明基板と、電極と、絶縁層又は保護層とを少なくとも有することが好ましい。
 本開示に係るタッチパネル表示装置は、本開示に係る回路配線の製造方法により製造された回路配線を少なくとも有するタッチパネル表示装置であり、本開示に係るタッチパネルを有するタッチパネル表示装置であることが好ましい。
 本開示に係るタッチパネル又はタッチパネル表示装置の製造方法は、本開示に係る回路配線の製造方法を含むことが好ましい。
 本開示に係るタッチパネル又はタッチパネル表示装置の製造方法は、感光性転写材料の製造方法により得られた感光性転写材料の上記レジスト層を上記基板に接触させて貼り合わせる工程と、上記貼り合わせる工程後の上記感光性転写材料の上記レジスト層をパターン露光する工程と、上記パターン露光する工程後のレジスト層を現像してパターンを形成する工程と、上記パターンが配置されていない領域における基板をエッチング処理する工程と、をこの順に含むことが好ましい。各工程の詳細は、上述の回路配線の製造方法における各工程の詳細と同義であり、好ましい態様も同様である。
 本開示に係るタッチパネル及び本開示に係るタッチパネル表示装置のおける検出方法としては、抵抗膜方式、静電容量方式、超音波方式、電磁誘導方式、及び、光学方式など公知の方式いずれでもよい。中でも、静電容量方式が好ましい。
 タッチパネル型としては、いわゆる、インセル型(例えば、特表2012-517051号公報の図5、図6、図7、図8に記載のもの)、いわゆる、オンセル型(例えば、特開2013-168125号公報の図19に記載のもの、特開2012-89102号公報の図1や図5に記載のもの)、OGS(One Glass Solution)型、TOL(Touch-on-Lens)型(例えば、特開2013-54727号公報の図2に記載のもの)、その他の構成(例えば、特開2013-164871号公報の図6に記載のもの)、各種アウトセル型(いわゆる、GG、G1・G2、GFF、GF2、GF1、G1Fなど)を挙げることができる。
 本開示に係るタッチパネル及び本開示に係るタッチパネル表示装置としては、『最新タッチパネル技術』(2009年7月6日、(株)テクノタイムズ社発行)、三谷雄二監修、“タッチパネルの技術と開発”、シーエムシー出版(2004,12)、FPD International 2009 Forum T-11講演テキストブック、Cypress Semiconductor Corporation アプリケーションノートAN2292等に開示されている構成を適用することができる。
(Touch panel, touch panel display device and manufacturing method thereof)
The touch panel according to the present disclosure is a touch panel having at least circuit wiring manufactured by the method for manufacturing circuit wiring according to the present disclosure. In addition, the touch panel according to the present disclosure preferably includes at least a transparent substrate, an electrode, and an insulating layer or a protective layer.
The touch panel display device according to the present disclosure is a touch panel display device having at least circuit wiring manufactured by the circuit wiring manufacturing method according to the present disclosure, and is preferably a touch panel display device including the touch panel according to the present disclosure.
The method for manufacturing a touch panel or a touch panel display device according to the present disclosure preferably includes a method for manufacturing a circuit wiring according to the present disclosure.
The manufacturing method of the touch panel or the touch panel display device according to the present disclosure includes a step of bringing the resist layer of the photosensitive transfer material obtained by the method of manufacturing the photosensitive transfer material into contact with the substrate and bonding, and after the bonding step Pattern exposing the resist layer of the photosensitive transfer material, developing the resist layer after the pattern exposing step, forming a pattern, and etching the substrate in a region where the pattern is not disposed It is preferable that the process to include is included in this order. The details of each process are synonymous with the details of each process in the above-described circuit wiring manufacturing method, and the preferred embodiments are also the same.
As a detection method in the touch panel according to the present disclosure and the touch panel display device according to the present disclosure, any of known methods such as a resistive film method, a capacitance method, an ultrasonic method, an electromagnetic induction method, and an optical method may be used. Among these, the electrostatic capacity method is preferable.
As the touch panel type, a so-called in-cell type (for example, those described in FIGS. 5, 6, 7, and 8 of JP-T-2012-517051), a so-called on-cell type (for example, JP 2013-168125 A). 19 of the gazette, those described in FIGS. 1 and 5 of JP 2012-89102 A, OGS (One Glass Solution) type, TOL (Touch-on-Lens) type (for example, JP No. 2013-54727 shown in FIG. 2), other configurations (for example, those shown in FIG. 6 of JP2013-164671A), various out-cell types (so-called GG, G1, G2, GFF, GF2, GF1, G1F, etc.).
As the touch panel according to the present disclosure and the touch panel display device according to the present disclosure, “latest touch panel technology” (July 6, 2009, issued by Techno Times Co., Ltd.), supervised by Yuji Mitani, “Touch Panel Technology and Development”, The configurations disclosed in CM Publishing (2004, 12), FPD International 2009 Forum T-11 Lecture Textbook, Cypress Semiconductor Corporation Application Note AN2292, etc. can be applied.
 次に、本開示に係る感光性転写材料の第2の実施態様について説明する。
 なお、以下の発明の詳細な説明欄において、単に「感光性転写材料」という場合は、断りのない限り、「感光性転写材料の第2の実施態様」を指すものとする。
Next, a second embodiment of the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure will be described.
In the detailed description column of the invention below, the term “photosensitive transfer material” means “second embodiment of the photosensitive transfer material” unless otherwise specified.
((感光性転写材料の第2の実施態様))
 本開示に係る感光性転写材料の第2の実施態様は、仮支持体、中間層、及び、感光性樹脂層をこの順に有し、上記中間層が、水溶性樹脂、粒子、並びに、酸性基、塩基性基、アニオン性基及びカチオン性基よりなる群から選ばれた少なくとも1種の極性基と炭素数6以上のアルキル基とを有する極性化合物を含有し、上記感光性樹脂層が、酸分解性基で保護された酸基を有する構成単位を含有する重合体を含有し、上記感光性樹脂層と上記中間層とが接している。
((Second Embodiment of Photosensitive Transfer Material))
A second embodiment of the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure includes a temporary support, an intermediate layer, and a photosensitive resin layer in this order, and the intermediate layer includes a water-soluble resin, particles, and an acidic group. A polar compound having at least one polar group selected from the group consisting of a basic group, an anionic group and a cationic group and an alkyl group having 6 or more carbon atoms, and the photosensitive resin layer comprises an acid A polymer containing a structural unit having an acid group protected by a decomposable group is contained, and the photosensitive resin layer and the intermediate layer are in contact with each other.
 本開示に係る感光性転写材料の第2の実施態様が解決しようとする課題は、感光性樹脂層と中間層との密着性に優れる感光性転写材料を提供することである。
 また、本開示に係る感光性転写材料の第2の実施態様が解決しようとする課題は、上記感光性転写材料を用いた樹脂パターンの製造方法、回路配線の製造方法、及び、タッチパネルの製造方法を提供することである。
The problem to be solved by the second embodiment of the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure is to provide a photosensitive transfer material having excellent adhesion between the photosensitive resin layer and the intermediate layer.
In addition, the problems to be solved by the second embodiment of the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure include a method of manufacturing a resin pattern, a method of manufacturing circuit wiring, and a method of manufacturing a touch panel using the photosensitive transfer material. Is to provide.
 本開示に係る感光性転写材料の第2の実施態様によれば、感光性樹脂層と中間層との密着性に優れる感光性転写材料を提供することができる。
 また、本開示に係る感光性転写材料の第2の実施態様によれば、上記感光性転写材料を用いた樹脂パターンの製造方法、回路配線の製造方法、及び、タッチパネルの製造方法を提供することができる。
According to the second embodiment of the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure, it is possible to provide a photosensitive transfer material having excellent adhesion between the photosensitive resin layer and the intermediate layer.
In addition, according to the second embodiment of the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure, a method of manufacturing a resin pattern, a method of manufacturing circuit wiring, and a method of manufacturing a touch panel using the photosensitive transfer material are provided. Can do.
 また、本開示に係る感光性転写材料は、上記のように、酸分解性基で保護された酸基を有する構成単位を含有する重合体を含有するポジ型感光性樹脂層を有するポジ型感光性転写材料である。また、上記感光性樹脂層は、化学増幅ポジ型感光性樹脂層であることが好ましい。 Further, as described above, the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure includes a positive photosensitive resin layer having a positive photosensitive resin layer containing a polymer containing a structural unit having an acid group protected by an acid-decomposable group. Transfer material. The photosensitive resin layer is preferably a chemically amplified positive photosensitive resin layer.
 従来の感光性転写材料では、感光性樹脂層と中間層とを接して設けた場合、上記感光性樹脂層と中間層との密着性が十分でないことを、本発明者らは見出した。
 本発明者らは鋭意検討を重ねた結果、上記構成の感光性転写材料とすることにより、感光性樹脂層と中間層との密着性に優れる感光性転写材料が得られることを見出した。
 詳細な上記効果の発現機構は不明であるが、上記中間層が、水溶性樹脂、粒子、並びに、酸性基、塩基性基、アニオン性基及びカチオン性基よりなる群から選ばれた少なくとも1種の極性基と炭素数6以上のアルキル基とを有する極性化合物を含有することにより、上記中間層中において、上記極性基が粒子表面に吸着し、上記炭素数6以上のアルキル基が上記感光性樹脂層へ貫入する又は上記感光性樹脂層と疎水性相互作用(疎水効果)することにより、感光性樹脂層と中間層とが強固に密着するため、感光性樹脂層と中間層との密着性に優れると推定される。
In the conventional photosensitive transfer material, the present inventors have found that when the photosensitive resin layer and the intermediate layer are provided in contact with each other, the adhesion between the photosensitive resin layer and the intermediate layer is not sufficient.
As a result of intensive studies, the present inventors have found that a photosensitive transfer material having excellent adhesion between the photosensitive resin layer and the intermediate layer can be obtained by using the photosensitive transfer material having the above-described configuration.
Although the detailed mechanism of the above effect is unknown, the intermediate layer is at least one selected from the group consisting of water-soluble resins, particles, and acidic groups, basic groups, anionic groups, and cationic groups. In the intermediate layer, the polar group is adsorbed on the particle surface, and the alkyl group having 6 or more carbon atoms is the photosensitive material. Adhesiveness between the photosensitive resin layer and the intermediate layer because the photosensitive resin layer and the intermediate layer are firmly adhered by penetrating into the resin layer or by hydrophobic interaction (hydrophobic effect) with the photosensitive resin layer. It is estimated to be excellent.
 以下、本開示に係る感光性転写材料の第2の実施態様について、詳細に説明する。 Hereinafter, the second embodiment of the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure will be described in detail.
<中間層>
 本開示に係る感光性転写材料は、上記感光性樹脂層と接する中間層を有し、上記中間層が、水溶性樹脂、粒子、並びに、酸性基、塩基性基、アニオン性基及びカチオン性基よりなる群から選ばれた少なくとも1種の極性基と炭素数6以上のアルキル基とを有する極性化合物を含有する。
<Intermediate layer>
The photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure has an intermediate layer in contact with the photosensitive resin layer, and the intermediate layer includes a water-soluble resin, particles, an acidic group, a basic group, an anionic group, and a cationic group. A polar compound having at least one polar group selected from the group consisting of and an alkyl group having 6 or more carbon atoms is contained.
〔極性化合物〕
 上記中間層は、酸性基、塩基性基、アニオン性基及びカチオン性基よりなる群から選ばれた少なくとも1種の極性基と炭素数6以上のアルキル基とを有する極性化合物を含有する。
[Polar compound]
The intermediate layer contains a polar compound having at least one polar group selected from the group consisting of an acidic group, a basic group, an anionic group, and a cationic group and an alkyl group having 6 or more carbon atoms.
 上記極性化合物における炭素数6以上のアルキル基は、直鎖状であっても、分岐鎖状であっても、環構造を有していてもよいが、感光性樹脂層と中間層との密着性における液安定性の観点から、直鎖アルキル基、又は、分岐アルキル基であることが好ましく、直鎖アルキル基であることがより好ましい。
 上記極性化合物における炭素数6以上のアルキル基は、感光性樹脂層と中間層との密着性の観点から、炭素数6~30のアルキル基であることが好ましく、炭素数8~22のアルキル基であることがより好ましく、炭素数10~16のアルキル基であることが特に好ましい。
The alkyl group having 6 or more carbon atoms in the polar compound may be linear, branched, or have a ring structure, but the adhesion between the photosensitive resin layer and the intermediate layer From the viewpoint of liquid stability in the properties, it is preferably a linear alkyl group or a branched alkyl group, and more preferably a linear alkyl group.
The alkyl group having 6 or more carbon atoms in the polar compound is preferably an alkyl group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms and an alkyl group having 8 to 22 carbon atoms from the viewpoint of adhesion between the photosensitive resin layer and the intermediate layer. And more preferably an alkyl group having 10 to 16 carbon atoms.
 上記極性基としては、感光性樹脂層と中間層との密着性の観点から、第一級~第三級アミノ基、第一級~第四級アンモニウム塩基、ピリジル基、ピリジニウム基、カルボン酸基(カルボキシ基)、スルホン酸基(スルホ基)、ホスホン酸基、リン酸基、カルボン酸塩基、スルホン酸塩基、ホスホン酸塩基、リン酸塩基、及び、ベタイン構造よりなる群から選ばれた少なくとも1種の構造であることが好ましく、第一級~第三級アミノ基、第一級~第四級アンモニウム塩基、ピリジル基、ピリジニウム基、カルボン酸基、スルホン酸基、カルボン酸塩基、スルホン酸塩基、及び、ベタイン構造よりなる群から選ばれた少なくとも1種の構造であることがより好ましく、第一級~第三級アミノ基、第一級~第四級アンモニウム塩基、及び、ベタイン構造よりなる群から選ばれた少なくとも1種の構造であることが更に好ましく、第一級~第三級アミノ基、又は、第一級~第四級アンモニウム塩基であることが特に好ましく、第四級アンモニウム塩基であることが最も好ましい。
 また、感光性樹脂層と中間層との密着性の観点から、上記第一級~第三級アミノ基の中でも、第三級アミノ基が好ましい。
 更に、感光性樹脂層と中間層との密着性の観点から、上記第一級~第四級アンモニウム塩基の中でも、第四級アンモニウム塩基が好ましい。
 ベタイン構造としては、カルボキシレート構造及びアンモニウム構造を有するベタイン構造、又は、スルホネート構造及びアンモニウム構造を有するベタイン構造が好ましく挙げられ、スルホネート構造及びアンモニウム構造を有するベタイン構造がより好ましく挙げられる。
Examples of the polar group include primary to tertiary amino groups, primary to quaternary ammonium groups, pyridyl groups, pyridinium groups, and carboxylic acid groups from the viewpoint of adhesion between the photosensitive resin layer and the intermediate layer. (Carboxy group), sulfonic acid group (sulfo group), phosphonic acid group, phosphoric acid group, carboxylic acid group, sulfonic acid group, phosphonic acid group, phosphoric acid group, and at least one selected from the group consisting of betaine structures It is preferably a seed structure, primary to tertiary amino group, primary to quaternary ammonium base, pyridyl group, pyridinium group, carboxylic acid group, sulfonic acid group, carboxylic acid group, sulfonic acid group More preferably at least one structure selected from the group consisting of betaine structures, primary to tertiary amino groups, primary to quaternary ammonium bases, and betai More preferably, it is at least one structure selected from the group consisting of structures, particularly preferably a primary to tertiary amino group, or a primary to quaternary ammonium base. Most preferred is a quaternary ammonium base.
From the viewpoint of adhesion between the photosensitive resin layer and the intermediate layer, among the primary to tertiary amino groups, a tertiary amino group is preferable.
Further, from the viewpoint of adhesion between the photosensitive resin layer and the intermediate layer, among the primary to quaternary ammonium bases, a quaternary ammonium base is preferable.
As a betaine structure, the betaine structure which has a carboxylate structure and an ammonium structure, or the betaine structure which has a sulfonate structure and an ammonium structure is mentioned preferably, The betaine structure which has a sulfonate structure and an ammonium structure is mentioned more preferably.
 なお、上記極性化合物は、上記中間層において、他の化合物と塩を形成していてもよい。具体的は、例えば、アニオン性基であるシラノール基を表面に有するシリカ粒子と、アミン化合物とを用いた場合、アミン化合物におけるアミノ基がシラノール基と一部反応して塩を形成していてもよい。
 上記に示す場合、上記中間層に含まれるアミン化合物は、アミノ基を有する化合物と、アンモニウム塩基を有する化合物との2種が生成していると推定される。このように、上記極性化合物として塩基性基を有する化合物を使用した場合であっても、塩基性基を有する化合物、及び、カチオン性基を有する化合物の2種が生成する場合もある。
 そのため、本開示においては、上記極性基を、酸性基、塩基性基、アニオン性基及びカチオン性基よりなる群から選ばれた少なくとも1種の極性基と規定した。
The polar compound may form a salt with other compounds in the intermediate layer. Specifically, for example, when silica particles having an anionic silanol group on the surface and an amine compound are used, even if the amino group in the amine compound partially reacts with the silanol group to form a salt Good.
In the case shown above, it is presumed that the amine compound contained in the intermediate layer is generated in two types: a compound having an amino group and a compound having an ammonium base. Thus, even when a compound having a basic group is used as the polar compound, two types of compounds, a compound having a basic group and a compound having a cationic group, may be produced.
Therefore, in the present disclosure, the polar group is defined as at least one polar group selected from the group consisting of an acidic group, a basic group, an anionic group, and a cationic group.
 上記極性化合物は、上記極性基を1つのみ有していても、2つ以上有していてもよいが、感光性樹脂層と中間層との密着性、及び、中間層形成用組成物における液安定性の観点から、上記極性基を1つのみ有する化合物であることが好ましい。なお、上記ベタイン構造は、カチオン部位及びアニオン部位を合わせて1つと数えるものとする。 The polar compound may have only one polar group or two or more polar groups, but the adhesion between the photosensitive resin layer and the intermediate layer, and the intermediate layer forming composition From the viewpoint of liquid stability, a compound having only one polar group is preferable. In addition, the said betaine structure shall count as one combining a cation site | part and an anion site | part.
 上記第一級~第四級アンモニウム塩基、又は、上記ピリジニウム基における対アニオンとしては、特に制限はないが、一価のアニオンを含むことが好ましく、ハロゲン化物イオン、又は、水酸化物イオンを含むことがより好ましく、塩化物イオン、又は、水酸化物イオンを含むことが特に好ましい。
 上記カルボン酸塩基、上記スルホン酸塩基、上記ホスホン酸塩基、又は、上記リン酸塩基における対カチオンとしては、特に制限はないが、一価のカチオンを含むことが好ましく、アルカリ金属イオン、又は、第一級~第四級アンモニウムイオンを含むことがより好ましい。
The counter anion in the primary to quaternary ammonium base or the pyridinium group is not particularly limited, but preferably includes a monovalent anion, and includes a halide ion or a hydroxide ion. It is more preferable that it contains a chloride ion or a hydroxide ion.
The counter cation in the carboxylate group, the sulfonate group, the phosphonate group, or the phosphate group is not particularly limited, but preferably contains a monovalent cation, an alkali metal ion, or More preferably, it contains primary to quaternary ammonium ions.
 上記極性化合物は、脂肪族化合物であっても、芳香族化合物であってもよいが、感光性樹脂層と中間層との密着性、及び、中間層形成用組成物における液安定性の観点から、脂肪族化合物であることが好ましい。 The polar compound may be an aliphatic compound or an aromatic compound, but from the viewpoint of adhesion between the photosensitive resin layer and the intermediate layer, and liquid stability in the intermediate layer forming composition. An aliphatic compound is preferable.
 上記極性化合物の分子量は、特に制限はないが、感光性樹脂層と中間層との密着性、及び、中間層形成用組成物における液安定性の観点から、100~800であることが好ましく、120~600であることがより好ましく、150~400であることが特に好ましい。 The molecular weight of the polar compound is not particularly limited, but is preferably 100 to 800 from the viewpoint of adhesion between the photosensitive resin layer and the intermediate layer, and liquid stability in the intermediate layer forming composition, More preferably, it is 120 to 600, and particularly preferably 150 to 400.
 上記極性化合物の具体例としては、例えば、第一級~第三級アミノ化合物、第一級~第四級アンモニウム塩化合物、カルボン酸化合物、スルホン酸化合物、カルボン酸塩化合物、スルホン酸塩化合物等が挙げられる。 Specific examples of the polar compound include, for example, primary to tertiary amino compounds, primary to quaternary ammonium salt compounds, carboxylic acid compounds, sulfonic acid compounds, carboxylate compounds, sulfonate compounds, etc. Is mentioned.
 また、上記極性化合物の具体例としては、以下に示すものが好ましく挙げられるが、これらに限定されないことは言うまでもない。 In addition, specific examples of the polar compound include those shown below, but it goes without saying that they are not limited to these.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000024
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000024
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000025
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000025
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000026
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000026
 中間層は、上記極性化合物を、1種単独で含んでいてもよいし、2種以上を含んでいてもよい。
 中間層における上記極性化合物の含有量は、感光性樹脂層と中間層との密着性、及び、中間層形成用組成物における液安定性の観点から、中間層の全質量に対し、0.01質量%~5質量%であることが好ましく、0.05質量%~2質量%であることがより好ましく、0.1質量%~1.0質量%であることが更に好ましく、0.2質量%~0.8質量%であることが特に好ましい。
The intermediate layer may contain the above polar compound singly or in combination of two or more.
Content of the said polar compound in an intermediate | middle layer is 0.01 with respect to the total mass of an intermediate | middle layer from a viewpoint of the adhesiveness of the photosensitive resin layer and an intermediate | middle layer, and the liquid stability in the composition for intermediate | middle layer formation. It is preferably from 5% by mass to 5% by mass, more preferably from 0.05% by mass to 2% by mass, still more preferably from 0.1% by mass to 1.0% by mass, and 0.2% by mass. % To 0.8% by mass is particularly preferable.
〔粒子〕
 上記中間層は、粒子を含有する。
 上記粒子としては、中間層と感光層との密着性の観点から、金属酸化物粒子、又は、有機粒子であることが好ましく、Si、Ti及びZrよりなる群から選択される元素の酸化物粒子、又は、有機粒子であることがより好ましい。
 なお、本開示における金属酸化物粒子の金属には、B、Si、Ge、As、Sb、Te等の半金属も含まれるものとする。
 金属酸化物粒子としては、Be、Mg、Ca、Sr、Ba、Sc、Y、La、Ce、Gd、Tb、Dy、Yb、Lu、Ti、Zr、Hf、Nb、Mo、W、Zn、B、Al、Si、Ge、Sn、Pb、Sb、Bi、Te等の原子を含む酸化物粒子が好ましく、シリカ、酸化チタン、チタン複合酸化物、酸化亜鉛、酸化ジルコニウム、インジウム/スズ酸化物、又は、アンチモン/スズ酸化物がより好ましく、シリカ、酸化チタン、チタン複合酸化物、又は、酸化ジルコニウムが更に好ましく、シリカ、酸化チタン、又は、酸化ジルコニウムが特に好ましく、シリカが最も好ましい。
 有機粒子としては、有機樹脂粒子が好ましく挙げられる。
 有機樹脂粒子としては例えば、アクリル酸、メタクリル酸、アクリル酸エステル、メタクリル酸エステル等のアクリル酸系モノマーの単独重合体及び共重合体、ニトロセルロース、メチルセルロース、エチルセルロース、セルロースアセテートのようなセルロース系ポリマー、ポリエチレン、ポリプロピレン、ポリスチレン、塩化ビニル系共重合体、塩化ビニル-酢酸ビニル共重合体、ポリビニルピロリドン、ポリビニルブチラール、ポリビニルアルコールのようなビニル系ポリマー及びビニル化合物の共重合体、ポリエステル、ポリウレタン、ポリアミドのような縮合系ポリマー、ブタジエン-スチレン共重合体のようなゴム系熱可塑性ポリマー、エポキシ化合物のような光重合性若しくは熱重合性化合物を重合、架橋させたポリマー、メラミン化合物等を挙げることができる。
 これらの中でも、有機粒子としては、アクリル樹脂粒子が好ましく挙げられ、ポリメチルメタクリレート粒子がより好ましく挙げられる。
 中でも、粒子としては、中間層と感光層との密着性の観点から、シリカ粒子であることが特に好ましい。
 また、これら粒子は、分散安定性付与のために表面を有機材料や無機材料で処理することもできる。上記粒子は、表面が親水性の粒子であることが好ましい。例えば、表面が疎水性の粒子の表面を親水化処理する等が挙げられる。
〔particle〕
The intermediate layer contains particles.
From the viewpoint of adhesion between the intermediate layer and the photosensitive layer, the particles are preferably metal oxide particles or organic particles, and oxide particles of an element selected from the group consisting of Si, Ti and Zr Or it is more preferable that it is an organic particle.
Note that the metal of the metal oxide particles in the present disclosure includes metalloids such as B, Si, Ge, As, Sb, and Te.
As the metal oxide particles, Be, Mg, Ca, Sr, Ba, Sc, Y, La, Ce, Gd, Tb, Dy, Yb, Lu, Ti, Zr, Hf, Nb, Mo, W, Zn, B Oxide particles containing atoms such as Al, Si, Ge, Sn, Pb, Sb, Bi, Te, etc. are preferred, silica, titanium oxide, titanium composite oxide, zinc oxide, zirconium oxide, indium / tin oxide, or Antimony / tin oxide is more preferable, silica, titanium oxide, titanium composite oxide, or zirconium oxide is more preferable, silica, titanium oxide, or zirconium oxide is particularly preferable, and silica is most preferable.
As the organic particles, organic resin particles are preferably exemplified.
Examples of the organic resin particles include homopolymers and copolymers of acrylic acid monomers such as acrylic acid, methacrylic acid, acrylic ester, and methacrylic ester, and cellulose polymers such as nitrocellulose, methylcellulose, ethylcellulose, and cellulose acetate. , Polyethylene, polypropylene, polystyrene, vinyl chloride copolymer, vinyl chloride-vinyl acetate copolymer, polyvinyl pyrrolidone, polyvinyl butyral, vinyl polymers such as polyvinyl alcohol, and copolymers of vinyl compounds, polyester, polyurethane, polyamide Condensation polymers such as butadiene-styrene copolymers, rubber-based thermoplastic polymers such as butadiene-styrene copolymers, polymers obtained by polymerizing and crosslinking photopolymerizable or thermopolymerizable compounds such as epoxy compounds, Min compounds and the like.
Among these, acrylic resin particles are preferable as the organic particles, and polymethyl methacrylate particles are more preferable.
Among these, silica particles are particularly preferable from the viewpoint of adhesion between the intermediate layer and the photosensitive layer.
Moreover, the surface of these particles can be treated with an organic material or an inorganic material in order to impart dispersion stability. The particles are preferably particles having a hydrophilic surface. For example, the surface of particles having a hydrophobic surface may be subjected to a hydrophilic treatment.
 また、上記粒子は、感光性樹脂層と中間層との密着性、及び、中間層形成用組成物における液安定性の観点から、アニオン性基又はカチオン性基を表面に有する粒子であることが好ましく、アニオン性基を表面に有する粒子であることがより好ましく、アニオン性基を表面に有するシリカ粒子であることが特に好ましい。
 更に、中間層が、アニオン性基を表面に有する粒子である場合、感光性樹脂層と中間層との密着性の観点から、上記極性化合物は、塩基性基又はカチオン性基を有する極性化合物であることが好ましい。また、カチオン性基を表面に有する粒子である場合、感光性樹脂層と中間層との密着性の観点から、上記極性化合物は、酸性基又はアニオン性基を有する極性化合物であることが好ましい。
 上記粒子が表面に有するアニオン性基としては、シラノール基、又は、カルボキシ基が好ましく挙げられ、シラノール基がより好ましく挙げられる。
 上記粒子が表面に有するカチオン性基としては、アミノ基が好ましく挙げられる。
In addition, the particles are particles having an anionic group or a cationic group on the surface from the viewpoint of adhesion between the photosensitive resin layer and the intermediate layer and liquid stability in the intermediate layer forming composition. The particles having an anionic group on the surface are more preferable, and the silica particles having an anionic group on the surface are particularly preferable.
Furthermore, when the intermediate layer is a particle having an anionic group on the surface, from the viewpoint of adhesion between the photosensitive resin layer and the intermediate layer, the polar compound is a polar compound having a basic group or a cationic group. Preferably there is. Moreover, when it is the particle | grains which have a cationic group on the surface, it is preferable that the said polar compound is a polar compound which has an acidic group or an anionic group from an adhesive viewpoint of the photosensitive resin layer and an intermediate | middle layer.
As an anionic group which the said particle | grain has on the surface, a silanol group or a carboxy group is mentioned preferably, A silanol group is mentioned more preferably.
The cationic group that the particles have on the surface is preferably an amino group.
 上記粒子の算術平均粒子径は、中間層と感光層との密着性の観点から、100nm以下であることが好ましく、50nm以下であることがより好ましく、6nm~30nmであることが更に好ましく、1nm~25nmであることが特に好ましい。
 本開示における粒子の算術平均粒子径の測定方法は、電子顕微鏡により任意の粒子200個の粒子径を測定し、その算術平均をいう。また、粒子の形状が球形でない場合には、最大径を径とする。
The arithmetic average particle diameter of the above particles is preferably 100 nm or less, more preferably 50 nm or less, still more preferably 6 nm to 30 nm, from the viewpoint of the adhesion between the intermediate layer and the photosensitive layer. It is particularly preferable that the thickness is ˜25 nm.
The method for measuring the arithmetic average particle diameter of the particles in the present disclosure refers to an arithmetic average obtained by measuring the particle diameter of 200 arbitrary particles with an electron microscope. When the particle shape is not spherical, the maximum diameter is taken as the diameter.
 中間層は、上記粒子を、1種単独で含んでいてもよいし、2種以上を含んでいてもよい。
 中間層における上記粒子の含有量は、中間層と感光層との密着性の観点から、中間層の全質量に対し、1質量%~90質量%であることが好ましく、3質量%~70質量%であることがより好ましく、5質量%~50質量%であることが特に好ましい。
The intermediate layer may contain the above particles alone or in combination of two or more.
The content of the particles in the intermediate layer is preferably 1% by mass to 90% by mass with respect to the total mass of the intermediate layer from the viewpoint of adhesion between the intermediate layer and the photosensitive layer, and preferably 3% by mass to 70% by mass. % Is more preferable, and 5% by mass to 50% by mass is particularly preferable.
〔水溶性樹脂〕
 中間層は、水溶性樹脂を含有する。
 本開示において、「水溶性」とは、22℃においてpH7.0の水100gへの溶解度が0.1g以上であることを意味する。
 また、上記水溶性樹脂は、22℃におけるpH7.0の水100gへの溶解度が、1g以上であることが好ましく、5g以上であることがより好ましい。
 水溶性樹脂としては、例えばセルロース樹脂、ポリビニルアルコール樹脂、ポリビニルピロリドン樹脂、アクリルアミド樹脂、(メタ)アクリレート樹脂、ポリエチレンオキサイド樹脂、ゼラチン、ビニルエーテル樹脂、ポリアミド樹脂、及びこれらの共重合体などの樹脂が挙げられる。中でも、セルロース樹脂であることが好ましく、ヒドロキシプロピルセルロース及びヒドロキシプロピルメチルセルロースよりなる群から選ばれた少なくとも1種の樹脂であることがより好ましい。
(Water-soluble resin)
The intermediate layer contains a water-soluble resin.
In the present disclosure, “water-soluble” means that the solubility in 100 g of water having a pH of 7.0 at 22 ° C. is 0.1 g or more.
In addition, the water-soluble resin has a solubility in 100 g of water having a pH of 7.0 at 22 ° C. of preferably 1 g or more, and more preferably 5 g or more.
Examples of water-soluble resins include cellulose resins, polyvinyl alcohol resins, polyvinyl pyrrolidone resins, acrylamide resins, (meth) acrylate resins, polyethylene oxide resins, gelatin, vinyl ether resins, polyamide resins, and copolymers thereof. It is done. Among these, a cellulose resin is preferable, and at least one resin selected from the group consisting of hydroxypropylcellulose and hydroxypropylmethylcellulose is more preferable.
 中間層は、水溶性樹脂を、1種単独で含んでいてもよいし、2種以上を含んでいてもよい。
 水溶性樹脂の含有量は、感光性樹脂層と中間層との密着性の観点から、中間層の全質量に対して、10質量%~99質量%であることが好ましく、30質量%~97質量%であることがより好ましく、50質量%~95質量%であることが特に好ましい。
The intermediate layer may contain one type of water-soluble resin, or may contain two or more types.
The content of the water-soluble resin is preferably 10% by mass to 99% by mass and preferably 30% by mass to 97% by mass with respect to the total mass of the intermediate layer from the viewpoint of adhesion between the photosensitive resin layer and the intermediate layer. More preferably, it is more preferably 50% by mass to 95% by mass.
〔pH感受性色素〕
 上記中間層は、露光パターンの確認容易性の観点から、発色時における波長範囲400nm~780nmの極大吸収波長が450nm以上であり、pHにより極大吸収波長が変化するpH感受性色素を含むことが好ましい。
「極大吸収波長が変化する」とは、発色状態にある色素が消色する態様、消色状態にある色素が発色する態様、及び、発色状態にある色素が他の色相の発色状態に変化する態様のいずれの態様を指すものであってもよい。
 pH感受性色素は、視認性の観点から、光酸発生剤から発生する酸により消色する潜在性色素であることがより好ましい。
[PH-sensitive dye]
From the viewpoint of easy confirmation of the exposure pattern, the intermediate layer preferably contains a pH-sensitive dye having a maximum absorption wavelength in the wavelength range of 400 nm to 780 nm during color development of 450 nm or more and the maximum absorption wavelength changing depending on pH.
“Maximum absorption wavelength changes” means a mode in which a dye in a colored state is decolored, a mode in which a dye in a decolored state is colored, and a color in a colored state changes to a colored state in another hue It may refer to any aspect of the aspects.
From the viewpoint of visibility, the pH-sensitive dye is more preferably a latent dye that is decolored by an acid generated from the photoacid generator.
 pH感受性色素であることの確認は、以下の方法により行うことができる。
 色素0.1gを、エタノール及び水の混合溶液(エタノール/水=1/2[質量比])100mLに溶かし、0.1mol/L(1N)の塩酸水溶液を加えてpH=1に調整する。0.01mol/L(0.01N)の水酸化ナトリウム水溶液で滴定し、発色変化と発色変化が現れた際のpHとを確認する。なお、pHは、pHメーター(型番:HM-31、東亜ディーケーケー(株)製)を用いて25℃で測定される値である。
Confirmation of the pH-sensitive dye can be performed by the following method.
0.1 g of the dye is dissolved in 100 mL of a mixed solution of ethanol and water (ethanol / water = 1/2 [mass ratio]), and 0.1 mol / L (1N) aqueous hydrochloric acid solution is added to adjust to pH = 1. Titrate with a 0.01 mol / L (0.01 N) aqueous sodium hydroxide solution to confirm the color change and the pH when the color change appears. The pH is a value measured at 25 ° C. using a pH meter (model number: HM-31, manufactured by Toa DKK Co., Ltd.).
 本開示における極大吸収波長の測定方法は、大気の雰囲気下で、25℃にて分光光度計:UV3100((株)島津製作所製)を用いて、400nm~780nmの範囲で透過スペクトルを測定し、光の強度が極小となる波長(極大吸収波長)を測定するものとする。 The measurement method of the maximum absorption wavelength in the present disclosure is to measure a transmission spectrum in the range of 400 nm to 780 nm using a spectrophotometer: UV3100 (manufactured by Shimadzu Corporation) at 25 ° C. in an air atmosphere. The wavelength at which the light intensity is minimized (maximum absorption wavelength) is measured.
 露光により消色する色素としては、例えば、ロイコ化合物、ジフェニルメタン系色素、オキザジン系色素、キサンテン系色素、イミノナフトキノン系色素、アゾメチン系色素、アントラキノン系色素等が挙げられる。
 中でも、色素としては、視認性の観点から、ロイコ化合物が好ましい。
 ロイコ化合物としては、トリアリールメタン系(例えばトリフェニルメタン系)、スピロピラン系、フルオラン系、ジフェニルメタン系、ローダミンラクタム系、インドリルフタリド系、ロイコオーラミン系等のロイコ化合物が挙げられる。中でも、トリアリールメタン骨格を有するロイコ化合物(トリアリールメタン系色素)が好ましく、トリフェニルメタン系色素がより好ましい。
 また、ロイコ化合物としては、視認性の観点から、ラクトン環、スルチン環、又はスルトン環を有し、ラクトン環、スルチン環、又は、スルトン環が開環又は閉環するものが好ましく、スルトン環を有し、スルトン環が閉環して消色するロイコ化合物であることがより好ましい。
Examples of the dye that can be erased by exposure include leuco compounds, diphenylmethane dyes, oxazine dyes, xanthene dyes, iminonaphthoquinone dyes, azomethine dyes, anthraquinone dyes, and the like.
Among these, as the pigment, a leuco compound is preferable from the viewpoint of visibility.
Examples of leuco compounds include leuco compounds such as triarylmethane (for example, triphenylmethane), spiropyran, fluorane, diphenylmethane, rhodamine lactam, indolylphthalide, and leucooramine. Among them, a leuco compound (triarylmethane dye) having a triarylmethane skeleton is preferable, and a triphenylmethane dye is more preferable.
In addition, from the viewpoint of visibility, the leuco compound preferably has a lactone ring, a sultin ring, or a sultone ring, and the lactone ring, sultin ring, or sultone ring is preferably opened or closed, and has a sultone ring. And it is more preferable that it is a leuco compound in which a sultone ring is closed and decolored.
 色素は、色素の析出による欠陥を防止する目的で、水溶性の化合物であることが好ましい。
 また、色素は、22℃におけるpH7.0の水100gへの溶解度が、1g以上であることが好ましく、5g以上であることがより好ましい。
The pigment is preferably a water-soluble compound for the purpose of preventing defects due to pigment deposition.
The solubility of the dye in 100 g of water having a pH of 7.0 at 22 ° C. is preferably 1 g or more, and more preferably 5 g or more.
 中間層は、色素を、1種単独で含んでいてもよいし、2種以上を含んでいてもよい。
 上記中間層における色素の含有量は、視認性の観点から、中間層の全質量に対し、0.01質量%~10質量%であることが好ましく、0.5質量%~5質量%であることがより好ましく、1.0質量%~3.0質量%であることが更に好ましい。
An intermediate | middle layer may contain the pigment | dye individually by 1 type, and may contain 2 or more types.
The content of the pigment in the intermediate layer is preferably 0.01% by mass to 10% by mass, and preferably 0.5% by mass to 5% by mass with respect to the total mass of the intermediate layer from the viewpoint of visibility. More preferably, the content is 1.0% by mass to 3.0% by mass.
〔界面活性剤〕
 中間層には、厚さ均一性の観点から界面活性剤を含有することが好ましい。界面活性剤としては、フッ素原子を有する界面活性剤、ケイ素原子を有する界面活性剤、フッ素原子もケイ素原子も有さない界面活性剤のいずれも使用することができる。中でも、界面活性剤としては、感光性樹脂層及び中間層におけるスジの発生抑制、及び、密着性の観点から、フッ素原子を有する界面活性剤であることが好ましく、パーフルオロアルキル基とポリアルキレンオキシ基とを有する界面活性剤であることがより好ましい。
 また、界面活性剤としては、アニオン性、カチオン性、ノニオン性(非イオン性)、又は、両性のいずれでも使用することができるが、好ましい界面活性剤はノニオン性界面活性剤である。
 界面活性剤は、界面活性剤の析出抑制の観点から、25℃の水100gに対する溶解度が1g以上であるものが好ましい。
[Surfactant]
The intermediate layer preferably contains a surfactant from the viewpoint of thickness uniformity. As the surfactant, any of a surfactant having a fluorine atom, a surfactant having a silicon atom, and a surfactant having neither a fluorine atom nor a silicon atom can be used. Among these, as the surfactant, a surfactant having a fluorine atom is preferable from the viewpoint of suppressing generation of streaks in the photosensitive resin layer and the intermediate layer and adhesion, and a perfluoroalkyl group and a polyalkyleneoxy are preferable. A surfactant having a group is more preferable.
Further, as the surfactant, any of anionic, cationic, nonionic (nonionic), or amphoteric can be used, but a preferable surfactant is a nonionic surfactant.
The surfactant preferably has a solubility of 1 g or more in 100 g of water at 25 ° C. from the viewpoint of suppressing the precipitation of the surfactant.
 中間層は、界面活性剤を、1種単独で含んでいてもよいし、2種以上を含んでいてもよい。
 上記中間層における界面活性剤の含有量は、感光性樹脂層及び中間層におけるスジの発生抑制、及び、密着性の観点から、中間層の全質量に対し、0.05質量%~2.0質量%であることが好ましく、0.1質量%~1.0質量%であることがより好ましく、0.2質量%~0.5質量%であることが特に好ましい。
The intermediate layer may contain one kind of surfactant, or two or more kinds.
The content of the surfactant in the intermediate layer is from 0.05% by mass to 2.0% with respect to the total mass of the intermediate layer, from the viewpoint of suppressing the occurrence of streaks in the photosensitive resin layer and the intermediate layer, and adhesion. The mass is preferably 0.1% by mass, more preferably 0.1% by mass to 1.0% by mass, and particularly preferably 0.2% by mass to 0.5% by mass.
〔pH調整剤〕
 中間層にはpH調整剤を含むことができる。pH調整剤を含むことで、中間層中の色素の発色状態又は消色状態をより安定的に維持することができ、感光性樹脂層と中間層との密着性がより向上する。
 本開示におけるpH調整剤は特に制限はない。例えば水酸化ナトリウム、水酸化カリウム、水酸化リチウム、有機アミン、有機アンモニウム塩等が挙げられる。水溶性の観点から水酸化ナトリウムが好ましい。感光性樹脂層と中間層との密着性の観点からは、有機アンモニウム塩が好ましい。
 また、pH調整剤として酸性のpH調整剤を使用してもよい。例えば、塩酸、硫酸等の無機酸、酢酸、トシル酸等の有機酸が挙げられる。基板安定性の観点からは、有機酸が好ましい。
[PH adjuster]
The intermediate layer can contain a pH adjusting agent. By including the pH adjuster, the coloring state or decoloring state of the dye in the intermediate layer can be more stably maintained, and the adhesion between the photosensitive resin layer and the intermediate layer is further improved.
There is no restriction | limiting in particular in the pH adjuster in this indication. Examples thereof include sodium hydroxide, potassium hydroxide, lithium hydroxide, organic amine, and organic ammonium salt. Sodium hydroxide is preferred from the viewpoint of water solubility. From the viewpoint of adhesion between the photosensitive resin layer and the intermediate layer, an organic ammonium salt is preferable.
Moreover, you may use an acidic pH adjuster as a pH adjuster. Examples thereof include inorganic acids such as hydrochloric acid and sulfuric acid, and organic acids such as acetic acid and tosylic acid. From the viewpoint of substrate stability, an organic acid is preferable.
<<中間層の平均厚さ>>
 中間層の平均厚さは、感光性樹脂層と中間層との密着性、及び、パターン形成性の観点から、0.3μm~10μmが好ましく、0.3μm~5μmがより好ましく、0.3μm~3μmが特に好ましい。
 また、中間層の平均厚さは、感光性樹脂層の平均厚さよりも薄いことが好ましい。
<< Average thickness of intermediate layer >>
The average thickness of the intermediate layer is preferably from 0.3 μm to 10 μm, more preferably from 0.3 μm to 5 μm, more preferably from 0.3 μm to 0.3 μm, from the viewpoints of adhesion between the photosensitive resin layer and the intermediate layer and pattern formability. 3 μm is particularly preferable.
Moreover, it is preferable that the average thickness of an intermediate | middle layer is thinner than the average thickness of a photosensitive resin layer.
<<中間層の形成方法>>
 本開示における中間層は、中間層の形成に用いる成分と、水溶性溶剤とを含有する中間層形成用組成物を調製し、塗布及び乾燥して形成することができる。各成分を、それぞれ予め溶剤に溶解させた溶液とした後、得られた溶液をあらかじめ定めた割合で混合して組成物を調製することもできる。以上の如くして調製した組成物は、孔径3.0μmのフィルター等を用いてろ過を行ってもよい。
 中間層形成用組成物を仮支持体に塗布し、乾燥させることで、仮支持体上に中間層を形成することができる。塗布方法は特に限定されず、スリット塗布、スピン塗布、カーテン塗布、インクジェット塗布などの公知の方法で塗布することができる。
<< Method for Forming Intermediate Layer >>
The intermediate layer in the present disclosure can be formed by preparing a composition for forming an intermediate layer containing a component used for forming the intermediate layer and a water-soluble solvent, and applying and drying the composition. It is also possible to prepare a composition by dissolving each component in a solvent in advance and then mixing the resulting solution at a predetermined ratio. The composition prepared as described above may be filtered using a filter having a pore size of 3.0 μm.
The intermediate layer can be formed on the temporary support by applying the intermediate layer-forming composition to the temporary support and drying it. The coating method is not particularly limited, and the coating can be performed by a known method such as slit coating, spin coating, curtain coating, and inkjet coating.
〔中間層形成用組成物〕
 中間層形成用組成物は、中間層の形成に用いる成分と、水溶性溶剤とを含むことが好ましい。各成分に水溶性溶剤を含有させて粘度を調節し、塗布及び乾燥することで、中間層を好適に形成することができる。
[Composition for forming an intermediate layer]
It is preferable that the composition for intermediate | middle layer formation contains the component used for formation of an intermediate | middle layer, and a water-soluble solvent. An intermediate layer can be suitably formed by adding a water-soluble solvent to each component, adjusting the viscosity, and applying and drying.
-水溶性溶剤-
 水溶性溶剤としては、公知の水溶性溶剤を用いることができ、例えば、水、炭素数1~6のアルコール等が挙げられ、水を含むことが好ましい。炭素数1~6のアルコールとしては、具体的には、メタノール、エタノール、n-プロパノール、イソプロパノール、n-ブタノール、n-ペンタノール、及び、n-ヘキサノールが挙げられる。中でも、メタノール、エタノール、n-プロパノール、及び、イソプロパノールよりなる群から選ばれた少なくとも1種を用いることが好ましい。
-Water-soluble solvent-
As the water-soluble solvent, known water-soluble solvents can be used, and examples thereof include water, alcohols having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, and preferably contains water. Specific examples of the alcohol having 1 to 6 carbon atoms include methanol, ethanol, n-propanol, isopropanol, n-butanol, n-pentanol, and n-hexanol. Among these, it is preferable to use at least one selected from the group consisting of methanol, ethanol, n-propanol, and isopropanol.
<水溶性樹脂層>
 本開示における感光性転写材料は、感光性樹脂層と中間層との密着性、及び、仮支持体と中間層との密着性の観点から、上記仮支持体と上記中間層との間に、粒子の含有量が5質量%以下である水溶性樹脂層を更に有することが好ましい。
 水溶性樹脂層は、水溶性樹脂を含み、かつ粒子の含有量が5質量%以下である層であればよく、粒子の含有量が0質量%である、すなわち、粒子を含んでいなくともよい。
 また、水溶性樹脂層は、保存安定性、及び、感光性樹脂層と中間層との密着性の観点から、上記中間層よりも粒子の含有量が少ないことが好ましい。
 また、水溶性樹脂層は、上記極性化合物を含むことが好ましく、水溶性樹脂層の上層に中間層を重層塗布及び乾燥させる際、あるいはその後の工程で、水溶性樹脂層中の極性化合物を中間層へ拡散させ、極性化合物と粒子とを含有する中間層を形成することが、液の保存安定性、及び、感光性樹脂層と中間層との密着性の両立の観点から好ましい。
<Water-soluble resin layer>
In the present disclosure, the photosensitive transfer material has an adhesive property between the photosensitive resin layer and the intermediate layer, and an adhesive property between the temporary support and the intermediate layer. It is preferable to further have a water-soluble resin layer having a particle content of 5% by mass or less.
The water-soluble resin layer may be a layer containing a water-soluble resin and having a particle content of 5% by mass or less, and the particle content is 0% by mass, that is, even if the particle is not included. Good.
The water-soluble resin layer preferably has a smaller content of particles than the intermediate layer from the viewpoints of storage stability and adhesion between the photosensitive resin layer and the intermediate layer.
The water-soluble resin layer preferably contains the above polar compound. When the intermediate layer is applied and dried on the upper layer of the water-soluble resin layer, or in the subsequent steps, the polar compound in the water-soluble resin layer is intermediated. It is preferable to diffuse into the layer and form an intermediate layer containing the polar compound and particles from the viewpoint of the storage stability of the liquid and the adhesion between the photosensitive resin layer and the intermediate layer.
 水溶性樹脂層は、水溶性樹脂を含有する。
 水溶性樹脂層に用いられる水溶性樹脂は、上述した中間層に用いられる水溶性樹脂と同様のものを用いることができ、好ましい態様も同様である。
 水溶性樹脂層は、水溶性樹脂を、1種単独で含んでいてもよいし、2種以上を含んでいてもよい。
 水溶性樹脂の含有量は、感光性樹脂層と中間層との密着性の観点から、水溶性樹脂層の全質量に対し、50質量%~100質量%であることが好ましく、65質量%~99質量%であることがより好ましく、80質量%~98質量%であることが特に好ましい。
The water-soluble resin layer contains a water-soluble resin.
The water-soluble resin used for the water-soluble resin layer can be the same as the water-soluble resin used for the intermediate layer described above, and the preferred embodiment is also the same.
The water-soluble resin layer may contain one type of water-soluble resin, or may contain two or more types.
The content of the water-soluble resin is preferably 50% by mass to 100% by mass with respect to the total mass of the water-soluble resin layer, from the viewpoint of adhesion between the photosensitive resin layer and the intermediate layer, and preferably 65% by mass to It is more preferably 99% by mass, and particularly preferably 80% by mass to 98% by mass.
 水溶性樹脂層は、含有量が5質量%以下であれば、粒子を含有していてもよい。
 水溶性樹脂層に用いられる粒子は、上述した中間層に用いられる粒子と同様のものを用いることができ、好ましい態様も同様である。
 水溶性樹脂層は、粒子を、1種単独で含んでいてもよいし、2種以上を含んでいてもよい。
 粒子の含有量は、感光性樹脂層と中間層との密着性の観点から、水溶性樹脂層の全質量に対し、3質量%以下であることが好ましく、1質量%以下であることがより好ましい。
The water-soluble resin layer may contain particles as long as the content is 5% by mass or less.
The particles used for the water-soluble resin layer can be the same as the particles used for the intermediate layer described above, and the preferred embodiments are also the same.
The water-soluble resin layer may contain one kind of particles or two or more kinds.
The content of the particles is preferably 3% by mass or less and more preferably 1% by mass or less with respect to the total mass of the water-soluble resin layer from the viewpoint of adhesion between the photosensitive resin layer and the intermediate layer. preferable.
 水溶性樹脂層は、極性化合物を含んでいてもよい。
 水溶性樹脂層に用いられる極性化合物は、上述した中間層に用いられる極性化合物と同様のものを用いることができ、好ましい態様も同様である。
 水溶性樹脂層は、極性化合物を、1種単独で含んでいてもよいし、2種以上を含んでいてもよい。
 極性化合物の含有量は、感光性樹脂層と中間層との密着性、及び、中間層形成用組成物における液安定性の観点から、水溶性樹脂層の全質量に対し、0.01質量%~5質量%であることが好ましく、0.05質量%~2質量%であることがより好ましく、0.1質量%~1.0質量%であることが更に好ましく、0.2質量%~0.8質量%であることが特に好ましい。
The water-soluble resin layer may contain a polar compound.
The polar compound used for the water-soluble resin layer can be the same as the polar compound used for the intermediate layer described above, and the preferred embodiment is also the same.
The water-soluble resin layer may contain one kind of polar compound or two or more kinds.
The content of the polar compound is 0.01% by mass with respect to the total mass of the water-soluble resin layer, from the viewpoint of adhesion between the photosensitive resin layer and the intermediate layer and liquid stability in the intermediate layer forming composition. Is preferably 5% by mass, more preferably 0.05% by mass to 2% by mass, further preferably 0.1% by mass to 1.0% by mass, and more preferably 0.2% by mass to It is especially preferable that it is 0.8 mass%.
 水溶性樹脂層は、上述した以外のその他の化合物を含んでいてもよい。
 水溶性樹脂層に用いられるその他の化合物は、特に制限はなく、上述した中間層に用いられるその他の化合物と同様のものを用いることができ、好ましい態様も同様である。
The water-soluble resin layer may contain other compounds other than those described above.
There is no restriction | limiting in particular in the other compound used for a water-soluble resin layer, The thing similar to the other compound used for the intermediate | middle layer mentioned above can be used, A preferable aspect is also the same.
 上記水溶性樹脂層の平均厚さは、中間層と感光性樹脂層との密着性、及び、パターン形成性の観点から、0.3μm~10μmが好ましく、0.3μm~5μmがより好ましく、0.3μm~2.5μmが特に好ましい。
 また、上記水溶性樹脂層の平均厚さは、中間層と感光性樹脂層との密着性、及び、パターン形成性の観点から、上記中間層の平均厚さよりも厚いことが好ましい。
The average thickness of the water-soluble resin layer is preferably from 0.3 μm to 10 μm, more preferably from 0.3 μm to 5 μm, from the viewpoints of adhesion between the intermediate layer and the photosensitive resin layer and pattern formation. Particularly preferred is 3 μm to 2.5 μm.
The average thickness of the water-soluble resin layer is preferably larger than the average thickness of the intermediate layer from the viewpoints of adhesion between the intermediate layer and the photosensitive resin layer and pattern formation.
<<水溶性樹脂層の形成方法>>
 水溶性樹脂層の形成方法は、特に制限はなく公知の方法を用いることができる。
 また、水溶性樹脂層を形成する場合、上記水溶性樹脂層及び上記中間層を形成する方法としては、逐次塗布法、又は、重層塗布法を好適に用いることができる。
 逐次塗布法により形成した場合であっても、上記水溶性樹脂層及び上記中間層のバインダー成分は水溶性樹脂であるため、水溶性樹脂層形成用組成物を仮支持体上に塗布乾燥して水溶性樹脂層を形成し、形成された水溶性樹脂層の上に中間層形成用組成物を塗布した際に、上記水溶性樹脂層の一部が溶解して中間層形成用組成物と混合し、例えば、中間層形成用組成物における粒子の一部が水溶性樹脂層へ移動し、また、上記水溶性樹脂層に含まれる上記極性化合物の一部が中間層形成用組成物、すなわち、中間層へと移動する。
 粒子を含まない水溶性樹脂層形成用組成物を用いた場合であっても、上記水溶性樹脂層は、粒子が含む層となる場合があり、また、上記極性化合物を含まない粒子含有層形成用組成物を用いた場合であっても、上記粒子含有層は、上記極性化合物を含む層となる。
 重層塗布法により上記水溶性樹脂層及び上記中間層を形成する場合、上記混合がより顕著であると考えられる。
 上記水溶性樹脂層の形成に用いられる水溶性樹脂層形成用組成物は、粒子を含んでいても、含んでいなくともよいが、水溶性樹脂層形成用組成物の液安定性の観点から、粒子を含まないことが好ましい。
 また、上記水溶性樹脂層の形成に用いられる水溶性樹脂層形成用組成物は、水溶性樹脂層形成用組成物の液安定性の観点から、極性化合物を含むことが好ましい。
 極性化合物を含む水溶性樹脂層形成用組成物を用いる場合、上記中間層の形成に用いられる中間層形成用組成物は、上記極性化合物を含んでいても、含んでいなくともよいが、中間層形成用組成物の液安定性の観点から、上記極性化合物を含まないことが好ましい。
<< Method for forming water-soluble resin layer >>
There is no restriction | limiting in particular in the formation method of a water-soluble resin layer, A well-known method can be used.
Moreover, when forming a water-soluble resin layer, as a method of forming the said water-soluble resin layer and the said intermediate | middle layer, a sequential coating method or a multilayer coating method can be used suitably.
Even when it is formed by the sequential coating method, the binder component of the water-soluble resin layer and the intermediate layer is a water-soluble resin. A water-soluble resin layer is formed, and when the intermediate layer forming composition is applied on the formed water-soluble resin layer, a part of the water-soluble resin layer is dissolved and mixed with the intermediate layer forming composition. For example, some of the particles in the intermediate layer-forming composition move to the water-soluble resin layer, and part of the polar compound contained in the water-soluble resin layer is the intermediate layer-forming composition, that is, Move to the middle layer.
Even when a composition for forming a water-soluble resin layer that does not contain particles is used, the water-soluble resin layer may be a layer that contains particles, and a particle-containing layer that does not contain the polar compound may be formed. Even when the composition for use is used, the particle-containing layer is a layer containing the polar compound.
When the water-soluble resin layer and the intermediate layer are formed by a multilayer coating method, the mixing is considered to be more remarkable.
From the viewpoint of the liquid stability of the water-soluble resin layer forming composition, the water-soluble resin layer forming composition used for forming the water-soluble resin layer may or may not contain particles. It is preferable that no particles are contained.
Moreover, it is preferable that the composition for water-soluble resin layer formation used for formation of the said water-soluble resin layer contains a polar compound from a liquid-stable viewpoint of the composition for water-soluble resin layer formation.
When the water-soluble resin layer forming composition containing a polar compound is used, the intermediate layer forming composition used for forming the intermediate layer may or may not contain the polar compound. From the viewpoint of the liquid stability of the layer forming composition, it is preferable not to contain the polar compound.
 また、水溶性樹脂層形成用組成物は、粒子の含有量が少ない以外は、上述した中間層形成用組成物と同様に調製することができる。各成分に水溶性溶剤を含有させて粘度を調節し、塗布及び乾燥することで、水溶性樹脂層を好適に形成することができる。 Moreover, the water-soluble resin layer forming composition can be prepared in the same manner as the above-described intermediate layer forming composition except that the content of particles is small. A water-soluble resin layer can be suitably formed by adding a water-soluble solvent to each component, adjusting the viscosity, and applying and drying.
<感光性樹脂層>
 本開示に係る感光性転写材料は、感光性樹脂層を有する。
 本開示における感光性樹脂層は、ポジ型感光性樹脂層である。また、本開示において用いられる感光性樹脂層は、感度及び解像度の観点から、酸分解性樹脂、すなわち、酸分解性基で保護された酸基を有する構成単位を有する重合体と、光酸発生剤とを含む化学増幅ポジ型感光性樹脂層であることが好ましい。
 後述するオニウム塩、オキシムスルホネート化合物等の光酸発生剤は、活性放射線(活性光線)に感応して生成される酸が、上記重合体中の保護された酸基の脱保護に対して触媒として作用するので、1個の光量子の作用で生成した酸が、多数の脱保護反応に寄与し、量子収率は1を超え、例えば、10の数乗のような大きい値となり、いわゆる化学増幅の結果として、高感度が得られる。
 一方、活性光線に感応する光酸発生剤としてキノンジアジド化合物を用いた場合、逐次型光化学反応によりカルボキシ基を生成するが、その量子収率は必ず1以下であり、化学増幅型には該当しない。
<Photosensitive resin layer>
The photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure has a photosensitive resin layer.
The photosensitive resin layer in the present disclosure is a positive photosensitive resin layer. Further, the photosensitive resin layer used in the present disclosure includes an acid-decomposable resin, that is, a polymer having a structural unit having an acid group protected by an acid-decomposable group, and photoacid generation from the viewpoint of sensitivity and resolution. A chemically amplified positive photosensitive resin layer containing an agent is preferable.
Photo acid generators such as onium salts and oxime sulfonate compounds described below are produced as a catalyst for the deprotection of protected acid groups in the polymer, as the acid generated in response to actinic radiation (active light). As a result, the acid generated by the action of one photon contributes to many deprotection reactions, and the quantum yield exceeds 1, for example, a large value such as the power of 10, which is a so-called chemical amplification. As a result, high sensitivity is obtained.
On the other hand, when a quinonediazide compound is used as a photoacid generator sensitive to actinic rays, a carboxy group is generated by a sequential photochemical reaction, but its quantum yield is always 1 or less and does not correspond to a chemical amplification type.
〔酸分解性基で保護された酸基を有する構成単位Aを有する重合体X〕
 感光性樹脂層は、酸分解性基で保護された酸基を有する構成単位A(単に「構成単位A」ともいう。)を有する重合体X(単に「重合体X」ともいう。)を含むことが好ましい。
 また、感光性樹脂層は、構成単位Aを有する重合体Xに加え、他の重合体を含んでいてもよい。本開示においては、構成単位Aを有する重合体X及び他の重合体をあわせて、「重合体成分」ともいう。
 重合体Xは、露光により生じる触媒量の酸等の酸性物質の作用により、重合体X中の酸分解性基で保護された酸基が脱保護反応を受け酸基となる。この酸基により、感光性樹脂層の現像液への溶解が可能となる。
[Polymer X having structural unit A having an acid group protected with an acid-decomposable group]
The photosensitive resin layer includes a polymer X (also simply referred to as “polymer X”) having a structural unit A having an acid group protected by an acid-decomposable group (also simply referred to as “structural unit A”). It is preferable.
In addition to the polymer X having the structural unit A, the photosensitive resin layer may contain another polymer. In the present disclosure, the polymer X having the structural unit A and other polymers are collectively referred to as “polymer component”.
In the polymer X, an acid group protected by an acid-decomposable group in the polymer X undergoes a deprotection reaction to be an acid group by the action of an acidic substance such as a catalytic amount of acid generated by exposure. This acid group enables the photosensitive resin layer to be dissolved in the developer.
 重合体Xは、付加重合型の樹脂であることが好ましく、(メタ)アクリル酸又はそのエステルに由来する構成単位を有する重合体であることがより好ましい。なお、(メタ)アクリル酸又はそのエステルに由来する構成単位以外の構成単位、例えば、スチレン化合物に由来する構成単位、ビニル化合物に由来する構成単位等を有していてもよい。
 以下に構成単位Aの好ましい態様について説明する。
The polymer X is preferably an addition polymerization type resin, and more preferably a polymer having a structural unit derived from (meth) acrylic acid or an ester thereof. In addition, you may have structural units other than the structural unit derived from (meth) acrylic acid or its ester, for example, the structural unit derived from a styrene compound, the structural unit derived from a vinyl compound, etc.
Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the structural unit A will be described.
-構成単位A-
 上記重合体成分は、酸分解性基で保護された酸基を有する構成単位Aを有する重合体Xを含むことが好ましい。感光性樹脂層が構成単位Aを有する重合体Xを含むことにより、極めて高感度な化学増幅ポジ型の感光性樹脂層とすることができる。
 本開示における酸基及び酸分解性基は、公知のものを使用でき、特に限定されない。具体的な酸基としては、カルボキシ基、及び、フェノール性水酸基が好ましく挙げられる。また、酸分解性基としては、酸により比較的分解し易い基(例えば、1-アルコキシアルキル基、テトラヒドロピラニル基、又は、テトラヒドロフラニル基等のアセタール型保護基)又は酸により比較的分解し難い基(例えば、tert-ブチル基等の第三級アルキル基、tert-ブチルオキシカルボニル基等の第三級アルキルオキシカルボニル基(炭酸エステル型保護基))が挙げられる。
 これらの中でも、酸分解性基としては、アセタールの形で保護された構造を有する基であることが好ましい。
 また、酸分解性基としては、導電パターンの形成に適用した場合における導電配線の線幅のバラツキが抑制される観点から、分子量が300以下の酸分解性基であることが好ましい。
 感光性樹脂層に含まれる重合体Xは、1種のみであっても、2種以上であってもよい。
-Structural unit A-
The polymer component preferably includes a polymer X having a structural unit A having an acid group protected with an acid-decomposable group. When the photosensitive resin layer contains the polymer X having the structural unit A, it can be an extremely sensitive chemical amplification positive type photosensitive resin layer.
Known acid groups and acid-decomposable groups in the present disclosure can be used, and are not particularly limited. Specific examples of the acid group preferably include a carboxy group and a phenolic hydroxyl group. The acid-decomposable group is a group that is relatively easily decomposed by an acid (for example, an acetal-type protecting group such as 1-alkoxyalkyl group, tetrahydropyranyl group, or tetrahydrofuranyl group) or an acid-decomposable group. And difficult groups (for example, tertiary alkyl groups such as tert-butyl group and tertiary alkyloxycarbonyl groups such as tert-butyloxycarbonyl group (carbonate-type protecting group)).
Among these, the acid-decomposable group is preferably a group having a structure protected in the form of an acetal.
In addition, the acid-decomposable group is preferably an acid-decomposable group having a molecular weight of 300 or less from the viewpoint of suppressing variations in the line width of the conductive wiring when applied to the formation of a conductive pattern.
The polymer X contained in the photosensitive resin layer may be one type or two or more types.
 酸分解性基で保護された酸基を有する構成単位Aは、感度及び解像度の観点から、下記式A1、式A2、又は式A3により表される構成単位であることが好ましい。 The structural unit A having an acid group protected with an acid-decomposable group is preferably a structural unit represented by the following formula A1, formula A2 or formula A3 from the viewpoint of sensitivity and resolution.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000027
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000027
 式A1中、R11及びR12はそれぞれ独立に、水素原子、アルキル基又はアリール基を表し、R11及びR12の少なくとも一方がアルキル基又はアリール基であり、R13はアルキル基又はアリール基を表し、R11又はR12と、R13とが連結して環状エーテルを形成してもよく、R14は水素原子又はメチル基を表し、Xは単結合又は二価の連結基を表し、R15は置換基を表し、nは0~4の整数を表す。
 式A2中、R21及びR22はそれぞれ独立に、水素原子、アルキル基又はアリール基を表し、R21及びR22の少なくとも一方がアルキル基又はアリール基であり、R23はアルキル基又はアリール基を表し、R21又はR22と、R23とが連結して環状エーテルを形成してもよく、R24はそれぞれ独立に、ヒドロキシ基、ハロゲン原子、アルキル基、アルコキシ基、アルケニル基、アリール基、アラルキル基、アルコキシカルボニル基、ヒドロキシアルキル基、アリールカルボニル基、アリールオキシカルボニル基又はシクロアルキル基を表し、mは0~3の整数を表す。
 式A3中、R31及びR32はそれぞれ独立に、水素原子、アルキル基又はアリール基を表し、R31及びR32の少なくとも一方がアルキル基又はアリール基であり、R33はアルキル基又はアリール基を表し、R31又はR32と、R33とが連結して環状エーテルを形成してもよく、R34は水素原子又はメチル基を表し、Xは単結合又は二価の連結基を表す。
In formula A1, R 11 and R 12 each independently represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group, at least one of R 11 and R 12 is an alkyl group or an aryl group, and R 13 is an alkyl group or an aryl group. R 11 or R 12 and R 13 may be linked to form a cyclic ether, R 14 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, and X 1 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group. , R 15 represents a substituent, and n represents an integer of 0 to 4.
In formula A2, R 21 and R 22 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group, at least one of R 21 and R 22 is an alkyl group or an aryl group, and R 23 is an alkyl group or an aryl group. R 21 or R 22 and R 23 may be linked to form a cyclic ether, and each R 24 independently represents a hydroxy group, a halogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, an alkenyl group, or an aryl group. Represents an aralkyl group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, a hydroxyalkyl group, an arylcarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group or a cycloalkyl group, and m represents an integer of 0 to 3.
In formula A3, R 31 and R 32 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group, at least one of R 31 and R 32 is an alkyl group or an aryl group, and R 33 is an alkyl group or an aryl group. R 31 or R 32 and R 33 may be linked to form a cyclic ether, R 34 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, and X 0 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group. .
 式A3中、R31又はR32がアルキル基の場合、炭素数は1~10のアルキル基が好ましい。R31又はR32がアリール基の場合、フェニル基が好ましい。R31及びR32は、それぞれ、水素原子又は炭素数1~4のアルキル基が好ましい。
 式A3中、R33は、アルキル基又はアリール基を表し、炭素数1~10のアルキル基が好ましく、炭素数1~6のアルキル基がより好ましい。
 また、R31~R33におけるアルキル基及びアリール基は、置換基を有していてもよい。
 式A3中、R31又はR32と、R33とが連結して環状エーテルを形成してもよく、R31又はR32と、R33とが連結して環状エーテルを形成することが好ましい。環状エーテルの環員数は特に制限はないが、5又は6であることが好ましく、5であることがより好ましい。
 式A3中、Xは単結合又はアリーレン基を表し、単結合が好ましい。アリーレン基は、置換基を有していてもよい。
 上記式A3で表される構成単位Aは、アセタール型酸分解性基で保護されたカルボキシ基を有する構成単位である。重合体Xが式A3で表される構成単位Aを含むことで、パターン形成時の感度に優れ、また、解像度がより優れる。
In formula A3, when R 31 or R 32 is an alkyl group, an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms is preferable. When R 31 or R 32 is an aryl group, a phenyl group is preferable. R 31 and R 32 are each preferably a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms.
In Formula A3, R 33 represents an alkyl group or an aryl group, preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, and more preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms.
Further, the alkyl group and aryl group in R 31 to R 33 may have a substituent.
In Formula A3, R 31 or R 32 and R 33 may be linked to form a cyclic ether, and R 31 or R 32 and R 33 are preferably linked to form a cyclic ether. The number of ring members of the cyclic ether is not particularly limited, but is preferably 5 or 6, and more preferably 5.
In Formula A3, X 0 represents a single bond or an arylene group, and a single bond is preferable. The arylene group may have a substituent.
The structural unit A represented by the formula A3 is a structural unit having a carboxy group protected with an acetal acid-decomposable group. When the polymer X contains the structural unit A represented by the formula A3, the sensitivity at the time of pattern formation is excellent, and the resolution is more excellent.
 式A3中、R34は水素原子又はメチル基を表し、重合体Xのガラス転移温度(Tg)をより低くし得るという観点から、水素原子であることが好ましい。
 より具体的には、重合体Xに含まれる構成単位Aの全量に対し、式A3におけるR34が水素原子である構成単位は20質量%以上であることが好ましい。
 なお、構成単位A中の、式A3におけるR34が水素原子である構成単位の含有量(含有割合:質量比)は、13C-核磁気共鳴スペクトル(NMR)測定から常法により算出されるピーク強度の強度比により確認することができる。
In the formula A3, R 34 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, and is preferably a hydrogen atom from the viewpoint that the glass transition temperature (Tg) of the polymer X can be further lowered.
More specifically, the structural unit in which R 34 in Formula A3 is a hydrogen atom is preferably 20% by mass or more based on the total amount of the structural unit A contained in the polymer X.
The content (content ratio: mass ratio) of the structural unit in which R 34 in formula A3 is a hydrogen atom in the structural unit A is calculated by a conventional method from 13 C-nuclear magnetic resonance spectrum (NMR) measurement. It can be confirmed by the intensity ratio of the peak intensity.
 また、式A1~式A3の好ましい態様としては、国際公開第2018/179640号の段落0044~段落0058を参照することができる。 Also, as preferred embodiments of the formulas A1 to A3, reference can be made to paragraphs 0044 to 0058 of International Publication No. 2018/179640.
 式A1~式A3において、酸分解性基は、感度の観点から、環状構造を有する基であることが好ましく、テトラヒドロフラン環又はテトラヒドロピラン環構造を有する基であるがより好ましく、テトラヒドロフラン環構造を有する基であることが更に好ましく、テトラヒドロフラニル基であることが特に好ましい。 In formulas A1 to A3, the acid-decomposable group is preferably a group having a cyclic structure, more preferably a tetrahydrofuran ring or a group having a tetrahydropyran ring structure, and more preferably a tetrahydrofuran ring structure from the viewpoint of sensitivity. It is more preferably a group, and particularly preferably a tetrahydrofuranyl group.
 重合体Xに含まれる構成単位Aは、1種であっても、2種以上であってもよい。
 重合体Xにおける構成単位Aの含有量は、重合体成分の全質量に対して、10質量%~70質量%であることが好ましく、15質量%~50質量%であることがより好ましく、20質量%~40質量%であることが更に好ましい。上記範囲であると、解像度がより向上する。
 重合体Xが2種以上の構成単位Aを含む場合、上記構成単位Aの含有量は、2種以上の構成単位Aの総含有量を表すものとする。
 重合体成分における構成単位Aの含有量(含有割合:質量比)は、13C-NMR測定から常法により算出されるピーク強度の強度比により確認することができる。
The structural unit A contained in the polymer X may be one type or two or more types.
The content of the structural unit A in the polymer X is preferably 10% by mass to 70% by mass, more preferably 15% by mass to 50% by mass, with respect to the total mass of the polymer component. More preferably, it is 40% by mass. If it is within the above range, the resolution is further improved.
When the polymer X includes two or more structural units A, the content of the structural unit A represents the total content of the two or more structural units A.
The content (content ratio: mass ratio) of the structural unit A in the polymer component can be confirmed by the intensity ratio of the peak intensity calculated by a conventional method from 13 C-NMR measurement.
-酸基を有する構成単位B-
 重合体Xは、酸基を有する構成単位B(単に「構成単位B」ともいう。)を含んでいてもよい。
 構成単位Bは、酸分解性基で保護されていない酸基、すなわち、保護基を有さない酸基を有する構成単位である。重合体Xが構成単位Bを含むことで、パターン形成時の感度が良好となり、パターン露光後の現像工程においてアルカリ性の現像液に溶けやすくなり、現像時間の短縮化を図ることができる。
 本明細書における酸基とは、pKaが12以下のプロトン解離性基を意味する。
 酸基のpKaは、感度向上の観点から、10以下が好ましく、6以下がより好ましい。また、酸基のpKaは、-5以上であることが好ましい。
 上記酸基としては、カルボキシ基、スルホンアミド基、ホスホン酸基、スルホ基、フェノール性水酸基、及び、スルホニルイミド基等が例示される。中でも、カルボキシ基又はフェノール性水酸基が好ましく、カルボキシ基がより好ましい。
-Structural unit B having an acid group-
The polymer X may include a structural unit B having an acid group (also simply referred to as “structural unit B”).
The structural unit B is a structural unit having an acid group that is not protected by an acid-decomposable group, that is, an acid group that does not have a protective group. When the polymer X contains the structural unit B, the sensitivity at the time of pattern formation becomes good, and the polymer X is easily dissolved in an alkaline developer in the development step after pattern exposure, and the development time can be shortened.
The acid group in this specification means a proton dissociable group having a pKa of 12 or less.
The pKa of the acid group is preferably 10 or less, more preferably 6 or less, from the viewpoint of improving sensitivity. The pKa of the acid group is preferably −5 or more.
Examples of the acid group include a carboxy group, a sulfonamide group, a phosphonic acid group, a sulfo group, a phenolic hydroxyl group, and a sulfonylimide group. Among these, a carboxy group or a phenolic hydroxyl group is preferable, and a carboxy group is more preferable.
 重合体Xに含まれる構成単位Bは、1種のみであっても、2種以上であってもよい。
 重合体Xにおける構成単位Bの含有量は、重合体成分の全質量に対して、0.01質量%~20質量%含むことが好ましく、0.01質量%~10質量%含むことがより好ましく、0.1質量%~5質量%含むことが更に好ましい。上記範囲であると、解像性がより良好となる。
 重合体Xが2種以上の構成単位Bを含む場合、上記構成単位Bの含有量は、2種以上の構成単位Bの総含有量を表すものとする。
 重合体Xにおける構成単位Bの含有量(含有割合:質量比)は、13C-NMR測定から常法により算出されるピーク強度の強度比により確認することができる。
The structural unit B contained in the polymer X may be only one type or two or more types.
The content of the structural unit B in the polymer X is preferably 0.01% by mass to 20% by mass and more preferably 0.01% by mass to 10% by mass with respect to the total mass of the polymer component. More preferably, the content is 0.1 mass% to 5 mass%. If it is in the above range, the resolution will be better.
When the polymer X includes two or more structural units B, the content of the structural unit B represents the total content of the two or more structural units B.
The content (content ratio: mass ratio) of the structural unit B in the polymer X can be confirmed by the intensity ratio of the peak intensity calculated by a conventional method from 13 C-NMR measurement.
-その他の構成単位C-
 重合体Xは、既述の構成単位A及び構成単位B以外の、その他の構成単位C(単に「構成単位C」ともいう。)を、本開示に係る感光性転写材料の効果を損なわない範囲で含むことが好ましい。
 構成単位Cを形成するモノマーとしては、特に制限はなく、例えば、スチレン類、(メタ)アクリル酸アルキルエステル、(メタ)アクリル酸環状アルキルエステル、(メタ)アクリル酸アリールエステル、不飽和ジカルボン酸ジエステル、ビシクロ不飽和化合物、マレイミド化合物、不飽和芳香族化合物、共役ジエン系化合物、不飽和モノカルボン酸、不飽和ジカルボン酸、不飽和ジカルボン酸無水物、脂肪族環式骨格を有する基、その他の不飽和化合物を挙げることができる。
 構成単位Cを用いて、種類及び含有量の少なくともいずれかを調整することで、重合体Xの諸特性を調整することができる。特に、構成単位Cを含むことで、重合体XのTg、酸価及び親疎水性を容易に調整することができる。
 重合体Xは、構成単位Cを1種のみ含んでもよく、2種以上含んでいてもよい。
-Other structural units C-
The range in which the polymer X does not impair the effects of the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure with respect to the other structural unit C (also simply referred to as “structural unit C”) other than the structural unit A and the structural unit B described above. It is preferable to contain.
There is no restriction | limiting in particular as a monomer which forms the structural unit C, For example, styrenes, (meth) acrylic acid alkyl ester, (meth) acrylic acid cyclic alkyl ester, (meth) acrylic acid aryl ester, unsaturated dicarboxylic acid diester , Bicyclounsaturated compounds, maleimide compounds, unsaturated aromatic compounds, conjugated diene compounds, unsaturated monocarboxylic acids, unsaturated dicarboxylic acids, unsaturated dicarboxylic acid anhydrides, groups having an aliphatic cyclic skeleton, other Mention may be made of saturated compounds.
Various characteristics of the polymer X can be adjusted by adjusting at least one of the kind and the content using the structural unit C. In particular, by including the structural unit C, the Tg, acid value, and hydrophilicity / hydrophobicity of the polymer X can be easily adjusted.
The polymer X may contain only 1 type of structural unit C, or may contain 2 or more types.
 構成単位Cは、具体的には、スチレン、α-メチルスチレン、アセトキシスチレン、メトキシスチレン、エトキシスチレン、クロロスチレン、ビニル安息香酸メチル、ビニル安息香酸エチル、(メタ)アクリル酸メチル、(メタ)アクリル酸エチル、(メタ)アクリル酸n-プロピル、(メタ)アクリル酸イソプロピル、(メタ)アクリル酸n-ブチル、(メタ)アクリル酸2-エチルヘキシル、(メタ)アクリル酸2-ヒドロキシエチル、(メタ)アクリル酸2-ヒドロキシプロピル、(メタ)アクリル酸ベンジル、(メタ)アクリル酸シクロペンチル、(メタ)アクリル酸シクロヘキシル、(メタ)アクリル酸イソボルニル、アクリロニトリル、又は、エチレングリコールモノアセトアセテートモノ(メタ)アクリレートなどを重合して形成される構成単位を挙げることができる。その他、特開2004-264623号公報の段落0021~段落0024に記載の化合物を挙げることができる。 Specifically, the structural unit C is styrene, α-methylstyrene, acetoxystyrene, methoxystyrene, ethoxystyrene, chlorostyrene, methyl vinylbenzoate, ethyl vinylbenzoate, methyl (meth) acrylate, (meth) acrylic. Ethyl acetate, n-propyl (meth) acrylate, isopropyl (meth) acrylate, n-butyl (meth) acrylate, 2-ethylhexyl (meth) acrylate, 2-hydroxyethyl (meth) acrylate, (meth) 2-hydroxypropyl acrylate, benzyl (meth) acrylate, cyclopentyl (meth) acrylate, cyclohexyl (meth) acrylate, isobornyl (meth) acrylate, acrylonitrile, ethylene glycol monoacetoacetate mono (meth) acrylate, etc. Polymerize Structure units formed can be exemplified. In addition, the compounds described in paragraphs 0021 to 0024 of JP-A No. 2004-264623 can be given.
 構成単位Cは、解像性の観点から、塩基性基を有する構成単位を含むことが好ましい。
 上記塩基性基としては、具体的には、脂肪族アミノ基、芳香族アミノ基、又は、含窒素複素芳香環基などの窒素原子を有する基が挙げられ、脂肪族アミノ基が好ましい。
 脂肪族アミノ基としては、第一級アミノ基、第二級アミノ基、又は、第三級アミノ基のいずれであってもよいが、解像性の観点から、第二級アミノ基、又は、第三級アミノ基が好ましい。
The structural unit C preferably includes a structural unit having a basic group from the viewpoint of resolution.
Specific examples of the basic group include groups having a nitrogen atom such as an aliphatic amino group, an aromatic amino group, or a nitrogen-containing heteroaromatic ring group, and an aliphatic amino group is preferable.
The aliphatic amino group may be a primary amino group, a secondary amino group, or a tertiary amino group, but from the viewpoint of resolution, a secondary amino group or Tertiary amino groups are preferred.
 塩基性基を有する構成単位を形成するモノマーとしては、具体的には、メタクリル酸1,2,2,6,6-ペンタメチル-4-ピペリジル、メタクリル酸2-(ジメチルアミノ)エチル、アクリル酸2,2,6,6-テトラメチル-4-ピペリジル、メタクリル酸2,2,6,6-テトラメチル-4-ピペリジル、アクリル酸2,2,6,6-テトラメチル-4-ピペリジル、メタクリル酸2-(ジエチルアミノ)エチル、アクリル酸2-(ジメチルアミノ)エチル、アクリル酸2-(ジエチルアミノ)エチル、メタクリル酸N-(3-ジメチルアミノ)プロピル、アクリル酸N-(3-ジメチルアミノ)プロピル、メタクリル酸N-(3-ジエチルアミノ)プロピル、アクリル酸N-(3-ジエチルアミノ)プロピル、メタクリル酸2-(ジイソプロピルアミノ)エチル、メタクリル酸2-モルホリノエチル、アクリル酸2-モルホリノエチル、N-[3-(ジメチルアミノ)プロピル]アクリルアミド、4-アミノスチレン、4-ビニルピリジン、2-ビニルピリジン、3-ビニルピリジン、1-ビニルイミダゾール、2-メチル-1-ビニルイミダゾール、1-アリルイミダゾール、1-ビニル-1,2,4-トリアゾール等が挙げられる。中でもメタクリル酸1,2,2,6,6-ペンタメチル-4-ピペリジルが好ましい。 Specific examples of the monomer that forms the structural unit having a basic group include 1,2,2,6,6-pentamethyl-4-piperidyl methacrylate, 2- (dimethylamino) ethyl methacrylate, acrylic acid 2 , 2,6,6-Tetramethyl-4-piperidyl, 2,2,6,6-tetramethyl-4-piperidyl methacrylate, 2,2,6,6-tetramethyl-4-piperidyl acrylate, methacrylic acid 2- (diethylamino) ethyl, 2- (dimethylamino) ethyl acrylate, 2- (diethylamino) ethyl acrylate, N- (3-dimethylamino) propyl methacrylate, N- (3-dimethylamino) propyl acrylate, N- (3-diethylamino) propyl methacrylate, N- (3-diethylamino) propyl acrylate, 2-methacrylic acid 2- Diisopropylamino) ethyl, 2-morpholinoethyl methacrylate, 2-morpholinoethyl acrylate, N- [3- (dimethylamino) propyl] acrylamide, 4-aminostyrene, 4-vinylpyridine, 2-vinylpyridine, 3-vinyl Examples include pyridine, 1-vinylimidazole, 2-methyl-1-vinylimidazole, 1-allylimidazole, 1-vinyl-1,2,4-triazole and the like. Of these, 1,2,2,6,6-pentamethyl-4-piperidyl methacrylate is preferred.
 また、構成単位Cとしては、芳香環を有する構成単位、又は、脂肪族環式骨格を有する構成単位が、得られる転写材料の電気特性を向上させる観点で好ましい。これら構成単位を形成するモノマーとして、具体的には、スチレン、α-メチルスチレン、ジシクロペンタニル(メタ)アクリレート、シクロペンチル(メタ)アクリレート、シクロヘキシル(メタ)アクリレート、イソボルニル(メタ)アクリレート、及び、ベンジル(メタ)アクリレート等が挙げられ、シクロヘキシル(メタ)アクリレートが好ましく用いられる。 Further, as the structural unit C, a structural unit having an aromatic ring or a structural unit having an aliphatic cyclic skeleton is preferable from the viewpoint of improving the electrical characteristics of the obtained transfer material. Specific examples of monomers that form these structural units include styrene, α-methylstyrene, dicyclopentanyl (meth) acrylate, cyclopentyl (meth) acrylate, cyclohexyl (meth) acrylate, isobornyl (meth) acrylate, and Examples thereof include benzyl (meth) acrylate, and cyclohexyl (meth) acrylate is preferably used.
 また、構成単位Cを形成するモノマーとしては、例えば、(メタ)アクリル酸アルキルエステルが、密着性の観点で好ましい。中でも、炭素数4~12のアルキル基を有する(メタ)アクリル酸アルキルエステルが密着性の観点でより好ましい。具体的には、(メタ)アクリル酸メチル、(メタ)アクリル酸エチル、(メタ)アクリル酸プロピル、(メタ)アクリル酸n-ブチル、及び、(メタ)アクリル酸2-エチルヘキシルが挙げられる。 Further, as the monomer forming the structural unit C, for example, (meth) acrylic acid alkyl ester is preferable from the viewpoint of adhesion. Among them, (meth) acrylic acid alkyl ester having an alkyl group having 4 to 12 carbon atoms is more preferable from the viewpoint of adhesion. Specific examples include methyl (meth) acrylate, ethyl (meth) acrylate, propyl (meth) acrylate, n-butyl (meth) acrylate, and 2-ethylhexyl (meth) acrylate.
 構成単位Cの含有量は、重合体成分の全質量に対し、90質量%以下が好ましく、85質量%以下がより好ましく、80質量%以下が更に好ましい。下限値としては、10質量%以上が好ましく、20質量%以上がより好ましい。上記範囲であると、解像度及び密着性がより向上する。
 重合体成分が2種以上の構成単位Cを含む場合、上記構成単位Cの含有量は、2種以上の構成単位Cの総含有量を表すものとする。
90 mass% or less is preferable with respect to the total mass of a polymer component, as for content of the structural unit C, 85 mass% or less is more preferable, and 80 mass% or less is still more preferable. As a lower limit, 10 mass% or more is preferable and 20 mass% or more is more preferable. Within the above range, the resolution and adhesion are further improved.
When the polymer component includes two or more structural units C, the content of the structural unit C represents the total content of the two or more structural units C.
 以下、本開示における重合体Xの好ましい例を挙げるが、本開示は以下の例示に限定されない。なお、下記例示化合物における構成単位の比率、重量平均分子量は、好ましい物性を得るために適宜選択される。 Hereinafter, although the preferable example of the polymer X in this indication is given, this indication is not limited to the following illustrations. In addition, the ratio of the structural unit and the weight average molecular weight in the following exemplary compounds are appropriately selected in order to obtain preferable physical properties.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000028
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000028
-重合体Xのガラス転移温度:Tg-
 本開示における重合体Xのガラス転移温度(Tg)は、転写性の観点から、90℃以下であることが好ましく、20℃以上60℃以下であることがより好ましく、30℃以上50℃以下であることが更に好ましい。
-Glass transition temperature of polymer X: Tg-
From the viewpoint of transferability, the glass transition temperature (Tg) of the polymer X in the present disclosure is preferably 90 ° C. or lower, more preferably 20 ° C. or higher and 60 ° C. or lower, and 30 ° C. or higher and 50 ° C. or lower. More preferably it is.
 本開示における重合体のTgを、既述の好ましい範囲に調整する方法としては、例えば、目的とする重合体の各構成単位の単独重合体のTgと各構成単位の質量比より、FOX式を指針にして、目的とする重合体のTgを制御することが可能である。
 FOX式について、以下に説明する。
 重合体に含まれる第1の構成単位の単独重合体のTgをTg1、第1の構成単位の共重合体における質量分率をW1とし、第2の構成単位の単独重合体のTgをTg2とし、第2の構成単位の共重合体における質量分率をW2としたときに、第1の構成単位と第2の構成単位とを含む共重合体のTg0(K)は、以下の式にしたがって推定することが可能である。
 FOX式:1/Tg0=(W1/Tg1)+(W2/Tg2)
 既述のFOX式を用いて、共重合体に含まれる各構成単位の種類と質量分率を調整して、所望のTgを有する共重合体を得ることができる。
 また、重合体の重量平均分子量を調整することにより、重合体のTgを調整することも可能である。
As a method for adjusting the Tg of the polymer in the present disclosure to the above-described preferable range, for example, the FOX formula can be calculated from the Tg of the homopolymer of each constituent unit of the target polymer and the mass ratio of each constituent unit. Using the guideline, it is possible to control the Tg of the target polymer.
The FOX formula will be described below.
Tg of the homopolymer of the first structural unit contained in the polymer is Tg1, the mass fraction in the copolymer of the first structural unit is W1, and the Tg of the homopolymer of the second structural unit is Tg2. When the mass fraction in the copolymer of the second structural unit is W2, the Tg0 (K) of the copolymer containing the first structural unit and the second structural unit is in accordance with the following formula: It is possible to estimate.
FOX formula: 1 / Tg0 = (W1 / Tg1) + (W2 / Tg2)
A copolymer having a desired Tg can be obtained by adjusting the type and mass fraction of each constituent unit contained in the copolymer using the FOX formula described above.
It is also possible to adjust the Tg of the polymer by adjusting the weight average molecular weight of the polymer.
-重合体Xの酸価-
 重合体Xの酸価は、解像性の観点から、0mgKOH/g以上50mgKOH/g以下であることが好ましく、0mgKOH/g以上20mgKOH/g以下であることがより好ましく、0mgKOH/g以上10mgKOH/g以下であることが更に好ましい。
 また、重合体Xの酸価は、保存安定性、及び、感光性樹脂層と中間層との密着性の観点から、10mgKOH/g以下であることが好ましく、3mgKOH/g以下であることがより好ましい。
-Acid value of polymer X-
The acid value of the polymer X is preferably from 0 mgKOH / g to 50 mgKOH / g, more preferably from 0 mgKOH / g to 20 mgKOH / g, and more preferably from 0 mgKOH / g to 10 mgKOH / g from the viewpoint of resolution. More preferably, it is g or less.
In addition, the acid value of the polymer X is preferably 10 mgKOH / g or less, more preferably 3 mgKOH / g or less, from the viewpoint of storage stability and adhesion between the photosensitive resin layer and the intermediate layer. preferable.
 本開示における重合体の酸価は、重合体1gあたりの酸性成分を中和するのに要する水酸化カリウムの質量を表したものである。具体的には、測定サンプルをテトラヒドロフラン/水=9/1(体積比)混合溶媒に溶解し、電位差滴定装置(商品名:AT-510、京都電子工業(株)製)を用いて、得られた溶液を25℃において、0.1mol/L水酸化ナトリウム水溶液で中和滴定する。滴定pH曲線の変曲点を滴定終点として、次式により酸価を算出する。
  A=56.11×Vs×0.1×f/w
 A:酸価(mgKOH/g)
 Vs:滴定に要した0.1mol/L水酸化ナトリウム水溶液の使用量(mL)
 f:0.1mol/L水酸化ナトリウム水溶液の力価
 w:測定サンプルの質量(g)(固形分換算)
The acid value of the polymer in the present disclosure represents the mass of potassium hydroxide required to neutralize the acidic component per gram of polymer. Specifically, the measurement sample was dissolved in a tetrahydrofuran / water = 9/1 (volume ratio) mixed solvent and obtained using a potentiometric titrator (trade name: AT-510, manufactured by Kyoto Electronics Industry Co., Ltd.). The solution was neutralized and titrated with a 0.1 mol / L aqueous sodium hydroxide solution at 25 ° C. The acid value is calculated by the following formula using the inflection point of the titration pH curve as the titration end point.
A = 56.11 × Vs × 0.1 × f / w
A: Acid value (mgKOH / g)
Vs: Amount of 0.1 mol / L sodium hydroxide aqueous solution required for titration (mL)
f: Potency of 0.1 mol / L sodium hydroxide aqueous solution w: Mass (g) of measurement sample (in terms of solid content)
-重合体Xの分子量:Mw-
 重合体Xの分子量は、ポリスチレン換算重量平均分子量で、60,000以下であることが好ましい。重合体Xの重量平均分子量が60,000以下であることで、転写材料を転写する際において低温(例えば130℃以下)での転写を実現することができる。
 また、重合体Xの重量平均分子量は、2,000~60,000であることが好ましく、3,000~50,000であることがより好ましい。
 重合体Xの数平均分子量と重量平均分子量との比(分散度)は、1.0~5.0が好ましく、1.05~3.5がより好ましい。
-Molecular weight of polymer X: Mw-
The molecular weight of the polymer X is preferably 60,000 or less in terms of polystyrene-equivalent weight average molecular weight. When the weight average molecular weight of the polymer X is 60,000 or less, transfer at a low temperature (for example, 130 ° C. or less) can be realized when the transfer material is transferred.
The weight average molecular weight of the polymer X is preferably 2,000 to 60,000, and more preferably 3,000 to 50,000.
The ratio (dispersion degree) between the number average molecular weight and the weight average molecular weight of the polymer X is preferably 1.0 to 5.0, more preferably 1.05 to 3.5.
 なお、本開示における重合体の重量平均分子量は、GPC(ゲルパーミエーションクロマトグラフィー)によって測定することができ、測定装置としては、様々な市販の装置を用いることができ、装置の内容、及び、測定技術は公知のものを用いることができる。
 ゲルパーミエーションクロマトグラフィ(GPC)による重量平均分子量の測定は、測定装置として、HLC(登録商標)-8220GPC(東ソー(株)製)を用い、カラムとして、TSKgel(登録商標)Super HZM-M(4.6mmID×15cm、東ソー(株)製)、Super HZ4000(4.6mmID×15cm、東ソー(株)製)、Super HZ3000(4.6mmID×15cm、東ソー(株)製)、Super HZ2000(4.6mmID×15cm、東ソー(株)製)をそれぞれ1本、直列に連結したものを用い、溶離液として、THF(テトラヒドロフラン)を用いることができる。
 また、測定条件としては、試料濃度を0.2質量%、流速を0.35ml/min、サンプル注入量を10μL、及び測定温度を40℃とし、示差屈折率(RI)検出器を用いて行うことができる。
 検量線は、東ソー(株)製の「標準試料TSK standard,polystyrene」:「F-40」、「F-20」、「F-4」、「F-1」、「A-5000」、「A-2500」及び「A-1000」の7サンプルのいずれかを用いて作製できる。
In addition, the weight average molecular weight of the polymer in the present disclosure can be measured by GPC (gel permeation chromatography), and as a measuring device, various commercially available devices can be used. Known measurement techniques can be used.
For the measurement of the weight average molecular weight by gel permeation chromatography (GPC), HLC (registered trademark) -8220GPC (manufactured by Tosoh Corp.) was used as a measuring device, and TSKgel (registered trademark) Super HZM-M (4 .6 mm ID × 15 cm, manufactured by Tosoh Corp.), Super HZ4000 (4.6 mm ID × 15 cm, manufactured by Tosoh Corp.), Super HZ3000 (4.6 mm ID × 15 cm, manufactured by Tosoh Corp.), Super HZ2000 (4.6 mm ID) × 15 cm, manufactured by Tosoh Corporation), one each connected in series, and THF (tetrahydrofuran) can be used as an eluent.
Further, the measurement conditions are as follows: the sample concentration is 0.2% by mass, the flow rate is 0.35 ml / min, the sample injection amount is 10 μL, the measurement temperature is 40 ° C., and a differential refractive index (RI) detector is used. be able to.
The calibration curve is “Standard sample TSK standard, polystyrene” manufactured by Tosoh Corporation: “F-40”, “F-20”, “F-4”, “F-1”, “A-5000”, “ It can be produced using any of the seven samples of “A-2500” and “A-1000”.
-重合体Xの製造方法-
 重合体Xの製造方法(合成法)は特に限定されないが、一例を挙げると、構成単位Aを形成するためのモノマー、更に必要に応じて、構成単位Bを形成するためのモノマー及び構成単位Cを形成するためのモノマーを含む有機溶剤中、重合開始剤を用いて重合することにより合成することができる。また、いわゆる高分子反応で合成することもできる。
-Production Method of Polymer X-
The production method (synthetic method) of the polymer X is not particularly limited. For example, the monomer for forming the structural unit A, and the monomer for forming the structural unit B and the structural unit C, if necessary. It can synthesize | combine by superposing | polymerizing using the polymerization initiator in the organic solvent containing the monomer for forming. It can also be synthesized by a so-called polymer reaction.
-重合体成分又は重合体Xの含有量-
 本開示における感光性樹脂層は、密着性の観点から、感光性樹脂層の全質量に対し、上記重合体成分を50質量%~99.9質量%の割合で含むことが好ましく、70質量%~98質量%の割合で含むことがより好ましい。
 また、感光性樹脂層は、密着性の観点から、感光性樹脂層の全質量に対し、重合体Xを50質量%~99.9質量%の割合で含むことが好ましく、70質量%~98質量%の割合で含むことがより好ましい。
-Content of polymer component or polymer X-
The photosensitive resin layer in the present disclosure preferably contains the polymer component in a proportion of 50% by mass to 99.9% by mass with respect to the total mass of the photosensitive resin layer from the viewpoint of adhesion, and is 70% by mass. More preferably, it is contained in a proportion of -98% by mass.
In addition, from the viewpoint of adhesion, the photosensitive resin layer preferably contains the polymer X in a proportion of 50% by mass to 99.9% by mass with respect to the total mass of the photosensitive resin layer, and is preferably 70% by mass to 98%. More preferably, it is contained in a proportion by mass.
〔他の重合体〕
 感光性樹脂層は、重合体成分として、重合体Xに加え、本開示に係る感光性転写材料の効果を損なわない範囲において、酸分解性基で保護された酸基を有する構成単位を含まない重合体(「他の重合体」ともいう。)を更に含んでいてもよい。
 本開示における重合体成分は、特に述べない限り、重合体Xに加え、必要に応じて添加される他の重合体を含めたものを意味するものとする。なお、後述する架橋剤、分散剤及び界面活性剤に該当する化合物は、高分子化合物であっても、重合体成分に含まないものとする。
 感光性樹脂層が他の重合体を含む場合、他の重合体の含有量は、全重合体成分中、50質量%以下であることが好ましく、30質量%以下であることがより好ましく、20質量%以下であることが更に好ましい。
[Other polymers]
The photosensitive resin layer does not contain a constituent unit having an acid group protected with an acid-decomposable group as long as the polymer component does not impair the effect of the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure in addition to the polymer X. It may further contain a polymer (also referred to as “other polymer”).
Unless otherwise specified, the polymer component in the present disclosure means a polymer including other polymers added in addition to the polymer X. In addition, even if it is a high molecular compound, the compound applicable to the crosslinking agent, a dispersing agent, and surfactant mentioned later shall not be contained in a polymer component.
When the photosensitive resin layer contains another polymer, the content of the other polymer is preferably 50% by mass or less, more preferably 30% by mass or less in the total polymer component, More preferably, it is at most mass%.
 感光性樹脂層は、重合体Xに加え、他の重合体を1種類のみ含んでいてもよいし、2種類以上含んでいてもよい。
 他の重合体として、例えばポリヒドロキシスチレンを用いることができ、市販されている、SMA 1000P、SMA 2000P、SMA 3000P、SMA 1440F、SMA 17352P、SMA 2625P、及び、SMA 3840F(以上、サートマー社製)、ARUFON UC-3000、ARUFON UC-3510、ARUFON UC-3900、ARUFON UC-3910、ARUFON UC-3920、及び、ARUFON UC-3080(以上、東亞合成(株)製)、並びに、Joncryl 690、Joncryl 678、Joncryl 67、及び、Joncryl 586(以上、BASF社製)等を用いることもできる。
In addition to the polymer X, the photosensitive resin layer may contain only one type of other polymer, or may contain two or more types.
As other polymers, for example, polyhydroxystyrene can be used, which are commercially available, such as SMA 1000P, SMA 2000P, SMA 3000P, SMA 1440F, SMA 17352P, SMA 2625P, and SMA 3840F (above, manufactured by Sartomer). , ARUFON UC-3000, ARUFON UC-3510, ARUFON UC-3900, ARUFON UC-3910, ARUFON UC-3920, and ARUFON UC-3080 (above, manufactured by Toagosei Co., Ltd.), Joncryl 690, Joncryl 6 Joncryl 67, Joncryl 586 (manufactured by BASF) or the like can also be used.
〔光酸発生剤〕
 感光性樹脂層は、光酸発生剤を含むことが好ましい。
 本開示で使用される光酸発生剤としては、紫外線、遠紫外線、X線、電子線等の活性光線を照射することにより酸を発生することができる化合物である。
 本開示で使用される光酸発生剤としては、波長300nm以上、好ましくは波長300nm~450nmの活性光線に感応し、酸を発生する化合物が好ましいが、その化学構造は制限されない。また、波長300nm以上の活性光線に直接感応しない光酸発生剤についても、増感剤と併用することによって波長300nm以上の活性光線に感応し、酸を発生する化合物であれば、増感剤と組み合わせて好ましく用いることができる。
 本開示で使用される光酸発生剤としては、pKaが4以下の酸を発生する光酸発生剤が好ましく、pKaが3以下の酸を発生する光酸発生剤がより好ましく、pKaが2以下の酸を発生する光酸発生剤が特に好ましい。pKaの下限値は特に定めないが、例えば、-10.0以上であることが好ましい。
[Photoacid generator]
It is preferable that the photosensitive resin layer contains a photoacid generator.
The photoacid generator used in the present disclosure is a compound capable of generating an acid by irradiating active rays such as ultraviolet rays, far ultraviolet rays, X-rays, and electron beams.
The photoacid generator used in the present disclosure is preferably a compound that generates an acid in response to an actinic ray having a wavelength of 300 nm or more, preferably 300 nm to 450 nm, but its chemical structure is not limited. Further, a photoacid generator that is not directly sensitive to an actinic ray having a wavelength of 300 nm or more can also be used as a sensitizer if it is a compound that reacts with an actinic ray having a wavelength of 300 nm or more and generates an acid when used in combination with a sensitizer. It can be preferably used in combination.
The photoacid generator used in the present disclosure is preferably a photoacid generator that generates an acid having a pKa of 4 or less, more preferably a photoacid generator that generates an acid having a pKa of 3 or less, and a pKa of 2 or less. A photoacid generator that generates an acid is particularly preferable. The lower limit value of pKa is not particularly defined, but is preferably −10.0 or more, for example.
 光酸発生剤としては、イオン性光酸発生剤及び非イオン性光酸発生剤を挙げることができる。
 イオン性光酸発生剤の例として、ジアリールヨードニウム塩類及びトリアリールスルホニウム塩類等のオニウム塩化合物、第四級アンモニウム塩類等を挙げることができる。これらのうち、オニウム塩化合物が好ましく、トリアリールスルホニウム塩類及びジアリールヨードニウム塩類が特に好ましい。
 イオン性光酸発生剤としては、特開2014-85643号公報の段落0114~段落0133に記載のイオン性光酸発生剤も好ましく用いることができる。
 非イオン性光酸発生剤の例としては、トリクロロメチル-s-トリアジン類、ジアゾメタン化合物、イミドスルホネート化合物、及び、オキシムスルホネート化合物などを挙げることができる。これらの中でも、感度、解像度、及び、密着性の観点から、光酸発生剤がオキシムスルホネート化合物であることが好ましい。トリクロロメチル-s-トリアジン類、ジアゾメタン化合物及びイミドスルホネート化合物の具体例としては、特開2011-221494号公報の段落0083~段落0088に記載の化合物が例示できる。
Examples of the photoacid generator include an ionic photoacid generator and a nonionic photoacid generator.
Examples of the ionic photoacid generator include onium salt compounds such as diaryliodonium salts and triarylsulfonium salts, quaternary ammonium salts, and the like. Of these, onium salt compounds are preferable, and triarylsulfonium salts and diaryliodonium salts are particularly preferable.
As the ionic photoacid generator, ionic photoacid generators described in paragraphs 0114 to 0133 of JP 2014-85643 A can also be preferably used.
Examples of nonionic photoacid generators include trichloromethyl-s-triazines, diazomethane compounds, imidosulfonate compounds, and oxime sulfonate compounds. Among these, the photoacid generator is preferably an oxime sulfonate compound from the viewpoints of sensitivity, resolution, and adhesion. Specific examples of the trichloromethyl-s-triazines, diazomethane compounds, and imide sulfonate compounds include the compounds described in paragraphs 0083 to 0088 of JP2011-221494A.
 オキシムスルホネート化合物としては、国際公開第2018/179640号の段落0084~段落0088に記載されたものを好適に用いることができる。 As the oxime sulfonate compound, those described in paragraphs 0084 to 0088 of International Publication No. 2018/179640 can be suitably used.
 光酸発生剤としては、感度及び解像度の観点から、オニウム塩化合物、及び、オキシムスルホネート化合物よりなる群から選ばれた少なくとも1種の化合物を含むことが好ましく、オキシムスルホネート化合物を含むことがより好ましい。
 また、好ましい光酸発生剤として、例えば、以下の構造の光酸発生剤が挙げられる。
The photoacid generator preferably includes at least one compound selected from the group consisting of an onium salt compound and an oxime sulfonate compound, and more preferably includes an oxime sulfonate compound from the viewpoint of sensitivity and resolution. .
Moreover, as a preferable photoacid generator, the photoacid generator of the following structures is mentioned, for example.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000029
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000029
 感光性樹脂層は、光酸発生剤を、1種単独で含んでいてもよいし、2種以上を含んでいてもよい。
 感光性樹脂層における光酸発生剤の含有量は、感度及び解像度の観点から、感光性樹脂層の全質量に対して、0.1質量%~10質量%であることが好ましく、0.5質量%~5質量%であることがより好ましい。
The photosensitive resin layer may contain 1 type of photo-acid generators individually, and may contain 2 or more types.
The content of the photoacid generator in the photosensitive resin layer is preferably 0.1% by mass to 10% by mass with respect to the total mass of the photosensitive resin layer from the viewpoint of sensitivity and resolution. More preferably, the content is 5% by mass to 5% by mass.
〔その他の添加剤〕
 本開示における感光性樹脂層は、重合体X、光酸発生剤及び溶剤に加え、必要に応じて、その他の添加剤を含むことができる。
 その他の添加剤としては、公知のものを用いることができ、例えば、可塑剤、増感剤、ヘテロ環状化合物、アルコキシシラン化合物、塩基性化合物、防錆剤、界面活性剤等が挙げられる。
 可塑剤、増感剤、ヘテロ環状化合物及びアルコキシシラン化合物としては、国際公開第2018/179640号の段落0097~段落0119に記載されたものが挙げられる。
 更に、本開示に係る感光性転写材料における感光性樹脂層は、溶剤を含んでいてもよい。溶剤を含む感光性樹脂組成物により感光性樹脂層を形成した場合、溶剤が残留することもある。
 感光性樹脂層における溶剤の含有量は、感光性樹脂層の全質量に対し、5質量%以下であることが好ましく、2質量%以下であることがより好ましく、1質量%以下であることが更に好ましい。
[Other additives]
The photosensitive resin layer in the present disclosure may contain other additives as necessary in addition to the polymer X, the photoacid generator, and the solvent.
As other additives, known ones can be used, and examples thereof include a plasticizer, a sensitizer, a heterocyclic compound, an alkoxysilane compound, a basic compound, a rust inhibitor, and a surfactant.
Examples of the plasticizer, sensitizer, heterocyclic compound, and alkoxysilane compound include those described in paragraphs 0097 to 0119 of WO2018 / 179640.
Furthermore, the photosensitive resin layer in the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure may contain a solvent. When the photosensitive resin layer is formed from a photosensitive resin composition containing a solvent, the solvent may remain.
The content of the solvent in the photosensitive resin layer is preferably 5% by mass or less, more preferably 2% by mass or less, and more preferably 1% by mass or less with respect to the total mass of the photosensitive resin layer. Further preferred.
-塩基性化合物-
 感光性樹脂層は、塩基性化合物を更に含むことが好ましい。
 塩基性化合物としては、化学増幅レジストで用いられる塩基性化合物の中から任意に選択して使用することができる。例えば、脂肪族アミン、芳香族アミン、複素環式アミン、第四級アンモニウムヒドロキシド、及び、カルボン酸の第四級アンモニウム塩等が挙げられる。これらの具体例としては、特開2011-221494号公報の段落0204~段落0207に記載の化合物が挙げられ、これらの内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。
 また、塩基性化合物としては、N-シクロヘキシル-N’-[2-(4-モルホリニル)エチル]チオ尿素(CMTU)を好適に用いることができる。また、CMTUの市販品としては、東洋化成工業(株)製のものが挙げられる。
-Basic compounds-
It is preferable that the photosensitive resin layer further contains a basic compound.
The basic compound can be arbitrarily selected from basic compounds used in chemically amplified resists. Examples thereof include aliphatic amines, aromatic amines, heterocyclic amines, quaternary ammonium hydroxides, and quaternary ammonium salts of carboxylic acids. Specific examples thereof include compounds described in JP-A-2011-212494, paragraphs 0204 to 0207, the contents of which are incorporated herein.
As the basic compound, N-cyclohexyl-N ′-[2- (4-morpholinyl) ethyl] thiourea (CMTU) can be preferably used. Moreover, as a commercial item of CMTU, the thing by Toyo Kasei Kogyo Co., Ltd. is mentioned.
 塩基性化合物としては、導電パターンの形成に適用した場合における導電配線の直線性の観点からは、ベンゾトリアゾール化合物が好ましい。
 ベンゾトリアゾール化合物としては、ベンゾトリアゾール骨格を有する化合物であれば制限されず、公知のベンゾトリアゾール化合物を用いることができる。
 ベンゾトリアゾール化合物としては、例えば、1,2,3-ベンゾトリアゾール、1-[N,N-ビス(2-エチルヘキシル)アミノメチル]ベンゾトリアゾール、5-カルボキシベンゾトリアゾール、1-(ヒドロキシメチル)-1H-ベンゾトリアゾール、1-アセチル-1H-ベンゾトリアゾール、1-アミノベンゾトリアゾール、9-(1H-ベンゾトリアゾール-1-イルメチル)-9H-カルバゾール、1-クロロ-1H-ベンゾトリアゾール、1-(2-ピリジニル)ベンゾトリアゾール、1-ヒドロキシベンゾトリアゾール、1-メチルベンゾトリアゾール、1-エチルベンゾトリアゾール、1-(1’-ヒドロキシエチル)ベンゾトリアゾール、1-(2’-ヒドロキシエチル)ベンゾトリアゾール、1-プロピルベンゾトリアゾール、1-(1’-ヒドロキシプロピル)ベンゾトリアゾール、1-(2’-ヒドロキシプロピル)ベンゾトリアゾール、1-(3’-ヒドロキシプロピル)ベンゾトリアゾール、4-ヒドロキシ-1H-ベンゾトリアゾール、5-メチル-1H-ベンゾトリアゾール、メチルベンゾトリアゾール-5-カルボキシレート、エチルベンゾトリアゾール-5-カルボキシレート、t-ブチル-ベンゾトリアゾール-5-カルボキシレート、シクロペンチルエチル-ベンゾトリアゾール-5-カルボキシレート、1H-ベンゾトリアゾール-1-アセトニトリル、1H-ベンゾトリアゾール-1-カルボキシアルデヒド、2-メチル-2H-ベンゾトリアゾール、2-エチル-2H-ベンゾトリアゾールなどが挙げられる。
As the basic compound, a benzotriazole compound is preferable from the viewpoint of linearity of the conductive wiring when applied to the formation of a conductive pattern.
The benzotriazole compound is not limited as long as it is a compound having a benzotriazole skeleton, and a known benzotriazole compound can be used.
Examples of the benzotriazole compound include 1,2,3-benzotriazole, 1- [N, N-bis (2-ethylhexyl) aminomethyl] benzotriazole, 5-carboxybenzotriazole, 1- (hydroxymethyl) -1H. -Benzotriazole, 1-acetyl-1H-benzotriazole, 1-aminobenzotriazole, 9- (1H-benzotriazol-1-ylmethyl) -9H-carbazole, 1-chloro-1H-benzotriazole, 1- (2- Pyridinyl) benzotriazole, 1-hydroxybenzotriazole, 1-methylbenzotriazole, 1-ethylbenzotriazole, 1- (1′-hydroxyethyl) benzotriazole, 1- (2′-hydroxyethyl) benzotriazole, 1-propyl Benzoto Azole, 1- (1′-hydroxypropyl) benzotriazole, 1- (2′-hydroxypropyl) benzotriazole, 1- (3′-hydroxypropyl) benzotriazole, 4-hydroxy-1H-benzotriazole, 5-methyl -1H-benzotriazole, methylbenzotriazole-5-carboxylate, ethylbenzotriazole-5-carboxylate, t-butyl-benzotriazole-5-carboxylate, cyclopentylethyl-benzotriazole-5-carboxylate, 1H-benzo Examples include triazole-1-acetonitrile, 1H-benzotriazole-1-carboxaldehyde, 2-methyl-2H-benzotriazole, 2-ethyl-2H-benzotriazole.
 感光性樹脂層は、塩基性化合物を、1種単独で含んでいてもよいし、2種以上を含んでいてもよい。
 塩基性化合物の含有量は、感光性樹脂層の全質量に対して、0.001質量%~5質量%であることが好ましく、0.005質量%~3質量%であることがより好ましい。
The photosensitive resin layer may contain one type of basic compound or two or more types.
The content of the basic compound is preferably 0.001% by mass to 5% by mass and more preferably 0.005% by mass to 3% by mass with respect to the total mass of the photosensitive resin layer.
-界面活性剤-
 感光性樹脂層は、厚さ均一性の観点から界面活性剤を含有することが好ましい。
 界面活性剤としては、アニオン性、カチオン性、ノニオン性(非イオン性)、及び、両性界面活性剤が挙げられる。好ましい界面活性剤はノニオン性界面活性剤である。
 ノニオン性界面活性剤の例としては、ポリオキシエチレン高級アルキルエーテル類、ポリオキシエチレン高級アルキルフェニルエーテル類、ポリオキシエチレングリコールの高級脂肪酸ジエステル類、シリコーン系、フッ素系界面活性剤を挙げることができる。
-Surfactant-
It is preferable that the photosensitive resin layer contains a surfactant from the viewpoint of thickness uniformity.
Examples of the surfactant include anionic, cationic, nonionic (nonionic), and amphoteric surfactants. A preferred surfactant is a nonionic surfactant.
Examples of nonionic surfactants include polyoxyethylene higher alkyl ethers, polyoxyethylene higher alkyl phenyl ethers, higher fatty acid diesters of polyoxyethylene glycol, silicone-based and fluorine-based surfactants. .
 界面活性剤としては、例えば、国際公開第2018/179640号の段落0120~段落0125に記載の界面活性剤を用いることができる。
 また、界面活性剤の市販品としては、例えば、メガファックF-552又はF-554(以上、DIC(株)製)を用いることができる。
 その他、特許第4502784号公報の段落0017、特開2009-237362号公報の段落0060~段落0071に記載の界面活性剤も用いることができる。
As the surfactant, for example, the surfactants described in paragraphs 0120 to 0125 of WO2018 / 179640 can be used.
Further, as a commercially available surfactant, for example, Megafac F-552 or F-554 (above, manufactured by DIC Corporation) can be used.
In addition, surfactants described in Japanese Patent No. 4502784, paragraph 0017 and Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-237362, paragraphs 0060 to 0071 can also be used.
 感光性樹脂層は、界面活性剤を、1種単独で含んでいてもよいし、2種以上を含んでいてもよい。
 界面活性剤の含有量は、感光性樹脂層の全質量に対して、0.001質量%~10質量%であることが好ましく、0.01質量%~3質量%であることがより好ましい。
The photosensitive resin layer may contain one type of surfactant, or two or more types.
The content of the surfactant is preferably 0.001% by mass to 10% by mass and more preferably 0.01% by mass to 3% by mass with respect to the total mass of the photosensitive resin layer.
 また、本開示における感光性樹脂層には、その他の添加剤として、金属酸化物粒子、酸化防止剤、分散剤、酸増殖剤、現像促進剤、導電性繊維、着色剤、熱ラジカル重合開始剤、熱酸発生剤、紫外線吸収剤、増粘剤、架橋剤、及び、有機又は無機の沈殿防止剤などの公知の添加剤を更に加えることができる。
 これらの成分の好ましい態様については特開2014-85643号公報の段落0165~段落0184にそれぞれ記載があり、この公報の内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。
Further, in the photosensitive resin layer in the present disclosure, as other additives, metal oxide particles, an antioxidant, a dispersant, an acid proliferation agent, a development accelerator, a conductive fiber, a colorant, a thermal radical polymerization initiator Further, known additives such as a thermal acid generator, an ultraviolet absorber, a thickener, a crosslinking agent, and an organic or inorganic suspending agent can be further added.
Preferred embodiments of these components are described in paragraphs 0165 to 0184 of JP-A-2014-85643, respectively, and the contents of this publication are incorporated herein.
<<感光性樹脂層の平均厚さ>>
 感光性樹脂層の平均厚さは、0.5μm~20μmが好ましい。感光性樹脂層の厚みが20μm以下であるとパターンの解像度がより優れ、0.5μm以上であるとパターン直線性の観点から好ましい。
 また、感光性樹脂層の平均厚さとしては、0.8μm~15μmがより好ましく、1.0μm~10μmが特に好ましい。
 本開示における各層の平均厚さの測定方法は、転写材料の面方向に対し垂直な方向の断面を走査型電子顕微鏡(SEM)により観察し、測定するものとする。また、平均厚さは、厚さを10点以上測定し、その平均値とする。
<< Average thickness of photosensitive resin layer >>
The average thickness of the photosensitive resin layer is preferably 0.5 μm to 20 μm. When the thickness of the photosensitive resin layer is 20 μm or less, the pattern resolution is more excellent, and when it is 0.5 μm or more, it is preferable from the viewpoint of pattern linearity.
In addition, the average thickness of the photosensitive resin layer is more preferably 0.8 μm to 15 μm, and particularly preferably 1.0 μm to 10 μm.
In the present disclosure, the average thickness of each layer is measured by observing a cross section in a direction perpendicular to the surface direction of the transfer material with a scanning electron microscope (SEM). The average thickness is the average value of 10 or more thicknesses measured.
<<感光性樹脂層の形成方法>>
 本開示における感光性樹脂層は、感光性樹脂層の形成に用いる成分と、溶剤とを含有する感光性樹脂組成物を調製し、塗布及び乾燥して形成することができる。各成分を、それぞれ予め溶剤に溶解させた溶液とした後、得られた溶液を所定の割合で混合して組成物を調製することもできる。以上の如くして調製した組成物は、例えば、孔径0.2μm~30μmのフィルター等を用いてろ過を行ってもよい。
 感光性樹脂組成物を仮支持体又はカバーフィルム上に塗布し、乾燥させることで、本開示における感光性樹脂層を形成することができる。
 塗布方法は特に限定されず、スリット塗布、スピン塗布、カーテン塗布、インクジェット塗布などの公知の方法で塗布することができる。
 また、仮支持体又はカバーフィルム上に後述の中間層又はその他の層を形成した上に、感光性樹脂層を形成することもできる。
<< Method for Forming Photosensitive Resin Layer >>
The photosensitive resin layer in the present disclosure can be formed by preparing a photosensitive resin composition containing a component used for forming the photosensitive resin layer and a solvent, and applying and drying the composition. It is also possible to prepare a composition by preparing each component in a solution previously dissolved in a solvent and then mixing the resulting solution at a predetermined ratio. The composition prepared as described above may be filtered using, for example, a filter having a pore size of 0.2 μm to 30 μm.
The photosensitive resin layer in this indication can be formed by apply | coating the photosensitive resin composition on a temporary support body or a cover film, and making it dry.
The coating method is not particularly limited, and the coating can be performed by a known method such as slit coating, spin coating, curtain coating, and inkjet coating.
Moreover, after forming the below-mentioned intermediate | middle layer or other layer on a temporary support body or a cover film, the photosensitive resin layer can also be formed.
〔感光性樹脂組成物〕
 感光性樹脂組成物は、感光性樹脂層の形成に用いる成分と、溶剤とを含むことが好ましい。各成分に溶剤を含有させて粘度を調節し、塗布及び乾燥することで、感光性樹脂層を好適に形成することができる。 
[Photosensitive resin composition]
It is preferable that the photosensitive resin composition contains the component used for formation of the photosensitive resin layer, and a solvent. The photosensitive resin layer can be suitably formed by adding a solvent to each component, adjusting the viscosity, and applying and drying.
-溶剤-
 溶剤としては、公知の溶媒を使用でき、例えば、国際公開第2018/179640号の段落0092~段落0094に記載された溶剤を用いることができる。
-solvent-
As the solvent, known solvents can be used, and for example, the solvents described in paragraphs 0092 to 0094 of International Publication No. 2018/179640 can be used.
 また、特開2018-177889公報の段落0014に記載された20℃における蒸気圧が1kPa以上16kPa以下の溶剤を好ましく用いることができる。
 本開示に用いることができる溶剤は、1種単独で用いてもよく、2種を併用してもよい。
In addition, a solvent having a vapor pressure of 1 kPa to 16 kPa at 20 ° C. described in paragraph 0014 of JP-A-2018-177889 can be preferably used.
The solvent which can be used for this indication may be used individually by 1 type, and may use 2 types together.
 感光性樹脂組成物を塗布する際における溶剤の含有量は、感光性樹脂組成物中の全固形分100質量部に対し、50質量部~1,900質量部であることが好ましく、100質量部~900質量部であることがより好ましい。 The content of the solvent in applying the photosensitive resin composition is preferably 50 parts by mass to 1,900 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the total solid content in the photosensitive resin composition, and 100 parts by mass. More preferably, it is 900 parts by mass.
<仮支持体>
 本開示に係る感光性転写材料は、仮支持体を有する。
 仮支持体は、感光性樹脂層を支持し、剥離可能な支持体である。
 本開示に用いられる仮支持体は、感光性樹脂層をパターン露光する場合において、仮支持体を介して感光性樹脂層を露光し得る観点から光透過性を有することが好ましい。
 光透過性を有するとは、パターン露光に使用する光の主波長の透過率が50%以上であることを意味し、パターン露光に使用する光の主波長の透過率は、露光感度向上の観点から、60%以上が好ましく、70%以上がより好ましい。透過率の測定方法としては、大塚電子(株)製MCPD Seriesを用いて測定する方法が挙げられる。
 仮支持体としては、ガラス基板、樹脂フィルム、紙等が挙げられ、強度及び可撓性等の観点から、樹脂フィルムが特に好ましい。樹脂フィルムとしては、ポリエチレンテレフタレートフィルム、トリ酢酸セルロースフィルム、ポリスチレンフィルム、ポリカーボネートフィルム等が挙げられる。中でも、2軸延伸ポリエチレンテレフタレートフィルムが特に好ましい。
<Temporary support>
The photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure has a temporary support.
The temporary support is a support that supports the photosensitive resin layer and can be peeled off.
The temporary support used in the present disclosure preferably has light transmittance from the viewpoint that the photosensitive resin layer can be exposed through the temporary support when the photosensitive resin layer is subjected to pattern exposure.
Having light transmittance means that the transmittance of the main wavelength of light used for pattern exposure is 50% or more, and the transmittance of the main wavelength of light used for pattern exposure is a viewpoint of improving exposure sensitivity. Therefore, 60% or more is preferable, and 70% or more is more preferable. Examples of the method for measuring the transmittance include a method of measuring using MCPD Series manufactured by Otsuka Electronics Co., Ltd.
Examples of the temporary support include a glass substrate, a resin film, paper, and the like, and a resin film is particularly preferable from the viewpoints of strength and flexibility. Examples of the resin film include a polyethylene terephthalate film, a cellulose triacetate film, a polystyrene film, and a polycarbonate film. Among these, a biaxially stretched polyethylene terephthalate film is particularly preferable.
 仮支持体の平均厚さは、特に限定されず、5μm~200μmの範囲が好ましく、取扱い易さ、汎用性などの点で、10μm~150μmの範囲がより好ましい。
 仮支持体の厚さは、支持体としての強度、回路配線形成用基板との貼り合わせに求められる可撓性、最初の露光工程で要求される光透過性などの観点から、材質に応じて選択すればよい。
The average thickness of the temporary support is not particularly limited, but is preferably in the range of 5 μm to 200 μm, and more preferably in the range of 10 μm to 150 μm in terms of ease of handling and versatility.
The thickness of the temporary support depends on the material in terms of strength as a support, flexibility required for bonding with a circuit wiring forming substrate, light transmittance required in the first exposure process, etc. Just choose.
 仮支持体の好ましい態様については、例えば、特開2014-85643号公報の段落0017~段落0018に記載があり、この公報の内容は本開示に組み込まれる。 A preferred embodiment of the temporary support is described, for example, in paragraphs 0017 to 0018 of JP 2014-85643 A, and the contents of this publication are incorporated in the present disclosure.
<カバーフィルム>
 本開示に係る感光性転写材料は、感光性転写材料における仮支持体が設けられた側の面とは反対側の面に、カバーフィルムを有することが好ましい。
 カバーフィルムとしては、樹脂フィルム、紙等が挙げられ、強度及び可撓性等の観点から、樹脂フィルムが特に好ましい。樹脂フィルムとしては、ポリエチレンフィルム、ポリプロピレンフィルム、ポリエチレンテレフタレートフィルム、トリ酢酸セルロースフィルム、ポリスチレンフィルム、ポリカーボネートフィルム等が挙げられる。中でも、ポリエチレンフィルム、ポリプロピレンフィルム、ポリエチレンテレフタレートフィルムが好ましい。
<Cover film>
The photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure preferably has a cover film on the surface of the photosensitive transfer material opposite to the surface on which the temporary support is provided.
Examples of the cover film include a resin film and paper. A resin film is particularly preferable from the viewpoint of strength and flexibility. Examples of the resin film include a polyethylene film, a polypropylene film, a polyethylene terephthalate film, a cellulose triacetate film, a polystyrene film, and a polycarbonate film. Among these, a polyethylene film, a polypropylene film, and a polyethylene terephthalate film are preferable.
 カバーフィルムの平均厚さは特に限定されず、例えば、1μm~2mmのものが好ましく挙げられる。 The average thickness of the cover film is not particularly limited, and preferably 1 μm to 2 mm, for example.
<その他の層>
 本開示に係る感光性転写材料は、上述した以外の層(以下、「その他の層」ともいう。)を有していてもよい。その他の層としては、コントラストエンハンスメント層、熱可塑性樹脂層等を挙げることができる。
 コントラストエンハンスメント層の好ましい態様については国際公開第2018/179640号の段落0134、熱可塑性樹脂層の好ましい態様については特開2014-85643号公報の段落0189~段落0193、及び、更に他の層の好ましい態様については特開2014-85643号公報の段落0194~段落0196にそれぞれ記載があり、この公報の内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。
<Other layers>
The photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure may have layers other than those described above (hereinafter also referred to as “other layers”). Examples of other layers include a contrast enhancement layer and a thermoplastic resin layer.
Regarding the preferred embodiment of the contrast enhancement layer, paragraph 0134 of WO2018 / 179640, for the preferred embodiment of the thermoplastic resin layer, paragraphs 0189 to 0193 of JP 2014-85643 A, and further preferred layers. Aspects are described in paragraphs 0194 to 0196 of JP 2014-85643 A, and the contents of this publication are incorporated in this specification.
 ここで図1を参照して、本開示に係る感光性転写材料の層構成の一例を概略的に示す。
 図1に示す感光性転写材料100は、仮支持体12と、感光性樹脂層14-1及び中間層14-2を積層してなる転写層14と、カバーフィルム16とがこの順に積層されている。以下、本開示において「転写層」と記載した場合は、積層された感光性樹脂層及び中間層の両方を表すものとする。
Here, with reference to FIG. 1, an example of a layer structure of the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure is schematically shown.
A photosensitive transfer material 100 shown in FIG. 1 includes a temporary support 12, a transfer layer 14 formed by stacking a photosensitive resin layer 14-1 and an intermediate layer 14-2, and a cover film 16 stacked in this order. Yes. Hereinafter, when “transfer layer” is described in the present disclosure, it means both the laminated photosensitive resin layer and the intermediate layer.
(感光性転写材料の製造方法)
 本開示に係る感光性転写材料の製造方法は、特に制限はなく、公知の製造方法、例えば、公知の各層の形成方法等を用いることができる。
 中でも、本開示に係る感光性転写材料の製造方法としては、中間層形成用組成物を仮支持体上に塗布及び乾燥し中間層を形成する工程、並びに、感光性樹脂組成物を中間層上に塗布及び乾燥し感光性樹脂層を形成する工程を含む方法が好ましく挙げられる。
 また、本開示に係る感光性転写材料の製造方法は、上記感光性樹脂層を形成する工程の後に、上記感光性樹脂層上にカバーフィルムを設ける工程を更に含むことが好ましい。
(Method for producing photosensitive transfer material)
The method for producing the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure is not particularly limited, and a known production method such as a known method for forming each layer can be used.
Among these, as a method for producing a photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure, an intermediate layer forming composition is applied on a temporary support and dried to form an intermediate layer, and a photosensitive resin composition is applied to the intermediate layer. Preferably, a method including a step of applying and drying to form a photosensitive resin layer is preferable.
Moreover, it is preferable that the manufacturing method of the photosensitive transfer material which concerns on this indication further includes the process of providing a cover film on the said photosensitive resin layer after the process of forming the said photosensitive resin layer.
(樹脂パターンの製造方法、及び、回路配線の製造方法)
 本開示に係る樹脂パターンの製造方法は、本開示に係る感光性転写材料を用いた樹脂パターンの製造方法であれば、特に制限はないが、本開示に係る感光性転写材料における上記仮支持体に対して感光性樹脂層を有する側の最外層を基板に接触させて貼り合わせる工程(以下、「貼り合わせ工程」ということがある。)と、上記感光性樹脂層をパターン露光する工程(以下、「露光工程」ということがある。)と、露光された上記感光性樹脂層を現像してパターンを形成する工程(以下、「現像工程」ということがある。)と、をこの順に含むことが好ましい。
 また、本開示に係る樹脂パターンの製造方法における上記基板は、導電層を有する基板であることが好ましく、表面に導電層を有する基板であることがより好ましい。
 本開示に係る回路配線の製造方法は、本開示に係る感光性転写材料を用いる方法であればよいが、本開示に係る感光性転写材料の、上記仮支持体に対して感光性樹脂層を有する側の最外層を、導電層を有する基板に貼り合わせる工程(以下、「貼り合わせ工程」ということがある。)と、貼り合わせた上記感光性転写材料における上記感光性樹脂層をパターン露光する工程と、パターン露光された上記感光性樹脂層を少なくとも現像して樹脂パターンを形成する工程と、上記樹脂パターンが配置されていない領域における上記基板をエッチング処理する工程(以下、「エッチング工程」ということがある。)と、をこの順に含むことが好ましい。
 本開示に係る回路配線の製造方法における上記基板は、表面に上記導電層を有する基板であることが好ましい。
(Resin pattern manufacturing method and circuit wiring manufacturing method)
The method for producing a resin pattern according to the present disclosure is not particularly limited as long as it is a method for producing a resin pattern using the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure, but the temporary support in the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure. A step of bringing the outermost layer on the side having the photosensitive resin layer into contact with the substrate and bonding (hereinafter, also referred to as “bonding step”), and a step of pattern exposure of the photosensitive resin layer (hereinafter referred to as “bonding step”). , And an “exposure process”) and a process of developing the exposed photosensitive resin layer to form a pattern (hereinafter also referred to as “development process”) in this order. Is preferred.
Moreover, the substrate in the method for producing a resin pattern according to the present disclosure is preferably a substrate having a conductive layer, and more preferably a substrate having a conductive layer on the surface.
The circuit wiring manufacturing method according to the present disclosure may be any method that uses the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure, but the photosensitive resin layer according to the present disclosure has a photosensitive resin layer on the temporary support. A step of bonding the outermost layer on the side having the conductive layer to a substrate having a conductive layer (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a “bonding step”), and pattern exposure of the photosensitive resin layer in the bonded photosensitive transfer material. A process, a process of developing at least the photosensitive resin layer subjected to pattern exposure to form a resin pattern, and a process of etching the substrate in a region where the resin pattern is not disposed (hereinafter referred to as “etching process”). May be included in this order.
The substrate in the circuit wiring manufacturing method according to the present disclosure is preferably a substrate having the conductive layer on a surface thereof.
 また、本開示に係る回路配線の製造方法は、上記貼り合わせ工程、上記露光工程、上記現像工程、及び、上記エッチング工程の4工程を1セットとして、複数回繰り返す態様も好ましく挙げられる。
 更に、後述するように基板を再利用(リワーク)できるため、本開示に係る回路配線の製造方法は、上記貼り合わせ工程、上記露光工程、上記現像工程、及び、上記エッチング工程の4工程を行った後、上記樹脂パターンに対して上記露光工程を行い、上記現像工程、及び、上記エッチング工程を更に行う態様も好ましく挙げられる。
Moreover, the manufacturing method of the circuit wiring which concerns on this indication also has the aspect which repeats several times by making the 4 processes of the said bonding process, the said exposure process, the said image development process, and the said etching process into 1 set.
Further, since the substrate can be reused (reworked) as will be described later, the circuit wiring manufacturing method according to the present disclosure includes four steps of the bonding step, the exposure step, the development step, and the etching step. After that, an embodiment in which the exposure process is performed on the resin pattern, and the development process and the etching process are further performed is also preferable.
 以下、リワークについて説明する。
 上記感光性樹脂層は、活性光線を照射していない部分を像として残すポジ型である。ポジ型感光性樹脂層では、活性光線を照射することにより、例えば活性光線を照射されて酸を発生する感光剤などを用いて露光部の溶解性を高めるため、パターン露光時点では露光部及び未露光部がいずれも硬化せず、得られたパターン形状が不良であった場合には全面露光などによって基板を再利用(リワーク)できる。
 上記回路配線の製造方法の実施形態としては、国際公開第2006/190405号を参考にすることができ、この内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。
Hereinafter, rework will be described.
The photosensitive resin layer is a positive type in which a portion not irradiated with actinic rays is left as an image. In the positive type photosensitive resin layer, by irradiating actinic rays, for example, using a photosensitizer that generates acid upon irradiation with actinic rays, the solubility of the exposed portions is increased. In the case where none of the exposed portions are cured and the obtained pattern shape is defective, the substrate can be reused (reworked) by overall exposure or the like.
As an embodiment of the method for manufacturing the circuit wiring, International Publication No. 2006/190405 can be referred to, the contents of which are incorporated herein.
<貼り合わせ工程>
 本開示に係る樹脂パターンの製造方法、又は、本開示に係る回路配線の製造方法は、本開示に係る感光性転写材料における上記仮支持体に対して感光性樹脂層を有する側の最外層を、基板、好ましくは導電層を有する基板に接触させて貼り合わせる工程(貼り合わせ工程)を含むことが好ましい。
 上記貼り合わせ工程においては、上記導電層と、本開示に係る感光性転写材料における上記仮支持体に対して感光性樹脂層を有する側の最外層と、が接触するように圧着させることが好ましい。上記態様であると、露光及び現像後のパターン形成された感光性樹脂層を、導電層をエッチングする際のエッチングレジストとして好適に用いることができる。
 上記基板と上記感光性転写材料とを圧着する方法としては、特に制限はなく、公知の転写方法、及び、ラミネート方法を用いることができる。
 感光性転写材料の基板への貼り合わせは、感光性転写材料の、感光性樹脂層を有する側の最外層を基板上に重ね、ロール等による加圧及び加熱することに行われることが好ましい。貼り合わせには、ラミネーター、真空ラミネーター、及び、より生産性を高めることができるオートカットラミネーター等の公知のラミネーターを使用することができる。本開示に係る回路配線の製造方法は、ロールツーロール方式により行われることが好ましい。そのため、基板を構成する基材は、樹脂フィルムであることが好ましい。
 以下、ロールツーロール方式について説明する。
 ロールツーロール方式とは、基板として、巻き取り及び巻き出しが可能な基板を用い、回路配線の製造方法に含まれるいずれかの工程の前に、基板又は基板を含む構造体を巻き出す工程(「巻き出し工程」ともいう。)と、いずれかの工程の後に、基材又は基板を含む構造体を巻き取る工程(「巻き取り工程」ともいう。)と、を含み、少なくともいずれかの工程(好ましくは、全ての工程、又は加熱工程以外の全ての工程)を、基材又は基板を含む構造体を搬送しながら行う方式をいう。
 巻き出し工程における巻き出し方法、及び巻き取り工程における巻取り方法としては、特に制限されず、ロールツーロール方式を適用する製造方法において、公知の方法を用いればよい。
<Lamination process>
The resin pattern manufacturing method according to the present disclosure or the circuit wiring manufacturing method according to the present disclosure includes an outermost layer on the side having the photosensitive resin layer with respect to the temporary support in the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure. It is preferable to include a step of bonding to a substrate, preferably a substrate having a conductive layer (bonding step).
In the bonding step, the conductive layer is preferably pressure-bonded so that the outermost layer on the side having the photosensitive resin layer is in contact with the temporary support in the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure. . In the above embodiment, the patterned photosensitive resin layer after exposure and development can be suitably used as an etching resist when the conductive layer is etched.
There is no restriction | limiting in particular as a method of crimping | bonding the said board | substrate and the said photosensitive transfer material, A well-known transfer method and a lamination method can be used.
The bonding of the photosensitive transfer material to the substrate is preferably performed by stacking the outermost layer of the photosensitive transfer material on the side having the photosensitive resin layer on the substrate, and applying pressure and heating with a roll or the like. For laminating, known laminators such as a laminator, a vacuum laminator, and an auto-cut laminator that can further increase productivity can be used. The method for manufacturing circuit wiring according to the present disclosure is preferably performed by a roll-to-roll method. Therefore, it is preferable that the base material which comprises a board | substrate is a resin film.
Hereinafter, the roll-to-roll method will be described.
The roll-to-roll method uses a substrate that can be wound and unwound as a substrate, and unwinds the substrate or a structure including the substrate before any step included in the circuit wiring manufacturing method ( And a step of winding a structure including a base material or a substrate (also referred to as a “winding step”) after any of the steps, and at least one of the steps (Preferably, all processes or all processes other than the heating process) are performed while conveying a structure including a base material or a substrate.
The unwinding method in the unwinding step and the winding method in the unwinding step are not particularly limited, and any known method may be used in the manufacturing method applying the roll-to-roll method.
 本開示に用いられる基板は、導電層を有する基板であることが好ましく、基材の表面に導電層を有する基板であることがより好ましい。
 基板は、ガラス、シリコン、フィルムなどの基材上に、導電層を有し、必要により任意の層が形成されてもよい。
 基材は透明であることが好ましい。
 基材の屈折率は、1.50~1.52であることが好ましい。
 基材は、ガラス基材等の透光性基材で構成されていてもよく、コーニング社のゴリラガラスに代表される強化ガラスなどを用いることができる。また、上述の透明基材としては、特開2010-86684号公報、特開2010-152809号公報及び特開2010-257492号公報に用いられている材料を好ましく用いることができる。
 基材として樹脂フィルム基材を用いる場合は、光学的に歪みが小さい基材、及び、透明度が高い基材を用いることがより好ましい。具体的な素材としては、ポリエチレンテレフタレート(polyethylene terephthalate;PET)、ポリエチレンナフタレート、ポリカーボネート、トリアセチルセルロース、シクロオレフィンポリマーを挙げることができる。
The substrate used in the present disclosure is preferably a substrate having a conductive layer, and more preferably a substrate having a conductive layer on the surface of a base material.
A board | substrate has a conductive layer on base materials, such as glass, a silicon | silicone, a film, and arbitrary layers may be formed as needed.
The substrate is preferably transparent.
The refractive index of the substrate is preferably 1.50 to 1.52.
The base material may be composed of a light-transmitting base material such as a glass base material, and tempered glass represented by gorilla glass manufactured by Corning Inc. can be used. In addition, as the above-described transparent substrate, materials used in JP 2010-86684 A, JP 2010-152809 A, and JP 2010-257492 A can be preferably used.
In the case of using a resin film substrate as the substrate, it is more preferable to use a substrate having a small optical distortion and a substrate having a high transparency. Specific examples of the material include polyethylene terephthalate (PET), polyethylene naphthalate, polycarbonate, triacetyl cellulose, and cycloolefin polymer.
 基材上に導電層を有する基板においては、ロールツーロール方式で製造する観点から、フィルム基材であることが好ましい。本開示に係る回路配線の製造方法は、タッチパネル用の回路配線である場合、基材がシート状樹脂組成物であることが特に好ましい。 In a substrate having a conductive layer on a base material, a film base material is preferable from the viewpoint of manufacturing by a roll-to-roll method. When the circuit wiring manufacturing method according to the present disclosure is a circuit wiring for a touch panel, the substrate is particularly preferably a sheet-shaped resin composition.
 基材上に形成されている導電層としては、一般的な回路配線又はタッチパネル配線に用いられる任意の導電層を挙げることができる。
 導電層としては、導電性及び細線形成性の観点から、金属層、導電性金属酸化物層、グラフェン層、カーボンナノチューブ層、及び、導電ポリマー層よりなる群から選ばれた少なくとも1種の層であることが好ましく挙げられ、金属層であることがより好ましく挙げられ、銅層、又は、銀層であることが特に好ましく挙げられる。
 また、基材上に導電層を1層有していても、2層以上有していてもよい。2層以上の場合は、異なる材質の導電層を有することが好ましい。
 導電層の材料としては、金属及び導電性金属酸化物などを挙げることができる。
 金属としては、Al、Zn、Cu、Fe、Ni、Cr、Mo、Ag、Au等を挙げることができる。
 導電性金属酸化物としては、ITO(Indium Tin Oxide)、IZO(Indium Zinc Oxide)、SiO等を挙げることができる。なお、本開示における「導電性」とは、体積抵抗率が1×10Ωcm未満であることをいい、体積抵抗率が1×10Ωcm未満であることが好ましい。
Examples of the conductive layer formed on the substrate include any conductive layer used for general circuit wiring or touch panel wiring.
The conductive layer is at least one layer selected from the group consisting of a metal layer, a conductive metal oxide layer, a graphene layer, a carbon nanotube layer, and a conductive polymer layer, from the viewpoints of conductivity and fine wire formability. It is preferably mentioned, more preferably a metal layer, and particularly preferably a copper layer or a silver layer.
Moreover, you may have 1 layer of conductive layers on a base material, or you may have 2 or more layers. In the case of two or more layers, it is preferable to have conductive layers of different materials.
Examples of the material for the conductive layer include metals and conductive metal oxides.
Examples of the metal include Al, Zn, Cu, Fe, Ni, Cr, Mo, Ag, and Au.
Examples of the conductive metal oxide include ITO (Indium Tin Oxide), IZO (Indium Zinc Oxide), and SiO 2 . “Conductivity” in the present disclosure means that the volume resistivity is less than 1 × 10 6 Ωcm, and the volume resistivity is preferably less than 1 × 10 4 Ωcm.
 本開示に係る回路配線の製造方法において、基材上に複数の導電層を有する基板を用いる場合、複数の導電層のうち少なくとも一つの導電層は導電性金属酸化物を含むことが好ましい。
 導電層としては、静電容量型タッチパネルに用いられる視認部のセンサーに相当する電極パターン又は周辺取り出し部の配線であることが好ましい。
In the circuit wiring manufacturing method according to the present disclosure, when a substrate having a plurality of conductive layers on a base material is used, at least one of the plurality of conductive layers preferably includes a conductive metal oxide.
The conductive layer is preferably an electrode pattern corresponding to a sensor of a visual recognition part used in a capacitive touch panel or a wiring of a peripheral extraction part.
<露光工程>
 本開示に係る樹脂パターンの製造方法、又は、本開示に係る回路配線の製造方法は、上記貼り合わせる工程後、上記感光性樹脂層をパターン露光する工程(露光工程)を含むことが好ましい。
<Exposure process>
It is preferable that the manufacturing method of the resin pattern which concerns on this indication, or the manufacturing method of the circuit wiring which concerns on this indication includes the process (exposure process) of carrying out pattern exposure of the said photosensitive resin layer after the said bonding process.
 本開示においてパターンの詳細な配置及び具体的サイズは特に制限されない。本開示に係る回路配線の製造方法により製造される回路配線を有する入力装置を備えた表示装置(例えばタッチパネル)の表示品質を高め、また、取り出し配線の占める面積をできるだけ小さくしたいことから、パターンの少なくとも一部(特にタッチパネルの電極パターン及び取り出し配線の部分)は100μm以下の細線であることが好ましく、70μm以下の細線であることが更に好ましい。 In the present disclosure, the detailed arrangement and specific size of the pattern are not particularly limited. Since it is desired to improve the display quality of a display device (for example, a touch panel) including an input device having a circuit wiring manufactured by the circuit wiring manufacturing method according to the present disclosure and to reduce the area occupied by the extraction wiring as much as possible, At least a part (particularly the electrode pattern of the touch panel and the part of the extraction wiring) is preferably a fine line of 100 μm or less, and more preferably a fine line of 70 μm or less.
 露光に使用する光源としては、感光性樹脂層を露光可能な波長域の光(例えば、365nm、405nm等)を照射するものであれば、適宜選定して用いることができる。具体的には、超高圧水銀灯、高圧水銀灯、メタルハライドランプ、LED(Light Emitting Diode)等が挙げられる。 As the light source used for the exposure, any light source capable of irradiating light in a wavelength region capable of exposing the photosensitive resin layer (for example, 365 nm, 405 nm, etc.) can be appropriately selected and used. Specifically, an ultrahigh pressure mercury lamp, a high pressure mercury lamp, a metal halide lamp, LED (LightLEDEmitting Diode) and the like can be mentioned.
 露光量としては、5mJ/cm~200mJ/cmであることが好ましく、10mJ/cm~100mJ/cmであることがより好ましい。 The exposure dose is preferably 5 mJ / cm 2 to 200 mJ / cm 2 , and more preferably 10 mJ / cm 2 to 100 mJ / cm 2 .
 露光工程においては、感光性樹脂層から仮支持体を剥離した後にパターン露光してもよく、仮支持体を剥離する前に、仮支持体を介してパターン露光し、その後、仮支持体を剥離してもよい。感光性樹脂層とマスクとの接触によるマスク汚染の防止、及びマスクに付着した異物による露光への影響を避けるためには、仮支持体を剥離せずにパターン露光することが好ましい。なお、パターン露光は、マスクを介した露光でもよいし、レーザー等を用いたダイレクト露光でもよい。 In the exposure step, pattern exposure may be performed after the temporary support is peeled off from the photosensitive resin layer. Before the temporary support is peeled off, pattern exposure is performed through the temporary support, and then the temporary support is peeled off. May be. In order to prevent mask contamination due to contact between the photosensitive resin layer and the mask and to avoid the influence on the exposure caused by foreign matter attached to the mask, it is preferable to perform pattern exposure without peeling off the temporary support. The pattern exposure may be exposure through a mask or direct exposure using a laser or the like.
<現像工程>
 本開示に係る樹脂パターンの製造方法、又は、本開示に係る回路配線の製造方法は、上記露光する工程後、露光された上記感光性樹脂層を現像して樹脂パターンを形成する工程(現像工程)を含むことが好ましい。
 また、上記感光性転写材料が中間層を有する場合、現像工程においては、露光された部分の中間層も、露光された感光性樹脂層とともに除去される。更に、現像工程においては、未露光部の中間層も現像液に溶解あるいは分散する形で除去されてもよい。
<Development process>
The method of manufacturing a resin pattern according to the present disclosure or the method of manufacturing a circuit wiring according to the present disclosure includes a step of developing the exposed photosensitive resin layer to form a resin pattern after the exposing step (developing step). ) Is preferably included.
When the photosensitive transfer material has an intermediate layer, the exposed intermediate layer is also removed together with the exposed photosensitive resin layer in the development step. Furthermore, in the development step, the intermediate layer in the unexposed area may also be removed in a form of being dissolved or dispersed in the developer.
 上記現像工程における露光された上記感光性樹脂層の現像は、現像液を用いて行うことができる。
 現像液としては、感光性樹脂層の非画像部を除去することができれば特に制限はなく、例えば、特開平5-72724号公報に記載の現像液など、公知の現像液を使用することができる。なお、現像液は感光性樹脂層の露光部(ポジ型)が溶解型の現像挙動をする現像液が好ましい。例えば、pKa=7~13の化合物を0.05mol/L(リットル)~5mol/Lの濃度で含むアルカリ水溶液系の現像液が好ましい。現像液は、更に、水溶性の有機溶剤、界面活性剤等を含有してもよい。本開示において好適に用いられる現像液としては、例えば、国際公開第2015/093271号の段落0194に記載の現像液が挙げられる。
Development of the exposed photosensitive resin layer in the development step can be performed using a developer.
The developer is not particularly limited as long as the non-image portion of the photosensitive resin layer can be removed. For example, a known developer such as the developer described in JP-A No. 5-72724 can be used. . The developing solution is preferably a developing solution in which the exposed portion (positive type) of the photosensitive resin layer has a dissolution type developing behavior. For example, an alkaline aqueous developer containing a compound having a pKa of 7 to 13 at a concentration of 0.05 mol / L (liter) to 5 mol / L is preferable. The developer may further contain a water-soluble organic solvent, a surfactant and the like. Examples of the developer suitably used in the present disclosure include the developer described in Paragraph 0194 of International Publication No. 2015/092731.
 現像方式としては、特に制限はなくパドル現像、シャワー現像、シャワー及びスピン現像、ディップ現像等のいずれでもよい。ここで、シャワー現像について説明すると、露光後の感光性樹脂層に現像液をシャワーにより吹き付けることにより、露光部分を除去することができる。また、現像の後に、洗浄剤などをシャワーにより吹き付け、ブラシなどで擦りながら、現像残渣を除去することが好ましい。現像液の液温度は20℃~40℃が好ましい。 The development method is not particularly limited and may be any of paddle development, shower development, shower and spin development, dip development, and the like. Here, the shower development will be described. The exposed portion can be removed by spraying the developer onto the exposed photosensitive resin layer by shower. Further, after the development, it is preferable to remove the development residue while spraying a cleaning agent or the like with a shower and rubbing with a brush or the like. The liquid temperature of the developer is preferably 20 ° C. to 40 ° C.
 更に、現像して得られた感光性樹脂層を含むパターンを加熱処理するポストベーク工程を有していてもよい。
 ポストベークの加熱は8.1kPa~121.6kPaの環境下で行うことが好ましく、50.66kPa以上の環境下で行うことがより好ましい。一方、111.46kPa以下の環境下で行うことがより好ましく、101.3kPa以下の環境下で行うことが特に好ましい。
 ポストベークの温度は、80℃~250℃であることが好ましく、110℃~170℃であることがより好ましく、130℃~150℃であることが特に好ましい。
 ポストベークの時間は、1分~30分であることが好ましく、2分~10分であることがより好ましく、2分~4分であることが特に好ましい。
 ポストベークは、空気環境下で行っても、窒素置換環境下で行ってもよい。
Furthermore, you may have the post-baking process which heat-processes the pattern containing the photosensitive resin layer obtained by image development.
The post-baking is preferably performed in an environment of 8.1 kPa to 121.6 kPa, and more preferably in an environment of 50.66 kPa or more. On the other hand, it is more preferable to carry out in an environment of 111.46 kPa or less, and it is particularly preferable to carry out in an environment of 101.3 kPa or less.
The post-baking temperature is preferably 80 ° C. to 250 ° C., more preferably 110 ° C. to 170 ° C., and particularly preferably 130 ° C. to 150 ° C.
The post-baking time is preferably 1 to 30 minutes, more preferably 2 to 10 minutes, and particularly preferably 2 to 4 minutes.
The post-bake may be performed in an air environment or a nitrogen substitution environment.
 また、後述のエッチング工程の前に、ポスト露光工程等、その他の工程を有していてもよい。 Further, other steps such as a post-exposure step may be provided before the etching step described later.
<エッチング工程>
 本開示に係る回路配線の製造方法は、上記樹脂パターンが配置されていない領域における基板をエッチング処理する工程(エッチング工程)を含むことが好ましい。
<Etching process>
It is preferable that the manufacturing method of the circuit wiring which concerns on this indication includes the process (etching process) of carrying out the etching process of the board | substrate in the area | region where the said resin pattern is not arrange | positioned.
 上記エッチング工程では、上記現像工程により上記感光性樹脂層から形成されたパターンを、エッチングレジストとして使用し、上記導電層のエッチング処理を行う。
 エッチング処理の方法としては、特開2010-152155号公報の段落0048~段落0054等に記載の方法、公知のプラズマエッチング等のドライエッチングによる方法など、公知の方法を適用することができる。
In the etching step, the conductive layer is etched using the pattern formed from the photosensitive resin layer in the developing step as an etching resist.
As a method for the etching treatment, a known method such as a method described in paragraphs 0048 to 0054 of JP 2010-152155 A, a dry etching method such as a known plasma etching, or the like can be applied.
 例えば、エッチング処理の方法としては、一般的に行われている、エッチング液に浸漬するウェットエッチング法が挙げられる。ウェットエッチングに用いられるエッチング液は、エッチングの対象に合わせて酸性タイプ又はアルカリ性タイプのエッチング液を適宜選択すればよい。
 酸性タイプのエッチング液としては、塩酸、硫酸、フッ酸、リン酸等の酸性成分単独の水溶液、酸性成分と塩化第二鉄、フッ化アンモニウム、過マンガン酸カリウム等の塩の混合水溶液等が例示される。酸性成分は、複数の酸性成分を組み合わせた成分を使用してもよい。
 アルカリ性タイプのエッチング液としては、水酸化ナトリウム、水酸化カリウム、アンモニア、有機アミン、テトラメチルアンモニウムハイドロオキサイドのような有機アミンの塩等のアルカリ成分単独の水溶液、アルカリ成分と過マンガン酸カリウム等の塩の混合水溶液等が例示される。アルカリ成分は、複数のアルカリ成分を組み合わせた成分を使用してもよい。
For example, as a method for the etching treatment, a wet etching method which is generally performed and is immersed in an etching solution can be given. As an etchant used for wet etching, an acid type or alkaline type etchant may be appropriately selected according to an object to be etched.
Examples of acidic etching solutions include aqueous solutions of acidic components such as hydrochloric acid, sulfuric acid, hydrofluoric acid, and phosphoric acid, and mixed aqueous solutions of acidic components and salts of ferric chloride, ammonium fluoride, potassium permanganate, etc. Is done. As the acidic component, a component obtained by combining a plurality of acidic components may be used.
Examples of alkaline type etchants include aqueous solutions of alkali components such as sodium hydroxide, potassium hydroxide, ammonia, organic amines, salts of organic amines such as tetramethylammonium hydroxide, alkaline components and potassium permanganate. Examples thereof include a mixed aqueous solution of salt. As the alkali component, a component obtained by combining a plurality of alkali components may be used.
 エッチング液の温度は特に制限されないが、45℃以下であることが好ましい。本開示においてエッチングマスク(エッチングパターン)として使用される樹脂パターンは、45℃以下の温度域における酸性及びアルカリ性のエッチング液に対して特に優れた耐性を発揮することが好ましい。したがって、エッチング工程中に感光性樹脂層が剥離することが防止され、感光性樹脂層の存在しない部分が選択的にエッチングされることになる。
 エッチング工程後、工程ラインの汚染を防ぐために、必要に応じて、エッチング処理された基板を洗浄する洗浄工程、及び、洗浄された基板を乾燥する乾燥工程を行ってもよい。
The temperature of the etching solution is not particularly limited, but is preferably 45 ° C. or lower. In the present disclosure, the resin pattern used as an etching mask (etching pattern) preferably exhibits particularly excellent resistance to acidic and alkaline etching solutions in a temperature range of 45 ° C. or lower. Therefore, the photosensitive resin layer is prevented from being peeled off during the etching process, and a portion where the photosensitive resin layer does not exist is selectively etched.
After the etching process, in order to prevent contamination of the process line, a cleaning process for cleaning the etched substrate and a drying process for drying the cleaned substrate may be performed as necessary.
<除去工程>
 本開示に係る回路配線の製造方法は、樹脂パターンを除去する工程(除去工程)を行うことが好ましい。
 除去工程は、特に制限はなく、必要に応じて行うことができるが、エッチング工程の後に行うことが好ましい。
 残存する感光性樹脂層を除去する方法としては特に制限はないが、薬品処理により除去する方法を挙げることができ、除去液を用いることが特に好ましく挙げることができる。
 感光性樹脂層の除去方法としては、好ましくは30℃~80℃、より好ましくは50℃~80℃にて撹拌中の除去液に感光性樹脂層などを有する基板を1分~30分間浸漬する方法が挙げられる。
<Removal process>
It is preferable that the manufacturing method of the circuit wiring which concerns on this indication performs the process (removal process) of removing a resin pattern.
The removal step is not particularly limited and can be performed as necessary, but is preferably performed after the etching step.
Although there is no restriction | limiting in particular as the method of removing the remaining photosensitive resin layer, The method of removing by chemical | medical treatment can be mentioned, It can mention especially preferably using a removal liquid.
As a method for removing the photosensitive resin layer, the substrate having the photosensitive resin layer or the like is immersed in a removing solution that is being stirred at preferably 30 ° C. to 80 ° C., more preferably 50 ° C. to 80 ° C. for 1 to 30 minutes. A method is mentioned.
 除去液としては、例えば、水酸化ナトリウム、水酸化カリウム等の無機アルカリ成分、又は、第1級アミン化合物、第2級アミン化合物、第3級アミン化合物、第4級アンモニウム塩化合物等の有機アルカリ成分を水、ジメチルスルホキシド、N-メチルピロリドン又はこれらの混合溶液に溶解させた除去液が挙げられる。
 また、除去液を使用し、スプレー法、シャワー法、パドル法等により除去してもよい。
Examples of the removing liquid include inorganic alkali components such as sodium hydroxide and potassium hydroxide, or organic alkalis such as primary amine compounds, secondary amine compounds, tertiary amine compounds, and quaternary ammonium salt compounds. Examples thereof include removal solutions in which the components are dissolved in water, dimethyl sulfoxide, N-methylpyrrolidone, or a mixed solution thereof.
Alternatively, the removal liquid may be used and removed by a spray method, a shower method, a paddle method, or the like.
<<感光性樹脂層の全面露光>>
 上記除去工程の前に、上記感光性樹脂層を全面露光する工程(「全面露光工程」ともいう。)を含むことが好ましい。更に必要に応じて、全面露光した感光性樹脂層を加熱する工程(「加熱工程」ともいう。)を含んでもよい。全面露光工程及び加熱工程は、エッチング工程後かつ除去工程前に行われることが好ましい。
 エッチング工程の後に、エッチングマスクとして使用した感光性樹脂層を全面露光することにより、除去液への溶解性及び除去液の浸透性が向上し、除去液を長時間使用した場合においても除去性に優れる。また、更に、加熱工程を含む場合、加熱工程により、より光酸発生剤の反応速度、及び、発生した酸とポジ型感光性樹脂との反応速度を向上することができ、結果、除去性能が向上する。
<< Entire exposure of photosensitive resin layer >>
It is preferable to include a step of exposing the entire surface of the photosensitive resin layer (also referred to as “overall exposure step”) before the removing step. Furthermore, if necessary, a step of heating the photosensitive resin layer exposed on the entire surface (also referred to as “heating step”) may be included. The entire surface exposure step and the heating step are preferably performed after the etching step and before the removal step.
By exposing the entire surface of the photosensitive resin layer used as an etching mask after the etching step, the solubility in the removal liquid and the penetration of the removal liquid are improved, and even when the removal liquid is used for a long time, the removal performance is improved. Excellent. Further, when a heating step is included, the reaction rate of the photoacid generator and the reaction rate between the generated acid and the positive photosensitive resin can be further improved by the heating step. improves.
 全面露光工程における露光に使用する光源としては、特に制限はなく、公知の露光光源を用いることができる。除去性の観点から、上記露光工程と同じ波長の光を含む光源を用いることが好ましい。 There is no restriction | limiting in particular as a light source used for exposure in a whole surface exposure process, A well-known exposure light source can be used. From the viewpoint of removability, it is preferable to use a light source including light having the same wavelength as that in the exposure step.
 全面露光工程における露光量としては、除去性の観点から、5mJ/cm~1,000mJ/cmであることが好ましく、10mJ/cm~800mJ/cmであることがより好ましく、100mJ/cm~500mJ/cmであることが特に好ましい。 The exposure amount in the overall exposure step, from the viewpoint of removability is preferably 5mJ / cm 2 ~ 1,000mJ / cm 2, more preferably 10mJ / cm 2 ~ 800mJ / cm 2, 100mJ / Particularly preferred is cm 2 to 500 mJ / cm 2 .
 全面露光工程における露光量としては、除去性の観点から、上記露光工程における露光量以上であることが好ましく、上記露光工程における露光量よりも多いことがより好ましい。 The exposure amount in the overall exposure step is preferably greater than or equal to the exposure amount in the exposure step, and more preferably greater than the exposure amount in the exposure step, from the viewpoint of removability.
<その他の工程>
 本開示に係る回路配線の製造方法は、上述した以外の任意の工程(その他の工程)を含んでもよい。例えば、以下のような工程が挙げられるが、これらの工程に制限されない。
 また、本開示における露光工程、現像工程、及びその他の工程の例としては、特開2006-23696号公報の段落0035~段落0051に記載の方法を本開示においても好適に用いることができる。
<Other processes>
The method for manufacturing circuit wiring according to the present disclosure may include an arbitrary process (other processes) other than those described above. For example, although the following processes are mentioned, it is not restricted to these processes.
As examples of the exposure step, the development step, and other steps in the present disclosure, the methods described in paragraphs 0035 to 0051 of JP-A-2006-23696 can be suitably used in the present disclosure.
<<カバーフィルム剥離工程>>
 本開示に係る樹脂パターンの製造方法、又は、本開示に係る回路配線の製造方法は、本開示に係る感光性転写材料がカバーフィルムを有する場合、上記感光性転写材料のカバーフィルムを剥離する工程(「カバーフィルム剥離工程」ということがある。)を含むことが好ましい。カバーフィルムを剥離する方法は、制限されず、公知の方法を適用することができる。
<< Cover film peeling process >>
The method of manufacturing a resin pattern according to the present disclosure or the method of manufacturing a circuit wiring according to the present disclosure includes a step of peeling the cover film of the photosensitive transfer material when the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure has a cover film. (Sometimes referred to as a “cover film peeling step”). The method for peeling the cover film is not limited, and a known method can be applied.
<<可視光線反射率を低下させる工程>>
 本開示に係る回路配線の製造方法は、基材上の複数の導電層の一部又は全ての可視光線反射率を低下させる処理をする工程を含むことが可能である。
 可視光線反射率を低下させる処理としては、酸化処理などを挙げることができる。例えば、銅を酸化処理して酸化銅とすることで、黒化することにより、可視光線反射率を低下させることができる。
 可視光線反射率を低下させる処理の好ましい態様については、特開2014-150118号公報の段落0017~段落0025、並びに、特開2013-206315号公報の段落0041、段落0042、段落0048及び段落0058に記載があり、この公報の内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。
<< Step of reducing visible light reflectance >>
The manufacturing method of the circuit wiring which concerns on this indication can include the process of reducing the visible light reflectance of some or all of the some conductive layers on a base material.
Examples of the treatment for reducing the visible light reflectance include an oxidation treatment. For example, the visible light reflectance can be reduced by blackening the copper by oxidizing copper.
Regarding preferred embodiments of the processing for reducing the visible light reflectance, paragraphs 0017 to 0025 of JP2014-150118A and paragraphs 0041, 0042, 0048 and 0058 of JP2013-206315A are described. The contents of this publication are incorporated herein.
<<絶縁膜を形成する工程、絶縁膜上に新たな導電層を形成する工程>>
 本開示に係る回路配線の製造方法は、形成した回路配線上に絶縁膜を形成する工程と、絶縁膜上に新たな導電層を形成する工程と、を含むことも好ましい。
 このような構成により、上述の第二の電極パターンを、第一の電極パターンと絶縁しつつ、形成することができる。
 絶縁膜を形成する工程については、特に制限はなく、公知の永久膜を形成する方法を挙げることができる。また、絶縁性を有する感光性材料を用いて、フォトリソグラフィにより所望のパターンの絶縁膜を形成してもよい。
 絶縁膜上に新たな導電層を形成する工程については、特に制限はない。導電性を有する感光性材料を用いて、フォトリソグラフィにより所望のパターンの新たな導電層を形成してもよい。
<< Step of Forming Insulating Film, Step of Forming New Conductive Layer on Insulating Film >>
The method for manufacturing a circuit wiring according to the present disclosure preferably includes a step of forming an insulating film on the formed circuit wiring and a step of forming a new conductive layer on the insulating film.
With such a configuration, the above-described second electrode pattern can be formed while being insulated from the first electrode pattern.
There is no restriction | limiting in particular about the process of forming an insulating film, The method of forming a well-known permanent film can be mentioned. Alternatively, an insulating film having a desired pattern may be formed by photolithography using a photosensitive material having insulating properties.
There is no particular limitation on the process of forming a new conductive layer on the insulating film. A new conductive layer having a desired pattern may be formed by photolithography using a photosensitive material having conductivity.
 本開示に係る回路配線の製造方法は、基材の両方の表面にそれぞれ複数の導電層を有する基板を用い、基材の両方の表面に形成された導電層に対して逐次又は同時に回路形成することも好ましい。このような構成により、基材の一方の表面に第一の導電パターン、もう一方の表面に第二の導電パターンを形成したタッチパネル用回路配線を形成することができる。また、このような構成のタッチパネル用回路配線を、ロールツーロールで基材の両面から形成することも好ましい。 The circuit wiring manufacturing method according to the present disclosure uses a substrate having a plurality of conductive layers on both surfaces of a base material, and sequentially or simultaneously forms a circuit on the conductive layers formed on both surfaces of the base material. It is also preferable. With such a configuration, it is possible to form a circuit wiring for a touch panel in which a first conductive pattern is formed on one surface of the substrate and a second conductive pattern is formed on the other surface. Moreover, it is also preferable to form the circuit wiring for touch panels of such a structure from both surfaces of a base material by roll-to-roll.
 本開示に係る回路配線の製造方法により製造される回路配線は、種々の装置に適用することができる。本開示に係る回路配線の製造方法により製造される回路配線を備えた装置としては、例えば、入力装置等が挙げられ、タッチパネルであることが好ましく、静電容量型タッチパネルであることがより好ましい。また、上記入力装置は、有機EL表示装置、液晶表示装置等の表示装置に適用することができる。 The circuit wiring manufactured by the circuit wiring manufacturing method according to the present disclosure can be applied to various apparatuses. As an apparatus provided with the circuit wiring manufactured by the manufacturing method of circuit wiring concerning this indication, an input device etc. are mentioned, for example, it is preferred that it is a touch panel, and it is more preferred that it is a capacitance type touch panel. The input device can be applied to a display device such as an organic EL display device or a liquid crystal display device.
(タッチパネルの製造方法)
 本開示に係るタッチパネルの製造方法は、本開示に係る感光性転写材料を用いる方法であればよいが、本開示に係る感光性転写材料における上記仮支持体に対して感光性樹脂層を有する側の最外層を導電層を有する基板に接触させて貼り合わせる工程(貼り合わせ工程)と、上記感光性樹脂層をパターン露光する工程(露光工程)と、露光された上記感光性樹脂層を現像して樹脂パターンを形成する工程(現像工程)と、上記樹脂パターンが配置されていない領域における上記基板をエッチング処理する工程(エッチング工程)と、をこの順に含むことが好ましい。
(Touch panel manufacturing method)
The touch panel manufacturing method according to the present disclosure may be a method using the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure, but the side having the photosensitive resin layer with respect to the temporary support in the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure. A step of bringing the outermost layer into contact with a substrate having a conductive layer (bonding step), a step of pattern exposing the photosensitive resin layer (exposure step), and developing the exposed photosensitive resin layer It is preferable to include a step of forming a resin pattern (developing step) and a step of etching the substrate in a region where the resin pattern is not disposed (etching step) in this order.
 本開示に係るタッチパネルの製造方法における、各工程の具体的な態様、及び、各工程を行う順序等の実施態様については、上述の「回路配線の製造方法」の項において説明した通りであり、好ましい態様も同様である。
 本開示に係るタッチパネルの製造方法は、上述した以外は、公知のタッチパネルの製造方法を参照することができる。
 また、本開示に係るタッチパネルの製造方法は、上述した以外の任意の工程(その他の工程)を含んでもよい。
In the manufacturing method of the touch panel according to the present disclosure, the specific aspects of each process and the embodiments such as the order of performing each process are as described in the above-mentioned section “Method of manufacturing circuit wiring”. The preferred embodiment is also the same.
The touch panel manufacturing method according to the present disclosure can refer to a known touch panel manufacturing method except the above.
Moreover, the manufacturing method of the touchscreen which concerns on this indication may also include arbitrary processes (other processes) other than having mentioned above.
 本開示に係るタッチパネルの製造方法において用いられるマスクのパターンの一例を、図3及び図4に示す。
 図3に示されるパターンA、及び、図4に示されるパターンBにおいて、SL及びGは非画像部(遮光部)であり、DLはアライメント合わせの枠を仮想的に示したものである。本開示に係るタッチパネルの製造方法において、例えば、図3に示されるパターンAを有するマスクを介して感光性樹脂層を露光することで、SL及びGに対応するパターンAを有する回路配線が形成されたタッチパネルを製造できる。具体的には、国際公開第2016/0190405号の図1に記載の方法で作製できる。製造されたタッチパネルの一例においては、Gは透明電極(タッチパネル用電極)が形成される部分であり、SLは周辺取出し部の配線が形成される部分である。
An example of a mask pattern used in the touch panel manufacturing method according to the present disclosure is shown in FIGS. 3 and 4.
In the pattern A shown in FIG. 3 and the pattern B shown in FIG. 4, SL and G are non-image portions (light-shielding portions), and DL is a virtual alignment alignment frame. In the method for manufacturing a touch panel according to the present disclosure, for example, the circuit wiring having the pattern A corresponding to SL and G is formed by exposing the photosensitive resin layer through the mask having the pattern A shown in FIG. Touch panel can be manufactured. Specifically, it can be produced by the method described in FIG. 1 of International Publication No. 2016/0190405. In an example of the manufactured touch panel, G is a portion where a transparent electrode (touch panel electrode) is formed, and SL is a portion where a wiring of a peripheral extraction portion is formed.
 本開示に係るタッチパネルは、本開示に係る回路配線の製造方法により製造された回路配線を少なくとも有するタッチパネルである。また、本開示に係るタッチパネルは、透明基板と、電極と、絶縁層又は保護層とを少なくとも有することが好ましい。
 本開示に係るタッチパネルにおける検出方法としては、抵抗膜方式、静電容量方式、超音波方式、電磁誘導方式、及び、光学方式など公知の方式いずれでもよい。中でも、静電容量方式が好ましい。
 タッチパネル型としては、いわゆる、インセル型(例えば、特表2012-517051号公報の図5、図6、図7、図8に記載のもの)、いわゆる、オンセル型(例えば、特開2013-168125号公報の図19に記載のもの、特開2012-89102号公報の図1や図5に記載のもの)、OGS(One Glass Solution)型、TOL(Touch-on-Lens)型(例えば、特開2013-54727号公報の図2に記載のもの)、その他の構成(例えば、特開2013-164871号公報の図6に記載のもの)、各種アウトセル型(いわゆる、GG、G1・G2、GFF、GF2、GF1、G1Fなど)等を挙げることができる。
 本開示に係るタッチパネルとしては、例えば、特開2017-120345号公報の段落0229に記載のものが挙げられる。
The touch panel according to the present disclosure is a touch panel having at least circuit wiring manufactured by the method for manufacturing circuit wiring according to the present disclosure. In addition, the touch panel according to the present disclosure preferably includes at least a transparent substrate, an electrode, and an insulating layer or a protective layer.
As a detection method in the touch panel according to the present disclosure, any known method such as a resistance film method, a capacitance method, an ultrasonic method, an electromagnetic induction method, and an optical method may be used. Among these, the electrostatic capacity method is preferable.
As the touch panel type, a so-called in-cell type (for example, those described in FIGS. 5, 6, 7, and 8 of JP-T-2012-517051), a so-called on-cell type (for example, JP 2013-168125 A). 19 of the gazette, those described in FIGS. 1 and 5 of JP 2012-89102 A, OGS (One Glass Solution) type, TOL (Touch-on-Lens) type (for example, JP No. 2013-54727 shown in FIG. 2), other configurations (for example, those shown in FIG. 6 of JP2013-164671A), various out-cell types (so-called GG, G1, G2, GFF, GF2, GF1, G1F, etc.).
Examples of the touch panel according to the present disclosure include those described in paragraph 0229 of JP-A-2017-120345.
 以下に実施例を挙げて本開示の実施形態を更に具体的に説明する。以下の実施例に示す材料、使用量、割合、処理内容、及び、処理手順等は、本開示の実施形態の趣旨を逸脱しない限り、適宜、変更することができる。したがって、本開示の実施形態の範囲は以下に示す具体例に限定されない。なお、特に断りのない限り、「部」、「%」は質量基準である。なお、本実施例における「極大吸収波長」とは、発色時における波長範囲400nm~780nmの極大吸収波長である。 Hereinafter, embodiments of the present disclosure will be described more specifically with reference to examples. The materials, amounts used, ratios, processing details, processing procedures, and the like shown in the following examples can be changed as appropriate without departing from the spirit of the embodiment of the present disclosure. Therefore, the scope of the embodiment of the present disclosure is not limited to the specific examples shown below. Unless otherwise specified, “part” and “%” are based on mass. The “maximum absorption wavelength” in this example is the maximum absorption wavelength in the wavelength range of 400 nm to 780 nm during color development.
((本開示に係る感光性転写材料の第1の実施態様における実施例及び比較例))
 実施例で用いている成分に関する略語は、それぞれ以下の化合物を表す。
-中間層-
〔重合体(中間層用バインダーポリマー)〕
 重合体B-11:Nisso HPC-SSL(ヒドロキシプロピルセルロース 日本曹達(株)製)
 重合体B-12:メトローズ60SH-03(ヒドロキシプロピルメチルセルロース、信越化学工業(株)製)
〔色素〕
 A-1:ブロモフェノールブルー(富士フイルム和光純薬(株)製、極大吸収波長:606nm、水溶性)
 A-2:ブロモクレゾールグリーン(富士フイルム和光純薬(株)製、極大吸収波長:626nm、水溶性)
 A-3:VPB-NAPS(ビクトリアピュアブルーのナフタレンスルホン酸塩)(保土谷化学工業(株)製、極大吸収波長:616nm、水溶性)
((Example and comparative example in the first embodiment of the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure))
The abbreviation regarding the component used in the Example represents the following compounds, respectively.
-Intermediate layer-
[Polymer (Binder polymer for intermediate layer)]
Polymer B-11: Nissan HPC-SSL (Hydroxypropylcellulose Nippon Soda Co., Ltd.)
Polymer B-12: Metroz 60SH-03 (hydroxypropylmethylcellulose, manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd.)
[Dye]
A-1: Bromophenol blue (manufactured by FUJIFILM Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd., maximum absorption wavelength: 606 nm, water-soluble)
A-2: Bromocresol green (manufactured by FUJIFILM Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd., maximum absorption wavelength: 626 nm, water-soluble)
A-3: VPB-NAPS (Victoria Pure Blue naphthalenesulfonate) (manufactured by Hodogaya Chemical Co., Ltd., maximum absorption wavelength: 616 nm, water-soluble)
 ~色素のpH感受性の有無の確認~
 水溶液中での上記色素の発色のpH感受性を以下の方法で確認した。
 色素0.1gを、エタノール及び水の混合溶液(エタノール/水=1/2[質量比])100mLに溶かし、0.1mol/l(1N)の塩酸水溶液を加えてpH=1に調整した。0.01mol/l(0.01N)の水酸化ナトリウム水溶液で滴定していき、発色変化と発色が変化した際のpHとを確認した。その結果を以下に示す。
 なお、pHは、pHメーター(型番:HM-31、東亜DKK社製)を用いて25℃で測定した。
 A-1:pH4.0以上で発色(即ち極大吸収波長)が変化した。
 A-2:pH5.4以上で発色(即ち極大吸収波長)が変化した。
 A-3:pH1~14においてpHを変化させても発色(即ち極大吸収波長)は変化しなかった。
-Confirmation of pH sensitivity of pigments-
The pH sensitivity of coloring of the dye in an aqueous solution was confirmed by the following method.
0.1 g of the dye was dissolved in 100 mL of a mixed solution of ethanol and water (ethanol / water = 1/2 [mass ratio]), and 0.1 mol / l (1N) aqueous hydrochloric acid was added to adjust to pH = 1. Titration was carried out with a 0.01 mol / l (0.01 N) aqueous solution of sodium hydroxide to confirm the color change and the pH when the color change. The results are shown below.
The pH was measured at 25 ° C. using a pH meter (model number: HM-31, manufactured by Toa DKK).
A-1: Color development (that is, maximum absorption wavelength) changed at pH 4.0 or higher.
A-2: Color development (that is, maximum absorption wavelength) changed at pH 5.4 or higher.
A-3: Even when the pH was changed at pH 1 to 14, the color development (that is, the maximum absorption wavelength) did not change.
〔pH調整剤〕
 G-1:0.1N 水酸化ナトリウム水溶液(富士フイルム和光純薬(株)製)
 G-2:0.1N 水酸化カリウム水溶液(富士フイルム和光純薬(株)製)
 G-3:0.1N 水酸化リチウム水溶液(富士フイルム和光純薬(株)製)
 G-4:テトラブチルアンモニウムヒドロキシド(40質量%水溶液)(富士フイルム和光純薬(株)製)
 G-5:ヘキサデシルトリメチルアンモニウムヒドロキシド(10質量%水溶液)(富士フイルム和光純薬(株)製)
 G-6:コリン(50質量%水溶液)(東京化成工業(株)製)
 G-7:ベンジルトリメチルアンモニウムヒドロキシド(40質量%メタノール溶液)(富士フイルム和光純薬(株)製)
〔無機フィラー〕
 H-1:スノーテックスO(日産化学工業(株)製)
 H-2:スノーテックスC(日産化学工業(株)製)
 H-3:スノーテックスN(日産化学工業(株)製)
〔界面活性剤〕
 E-11:メガファックF-444(DIC(株)製)
[PH adjuster]
G-1: 0.1N sodium hydroxide aqueous solution (manufactured by FUJIFILM Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.)
G-2: 0.1N aqueous potassium hydroxide solution (manufactured by FUJIFILM Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.)
G-3: 0.1N lithium hydroxide aqueous solution (manufactured by FUJIFILM Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.)
G-4: Tetrabutylammonium hydroxide (40% by mass aqueous solution) (manufactured by FUJIFILM Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.)
G-5: Hexadecyltrimethylammonium hydroxide (10% by mass aqueous solution) (manufactured by Fujifilm Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.)
G-6: Choline (50% by mass aqueous solution) (manufactured by Tokyo Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.)
G-7: benzyltrimethylammonium hydroxide (40 mass% methanol solution) (manufactured by FUJIFILM Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.)
[Inorganic filler]
H-1: Snowtex O (Nissan Chemical Co., Ltd.)
H-2: Snowtex C (manufactured by Nissan Chemical Industries, Ltd.)
H-3: Snowtex N (manufactured by Nissan Chemical Industries)
[Surfactant]
E-11: Megafuck F-444 (manufactured by DIC Corporation)
-レジスト層-
〔重合体〕
 以下の例において、以下の略語はそれぞれ以下の化合物を表す。
 ATHF:2-テトラヒドロフラニルアクリレート(合成品)
 MATHF:2-テトラヒドロフラニルメタクリレート(合成品)
 ATHP:テトラヒドロ-2H-ピラン-2-イルアクリレート(新中村化学工業(株)製)
 MATHP:テトラヒドロ-2H-ピラン-2-イルメタクリレート(新中村化学工業(株)製)
 MAEVE:1-エトキシエチルメタクリレート(富士フイルム和光純薬(株)製)
 TBMA:t-ブチルメタクリレート(富士フイルム和光純薬(株)製)
 AA:アクリル酸(東京化成工業(株)製)
 MAA:メタクリル酸(東京化成工業(株)製)
 EA:アクリル酸エチル(東京化成工業(株)製)
 MMA:メタクリル酸メチル(東京化成工業(株)製)
 CHA:アクリル酸シクロヘキシル(東京化成工業(株)製)
 CHMA:メタクリル酸シクロヘキシル(東京化成工業(株)製)
 酢酸ノルマルプロピル(昭和電工(株)製)
 V-601:ジメチル 2,2’-アゾビス(2-メチルプロピオネート)(富士フイルム和光純薬(株)製)
-Resist layer-
(Polymer)
In the following examples, the following abbreviations represent the following compounds, respectively.
ATHF: 2-tetrahydrofuranyl acrylate (synthetic product)
MATHF: 2-tetrahydrofuranyl methacrylate (synthetic product)
ATHP: Tetrahydro-2H-pyran-2-yl acrylate (manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd.)
MATHP: Tetrahydro-2H-pyran-2-yl methacrylate (manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd.)
MAEVE: 1-ethoxyethyl methacrylate (Fuji Film Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.)
TBMA: t-butyl methacrylate (Fuji Film Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.)
AA: Acrylic acid (manufactured by Tokyo Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.)
MAA: Methacrylic acid (manufactured by Tokyo Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.)
EA: Ethyl acrylate (manufactured by Tokyo Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.)
MMA: Methyl methacrylate (manufactured by Tokyo Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.)
CHA: cyclohexyl acrylate (manufactured by Tokyo Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.)
CHMA: cyclohexyl methacrylate (manufactured by Tokyo Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.)
Normal propyl acetate (manufactured by Showa Denko KK)
V-601: Dimethyl 2,2′-azobis (2-methylpropionate) (manufactured by FUJIFILM Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.)
-ATHFの合成-
 3つ口フラスコにアクリル酸(72.1部、1.0モル当量)、ヘキサン(72.1部)を加え20℃に冷却した。カンファースルホン酸(0.00070質量部、0.003ミリモル当量)、2-ジヒドロフラン(70.1質量部、1.0モル当量))を滴下した後に、20℃±2℃で1.5時間撹拌した後、35℃まで昇温して2時間撹拌した。ヌッチェにキョーワード200(水酸化アルミニウム吸着剤、協和化学工業(株)製)、キョーワード1000(ハイドロタルサイト系吸着剤、協和化学工業(株)製)の順に敷き詰めた後、反応液をろ過することでろ過液を得た。得られたろ過液にヒドロキノンモノメチルエーテル(MEHQ、0.0012部)を加えた後、40℃で減圧濃縮することで、アクリル酸テトラヒドロフラン-2-イル(ATHF)140.8部を無色油状物として得た(収率99.0%)。
-Synthesis of ATHF-
Acrylic acid (72.1 parts, 1.0 molar equivalent) and hexane (72.1 parts) were added to a three-necked flask and cooled to 20 ° C. After adding camphorsulfonic acid (0.00070 parts by mass, 0.003 mmol equivalent) and 2-dihydrofuran (70.1 parts by mass, 1.0 molar equivalent)), 1.5 hours at 20 ° C. ± 2 ° C. After stirring, the temperature was raised to 35 ° C. and stirred for 2 hours. After spreading Kyoward 200 (aluminum hydroxide adsorbent, manufactured by Kyowa Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.) and Kyoward 1000 (hydrotalcite-based adsorbent, manufactured by Kyowa Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.) in the order of Nutsche, the reaction solution is filtered. As a result, a filtrate was obtained. Hydroquinone monomethyl ether (MEHQ, 0.0012 parts) was added to the obtained filtrate, followed by concentration under reduced pressure at 40 ° C., whereby 140.8 parts of tetrahydrofuran-2-yl acrylate (ATHF) was obtained as a colorless oil. Obtained (yield 99.0%).
-MATHFの合成-
 3つ口フラスコにメタクリル酸(86.0部、1.0モル当量)、ヘキサン(72.1部)を加え20℃に冷却した。カンファースルホン酸(0.00070質量部、0.003ミリモル当量)、2-ジヒドロフラン(70.1質量部、1.0モル当量))を滴下した後に、20℃±2℃で1.5時間撹拌した後、35℃まで昇温して2時間撹拌した。ヌッチェにキョーワード200(水酸化アルミニウム吸着剤、協和化学工業(株)製)、キョーワード1000(ハイドロタルサイト系吸着剤、協和化学工業(株)製)の順に敷き詰めた後、反応液をろ過することでろ過液を得た。得られたろ過液にヒドロキノンモノメチルエーテル(MEHQ、0.0012部)を加えた後、40℃で減圧濃縮することで、メタクリル酸テトラヒドロフラン-2-イル(MATHF)152.9部を無色油状物として得た(収率98.0%)。
-Synthesis of MATHF-
Methacrylic acid (86.0 parts, 1.0 molar equivalent) and hexane (72.1 parts) were added to a three-necked flask and cooled to 20 ° C. After adding camphorsulfonic acid (0.00070 parts by mass, 0.003 mmol equivalent) and 2-dihydrofuran (70.1 parts by mass, 1.0 molar equivalent)), 1.5 hours at 20 ° C. ± 2 ° C. After stirring, the temperature was raised to 35 ° C. and stirred for 2 hours. After spreading Kyoward 200 (aluminum hydroxide adsorbent, manufactured by Kyowa Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.) and Kyoward 1000 (hydrotalcite-based adsorbent, manufactured by Kyowa Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.) in the order of Nutsche, the reaction solution is filtered. As a result, a filtrate was obtained. Hydroquinone monomethyl ether (MEHQ, 0.0012 parts) was added to the obtained filtrate, and the filtrate was concentrated under reduced pressure at 40 ° C. to give 152.9 parts of tetrahydrofuran-2-yl methacrylate (MATHF) as a colorless oil. Obtained (yield 98.0%).
-重合体B-1の合成例-
 3つ口フラスコに酢酸ノルマルプロピル(75.0部)を入れ、窒素雰囲気下において90℃に昇温した。ATHF(38.70部)、AA(1.47部)、CHA(59.83部)、V-601(4.1部)、酢酸ノルマルプロピル(75.0部)を混合した溶液を、90℃±2℃の範囲内に維持した3つ口フラスコ溶液中に2時間かけて滴下した。滴下終了後,90℃±2℃の範囲内にて2時間撹拌することで、重合体B-1の溶液(固形分濃度40.0質量%)を得た。
-Synthesis example of polymer B-1-
Normal propyl acetate (75.0 parts) was placed in a three-necked flask and heated to 90 ° C. in a nitrogen atmosphere. A mixed solution of ATHF (38.70 parts), AA (1.47 parts), CHA (59.83 parts), V-601 (4.1 parts), and normal propyl acetate (75.0 parts) The solution was added dropwise to the three-necked flask solution maintained within the range of ± 2 ° C over 2 hours. After completion of the dropping, the solution was stirred for 2 hours within a range of 90 ° C. ± 2 ° C. to obtain a solution of polymer B-1 (solid content concentration 40.0% by mass).
-重合体B-2~B-8の合成例-
 モノマーの種類等を下記表1に示すように変更し、その他の条件については重合体A-1の合成と同様にして、重合体B-2~B-8を合成した。
 重合体の固形分濃度は、いずれも40質量%とした。
 なお、表1中の「-」の表記は、該当する成分を含まないことを示す。
-Synthesis example of polymers B-2 to B-8-
Polymers B-2 to B-8 were synthesized in the same manner as in the synthesis of polymer A-1, except that the types of monomers were changed as shown in Table 1 below.
The solid content concentration of the polymer was 40% by mass.
The notation “-” in Table 1 indicates that the corresponding component is not included.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000030
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000030
〔光酸発生剤〕
 C-1:下記に示す構造の化合物(特開2013-47765号公報の段落0227に記載の方法にしたがって合成)
[Photoacid generator]
C-1: Compound having the following structure (synthesized according to the method described in paragraph 0227 of JP2013-47765A)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000031

 
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000031

 
 C-2:下記に示す構造の化合物(特開2014-197155号公報の段落0210に記載の方法にしたがって合成)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000032

 
C-2: Compound having the structure shown below (synthesized according to the method described in paragraph 0210 of JP-A No. 2014-197155)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000032

 C-3:下記化合物(Irgacure PAG-103、BASF社製)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000033

 
C-3: The following compound (Irgacure PAG-103, manufactured by BASF)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000033

 C-4:CPI-310TS(トリアリールスルホニウム塩、サンアプロ株式会社製) C-4: CPI-310TS (triarylsulfonium salt, manufactured by San Apro Co., Ltd.)
〔塩基性化合物〕
 D-1:下記に示す構造の化合物(CMTU)
[Basic compounds]
D-1: Compound having the structure shown below (CMTU)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000034

 
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000034

 
 D-2:2,4,5-トリフェニルイミダゾール(東京化成工業(株)製)
 D-3:1,5-ジアザビシクロ[4.3.0]-5-ノネン(東京化成工業(株)製)
D-2: 2,4,5-triphenylimidazole (manufactured by Tokyo Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.)
D-3: 1,5-diazabicyclo [4.3.0] -5-nonene (manufactured by Tokyo Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.)
〔界面活性剤〕
 E-1:F-552(フッ素系ノニオン界面活性剤、DIC(株)製)
 E-2:F-554(フッ素系ノニオン界面活性剤、DIC(株)製)
[Surfactant]
E-1: F-552 (fluorine nonionic surfactant, manufactured by DIC Corporation)
E-2: F-554 (Fluorine nonionic surfactant, manufactured by DIC Corporation)
(実施例1)
<中間層組成物1の調製>
 下記成分を混合し、孔径5.0μmのポリテトラフルオロエチレン製フィルターで濾過することで、中間層組成物1を調製した。
Example 1
<Preparation of intermediate layer composition 1>
The following components were mixed and filtered with a polytetrafluoroethylene filter having a pore size of 5.0 μm to prepare an intermediate layer composition 1.
 水:891.5質量部
 メタノール:891.5質量部
 重合体B-11:80.0質量部
 色素A-1:1.2質量部
 pH調整剤G-1:35.8質量部
 無機フィラーH-1:100.0質量部
 界面活性剤E-11:0.05質量部
Water: 891.5 parts by mass Methanol: 891.5 parts by mass Polymer B-11: 80.0 parts by mass Dye A-1: 1.2 parts by mass pH adjuster G-1: 35.8 parts by mass Inorganic filler H -1: 100.0 parts by mass Surfactant E-11: 0.05 parts by mass
<レジスト層組成物1の調製>
 下記成分を混合し、孔径1.0μmのポリテトラフルオロエチレン製フィルターで濾過することで、レジスト層組成物1を調製した。
<Preparation of resist layer composition 1>
The following components were mixed and filtered through a polytetrafluoroethylene filter having a pore size of 1.0 μm to prepare a resist layer composition 1.
 MEK(メチルエチルケトン:丸善石油化学(株)製): 306.0質量部
 酢酸ノルマルプロピル(昭和電工(株)製): 459.9質量部
 重合体B-1溶液: 423.5質量部
 光酸発生剤C-1: 9.00質量部
 塩基性化合物D-1: 1.35質量部
 界面活性剤E-1: 0.24質量部
MEK (methyl ethyl ketone: manufactured by Maruzen Petrochemical Co., Ltd.): 306.0 parts by mass Normal propyl acetate (manufactured by Showa Denko KK): 459.9 parts by mass Polymer B-1 solution: 423.5 parts by mass Photoacid generation Agent C-1: 9.00 parts by mass Basic compound D-1: 1.35 parts by mass Surfactant E-1: 0.24 parts by mass
<感光性転写材料の調製>
 中間層組成物1を、仮支持体である厚さ16μmのポリエチレンテレフタレートフィルム(以下、「PET(A)」ともいう。)の上に、スリット状ノズルを用いて乾燥膜厚が1.8μmとなる量を塗布した。その後、100℃のコンベクションオーブンで2分間乾燥させた。
 形成された中間層上にレジスト層組成物1を、スリット状ノズルを用いて乾燥膜厚が3.0μmとなる量を塗布した。最後にカバーフィルムとしてポリプロピレンフィルム(王子エフテックス(株)製、アルファンPK-002)を圧着して感光性転写材料を作製した。
<Preparation of photosensitive transfer material>
An intermediate layer composition 1 is formed on a polyethylene terephthalate film (hereinafter also referred to as “PET (A)”) having a thickness of 16 μm, which is a temporary support, with a dry film thickness of 1.8 μm using a slit nozzle. Was applied. Then, it was dried in a convection oven at 100 ° C. for 2 minutes.
On the formed intermediate layer, the resist layer composition 1 was applied in an amount such that the dry film thickness was 3.0 μm using a slit nozzle. Finally, a polypropylene film (manufactured by Oji F-Tex Co., Ltd., Alphan PK-002) was pressure-bonded as a cover film to prepare a photosensitive transfer material.
(実施例2~27及び実施例201)
 色素、重合体、pH調整剤、無機フィラー、及び界面活性剤を、下記表2に示す添加量となるように水及びメタノールの混合溶媒(水/メタノール=891.5質量部/891.5質量部)に溶解混合し、孔径1.0μmのポリテトラフルオロエチレン製フィルターで濾過することで、中間層組成物2~18を調製した。
 また、表3に示すように、さらに光酸発生剤C-4を2.0質量部添加した以外は中間層組成物1と同様にして、中間層組成物19を調製した。
(Examples 2 to 27 and Example 201)
A mixed solvent of water and methanol (water / methanol = 891.5 parts by mass / 891.5 parts by mass) was added to the pigment, polymer, pH adjuster, inorganic filler, and surfactant, as shown in Table 2 below. The intermediate layer compositions 2 to 18 were prepared by dissolving and mixing with a filter of polytetrafluoroethylene having a pore size of 1.0 μm.
Further, as shown in Table 3, an intermediate layer composition 19 was prepared in the same manner as the intermediate layer composition 1 except that 2.0 parts by mass of a photoacid generator C-4 was further added.
 また、重合体、光酸発生剤、塩基性化合物、界面活性剤、及びその他の成分を、下記表4に示す固形分比(質量比)となるように、酢酸n-プロピル及びメチルエチルケトンの混合溶媒(酢酸n-プロピル/メチルエチルケトン=70/30[体積%])に固形分濃度を14質量%として溶解混合し、孔径1.0μmのポリテトラフルオロエチレン製フィルターで濾過することで、レジスト層組成物2~10を調製した。
 また、下記成分を混合し、孔径1.0μmのポリテトラフルオロエチレン製フィルターで濾過することで、レジスト層組成物11を調製した。
In addition, the polymer, photoacid generator, basic compound, surfactant, and other components are mixed solvents of n-propyl acetate and methyl ethyl ketone so that the solid content ratio (mass ratio) shown in Table 4 below is obtained. A resist layer composition is prepared by dissolving and mixing in (n-propyl acetate / methyl ethyl ketone = 70/30 [volume%]) with a solid content of 14% by mass and filtering through a polytetrafluoroethylene filter having a pore size of 1.0 μm. 2-10 were prepared.
Moreover, the following component was mixed and the resist layer composition 11 was prepared by filtering with the filter made from a polytetrafluoroethylene with a hole diameter of 1.0 micrometer.
 メタクリル酸/スチレン/ベンジルメタクリレート(重合比が30/20/50)の組成を有し、酸等量が290であり、重量平均分子量が55000である共重合体の41質量%(固形分)MEK(メチルエチルケトン)溶液:55.0質量部
 ビスフェノールAの両端にそれぞれ平均5モルずつのエチレンオキサイドを付加したポリエチレングリコールのジメタクリレート(新中村化学社製、BPE-500):25.0質量部
 平均12モルのプロピレンオキサイドを付加したポリプロピレングリコールにエチレンオキサイドをさらに両端にそれぞれ平均3モルずつ付加したポリアルキレングリコールのジメタクリレート:20.0質量部
 4,4’-ビス(ジエチルアミノ)ベンゾフェノン:0.1質量部
 2-(o-クロロフェニル)-4,5-ジフェニルイミダゾール二量体:3.0質量部
 ダイアモンドグリーン:0.1質量部
 ロイコクリスタルバイオレット:0.3質量部
41% by mass (solid content) MEK of a copolymer having a composition of methacrylic acid / styrene / benzyl methacrylate (polymerization ratio 30/20/50), an acid equivalent weight of 290, and a weight average molecular weight of 55,000. (Methyl ethyl ketone) solution: 55.0 parts by mass Polyethylene glycol dimethacrylate (Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., BPE-500) obtained by adding an average of 5 moles of ethylene oxide to both ends of bisphenol A: 25.0 parts by mass, average 12 Polyalkylene glycol dimethacrylate in which 3 moles of ethylene oxide was added to both ends of polypropylene glycol to which moles of propylene oxide were added, respectively, on average: 20.0 parts by mass 4,4′-bis (diethylamino) benzophenone: 0.1 parts by mass Part 2- (o-Chlorophenyl)- , 5-diphenyl imidazole dimer: 3.0 parts by Diamond Green: 0.1 parts by weight Leuco Crystal Violet: 0.3 parts by weight
 そして、実施例1において、中間層組成物1を中間層組成物2~19にそれぞれ代え、かつ、レジスト層組成物1をレジスト層組成物2~11にそれぞれ代えたこと以外は、実施例1と同様にして、感光性転写材料を作製した。 In Example 1, Example 1 except that the intermediate layer composition 1 was replaced with the intermediate layer compositions 2 to 19 and the resist layer composition 1 was replaced with the resist layer compositions 2 to 11, respectively. In the same manner, a photosensitive transfer material was produced.
(比較例1)
 実施例1において、中間層組成物1を、中間層組成物1の調製に用いた色素A-1およびpH調整剤G-1を添加せずに調製した比較中間層組成物1に代えたこと以外は、実施例1と同様にして、比較例1の感光性転写材料を作製した。
(Comparative Example 1)
In Example 1, the intermediate layer composition 1 was replaced with the comparative intermediate layer composition 1 prepared without adding the dye A-1 and the pH adjuster G-1 used for the preparation of the intermediate layer composition 1. A photosensitive transfer material of Comparative Example 1 was produced in the same manner as Example 1 except for the above.
(比較例2)
 色素、重合体、pH調整剤、無機フィラー、及び界面活性剤を、下記表2に示す添加量となるように水及びメタノールの混合溶媒(水/メタノール=891.5質量部/891.5質量部)に溶解混合し、孔径1.0μmのポリテトラフルオロエチレン製フィルターで濾過することで、比較中間層組成物2を調製した。
(Comparative Example 2)
A mixed solvent of water and methanol (water / methanol = 891.5 parts by mass / 891.5 parts by mass) was added to the pigment, polymer, pH adjuster, inorganic filler, and surfactant, as shown in Table 2 below. Part), and the mixture was filtered through a polytetrafluoroethylene filter having a pore diameter of 1.0 μm to prepare a comparative intermediate layer composition 2.
 そして、実施例1において、中間層組成物1を比較中間層組成物2に代えたこと以外は、実施例1と同様にして、感光性転写材料を作製した。 Then, in Example 1, a photosensitive transfer material was produced in the same manner as in Example 1 except that the intermediate layer composition 1 was replaced with the comparative intermediate layer composition 2.
(比較例3)
 実施例201において、中間層組成物19に代えて、表3に示すように、中間層組成物19の調製に用いた色素A-1および光酸発生剤C-4を添加せずに調製した比較中間層組成物3を用いた以外は、実施例201と同様にして、感光性転写材料を作製した。
(Comparative Example 3)
In Example 201, instead of the intermediate layer composition 19, as shown in Table 3, it was prepared without adding the dye A-1 and the photoacid generator C-4 used for the preparation of the intermediate layer composition 19. A photosensitive transfer material was produced in the same manner as in Example 201 except that the comparative intermediate layer composition 3 was used.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000035

 
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000035

 
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000036

 
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000036

 
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000037

 
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000037

 
[性能評価1]
 厚さ100μmのポリエチレンテレフタレート(PET)フィルム上に厚さ200nmでスパッタ法にて銅層を作製した銅層付きPET基板を使用した。
[Performance evaluation 1]
A PET substrate with a copper layer was used in which a copper layer was formed by sputtering at a thickness of 200 nm on a polyethylene terephthalate (PET) film having a thickness of 100 μm.
<視認性>
 作製した感光性転写材料を、ロール温度90℃、線圧0.8MPa、線速度3.0m/min.のラミネート条件で銅層付きPET基板にラミネートした。仮支持体を剥離せずに感光性転写材料の仮支持体と、線幅10μmのラインアンドスペースパターン(Duty比 1:1)を有するガラス製マスクとをコンタクトさせ、上記マスクを介して超高圧水銀灯で200mJ/cmの露光量でレジスト層を露光した。4時間放置した後、光学顕微鏡で露光したラインアンドスペースパターンを観察し、以下の評価基準にしたがって評価した。
 <評価基準>
A:ラインアンドスペースパターンが十分な色濃度で判別可能であることを確認した。
B:ラインアンドスペースパターンを確認できなかった。
<Visibility>
The produced photosensitive transfer material was subjected to a roll temperature of 90 ° C., a linear pressure of 0.8 MPa, and a linear velocity of 3.0 m / min. It laminated on the PET board | substrate with a copper layer on the lamination conditions of these. The temporary support of the photosensitive transfer material is contacted with a glass mask having a line-and-space pattern (duty ratio of 1: 1) having a line width of 10 μm without peeling off the temporary support, and ultrahigh pressure is passed through the mask. The resist layer was exposed with an exposure dose of 200 mJ / cm 2 with a mercury lamp. After leaving for 4 hours, the exposed line and space pattern was observed with an optical microscope and evaluated according to the following evaluation criteria.
<Evaluation criteria>
A: It was confirmed that the line and space pattern was distinguishable with a sufficient color density.
B: A line and space pattern could not be confirmed.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000038

 
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000038

 
(実施例28~33)
 実施例1において、中間層組成物及びレジスト層組成物を下記表6の構成になるように変更したこと以外は、実施例1と同様にして、感光性転写材料を作製した。
(Examples 28 to 33)
In Example 1, a photosensitive transfer material was produced in the same manner as in Example 1 except that the intermediate layer composition and the resist layer composition were changed to have the configuration shown in Table 6 below.
[性能評価2]
<密着性>
 厚さ100μmのポリエチレンテレフタレート(PET)フィルム上に厚さ200nmでスパッタ法にて銅層を形成した銅層付きPET基板を使用した。
 作製した感光性転写材料を50cm×50cmのサイズにカットして試料片とし、得られた試料片のカバーフィルムを剥がし、ロール温度90℃、線圧1.0MPa、線速度4.0m/min.のラミネート条件で銅層付きPETフィルムにラミネートした。続いて、仮支持体を剥離し、中間層およびレジスト層が銅層に付着している部分を油性マジックを用いてマーキングし、PET基板全体を撮影し、画像解析ソフト(ImageJ(米国 National Instisute of Health製))にて、 中間層およびレジスト層が銅層に付着している部分と試料片全体の面積をそれぞれ算出した。そして、下記式より面積比を求め、以下の評価基準にしたがって評価した。
 面積比(%)=中間層およびレジスト層が付着した面積/試料片全体の面積×100
 <評価基準>
5:95%以上
4:90%以上95%未満
3:85%以上90%未満
2:80%以上85%未満
1:80%未満
[Performance evaluation 2]
<Adhesion>
A PET substrate with a copper layer in which a copper layer was formed by a sputtering method at a thickness of 200 nm on a polyethylene terephthalate (PET) film having a thickness of 100 μm was used.
The produced photosensitive transfer material was cut into a size of 50 cm × 50 cm to obtain a sample piece, and the cover film of the obtained sample piece was peeled off, and the roll temperature was 90 ° C., the linear pressure was 1.0 MPa, and the linear velocity was 4.0 m / min. The film was laminated on a PET film with a copper layer under the following laminating conditions. Subsequently, the temporary support is peeled off, the portion where the intermediate layer and the resist layer are attached to the copper layer is marked using an oil-based magic, the entire PET substrate is photographed, and image analysis software (ImageJ (National Institute of America, USA) (Health)), the area where the intermediate layer and the resist layer were attached to the copper layer and the area of the entire sample were calculated. And area ratio was calculated | required from the following formula and evaluated according to the following evaluation criteria.
Area ratio (%) = area where the intermediate layer and resist layer are attached / area of the entire sample piece × 100
<Evaluation criteria>
5: 95% or more 4: 90% or more and less than 95% 3: 85% or more and less than 90% 2: 80% or more and less than 85% 1: less than 80%
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000039

 
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000039

 
(実施例101)
 100μm厚PET基材上に、第2層の導電性層として酸化インジウムスズ(ITO)をスパッタリングで150nm厚にて成膜し、その上に第1層の導電性層として銅を真空蒸着法で200nm厚にて成膜して、回路形成基板とした。
 銅層上に実施例1で得た感光性転写材料1をラミネートした(線圧0.8MPa、線速度3.0m/min、ロール温度90℃)。仮支持体を剥離せずに一方向に導電性層パッドが連結された構成を持つ図3に示すパターン(以下、「パターンA」とも称する。)を設けたフォトマスクを用いてコンタクトパターン露光した。
 なお、図3に示すパターンAは、実線部SL及びグレー部Gが遮光部であり、点線部DLはアライメント合わせの枠を仮想的に示したものである。
 その後仮支持体を剥離し、現像、水洗を行ってパターンAを得た。次いで銅エッチング液(関東化学(株)製Cu-02)を用いて銅層をエッチングした後、ITOエッチング液(関東化学(株)製ITO-02)を用いてITO層をエッチングすることで、銅(実線部SL)とITO(グレー部G)とが共にパターンAで描画された基板を得た。
(Example 101)
Indium tin oxide (ITO) was deposited as a second conductive layer on a 100 μm thick PET substrate by sputtering to a thickness of 150 nm, and copper was deposited thereon as a first conductive layer by vacuum deposition. A film was formed with a thickness of 200 nm to obtain a circuit formation substrate.
The photosensitive transfer material 1 obtained in Example 1 was laminated on the copper layer (linear pressure 0.8 MPa, linear velocity 3.0 m / min, roll temperature 90 ° C.). Contact pattern exposure was performed using a photomask provided with a pattern shown in FIG. 3 (hereinafter also referred to as “pattern A”) having a configuration in which conductive layer pads are connected in one direction without peeling off the temporary support. .
In the pattern A shown in FIG. 3, the solid line portion SL and the gray portion G are light shielding portions, and the dotted line portion DL virtually shows an alignment alignment frame.
Thereafter, the temporary support was peeled off, developed and washed with water to obtain a pattern A. Next, after etching the copper layer using a copper etching solution (Cu-02 manufactured by Kanto Chemical Co., Ltd.), the ITO layer is etched using an ITO etching solution (ITO-02 manufactured by Kanto Chemical Co., Ltd.), A substrate on which copper (solid line portion SL) and ITO (gray portion G) were both drawn with the pattern A was obtained.
 次いで、アライメントを合わせた状態で図4に示すパターン(以下、「パターンB」とも称する。)の開口部を設けたフォトマスクを用いてパターン露光し、現像、水洗を行った。
 なお、図4に示すパターンBは、グレー部Gが遮光部であり、点線部DLはアライメント合わせの枠を仮想的に示したものである。
 その後、Cu-02を用いて銅層をエッチングし、残ったレジスト層を、剥離液(10質量%水酸化ナトリウム水溶液)を用いて剥離し、回路配線基板を得た。
 これにより、回路配線基板を得た。顕微鏡で観察したところ、剥がれや欠けなどは無く、きれいなパターンであった。
Next, pattern alignment was performed using a photomask provided with openings of the pattern shown in FIG. 4 (hereinafter also referred to as “pattern B”) in the aligned state, and development and washing were performed.
In the pattern B shown in FIG. 4, the gray portion G is a light shielding portion, and the dotted line portion DL is a virtual alignment alignment frame.
Thereafter, the copper layer was etched using Cu-02, and the remaining resist layer was stripped using a stripping solution (10 mass% sodium hydroxide aqueous solution) to obtain a circuit wiring board.
As a result, a circuit wiring board was obtained. When observed with a microscope, there was no peeling or chipping, and the pattern was clean.
(実施例102)
 100μm厚PET基材上に、第2層の導電性層としてITOをスパッタリングで150nm厚にて成膜し、その上に第1層の導電性層として銅を真空蒸着法で200nm厚にて成膜して、回路形成基板とした。
 銅層上に実施例1で得た感光性転写材料1をラミネートした(線圧0.8MPa、線速度3.0m/min、ロール温度90℃)。
(Example 102)
On a 100 μm-thick PET substrate, ITO was deposited as a second conductive layer by sputtering to a thickness of 150 nm, and copper was deposited thereon as a first conductive layer by vacuum deposition at a thickness of 200 nm. The film was formed into a circuit forming substrate.
The photosensitive transfer material 1 obtained in Example 1 was laminated on the copper layer (linear pressure 0.8 MPa, linear velocity 3.0 m / min, roll temperature 90 ° C.).
 仮支持体を剥離せずに一方向に導電性層パッドが連結された構成を持つ図3に示すパターンAを設けたフォトマスクを用いてレジスト層をパターン露光した。その後仮支持体を剥離し、現像、水洗を行ってパターンAを得た。次いで銅エッチング液(関東化学(株)製Cu-02)を用いて銅層をエッチングした後、ITOエッチング液(関東化学(株)製ITO-02)を用いてITO層をエッチングすることで、銅(実線部SL)とITO(グレー部G)とが共にパターンAで描画された基板を得た。
 次いで、残存しているレジスト上に保護層としてPET(A)をラミネートした。この状態で、アライメントを合わせた状態で図4に示すパターンBの開口部を設けたフォトマスクを用いてパターン露光し、PET(A)を剥離した後に現像、水洗を行った。
 その後、Cu-02を用いて銅配線をエッチングし、残ったレジスト層を剥離液(関東化学(株)製KP-301)を用いて剥離し、回路配線基板を得た。
The resist layer was subjected to pattern exposure using a photomask provided with a pattern A shown in FIG. 3 having a configuration in which conductive layer pads were connected in one direction without peeling off the temporary support. Thereafter, the temporary support was peeled off, developed and washed with water to obtain a pattern A. Next, after etching the copper layer using a copper etching solution (Cu-02 manufactured by Kanto Chemical Co., Ltd.), the ITO layer is etched using an ITO etching solution (ITO-02 manufactured by Kanto Chemical Co., Ltd.), A substrate on which copper (solid line portion SL) and ITO (gray portion G) were both drawn with the pattern A was obtained.
Next, PET (A) was laminated as a protective layer on the remaining resist. In this state, pattern alignment was performed using a photomask provided with an opening of the pattern B shown in FIG. 4 in the aligned state, and after developing the PET (A), development and washing were performed.
Thereafter, the copper wiring was etched using Cu-02, and the remaining resist layer was stripped using a stripping solution (KP-301 manufactured by Kanto Chemical Co., Inc.) to obtain a circuit wiring board.
 顕微鏡で観察したところ、剥がれ、欠けなどは無く、きれいなパターンであった。 When observed with a microscope, it was a clean pattern with no peeling or chipping.
((本開示に係る感光性転写材料の第2の実施態様における実施例及び比較例))
<重合体の合成>
 以下の合成例において、以下の略語はそれぞれ以下の化合物を表す。
 ATHF:2-テトラヒドロフラニルアクリレート(合成品)
 AA:アクリル酸(富士フイルム和光純薬(株)製)
 EA:アクリル酸エチル(富士フイルム和光純薬(株)製)
 MMA:メタクリル酸メチル(富士フイルム和光純薬(株)製)
 CHA:アクリル酸シクロヘキシル(富士フイルム和光純薬(株)製)
 PMPMA:メタクリル酸1,2,2,6,6-ペンタメチル-4-ピペリジル(富士フイルム和光純薬(株)製)
 V-601:ジメチル 2,2’-アゾビス(2-メチルプロピオネート)(富士フイルム和光純薬(株)製)
((Example and Comparative Example in the Second Embodiment of the Photosensitive Transfer Material According to the Present Disclosure))
<Synthesis of polymer>
In the following synthesis examples, the following abbreviations represent the following compounds, respectively.
ATHF: 2-tetrahydrofuranyl acrylate (synthetic product)
AA: Acrylic acid (Fuji Film Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.)
EA: ethyl acrylate (manufactured by FUJIFILM Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.)
MMA: Methyl methacrylate (Fuji Film Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.)
CHA: cyclohexyl acrylate (manufactured by FUJIFILM Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.)
PMPMA: 1,2,2,6,6-pentamethyl-4-piperidyl methacrylate (manufactured by Fujifilm Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.)
V-601: Dimethyl 2,2′-azobis (2-methylpropionate) (manufactured by FUJIFILM Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.)
<<ATHFの合成>>
 国際公開第2018/115192号の段落0172に従って合成した。
<< Synthesis of ATHF >>
Synthesized according to paragraph 0172 of WO2018 / 115192.
<<重合体A-1の合成例>>
 3つ口フラスコに酢酸イソプロピル(75.0部)を入れ、窒素雰囲気下において90℃に昇温した。ATHF(30.0部)、MMA(40.0部)、EA(30.0部)、V-601(4.0部)、酢酸イソプロピル(75.0部)を加えた溶液を、90℃±2℃に維持した3つ口フラスコ溶液中に2時間かけて滴下した。滴下終了後,90℃±2℃にて2時間撹拌することで、重合体A-1(固形分濃度40.0%)を得た。
<< Synthesis Example of Polymer A-1 >>
Isopropyl acetate (75.0 parts) was placed in a three-necked flask and heated to 90 ° C. in a nitrogen atmosphere. A solution containing ATHF (30.0 parts), MMA (40.0 parts), EA (30.0 parts), V-601 (4.0 parts), and isopropyl acetate (75.0 parts) was added at 90 ° C. The solution was dropped into a three-necked flask solution maintained at ± 2 ° C. over 2 hours. After completion of the dropwise addition, the mixture was stirred at 90 ° C. ± 2 ° C. for 2 hours to obtain a polymer A-1 (solid content concentration 40.0%).
<<重合体A-2~A-6の合成例>>
 モノマーの種類等を下記表7に示す通りに変更し、その他の条件については、重合体A-1と同様の方法で合成した。重合体A-2~A-6の固形分濃度はそれぞれ、40質量%とした。
 なお、表7のモノマーの量の単位は、質量%であり、得られた重合体における各構成単位の量比も同様であった。
<< Synthesis Example of Polymers A-2 to A-6 >>
The monomer type was changed as shown in Table 7 below, and the other conditions were synthesized in the same manner as for Polymer A-1. The solid content concentrations of the polymers A-2 to A-6 were 40% by mass, respectively.
In addition, the unit of the quantity of the monomer of Table 7 was the mass%, and the quantity ratio of each structural unit in the obtained polymer was also the same.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000040
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000040
 なお、重合体A-1~A-6の重量平均分子量はそれぞれ、20,000であった。 The weight average molecular weights of the polymers A-1 to A-6 were 20,000, respectively.
<光酸発生剤>
 B-1:下記に示す構造の化合物(特開2013-47765号公報の段落0227に記載の化合物、段落0227に記載の方法に従って合成した。)
<Photo acid generator>
B-1: Compound having the structure shown below (Compound described in paragraph 0227 of JP 2013-47765 A, synthesized according to the method described in paragraph 0227)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000041
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000041
<塩基性化合物>
 C-1:1,2,3-ベンゾトリアゾール(東京化成工業(株)製)
 C-2:N-シクロヘキシル-N’-[2-(4-モルホリニル)エチル]チオ尿素(CMTU、東洋化成工業(株)製)
<Basic compound>
C-1: 1,2,3-benzotriazole (manufactured by Tokyo Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.)
C-2: N-cyclohexyl-N ′-[2- (4-morpholinyl) ethyl] thiourea (CMTU, manufactured by Toyo Kasei Kogyo Co., Ltd.)
<界面活性剤>
 E-1:メガファックF-552(フッ素系界面活性剤、DIC(株)製)
<Surfactant>
E-1: Megafac F-552 (Fluorosurfactant, manufactured by DIC Corporation)
<感光性樹脂組成物1~6の調製>
 下記表8に示す固形分比となるように、重合体、光酸発生剤、塩基性化合物、及び、界面活性剤を、酢酸イソプロピルに固形分濃度15質量%になるように溶解混合し、孔径0.2μmのポリテトラフルオロエチレン製フィルターで濾過して、感光性樹脂組成物1~6をそれぞれ得た。
<Preparation of photosensitive resin compositions 1-6>
The polymer, photoacid generator, basic compound, and surfactant were dissolved and mixed in isopropyl acetate so that the solid content concentration was 15% by mass so that the solid content ratio shown in Table 8 below was obtained. The mixture was filtered through a 0.2 μm polytetrafluoroethylene filter to obtain photosensitive resin compositions 1 to 6, respectively.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000042
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000042
 なお、表8における各成分の量の単位は、質量部である。 The unit of the amount of each component in Table 8 is part by mass.
<中間層形成用組成物1の作製>
 以下の処方で中間層形成用組成物1を作製した。
<Preparation of intermediate layer forming composition 1>
An intermediate layer forming composition 1 was prepared according to the following formulation.
<<ヒドロキシプロピルセルロース(HPC)10%溶液の作製>>
・蒸留水:45.0部
・メタノール:45.0部
・ヒドロキシプロピルセルロース(商品名:Nisso HPC-SSL、日本曹達(株)製):10.0部
 上記成分を室温(25℃)で溶解したのち、3μmフィルター(プロファイルII 日本ポール(株)製)にて濾過し、HPC10%溶液を得た。
<< Preparation of 10% solution of hydroxypropylcellulose (HPC) >>
・ Distilled water: 45.0 parts ・ Methanol: 45.0 parts ・ Hydroxypropylcellulose (trade name: Nissan HPC-SSL, manufactured by Nippon Soda Co., Ltd.): 10.0 parts The above components are dissolved at room temperature (25 ° C.) After that, the mixture was filtered through a 3 μm filter (Profile II, Nippon Pall Co., Ltd.) to obtain a 10% HPC solution.
<<中間層形成用組成物1の作製>>
 以下に示す処方で溶解混合し、中間層形成用組成物1を得た。
・蒸留水:7.1部
・メタノール:53.1部
・HPC10%溶液:29.7部
・スノーテックスO(シリカ粒子、日産化学工業(株)製、平均粒子径12nm):10.0部
・メガファックF-444(フッ素系界面活性剤、DIC(株)製):0.01部
・n-オクチルトリメチルアンモニウム・クロリド(東京化成工業(株)製):0.02部
<< Preparation of Composition 1 for Forming Intermediate Layer >>
The composition shown in the following was dissolved and mixed to obtain an intermediate layer forming composition 1.
-Distilled water: 7.1 parts-Methanol: 53.1 parts-HPC 10% solution: 29.7 parts-Snowtex O (silica particles, manufactured by Nissan Chemical Industries, Ltd., average particle size 12 nm): 10.0 parts・ Megafac F-444 (fluorine surfactant, manufactured by DIC Corporation): 0.01 part ・ n-octyltrimethylammonium chloride (manufactured by Tokyo Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.): 0.02 part
<中間層形成用組成物2~30の作製>
 粒子等の表9に記載の各成分を下記表9に示すとおりに変更し、その他の条件については、中間層形成用組成物1と同様な方法により、中間層形成用組成物2~30をそれぞれ作製した。
<Preparation of intermediate layer forming compositions 2 to 30>
The respective components described in Table 9 such as particles were changed as shown in Table 9 below, and the other conditions were changed by using the same methods as in the intermediate layer forming composition 1 for the intermediate layer forming compositions 2 to 30. Each was produced.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000043
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000043
 上述した以外の表9に記載の略称の詳細を以下に示す。
 HPC:ヒドロキシプロピルセルロース(商品名:HPC-SSL、日本曹達(株)製)
 HMPC:ヒドロキシプロピルメチルセルロース(商品名:TC-5、信越化学工業(株)製)
 スノーテックスO:シリカ粒子、日産化学工業(株)製、算術平均粒径12nm、表面状態アニオン性(シラノール)
 スノーテックスXS:シリカ粒子、日産化学工業(株)製、算術平均粒径5nm、表面状態アニオン性(シラノール)
 スノーテックスOS:シリカ粒子、日産化学工業(株)製、算術平均粒径9nm、表面状態アニオン性(シラノール)
 スノーテックスO-40:シリカ粒子、日産化学工業(株)製、算術平均粒径22nm、表面状態アニオン性(シラノール)
 スノーテックスOL:シリカ粒子、日産化学工業(株)製、算術平均粒子径45nm、表面状態アニオン性(シラノール)
 スノーテックスOYL:シリカ粒子、日産化学工業(株)製、算術平均粒子径60nm、表面状態アニオン性(シラノール)
 OTAC:n-オクチルトリメチルアンモニウムクロリド
 DDTAC:n-ドデシルトリメチルアンモニウムクロリド
 HDTAC:n-ヘキサデシルトリメチルアンモニウムクロリド
 HDPyC:n-ヘキサデシルピリジニウムクロリド
 BMSAC:ベンジルジメチルステアリルアンモニウムクロリド水和物(東京化成工業(株)製)
 HDDSAH:ヘキサデシルジメチル(3-スルホプロピル)アンモニウムヒドロキシド分子内塩(東京化成工業(株)製)
 BZC:ベンゼトニウムクロリド(東京化成工業(株)製、下記構造の化合物)
 HDTAH:n-ヘキサデシルトリメチルアンモニウムヒドロキシド
 HDTA:n-ヘキサデシルトリメチルアミン
 BTAH:ベンジルトリメチルアンモニウムヒドロキシド
 BPB:ブロモフェノールブルー(着色剤(色素)、富士フイルム和光純薬(株)製、極大吸収波長:606nm)
The details of the abbreviations described in Table 9 other than those described above are shown below.
HPC: Hydroxypropyl cellulose (trade name: HPC-SSL, manufactured by Nippon Soda Co., Ltd.)
HMPC: Hydroxypropyl methylcellulose (trade name: TC-5, manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd.)
Snowtex O: Silica particles, manufactured by Nissan Chemical Industries, arithmetic average particle size 12 nm, surface state anionic (silanol)
Snowtex XS: Silica particles, manufactured by Nissan Chemical Industries, arithmetic average particle size 5 nm, surface state anionic (silanol)
Snowtex OS: Silica particles, manufactured by Nissan Chemical Industries, arithmetic average particle size 9 nm, surface state anionic (silanol)
Snowtex O-40: Silica particles, manufactured by Nissan Chemical Industries, arithmetic average particle size 22 nm, surface state anionic (silanol)
Snowtex OL: Silica particles, manufactured by Nissan Chemical Industries, Ltd., arithmetic average particle size 45 nm, surface state anionic (silanol)
Snowtex OYL: Silica particles, manufactured by Nissan Chemical Industries, arithmetic average particle size 60 nm, surface state anionic (silanol)
OTAC: n-octyltrimethylammonium chloride DDTAC: n-dodecyltrimethylammonium chloride HDTAC: n-hexadecyltrimethylammonium chloride HDPyC: n-hexadecylpyridinium chloride BMSAC: benzyldimethylstearylammonium chloride hydrate (Tokyo Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.) Made)
HDDSAH: hexadecyldimethyl (3-sulfopropyl) ammonium hydroxide inner salt (manufactured by Tokyo Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.)
BZC: Benzethonium chloride (manufactured by Tokyo Chemical Industry Co., Ltd., compound with the following structure)
HDTAH: n-hexadecyltrimethylammonium hydroxide HDTA: n-hexadecyltrimethylamine BTAH: benzyltrimethylammonium hydroxide BPB: bromophenol blue (colorant (dye), manufactured by Fuji Film Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd., maximum absorption wavelength: 606nm)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000044
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000044
(実施例2-1)
<感光性転写材料の作製>
 下記表10に示す構成となるように中間層形成用組成物1を仮支持体となる厚さ30μmのポリエチレンテレフタレートフィルムの上に、スリット状ノズルを用いて塗布幅が1.0m、膜厚1.8μmとなるように塗布し、100℃の乾燥ゾーンを40秒間かけて通過させて中間層を形成した。その後、中間層の上に、感光性樹脂組成物A-1をスリット状ノズルを用いて塗布幅が1.0m、膜厚3μmとなるように塗布し、100℃の乾燥ゾーンを40秒間かけて通過させて、感光性樹脂層を形成した。感光性樹脂層の上にカバーフィルム(保護フィルム)としてポリエチレンフィルム(トレデガー社製、OSM-N)を圧着して感光性転写材料2-1を作製し、感光性転写材料2-1を巻き取ってロール形態にした。
Example 2-1
<Production of photosensitive transfer material>
The composition for forming an intermediate layer 1 is formed on a polyethylene terephthalate film having a thickness of 30 μm serving as a temporary support so that the composition shown in Table 10 below is applied. The film was applied to a thickness of 8 μm and passed through a drying zone at 100 ° C. over 40 seconds to form an intermediate layer. Thereafter, the photosensitive resin composition A-1 was applied onto the intermediate layer using a slit nozzle so that the coating width was 1.0 m and the film thickness was 3 μm, and a 100 ° C. drying zone was applied for 40 seconds. The photosensitive resin layer was formed by passing through. A polyethylene film (Tradeger's OSM-N) is pressure-bonded as a cover film (protective film) on the photosensitive resin layer to produce a photosensitive transfer material 2-1, and the photosensitive transfer material 2-1 is wound up. In roll form.
(実施例2-2~2-27)
 下記表10に示す組成物を使用した以外は、実施例2-1と同様にして、感光性転写材料2-2~2-27をそれぞれ作製した。
(Examples 2-2 to 2-27)
Photosensitive transfer materials 2-2 to 2-27 were prepared in the same manner as in Example 2-1, except that the compositions shown in Table 10 below were used.
(比較例2-1~2-4)
 下記表10に示す組成物を使用した以外は、実施例2-1と同様にして、感光性転写材料2-C1~2-C4をそれぞれ作製した。
(Comparative Examples 2-1 to 2-4)
Photosensitive transfer materials 2-C1 to 2-C4 were prepared in the same manner as in Example 2-1, except that the compositions shown in Table 10 below were used.
(実施例2-28~2-32)
 下記表11に示す組成物を使用し、水溶性樹脂層を形成した後に、水溶性樹脂層と同様にして中間層を形成した以外は、実施例2-1と同様にして感光性転写材料2-28~2-32を作製した。なお、水溶性樹脂層の形成には、上記で作製した中間層形成用組成物のうち、表11に記載のものを水溶性樹脂層形成用組成物として使用した。
 なお、実施例2-28~2-32にて作製した感光性転写材料の断面SEMを観測したところ、仮支持体/粒子の含有量が5質量%以下である水溶性樹脂層(水溶性樹脂層)/粒子と上記極性化合物と水溶性樹脂とを含む層(中間層)/感光性樹脂層の4層となっていることが認められた。また、得られた実施例2-28~2-32の感光性転写材料の断面を、SIMS法を用いて観察したところ、いずれも、中間層中に上記極性化合物が含有されていることが認められた。
(Examples 2-28 to 2-32)
Photosensitive transfer material 2 was prepared in the same manner as in Example 2-1, except that the composition shown in Table 11 below was used to form a water-soluble resin layer, and then an intermediate layer was formed in the same manner as the water-soluble resin layer. -28 to 2-32 were produced. In addition, the formation of the water-soluble resin layer used the composition of Table 11 among the compositions for intermediate | middle layer formation produced above as a composition for water-soluble resin layer formation.
When the cross-sectional SEM of the photosensitive transfer material produced in Examples 2-28 to 2-32 was observed, a water-soluble resin layer (water-soluble resin) having a temporary support / particle content of 5% by mass or less was observed. It was recognized that the layer was composed of 4 layers: (layer) / particle, layer containing the above polar compound and water-soluble resin (intermediate layer) / photosensitive resin layer. Further, when the cross sections of the obtained photosensitive transfer materials of Examples 2-28 to 2-32 were observed using the SIMS method, it was found that any of the above polar compounds was contained in the intermediate layer. It was.
 得られた感光性転写材料2-1~2-32、及び、2-C1~2-C4を使用し、以下の評価を行った。 Using the obtained photosensitive transfer materials 2-1 to 2-32 and 2-C1 to 2-C4, the following evaluation was performed.
<性能評価>
 厚さ100μmのポリエチレンテレフタレート(PET)フィルム上に、銅を真空蒸着法で200nm厚にて成膜した銅層付きPET基板を使用した。
<Performance evaluation>
A PET substrate with a copper layer was used in which a copper film was formed to a thickness of 200 nm by a vacuum deposition method on a polyethylene terephthalate (PET) film having a thickness of 100 μm.
-中間層と感光性樹脂層との密着性の評価-
 実施例2-1の感光性転写材料からカバーフィルムを剥離し、上記銅層付きPET基板における銅層上に得られた感光性転写材料を100℃、4m/minの速度、線圧0.6MPaの条件でラミネートした後、仮支持体を剥離し、銅層上にポジ型感光層が積層した積層体を作製した。
 積層体に、カッターナイフを用いて、基材に達する程度に1mm間隔で6本、これに直行するように1mm間隔で更に6本の切り込みを入れ、25マスの切り込みのあるクロスカット付着テスト試験片を作成した。これに透明粘着テープを貼り、90度の方向に透明粘着テープを剥離し、付着面積を観察することで中間層と感光性樹脂層との密着性を下記評価基準に従って評価した。2以上が実用範囲である。
〔評価基準〕
  3:剥離面積が30%未満
  2:剥離面積が30%以上~90%未満
  1:剥離面積が90%以上
-Evaluation of adhesion between intermediate layer and photosensitive resin layer-
The cover film was peeled from the photosensitive transfer material of Example 2-1, and the photosensitive transfer material obtained on the copper layer in the above-mentioned PET substrate with a copper layer was transferred at 100 ° C., a speed of 4 m / min, and a linear pressure of 0.6 MPa. After laminating under the above conditions, the temporary support was peeled off to produce a laminate in which a positive photosensitive layer was laminated on the copper layer.
Using a cutter knife, in the laminate, make 6 cuts at 1 mm intervals to reach the base material, and further 6 cuts at 1 mm intervals so as to go directly to this, and a cross-cut adhesion test test with 25 square cuts Created a piece. A transparent adhesive tape was affixed thereto, the transparent adhesive tape was peeled in the direction of 90 degrees, and the adhesion area was observed to evaluate the adhesion between the intermediate layer and the photosensitive resin layer according to the following evaluation criteria. Two or more is a practical range.
〔Evaluation criteria〕
3: Peeling area is less than 30% 2: Peeling area is 30% to less than 90% 1: Peeling area is 90% or more
-保存安定性の評価-
 作製した感光性転写材料を巻き出した後、ロール温度120℃、線圧1.0MPa、線速度0.5m/minのラミネート条件で、上記銅層付きPET基板にラミネートした。仮支持体を剥離せずに線幅10μmのラインアンドスペースパターンマスク(Duty比
 1:1)を介して超高圧水銀灯で露光後、23℃55%RHの環境下で3時間引き置いた後に仮支持体を剥離して現像した。現像は25℃の1.0%炭酸ナトリウム水溶液を用い、シャワー現像で30秒行った。
 上記方法にて10μmのラインアンドスペースパターンを形成したとき、スペース部の残渣を走査型電子顕微鏡(SEM)により観察し、レジスト線幅がちょうど10μmとなる露光量を求めた。
 作製した感光性転写材料を40℃55%RHの環境下で7日間放置したのち、上記と同じの条件で、銅層付きPET基板にラミネートした。仮支持体を剥離せずに線幅10μmのラインアンドスペースパターンマスク(Duty比 1:1)を介して、上記の方法で求めたレジスト線幅がちょうど10μmとなる露光後で露光し、23℃55%RHの環境下で3時間引き置いた後に仮支持体を剥離して現像した。現像は25℃の1.0%炭酸ナトリウム水溶液を用い、シャワー現像で30秒行った。
 得られたラインアンドスペースパターンの線幅を走査型電子顕微鏡(SEM)により観察し、5つのラインについて計50点において線幅を測定し、10μmからの線幅の変動を求め、得られた値の平均値を算出し、その平均値を以下の基準により評価した。10μmからの線幅の変動の平均値が小さい値であるほど、保存安定性に優れ、また、10μmからの線幅の変動の平均値が1.5μm未満であることが好ましい。
〔評価基準〕
  3:1.0μm未満
  2:1.0μm以上1.5μm未満
  1:1.5μm以上
-Evaluation of storage stability-
After unwinding the produced photosensitive transfer material, it was laminated on the PET substrate with a copper layer under the lamination conditions of a roll temperature of 120 ° C., a linear pressure of 1.0 MPa, and a linear velocity of 0.5 m / min. After peeling with a super high pressure mercury lamp through a line-and-space pattern mask (Duty ratio 1: 1) having a line width of 10 μm without peeling off the temporary support, the temporary support was placed in an environment of 23 ° C. and 55% RH for 3 hours. The support was peeled off and developed. Development was performed by shower development for 30 seconds using a 1.0% aqueous sodium carbonate solution at 25 ° C.
When a 10 μm line-and-space pattern was formed by the above method, the residue in the space portion was observed with a scanning electron microscope (SEM), and an exposure amount at which the resist line width was exactly 10 μm was determined.
The produced photosensitive transfer material was allowed to stand in an environment of 40 ° C. and 55% RH for 7 days, and then laminated on a PET substrate with a copper layer under the same conditions as described above. Without exposing the temporary support, the film was exposed through a line-and-space pattern mask (duty ratio 1: 1) having a line width of 10 μm after the exposure at which the resist line width obtained by the above method was exactly 10 μm, and 23 ° C. After leaving for 3 hours in an environment of 55% RH, the temporary support was peeled off and developed. Development was performed by shower development for 30 seconds using a 1.0% aqueous sodium carbonate solution at 25 ° C.
The line width of the obtained line and space pattern was observed with a scanning electron microscope (SEM), the line width was measured at a total of 50 points for five lines, the fluctuation of the line width from 10 μm was obtained, and the obtained value The average value was calculated, and the average value was evaluated according to the following criteria. The smaller the average value of the line width variation from 10 μm, the better the storage stability, and the average value of the line width variation from 10 μm is preferably less than 1.5 μm.
〔Evaluation criteria〕
3: Less than 1.0 μm 2: 1.0 μm or more and less than 1.5 μm 1: 1.5 μm or more
-液安定性の評価-
 中間層形成用組成物を30℃で7日間保管した後、孔径3μm、1インチのカートリッジ式ポリプロピレン製フィルター(プロファイルII、日本ポール(株)製)を用いて、流速150mL/min.で100L濾過した際の濾圧の変化を記録し、下記評価基準に従って液安定性を評価した。
 また、実施例28~32については、使用した2種の中間層形成用組成物の両方について評価し、悪いほうの評価を表5に記載した。
〔評価基準〕
  3:初期の濾圧が0.1MPa以下であり、かつ100Lろ過した際の濾圧変化が0.01MPa未満である。
  2:初期の濾圧が0.1MPa以下であり、かつ10Lろ過した際の濾圧変化が0.01MPa以上0.05MPa未満である。
  1:初期の濾圧が0.1MPaを超える値であるか、又は、10Lろ過した際の濾圧変化が0.05MPa以上である。
-Evaluation of liquid stability-
After the intermediate layer forming composition was stored at 30 ° C. for 7 days, the flow rate was 150 mL / min. Using a cartridge type polypropylene filter (Profile II, manufactured by Nippon Pole Co., Ltd.) having a pore size of 3 μm and 1 inch. The change in filtration pressure when 100 L was filtered was recorded, and the liquid stability was evaluated according to the following evaluation criteria.
In Examples 28 to 32, both of the two types of intermediate layer forming compositions used were evaluated, and the worse evaluation was shown in Table 5.
〔Evaluation criteria〕
3: The initial filtration pressure is 0.1 MPa or less, and the change in filtration pressure after 100 L filtration is less than 0.01 MPa.
2: The initial filtration pressure is 0.1 MPa or less, and the filtration pressure change when 10 L is filtered is 0.01 MPa or more and less than 0.05 MPa.
1: The initial filtration pressure is a value exceeding 0.1 MPa, or the filtration pressure change after 10 L filtration is 0.05 MPa or more.
 評価結果を、表10又は表11に示す。 Evaluation results are shown in Table 10 or Table 11.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000045
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000045
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000046
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000046
 表10から、実施例の感光性転写材料は、比較例の感光性転写材料に比べ、中間層と感光性樹脂層との密着性に優れることがわかる。
 また、表11から、水溶性樹脂層を更に作製することで、中間層と感光性樹脂層との密着性、保存安定性、及び、液安定性がともに優れていることが分かる。
 また、保存安定性、又は、液安定性の評価が1であっても、感光性転写材料又は中間層形成用組成物を作製時から長期にわたり保管せずに使用することにより、実用上問題なく用いることができる。
From Table 10, it can be seen that the photosensitive transfer materials of the examples are superior in adhesion between the intermediate layer and the photosensitive resin layer as compared with the photosensitive transfer materials of the comparative examples.
In addition, it can be seen from Table 11 that by further producing a water-soluble resin layer, the adhesion between the intermediate layer and the photosensitive resin layer, storage stability, and liquid stability are all excellent.
In addition, even when the storage stability or the liquid stability is evaluated as 1, the photosensitive transfer material or the intermediate layer forming composition can be used without being stored for a long time from the time of preparation, and there is no practical problem. Can be used.
(実施例2-101)
 100μm厚PET基材上に、第2層の導電層としてITOをスパッタリングで150nm厚にて成膜し、その上に第1層の導電層として銅を真空蒸着法で200nm厚にて成膜して、回路形成用基板とした。
 銅層上に実施例2-1で得られた感光性転写材料を、保護フィルムを剥離して、基板に貼り合わせて(ラミネートロール温度100℃、線圧0.8MPa、線速度3.0m/min.)、積層体とした。得られた積層体を、仮支持体を剥離せずに一方向に導電層パッドが連結された構成を持つ図3に示すパターンAを設けたフォトマスクを用いてコンタクトパターン露光した。露光にはi線(365nm)を露光主波長とする高圧水銀灯を用いた。
 その後仮支持体を剥離し、現像、水洗を行ってパターンAを得た。次いで銅エッチング液(関東化学(株)製Cu-02)を用いて銅層をエッチングした後、ITOエッチング液(関東化学(株)製ITO-02)を用いてITO層をエッチングすることで、銅とITOが共にパターンAで描画された基板を得た。
 次いで、残存しているレジスト上に保護層として実施例2-1と同様の仮支持体をラミネートした。この状態で、アライメントを合わせ、パターンBの開口部を設けたフォトマスクを用いてパターン露光し、仮支持体を剥離した後、現像、水洗を行った。その後、Cu-02を用いて銅配線をエッチングし、残った感光性樹脂層を剥離液(関東化学(株)製KP-301)を用いて剥離し、回路配線基板を得た。
 得られた回路配線基板を、顕微鏡で観察したところ、剥がれや欠けなどは無く、きれいなパターンであった。
(Example 2-101)
On the 100 μm-thick PET substrate, ITO was deposited as a second conductive layer by sputtering to a thickness of 150 nm, and copper was deposited thereon as a first conductive layer at a thickness of 200 nm by vacuum evaporation. Thus, a circuit forming substrate was obtained.
The photosensitive transfer material obtained in Example 2-1 on the copper layer was peeled off the protective film and bonded to the substrate (lamination roll temperature 100 ° C., linear pressure 0.8 MPa, linear velocity 3.0 m / min.), a laminate. The obtained laminate was exposed to a contact pattern using a photomask provided with a pattern A shown in FIG. 3 having a configuration in which conductive layer pads were connected in one direction without peeling off the temporary support. For the exposure, a high pressure mercury lamp having i-line (365 nm) as an exposure dominant wavelength was used.
Thereafter, the temporary support was peeled off, developed and washed with water to obtain a pattern A. Next, after etching the copper layer using a copper etching solution (Cu-02 manufactured by Kanto Chemical Co., Ltd.), the ITO layer is etched using an ITO etching solution (ITO-02 manufactured by Kanto Chemical Co., Ltd.), A substrate on which both copper and ITO were drawn in pattern A was obtained.
Next, a temporary support similar to that in Example 2-1 was laminated as a protective layer on the remaining resist. In this state, alignment was performed, pattern exposure was performed using a photomask provided with an opening of pattern B, and the temporary support was peeled off, followed by development and washing with water. Thereafter, the copper wiring was etched using Cu-02, and the remaining photosensitive resin layer was stripped using a stripping solution (KP-301 manufactured by Kanto Chemical Co., Inc.) to obtain a circuit wiring board.
When the obtained circuit wiring board was observed with a microscope, it was a clean pattern with no peeling or chipping.
(実施例2-102)
 実施例2-101と同様にして、パターンAで描画された基板を得た後に、残存しているレジスト上に、実施例1で得られた感光性転写材料を、保護フィルムを剥離して、実施例2-101と同様の条件で再度貼り合わせた。アライメントを合わせた状態で、仮支持体を剥離せずにパターンBの開口部を設けたフォトマスクを用いてパターン露光し、その後仮支持体を剥離し、現像、水洗を行ってパターンBを得た。次いで、実施例2-101と同様の条件で銅配線をエッチング、残った感光性樹脂層を剥離し、導電パターンを有する回路配線基板を得た。
 得られた回路配線基板を、顕微鏡で観察したところ、剥がれ、欠けなどは無く、きれいなパターンであった。
(Example 2-102)
In the same manner as in Example 2-101, after obtaining the substrate drawn with pattern A, the protective transfer film was peeled off the photosensitive transfer material obtained in Example 1 on the remaining resist, Bonding was again performed under the same conditions as in Example 2-101. With the alignment aligned, pattern exposure is performed using a photomask provided with an opening of pattern B without peeling off the temporary support, and then the temporary support is peeled off, followed by development and washing to obtain pattern B. It was. Next, the copper wiring was etched under the same conditions as in Example 2-101, and the remaining photosensitive resin layer was peeled off to obtain a circuit wiring board having a conductive pattern.
When the obtained circuit wiring board was observed with a microscope, it was a clean pattern with no peeling or chipping.
 2018年2月5日に出願された日本国特許出願2018-018478号、2018年5月22日に出願された日本国特許出願2018-098329号、2018年8月30日に出願された日本国特許出願2018-162138号及び2019年2月1日に出願された日本国特許出願2019-016912号の開示は、その全体が参照により本明細書に取り込まれる。
 本明細書に記載された全ての文献、特許出願、及び技術規格は、個々の文献、特許出願、及び技術規格が参照により取り込まれることが具体的かつ個々に記された場合と同程度に、本明細書に参照により取り込まれる。
Japanese Patent Application No. 2018-018478 filed on February 5, 2018, Japanese Patent Application No. 2018-098329 filed on May 22, 2018, Japanese Patent Application filed on August 30, 2018 The disclosures of Japanese Patent Application No. 2018-162138 and Japanese Patent Application No. 2019-016912 filed on Feb. 1, 2019 are incorporated herein by reference in their entirety.
All documents, patent applications, and technical standards mentioned in this specification are to the same extent as if each individual document, patent application, and technical standard were specifically and individually stated to be incorporated by reference, Incorporated herein by reference.

Claims (14)

  1.  仮支持体、中間層およびレジスト層をこの順番に有し、
     前記中間層は、下記(A)成分を含有する感光性転写材料。
    (A)成分:発色時の波長範囲400nm~780nmにおける極大吸収波長が450nm以上であり、酸、塩基又はラジカルにより極大吸収波長が変化する色素
    Having a temporary support, an intermediate layer and a resist layer in this order,
    The intermediate layer is a photosensitive transfer material containing the following component (A).
    Component (A): a dye having a maximum absorption wavelength of 450 nm or more in the wavelength range of 400 nm to 780 nm during color development, and the maximum absorption wavelength being changed by an acid, base or radical
  2.  前記(A)成分である色素が、pH感受性色素である請求項1に記載の感光性転写材料。 The photosensitive transfer material according to claim 1, wherein the dye as the component (A) is a pH sensitive dye.
  3.  前記(A)成分である色素が、トリアリールメタン骨格を有する請求項1又は請求項2に記載の感光性転写材料。 The photosensitive transfer material according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the dye as the component (A) has a triarylmethane skeleton.
  4.  前記(A)成分である色素が、下記式Iで表される色素、下記式Iで表される色素の開環体及び前記開環体の中和体から選ばれる少なくとも1つを含む請求項1~請求項3のいずれか1項に記載の感光性転写材料。
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000001

     
     式I中、ArおよびAr’は、それぞれ独立に芳香族基を表す。R、R、RおよびRは、それぞれ独立に水素原子または1価の置換基を表す。
    The dye as the component (A) contains at least one selected from a dye represented by the following formula I, a ring-opened product of the dye represented by the following formula I, and a neutralized product of the ring-opened product. The photosensitive transfer material according to any one of claims 1 to 3.
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000001


    In formula I, Ar and Ar ′ each independently represent an aromatic group. R 1 , R 2 , R 3 and R 4 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a monovalent substituent.
  5.  前記レジスト層は下記(B)成分及び(C)成分を含有する請求項1~請求項4のいずれか1項に記載の感光性転写材料。
    (B)成分:酸基が酸分解性基で保護された基を有する構成単位を含有する重合体
    (C)成分:光酸発生剤
    The photosensitive transfer material according to any one of claims 1 to 4, wherein the resist layer contains the following components (B) and (C).
    (B) Component: Polymer (C) component containing a structural unit having a group in which an acid group is protected with an acid-decomposable group: Photoacid generator
  6.  露光により前記(C)成分である光酸発生剤から放出された酸により、前記(A)成分である色素の発色時における波長範囲400nm~780nmの極大吸収波長が変化する請求項5に記載の感光性転写材料。 The maximum absorption wavelength in a wavelength range of 400 nm to 780 nm at the time of color development of the dye as the component (A) is changed by the acid released from the photoacid generator as the component (C) by exposure. Photosensitive transfer material.
  7.  露光により前記(C)成分である光酸発生剤から放出された酸により、前記(A)成分である色素の発色時における波長範囲400nm~780nmの極大吸収波長が短波化する請求項6に記載の感光性転写材料。 7. The maximum absorption wavelength in the wavelength range of 400 nm to 780 nm during color development of the dye as the component (A) is shortened by the acid released from the photoacid generator as the component (C) by exposure. Photosensitive transfer material.
  8.  前記(C)成分である光酸発生剤から生じる酸が、リン酸、又はスルホン酸であり、且つpKaが4以下の酸である請求項5~請求項7のいずれか1項に記載の感光性転写材料。 The photosensitive resin according to any one of claims 5 to 7, wherein the acid generated from the photoacid generator as the component (C) is phosphoric acid or sulfonic acid and an acid having a pKa of 4 or less. Transfer material.
  9.  前記(B)成分である重合体が有する、前記酸基が酸分解性基で保護された基を有する構成単位が、下記式IIで表される構成単位である請求項5~請求項8のいずれか1項に記載の感光性転写材料。
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000002

     
     式II中、R及びRはそれぞれ独立に、水素原子、アルキル基又はアリール基を表し、少なくともR及びRのいずれか一方が、アルキル基又はアリール基であり、Rはアルキル基又はアリール基を表し、R又はRと、Rと、が連結して環状エーテルを形成してもよい。Rは水素原子又はメチル基を表し、Xは単結合又はアリーレン基を表す。
    The structural unit having a group in which the acid group is protected by an acid-decomposable group, which the polymer as the component (B) has, is a structural unit represented by the following formula II: The photosensitive transfer material of any one of Claims 1.
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000002


    In Formula II, R 1 and R 2 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, or an aryl group, at least one of R 1 and R 2 is an alkyl group or an aryl group, and R 3 is an alkyl group Alternatively, it represents an aryl group, and R 1 or R 2 and R 3 may be linked to form a cyclic ether. R 4 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, and X represents a single bond or an arylene group.
  10.  前記中間層が、更に、下記(G)成分を含有する請求項1~請求項9のいずれか1項に記載の感光性転写材料。
    (G)成分:pH調整剤
    The photosensitive transfer material according to any one of claims 1 to 9, wherein the intermediate layer further contains the following component (G).
    (G) component: pH adjuster
  11.  前記pH調整剤が、4級アンモニウム塩である請求項10に記載の感光性転写材料。 The photosensitive transfer material according to claim 10, wherein the pH adjuster is a quaternary ammonium salt.
  12.  前記レジスト層は、さらに下記(D)成分を含有する請求項1~請求項11のいずれか1項に記載の感光性転写材料。
     (D)成分:塩基性化合物
    The photosensitive transfer material according to any one of claims 1 to 11, wherein the resist layer further comprises the following component (D).
    Component (D): basic compound
  13.  基板に対し、請求項1~請求項12のいずれか1項に記載の感光性転写材料を、前記感光性転写材料の前記レジスト層を前記基板に接触させて貼り合わせる工程と、
     前記貼り合わせる工程後の前記感光性転写材料の前記レジスト層をパターン露光する工程と、
     前記パターン露光する工程後のレジスト層を現像してパターンを形成する工程と、
     前記パターンが配置されていない領域における基板をエッチング処理する工程と、
    をこの順に含む回路配線の製造方法。
    A process of bonding the photosensitive transfer material according to any one of claims 1 to 12 to a substrate while bringing the resist layer of the photosensitive transfer material into contact with the substrate;
    Pattern exposing the resist layer of the photosensitive transfer material after the bonding step;
    Developing the resist layer after the pattern exposing step to form a pattern;
    Etching the substrate in a region where the pattern is not disposed;
    A method of manufacturing circuit wiring that includes
  14.  基板に対し、請求項1~請求項12のいずれか1項に記載の感光性転写材料を、前記感光性転写材料の前記レジスト層を前記基板に接触させて貼り合わせる工程と、
     前記貼り合わせる工程後の前記感光性転写材料の前記レジスト層をパターン露光する工程と、
     前記パターン露光する工程後のレジスト層を現像してパターンを形成する工程と、
     前記パターンが配置されていない領域における基板をエッチング処理する工程と、
    をこの順に含むタッチパネルの製造方法。
    A process of bonding the photosensitive transfer material according to any one of claims 1 to 12 to a substrate while bringing the resist layer of the photosensitive transfer material into contact with the substrate;
    Pattern exposing the resist layer of the photosensitive transfer material after the bonding step;
    Developing the resist layer after the pattern exposing step to form a pattern;
    Etching the substrate in a region where the pattern is not disposed;
    The manufacturing method of the touch panel which contains these in this order.
PCT/JP2019/004043 2018-02-05 2019-02-05 Photosensitive transfer material, manufacturing method for circuit wiring, and manufacturing method for touch panel WO2019151534A1 (en)

Priority Applications (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN201980011644.1A CN111684359A (en) 2018-02-05 2019-02-05 Photosensitive transfer material, method for manufacturing circuit wiring, and method for manufacturing touch panel

Applications Claiming Priority (8)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2018-018478 2018-02-05
JP2018018478 2018-02-05
JP2018098329 2018-05-22
JP2018-098329 2018-05-22
JP2018-162138 2018-08-30
JP2018162138A JP6832899B2 (en) 2018-02-05 2018-08-30 Photosensitive transfer material, circuit wiring manufacturing method, and touch panel manufacturing method
JP2019016912A JP7007308B2 (en) 2019-02-01 2019-02-01 Photosensitive transfer material, resin pattern manufacturing method, circuit wiring manufacturing method, and touch panel manufacturing method.
JP2019-016912 2019-02-01

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2019151534A1 true WO2019151534A1 (en) 2019-08-08

Family

ID=67478347

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/JP2019/004043 WO2019151534A1 (en) 2018-02-05 2019-02-05 Photosensitive transfer material, manufacturing method for circuit wiring, and manufacturing method for touch panel

Country Status (1)

Country Link
WO (1) WO2019151534A1 (en)

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2021225162A1 (en) * 2020-05-07 2021-11-11 富士フイルム株式会社 Transfer film, method for producing laminate, touch sensor, and method for producing printed circuit board

Citations (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2002099078A (en) * 2000-09-25 2002-04-05 Nippon Columbia Co Ltd Mastering original disk
JP2004205732A (en) * 2002-12-25 2004-07-22 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Method for manufacturing color filter
JP2006085116A (en) * 2004-08-17 2006-03-30 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Photosensitive transfer material, method for forming pattern, and pattern
JP2006205397A (en) * 2005-01-25 2006-08-10 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd On-press developing type lithographic printing-form original plate and lithographic printing method using the same
JP2006243546A (en) * 2005-03-04 2006-09-14 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Pattern forming material, pattern forming apparatus, and pattern forming method
WO2018008376A1 (en) * 2016-07-06 2018-01-11 富士フイルム株式会社 Photosensitive composition, transfer film, cured film, touch panel, and method for manufacturing touch panel

Patent Citations (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2002099078A (en) * 2000-09-25 2002-04-05 Nippon Columbia Co Ltd Mastering original disk
JP2004205732A (en) * 2002-12-25 2004-07-22 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Method for manufacturing color filter
JP2006085116A (en) * 2004-08-17 2006-03-30 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Photosensitive transfer material, method for forming pattern, and pattern
JP2006205397A (en) * 2005-01-25 2006-08-10 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd On-press developing type lithographic printing-form original plate and lithographic printing method using the same
JP2006243546A (en) * 2005-03-04 2006-09-14 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Pattern forming material, pattern forming apparatus, and pattern forming method
WO2018008376A1 (en) * 2016-07-06 2018-01-11 富士フイルム株式会社 Photosensitive composition, transfer film, cured film, touch panel, and method for manufacturing touch panel

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2021225162A1 (en) * 2020-05-07 2021-11-11 富士フイルム株式会社 Transfer film, method for producing laminate, touch sensor, and method for producing printed circuit board

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
JP6999693B2 (en) Photosensitive transfer material, resin pattern manufacturing method, and wiring manufacturing method
WO2020105457A1 (en) Transfer material, resin pattern production method, circuit wiring production method, and touch panel production method
JP6995865B2 (en) Manufacturing method of photosensitive transfer material and manufacturing method of circuit wiring
JP2019191518A (en) Photosensitive transfer material, production method of resist pattern and method for manufacturing circuit wiring
JP2022069472A (en) Photosensitive transfer material and its manufacturing method, manufacturing method of resin pattern, as well as, manufacturing method of circuit wiring
JPWO2020066351A1 (en) Manufacturing method of patterned base material, manufacturing method of circuit board and manufacturing method of touch panel
JPWO2019065113A1 (en) Method for manufacturing circuit wiring and method for manufacturing touch panel
JP6812556B2 (en) Photosensitive resin composition, photosensitive transfer material, circuit wiring manufacturing method, and touch panel manufacturing method
JP7007308B2 (en) Photosensitive transfer material, resin pattern manufacturing method, circuit wiring manufacturing method, and touch panel manufacturing method.
JP6992097B2 (en) Resist pattern manufacturing method, circuit board manufacturing method, and touch panel manufacturing method
WO2019151534A1 (en) Photosensitive transfer material, manufacturing method for circuit wiring, and manufacturing method for touch panel
JP6832899B2 (en) Photosensitive transfer material, circuit wiring manufacturing method, and touch panel manufacturing method
JP6968273B2 (en) Photosensitive transfer material, resin pattern manufacturing method, circuit wiring manufacturing method, and touch panel manufacturing method.
JP6808045B2 (en) Photosensitive resin composition, photosensitive transfer material, circuit wiring manufacturing method, and touch panel manufacturing method
JP7220641B2 (en) Pattern forming method, circuit board manufacturing method, electronic device, transfer material, and laminate
JP7102517B2 (en) Photosensitive transfer material, resin pattern manufacturing method, circuit wiring manufacturing method, and touch panel manufacturing method
WO2023090253A1 (en) Laminate, method for producing same, and electronic device
JP7048332B2 (en) Photosensitive transfer material and its manufacturing method, resin pattern manufacturing method, and circuit wiring manufacturing method.
TW201938384A (en) Photosensitive transfer material, method for producing circuit wiring, and method for producing touch panel
JP7011046B2 (en) Photosensitive transfer material, resist pattern manufacturing method, circuit wiring manufacturing method, touch panel, and touch panel display device
WO2019225363A1 (en) Photosensitive transfer material, method for producing resin pattern, method for manufacturing circuit wiring, and method for manufacturing touch panel
TW202112856A (en) Photosensitive transfer material, method for producing resin pattern, method for producing wiring line, and method for producing touch panel
JP2023076241A (en) Photosensitive composition, laminate, patterning method, and patterned laminate

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 19748253

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 19748253

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1